Digital PDFs

XX-8B016-32

July 1988

452 pages

Original

19MB

Document:	PDP Systems and Options Catalog
Order Number:	XX-8B016-32
Revision:	0
Pages:	452
Original Filename:	PDP_Systems_and_Options_Catalog_1988_Jul-Dec.pdf

OCR Text

PDP Systems and
Options Catalog
1988 July - December

Digital believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date; such
information is subject to change without notice. Digital is not ~sponsible for any inadvertent errors.
Digital Equipment Corporation makes no representation that the interconnection of its mass
storage products with products of other manufacturers will not infringe on existing or future patent
rights. Nor do the descriptions contained herein imply the granting of licenses to make, use, or sell
equipment constructed or congfigured in accordance ryerewith.
Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) mass storage products manufactured by Digital Equipment
Corporation are designed to work with host computers and other DSA mass storage products designed
by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility or
liability if the host computers, controllers, mass storage setVers, tape, software, diagnostics, or disk
products of another manufacturer are used with DSA products.
The software described in this document is furnished under license and may be used or copied only
in accordance with the terms of such license.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation; DATATRIEVE, DEC, DEC mail,
DECmate, DECnet, DECsystem-lO, DEC SYSTEM-20, DECUS, DECwriter, DIBOL, the Digital
logo, LA, Letterprinter 100, MASSBUS, MicroVAX, MicroVMS, PDp, Professional, Q-bus, Rainbow,
RSTS, RSX, RT, SBI, UNIBUS, ULTRIX, ULTRIX-32, VAX, VAXduster, VAXELN, VMS and VT.
Copyright © 1988, by Digital Equipment Corporation.

Table of Contents

Introduction
Ordering Information ............................................. ii
Configuring Information .......................................... ii
Mounting Information ......... '................................... iii
Howto Order a Standard System ................................... iii
Power Requirements ............................................. iv
Bus Load Requirements ........................................... iv
Units of Measure ................................................ iv

Systems
Introduction .................................................. 1.2

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Introduction ......... , ......................................... 1.2
Configuring Guidelines .................... ...................... 1.6
Options ................................ ...................... 1.7
Upgrades .......................................... '.......... 1.11
MicroPDP-11/83 Systems ........................................ 1.13
MicroPDP-11/83 BA23 Standard System ............................ 1.14
MicroPDP-11/83 BA23 System Building Block ........................ 1.19
MicroPDP-11/83 BA23 System Ordering Tables ....................... 1.27
MicroPDP-11/83 RD54-Based BA213 Standard System ................. 1.31
MicroPDP-11/83 BA213 System Ordering Tables ...................... 1.35
MicroPDP-11/83 RD54-Based BA123 Standard System ................. 1.39
MicroPDP-11/83 BA123 System Building Block ....................... 1.44
MicroPDP-11/83 BA123 System Ordering Tables ...................... 1.51
MicroPDP-11/83 Cabinet Standard System .......................... 1.55
MicroPDP-11/83 Cabinet System Building Block ...................... 1.60
MicroPDP-11/83 Cabinet System Ordering Tables ..................... 1.69
MicroPDP-11/73 Systems ........................................ 1.73
MicroPDP-11/73 BA23 Standard System ............................ 1.74
MicroPDP-11/73 BA23 System Building Block ........................ I. 79
MicroPDP-11/73 BA23 System Ordering Tables ....................... 1.87
MicroPDP-11/73 BA123 System Building Block ....................... 1.91
MicroPDP-11/73 BA123 System Ordering Tables ...................... 1.98
MicroPDP-11/53 Systems ....................................... 1.102
MicroPDP-11/53 Standard Systems ............................... 1.103
MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD53-Based
Standard System ............................................ 1.106
MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD53-Based Standard System ... 1.110
MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD32-Based
Standard System ............................................. 1.114
MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD32-Based Standard System ... 1.118
MicroPDP-11/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD31-Based Standard System ... 1.122
MicroPDP-11/53 Rackmount RX33/RD31-Based Standard System ....... 1.126
MicroPDP-11/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD32-Based Standard System ... 1.130
MicroPDP-11/53 Rackmount RX33/RD32-Based Standard System ....... 1.134
MicroPDP-11/53 System Ordering Tables ........................... 1.138

PDP·11 UNmus Multiuser Systems

Introduction .................................................. 11.2
Options ...................................................... 11.5
Configuring Guidelines .......................................... 11.8
PDP-11/84 5;25-inch Rackmount Design Center ...................... 11.10
PDP-11/84 10.5-inch Rackmount Design Center ...................... 11.12
11X84 Single-bay Kernel Systems ................................ 11.14
11W84 Widebody Kernel Systems ................................ 11.16
11Y84 Four -high Kernel Systems ................................. 11.18
SX-]X200 Single-bay System Building Blocks ........................ 11.20
SX-]X300 Widebody System Building Blocks ........................ 11.22
SX-]X400 Four -high System Building Blocks ........................ 11.24
Upgrades/Growth Paths ........................................ 11.26
11/84 CPU Site Preparation Data ................................. 11.27

Industrial Systems
Industrial Family of Products .................................... 111.2
Industrial PDP-11/83 (Hardware Only) ............................. 111.3
Industrial PDP-11/83 (Complete System) ............................ 111.6
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers ............... 111.9
Industrial PDP Common Options: Field Upgrade Options .............. 111.15

MIRA High Availability Microsystems
MIRA High Availability Microsystem ............................... IV.2

PDP System Expansion
BA200-Series Enclosure Bulkhead Design Kits ........................ 2.2
Q-bus System Expansion ......................................... 2.4
UNIBUS CPU Cabinets .......................................... 2.6
UNIBUS Expander Cabinets ...................................... 2.8
60-inch-high CPU Cabinet ....................................... 2.10
ExpansionHardware ........................................... 2.11
UNIBUS Expansion Boxes ....................................... 2.12
General Purpose System Cabinets ................................. 2.14
Unshielded Mass-storage Cabinets ................................. 2.19
Communications Cabinets ....................................... 2.29
Power Controllers ............................................. 2.20

Options
Q-bus Processor Options and Memories .............................. 3.2
UNIBUS PMI Memory ........................................... 3.3
Ethernet-to-Q-bus Synchronous Options ............................. 3.4
Ethernet-to-UNIBUS Synchronous Options ........................... 3.6
Ethernet Option ............................................... 3.7
Q-bus Asynchronous Options ..................................... 3.8
Q-bus Synchronous Options ..................................... 3.13
UNIBUS Asynchronous Options .................................. 3.16
UNIBUS Synchronous Options ................................... 3.17
UNIBUS Communications Processors/Controllers ..................... 3.20
Q-bus Realtime Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 3.22
UNIBUS Realtime Options ...................................... 3.23

Environmental Products
Introduction ................................................. 3.27
Power Conditioning System Plus/Power Distribution System Plus ......... 3.27
PCS Plus/PDS Plus Options ...................................... 3.28
Constant Voltage Conditioner .................................... 3.28
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors ............................... 3.28
Standby Uninterruptable Power System ............................. 3.28

Components
Single-board Processors ......................................... 3.29
Single-board Processor Options ................................... 3.31
Memories and Multifunction Options .............................. 3'} 3
Enclosures and Cables .......................................... 3.35
Backplanes ................................................... 3.36

Cables
Coaxial Cables ................................................. 4.2
Cable Assemblies ............................................... 4.2
Fiber Optic Cable .............................................. 4.3
Communications Cables ......................................... 4.4
Interconnection Cables .......................................... 4.8
Terminal Cables ............................ '.................... 4.9
DECconnect Products .......................................... 4.10
Cable Application Table ......................................... 4.11

Disks and Tapes
Digital Storage Architecture ...................................... 5.2
SDI Family .................................................... 5.3
KDA50 ....................................................... 5.4
UDA50 ....................................................... 5.5
SA482 2.5-Gbyte Storage Array ................................... 5.6
RA82 622-Mhyte Fixed Disk ...................................... 5.8
RA81456-Mbyte Fixed Disk ..................................... 5.10
RA60 205-Mhyte Removable-Media Disk ........................... 5.12
RC25 Fixed/Removable Disk ..................................... 5.14
RD Disk Drives ....................... " ....................... 5.16
RQDX3 ..................................................... 5.17
RQDXE ..................................................... 5.19
RUX50 ...................................................... 5.20
RD31 20-Mbyte Disk Drive .................................... ; . 5.21
RD32 42-Mbyte Disk Drive ...................................... 5.22
RD53 71-Mbyte Disk Drive ...................................... 5.23
RD54 159-Mhyte Disk Drive ..................................... 5.24
RX33 ....................................................... 5.26
RX50 Dual Diskette Drive ....................................... 5.27
TU81-Plus Magnetic Tape ....................................... 5.28
TU80 Magnetic Tape ........................................... 5.29
TS05 Magnetic Tape ........................................... 5.30
TK50 ....................................................... 5.33
DSA Disk Site Preparation ....................................... 5.36
Disk Site Preparation ........................................... 5.38

Terminals and Printers
VT300-family Video Terminals ..................................... 6.2
Video Terminal Selection Chart ..................................... 6.5
Video Terminal Site Preparation ................................... 6.9
VSV21 Color Graphics Controller ................................. 6.10
Printer Feature Chart ........................................... 6.12
LA75/LA75PCompanionPrinters ................................. 6.13
LA210 Letterprinter ........................................... 6.16
LA100 Letterwriter ............................................ 6.18
LA120 DECwriter ............................................. 6.20
Companion Color Printers (LJ250/LJ252) ........................... 6.22
LCG01 Color Printer ........................................... 6.24
LN03 PLUS Laser Printer (LN03S) ................................ 6.26
LN03 Laser Printer ............................................ 6.28
LQP45 Letter-quality Office Printer ............................... 6.30
LP29 Impact Printer ........................................... 6.32
LP27 System Printer ........................................... 6.34
LP25 System Printer ........................................... 6.36
LXY Graphics Lineprinter ....................................... 6.38
LG31 Dot Matrix Printer ....................................... 6.40
LG01/LG02 Line Dot Matrix Printers .............................. 6.42
Printer Interconnect Cabling ..................................... 6.44
Printer Site Preparation ............... 0-' • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6.45
Printer Selection Chart ......................................... 6.47
DECtalk ..................................................... 6.48
Personal Computers
Rainbow Options and Software .................................... 7.2
Professional 380 Options ......................................... 7.5
DECmate III and DECmate IiI Plus ................................. 7.8
Industrial Systems
Tough, Reliable Equipment for Industrial Environments ................. 8.2
E-Series IPDP ................................................. 8.3
Ruggedized Terminals ........................................... 8.4
Industrial I/O Products .......................................... 8.6
Software
Introduction .................................................. 9.2
Software Binary License Agreements ................................ 9.3
Operating Systems .............................................. 9.4
Programming Languages and Applications ........................... 9.16
A-to-Z Software ............................................. '.' 9.25
Applications Development ....................................... 9.28
Communications .............................................. 9.29
Electronic Mail ............................................... 9.31
Diagnostics .................................................. 9.32

Professional 380 Software
Operating Systems ............................................. 9.33
Application Development Tools ................................... 9.35
Networking and Communications ................................. 9.35
Database Management .......................................... 9.36
Spreadsheets ................................................. 9.36
Engineering and Scientific ....................................... 9.37
Graphics .................................................... 9.38
Accounting .................................................. 9.39
Word Processing .............................................. 9.39
Specialty .................................................... 9.40
Trademarks .................................................. 9.40

Services
Startup Service Packages ........................................ 10.2
Field Service ................................................. 10.4
Software Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Educational Services .......................................... 10.14
Leasing Services .............................................. 10.15
Digital's Electronic Store ....................................... 10.16

Publications
Digital Press ................................................. 10.17
Literature .................................................. 10.18
Digital Reference Service ....................................... 10.20

Introduction

PDP·tt Systems and Options Catalog
Introduction

The PDP-ll Systems and Options Catalog is published quarterly as an ordering
and configuring publication for Digital's customers and sales representatives. It
contains a collection of the most current configuring and ordering information
available for actively marketed PDP-11 systems, hardware options, software,
and services.
The terminology described in this introduction is used throughout the catalog.
Ordering Information

Model numbers are used to order products in this catalog. For products that are
voltage/frequency dependent, the model numbers appear in the following sequence: the 120-Vac/60-Hz variation of the model appears first; the 240-Vac/
50-Hz model follows. For example, with model number RA81-AA/AD,
RA81-AA designates the 120-V/60-Hz model and RA81-AD designates the
240-Vac/50-Hz model. The same rule applies for model numbers printed using
parentheses instead of a slash, i.e., RA81-AA(AD) is identical to RA81-AA/AD.

Configuring Information

Five factors must be considered when configuring PDP-11 systems

• UNIBUS System Expansion Space - The physical space in a CPU or expansion
hnv
t-hatarrntnrnnrlat-""e
tnnrl111
Pnt"
-_ ........
__ .. - - - ..............- - - .. -.., -a en""r;t;r
".1:""-_ ......... - hrn""
"J r- nt
_ .. harlrnl-:Jf"I'"
--_ .....1"" ... _ ...... - nt"
_ ............
_-_ ... ...
_ ...
_ ... ",v<ln"lnl
r ......
_'
_.6.J.. .............

SU (System Unit) or quad slots.

• Power Requirements - The amount of dc current and watts each option
requires. The figures for available power are supplied in the configuration
template provided for each PDP-ll system described in Chapter 1.

• Bus Loads - The number of ac and dc busloads drawn by each option. The figures for available bus loads are supplied in the configuration template provided
for each PDP-ll system described in Chapter I.

• Priority - The order in which options are placed in the backplane that can
affect system performance. For example, the UDA50 controller is always
configured as the last device in the UNIBUS backplane.

Note: Module placement will be done by Manufacturing or by Field Service.
• I/O Distribution Panel Insert Space - The space in the I/O Distribution Panel
located at the back of the system box or expansion cabinet that is used to carry
connectors for communications and peripheral devices. Options vary in the
number of I/O panel inserts of space they require. The number of available insert spaces is included in the configuration template provided for each PDP-ll
system described in Chapter 1.
Once you have selected those options that meet your system requirements,
list them in the option column of the configuration template. Refer to the
configuring information table that lists the power and space requirements
mentioned above, and begin subtracting the figures given for each option
from the figures provided in the configuration template.

ii Introduction

PDP·ll Systems and Options Catalog
Introduction

Mounting Information

SU (System Units) - Definition of space available in UNIBUS CPU and expansion cabinets for mounting backplane(s) to accommodate modules. For example, a BA11-KU/KV box has five SUs worth of space that could 'accommodate up
to two DDll-DK backplanes and one DDll-CK backplane.

Backplane - Hardware interface containing edge connector slots for insertion
of modules. These backplanes allow for the connection of the modules to the
bus and to a power supply source. For example, DDll-CK, DDll-DK.

Dual-height Module - A 13.2-cm-by-20.3-cm (5.22-in by 8-in) module with
two connectors.

Quad-height Module - A 26.5-cm-by-20.3-cm (10.44-in by 8-in) module with
four connectors.

Hex-height Module - A 39.6-cm-by-20.3-cm (15.6-in by 8-in) module with six
connectors. Used only in UNIBUS systems.
Dual Slot - Space in the backplane capable of accepting one dual-height
module.

Quad Slot - Space in the backplane capable of accepting one quad-height
module. In Q-bus systems, the slot will also accept one dual-height module and
may accept two dual-height modules.
Note: Q-bus and UNIBUS quad-height modules are not interchangeable.
Hex Slot - Space in a UNIBUS backplane capable of accepting a hex-height or
quad-height module.
I/O Distribution Panel Insert - Space in the plate (I/O Distribution Panel) located at the back of Q-bus systems boxes and UNIBUS CPU and expansion cabinets for simple connection of modules and cables. There are three panel insert
sizes for Q-bus options: Size A (2.54 cm by 10.1 cm, 1.0 in by 4.0 in), size B
(6.6 cm by 8.1 cm, 2.6 in by 3.2 in), and size C (10.1 cm by 10.1 cm, 4.0 in by
4.0 in). UNIBUS option panel inserts are in multiples of 5 cm by 10.1 cm (2.0 in
by 4.0 in) panel units.
How to Order a Standard System

The Standard Systems Menu/Worksheets for the MicroPDP-ll systems are provided to assist in the selection of the appropriate system configuration(s). Care
must be taken when transferring the information from the worksheet to an order form. In order to qualify for a Standard System, orders must adhere to the
following rules:
• Mandatory items must be included on the order.
• Options as part of a Standard System configuration are limited to those stated
in the menus.
• Orders will be verified through the precertification technical edit process to
ensure consistency with the Standard System ordering rules.
• Options required beyond those available on the Standard System menu must
be submitted on a separate order with appropriate installation charges.
• Product change orders are not allowed.
• Returns are not allowed.

Introduction iii

PDP·tt Systems and Options Catalog
Introduction

Power Requirements

de Amperes Available - dc current available for system expansion at 5 V
and at 12 V for Q-bus systems and at 5 V, 15 V, and -15 V for UNIBUS systems.

ae Amperes Available - ac current available for system expansion at 120 V
within a specific system cabinet for peripheral expansion.

de Amperes Drawn - dc current drawn from the system at 5 V and at
12 V for Q-bus systems and at 5 V, 15 V, and - 15 V for UNIBUS
options.

ae Amperes Drawn - ac current drawn by the option at 120 V or 240 V.
Bus Load Requirements

System Bus Loads - The number of ac and dc loads remaining on the Q-bus
or UNIBUS.

System Bus Loads Drawn - The number of bus loads the option draws from
the Q-bus or UNIBUS.

Units of Measure

Introduction

K = 1,024
M = 1,0242 (1,048,576)
b/in = bits per inch
b/s = bits per second
in/min = inches per minute
in/s = inches per second (formerly ips)
cm/min = centimeters per minute
cm/s = centimeters per second
ch/in = characters per inch
chis = characters per second
dpi = dots per inch
Ii/min = lines per minute
Ii/in = lines per inch
Ii/em = lines per centimeter
pp/min = pages per minute

Chapter 1
Systems

Systems
Introduction

Digital's PDP-ll systems are based on a compatible set of processors that use a
common architecture and a common instruction set. PDP-II systems offer the
widest selection of operating systems, languages, data management, communications, and applications software in the industry. In addition, they can easily
be connected to our larger VAX systems, to personal computers, to other
vendors' mainframes, and into an Ethernet local area network.
The Systems and Software chapters of this catalog give you quick and easy-touse information about the hardware and software that will meet your requirements. (As not all hardware options are supported by all operating systems, Software Product Descriptions should be consulted to verify support). The Processor
Selection Chart on the following page compares Digital PDP-ll systems.
This chapter is divided into four parts: Q-bus systems, UNIBUS systems,
Industrial Systems, and MIRA High Availability Microsystems. The major differences between the Q-bus and UNIBUS are in the bus structure and the type
and variety of peripheral devices they support. Industrial Systems and MIRA
High Availability Microsystems are designed to meet specific customer needs.
The Q-bus supports small, inexpensive computer systems including the
MicroPDP-ll/83, the MicroPDP-ll/73, the MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS, and the
MicroPDP-II/53. The UNIBUS supports the PDP-ll/84, the PDP-ll/44,
and the PDP-ll/24.

1.2

Systems

Systems
Introduction

Processor

Maximum
Memory

Mass Storale Devices
(See Software Selection Charts
for Specific O/S Support)
Floppy

Hard Disk

Tape

MicroPDP.11/83

4 Mbytes

RX50
(800 Kbytes)
RX33
(1.2 Mbytes)

RA81 (456 Mbytes) TK50 (95 Mbytes)
RA60 (205 Mbytes) TSV05 (40 Mbytes)
RD54 (159 Mbytes)
RD53 (71 Mbytes)
RD32 (42 Mbytes)

MicroPDP.11/73

4 Mbytes

RX50
(800 Kbytes)
RX33
(1.2 Mbytes)

RD54 (159 Mbytes) TK50 (95 Mbytes)
RD53 (71 Mbytes)
TSV05 (40 Mbytes)
RD32 (42 Mbytes)
RD54 (159 Mbytes)* TK50 (95 Mbytes)
TSV05 (40 Mbytes)
RD53 (71 Mbytes)
RD32 (42 Mbytes)

MicroPDP.ll/S3
PLUS

4 Mbytes

MicroPDP.ll/H

4 Mbytes

RX33
(1.2 Mbytes)

RD54 (159 Mbytes)* TK50 (95 Mbytes)*
RD53 (71 Mbytes)* TSV05 (40 Mbytes)
RD31 (20 Mbytes)
RD32 (42 Mbytes)

PDP· 11/84

4 Mbytes

RX50
(800 Kbytes)

RA82 (622 Mbytes)
RA81 (456 Mbytes)
RA60 (205 Mbytes)
RC25 (52 Mbytes)

TU81E (145 Mbytes)
TK50 (95 Mbytes)
TU80 (40 Mbytes)
TS05 (40 Mbytes)

*External to BA23 box only

Systems

1.3

Systems
Introduction

EXTENDING THE PDP·1t
VAX/VMS COEXISTENCE AND
MIGRATION PROGRAM
Digital PDP·11 VAX/VMS
Compatibility Guides

In response to customer's request, Digital has created PDP-ll VAX/VMS Compatibility Guides to help users understand the similarities and differences between PDP-ll system environments and the VAX/VMS system environment.
The compatibility guides provide technical help for PDP-ll customers who
work or expect to work in a mixed PDP-il and VAX environment or who are
migrating or planning to migrate from PDP-l1s to VAXes.
Separate language guides, i.e., the BASIC and FORTRAN compatibility guides,
are available to help programmers understand the similarities and differences
between the programming languages available from Digital for the PDP-ll operating systems and those for VMS. With programmers as their primary audience, each language guide covers topics such as language elements, character
sets, and subprograms. Each guide also provides some general guidelines for
writing transportable code. This information assists people with operating in a
mixed PDP-ll VMS environment and with moving applications from a PDP-ll
environment to VMS.
The language compatibility guides are useful as:
• a day-to-day reference for programmers working in a mixed PDP-1i/VMS
environment
• a tool for understanding and performing an application conversion
• an accelerated training vehicle with new information being related to
familiar topics
• a guide for writing transportable programs.
Although they are not a complete guide to PDP-ll to VAX/VMS migration,
these guides, available at no cost to the customer, should prove to be an
invaluable resource to anyone engaged in any migration efforts.

Ordering Information

1.4 Systems

EJ·31491·41

FOR TRAN Compatibility Guide

EJ·31492·41

BASIC Compatibility Guide

Systems I
MicroPDP·ll Q·bus Multiuser Systems

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Introduction

The MicroPDP-ll computer family enables organizations to buy minicomputer
power and multiuser capacity in a variety of inexpensive configurations. The
MicroPDP-ll/53 has the power to support up to eight users and is the first
MicroPDP-ll system to support the new "half-height" devices that offer
greater capacity at a lower cost for improved price/performance. The
MicroPDP-ll/53-PLUS has additional onboard memory for improved performance and reliability and supports larger system devices. The MicroPDP-ll/73
can handle larger applications, with up to twenty-five simultaneous users
(depending on the application), and supports the larger system devices. The
most powerful MicroPDP-ll is the MicroPDP-ll/83, which incorporates the
18-MHzJ-ll chipset, a floating-point accelerator, and a private memory interconnect for maximum performance. It can easily support more than thirty users.
All the MicroPDP-lls support the standard PDP-ll operating systems including
Micro/RSX, a low-cost version of Digital's RSX-llM-PLUS operating system,
and Micro/RSTS, a subset of RSTS/E that supports all of the RSTS/E system
calls and programming facilities. Both are distributed on RX33 floppy diskette
or TK50 tape for simple installation. The MicroPDP-ll family also. uses RT-ll
(a single-user realtime system), CTS-300 (for small-business timesharing), and
DSM-ll (an integrated operating system using the ANSI-standard MUMPS
language). An extensive list of programming languages including BASIC,
COBOL-81, DIBOL, FORTRAN-77, MACRO-ll, and Pascal are all supported
by the MicroPDP-ll family.
The following chart shows the variety of offerings, by enclosure, for each of the
MicroPDP-ll Multiuser System family members.

1.2

Systems

MicroPDP-ll Q-bus Multiuser Systems
Introduction

MicroPDP·ll System Summary
System

BA23

MicroPDP.ll/.53
Standard Systems

DH.l.53Ql.AA/A2/A3
KDJll-DA (15 MHz, 512 Kbytes)
RX33/RD31
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

BA123

BA213

MicroSystem Cabinet

DH.183Q5·AA/A2/A3
KDJll-BF/BA213
Floating Point
2 Mbytes PMI/RD54
TK50/CXY08

DH.183Q3·BAjB2/B3
KDJ11-BF (18 MHz)/Floating Point
2 Mbytes PMI/H9642/BA23 (2)
RA81/KDA50/TK50
DHQll (2)

DH·l.53Q2.AA/A2/A3
KDJll-DA (15 MHz, 512 Kbytes)
RX33/RD31
BA23 Rackmount
DH.l.53Q5·AA/A2/A3
KDJll-DA (15 MHz, 512 Kbytes)
RX33/RD32
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop
DH.l.53Q6·AA/A2/A3
KDJll-DA (15 MHz, 512 Kbytes)
RX33/RD32
BA23 Rackmount
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS
Standard Systems

DH·l.53Q3·BA/B2/B3
KDJll-DB (15 MHz, 1.5 Mbytes)
RD53/TK50/DHQll
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop
DH·153Q4·BA/B2/B3
KDJ11-DB (15 MHz, 1.5 Mbytes)
RD5 3/TK50/DHQ 11
BA23 Rackmount
DH·l.53Q7.BA/B2/B3
KDJll-DB (15 MHz, 1.5 Mbytes)
RD32/TK50
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop
DH·15 3Q8·BA/B2/B3
KDJll-DB (15 MHz, 1.5 Mbytes)
RD32/TK50
BA23 Rackmount

MicroPDP.l1/73
Standard Systems

DH.173Ql.CA/C2/C3
KDJll-BB (15 MHz)
No Floating-point Support
RD53/TK50/DHQll
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

System
Building
Blocks

173QY.C2/C3
KDJll-BB/1 Mbyte
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

173QB.C2/C3
KDJll-BB/1 Mbyte
BA123

173QZ.C2/C3
KDJll-BB/1 Mbyte
BA23 Rackmount
173QY.D2/D3
KDJll-BB/2 Mbytes
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

173QB.D2/D3
KDJll-BB/2 Mbytes
BA123

173QZ.D2/D3
KDJ11-BB/2 Mbytes
BA23 Rackmount
MicroPDP.ll/83
Standard Systems

DH.183Ql.BA/B2/B3
KDJll-BF/Floating Point
2 Mbytes PMI/RD54
TK50/DHQll
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

DH.183Q2.CA/C2/C3
KDJll-BF/
Floating Point/BA123
2 Mbytes PMI/RD54
TK50/DHQ11 (2)

System
Building
Blocks

183QY.D2/D3
KDJll-BF/2 Mbytes PMI
BA23 Floorstand/Tabletop

183QB.D2/D3
KDJll-BF/2 Mbytes
PMI BA123

183QE.D2/D3
KDJll-BF/2 Mbytes PMI
H9642/BA23 (2)

183QZ.D2/D3
KDJ11-BF/2 Mbytes PMI
BA23 Rackmount

Note: The "A" versions of Standard Systems include a Documentation and Diagnostics kit.
Systems 1.3

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Introduction

MicroPDP-ll/83
Features

• 2-Mbyte base configuration expandable in 1- or 2-Mbyte increments of PMI
ECC MaS memory up to 4 Mbytes (depending on configuration)
• One serial-line standard for connection of console terminal
• 22-bit Q-bus backplane
• 1/0 distribution panel for easy 1/0 device connection

• Choice of pedestal, tabletop, rackmount, floorstand, or cabinet-based
(manufacturing-integrated) packaging
• Optional four-line or eight-line asynchronous multiplexer from 50 to 9600
baud (DZQll, DHQll, CXY08, CXA16, or CXB16)
• Optional Ethernet capability (DEQNA, DELQA)
• 159-Mbyte or 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive (RD54 or RD53)
• 1.2-Mbyte "half-height" floppy-diskette drive (RX33)
• 42-Mbyte "half-height" fixed-disk drive (RD32)
• 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive (RX50)
• 95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive (TK50)
• 52-Mbyte (26 fixed/26 removable) tabletop disk drive (RC25)
• 456-Mbyte high-capacity fixed-disk drive for the cabinet package (RA81)
• 205-Mbyte high-capacity removable-disk drive for the cabinet package (RA60)
• 40-Mbyte industry-standard, 1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive (TSV05)

MicroPDP-ll/73
Features

• 1- or 2-Mbyte increments of parity MaS memory expandable up to 4 Mbytes
(depending on configuration)
• One serial-line standard for connection of console terminal
• 22-bit Q-bus backplane
• 1/0 distribution panel for easy 1/0 device connection

• Choice of pedestal, tabletop, rackmount, floorstand, or cabinet-based
(field upgrade only) packaging
• Optional four-line or eight-line asynchronous multiplexer from 50 to
9600 baud (DZQll, DHVl1, or DHQll)
• Optional Ethernet capability (DEQNA, DELQA)
• 159-Mbyte or 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive (RD54 or RD53)
• 1.2-Mbyte "half-height" floppy-diskette drive (RX33)
• 42-Mbyte "half-height" fixed-disk drive (RD32)
• 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive (RX50)
• 95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive (TK50)
• 52-Mbyte (26 fixed/26 removable) tabletop disk drive (RC25)
• The following items may be integrated by customers in the field
-456-Mbyte high-capacity fixed-disk drive for the cabinet package (RA81)
-205-Mbyte high-capacity removable-disk drive for the cabinet package (RA60)
-40-Mbyte industry-standard, 1,600-h/in steaming-tape drive (TSV05)

1.4' Systems

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Introduction

MicroPDP.ll/.53 PLUS,
MicroPDP.ll/.53
Features

• System module with 15 MHzJ-ll chipset
• Onboard parity memory
- MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS: 1.5 Mbytes
- MicroPDP-11/53: 0.5 Mbytes
• MicroPDP-ll/73 complete instruction set
• Expandable up to 4 Mbytes of memory
• Two serial-line units, implementing EIA RS-232 or EIA RS-423
• 22-bit Q-bus backplane
• I/O distribution panel
• Choice of pedestal, tabletop, or rackmount packaging
• Optional four-line or eight-line asynchronous multiplexer from 50 to
9600 baud (DZQll or DHQ11)
• Optional Ethernet capability (DEQNA, DELQA)
• Optional 52-Mbyte (26 fixed/26 removable) tabletop disk drive (RC25)
• RX33 1.2-Mbyte "half-height" floppy-diskette drive (MicroPDP-11/53 only)
• RD31 "half-height" 20-Mbyte Winchester drive (MicroPDP-11/53 only)
• RD32 "half-height" 42-Mbyte Winchester drive
• RD53 "full-height" 71-Mbyte Winchester drive (MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS only)
• TK50 95-Mbyte cartridge tape (MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS only)
• Add-on support of RD54, RD53 and TK50

Mass-storage Expansion

The BA23 pedestal (desktop) and rackmount packages can accommodate one
RD54 or RD53 fixed disk, or up to two RD32 or RD31 half-height disks,
and up to two RX33 "half-height" diskettes or one RX50 diskette or TK50
tape drive inside the basic BA23 system enclosure. They can also be expanded
to include tabletop or rack mount versions of the full-height devices.
The BA213 floorstand package can accommodate one TK50 tape drive and up
to three RD53 or RD54 disk drives.
The BA123 floorstand package can accommodate up to four 5.25-inch storage
devices. ThesecanincludetheRD54, RD53, RX50, RX33, and TK50 disk and
tape drives, with a maximum of three RD54 or RD53 disk drives.
The H9642-JA/JB cabinet package can accommodate two BA23 chassis that can
contain a total of four 5 .25-inch storage devices. These can include up to two
RD54s or RD53s andup to two RX50 or TK50 disk and tape drives.
Up to four RX33s can be accommodated, depending upon the other devices
in the configuration. The H9642-JA/JB cabinet also provides space for two
10.5-inch storage devices. These can include the RA81, RA60, and the TSV05
disk and tape drives.
The RC25 disk subsystem is externally mounted. The RC25 is available in rackmount and tabletop versions.

Systems 1.5

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Configuring Guidelines

Power Requirements and Bus Loads

Each option requires mounting space {quad or dual slot}, dc current, and ac and
dc bus loads. If you select a Standard System configuration, it is not necessary
to calculate the current or bus loads. This has already been done for you. However, if you select a System Building Block configuration, you must calculate
these by using the available configuration templates. Simply subtract the option from the available amperes and bus loads in the configuring templates.
Each available option slot of the traditional Micro PDP-II enclosures can accept one quad option or two dual options. When configuring options, place
dual-width options beside each other to efficiently use the slot space. If you
have a dual option followed by a quad option, a bus grant continuity card will
be supplied.
.
Each available option slot of the new BA2l3 enclosure can accept only one dual
or quad option.
Refer to the Configuring Charts in the Options chapter and in the Disks and
Tapes chapter for the power requirements, bus loads, module size, and I/O
distribution panel insert sizes for each option.

I/O Management
BA23, BA123, H9642

In addition to calculating power requirements and available backplane slots,
the utilization of the I/O distribution panel must be considered when configuring systems in the BA23 , BA123, or H9642-SA/SB enclosures.
The I/O distribution panel is a plate located at the back of the system box
designed to simplify cable management. It is used to mount connectors {panel
inserts} for communications and peripheral cables that connect the CPU to
-these devices.
Options have panel inserts that come in two sizes: Size A: 2.5 cm by 10.1 cm
{1 inch by 4 inches}; and Size B: 6.6 cm by 8.1 cm, {2.6 inches by 3.2 inches}.
The BA23 I/O distribution panel has space for two Size A inserts and four
Size B inserts. An adapter place is included for converting two Size B inserts to
three Size A inserts. The BA123 has space for ten panel inserts of which four
are Size A and six are Size B. The H9642-JA/JB I/O distribution panel has space
for six Size A inserts and eleven Size B inserts.

BA2l3

The modules of the new BA213 enclosure feature connections through an integral module handle rather than through internal cabling to a back insert panel.
Refer to the Configuring Charts in the Options chapter and in the Disks and
Tapes chapter for the power requirements, bus loads, module size, and I/O
distribution panel insert sizes for each option.

1.6

Systems

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Options

Q-bus Options

The following is a list of system options for the MicroPDP-11/83, 11/73, 11/53
PLUS, and 11/53. The options and all ordering details are completely described
in the Options and Disks and Tapes chapters.

Memory (RAM) Options

MSVll·MB*

I-Mbyte MaS memory

MSVll·QA

I-Mbyte parity MaS memory (11/73, 11/53 PLUS, 11/53)

MSVll-QB

2-Mbyte parity MaS memory (11/73,11/53 PLUS, 11/53)

MSVl1-QC

4-Mbyte parity MaS memory (11/73, 11/53 PLUS, 11/53)

MSVl1-JD

I-Mbyte PMI ECC MaS memory (11/83)

MSVl1-JE

2-Mbyte PMI ECC MaS memory (11/83)

*Not integrated in MicroPDP·ll systems by Digital.

Memory (CMOS) Options

MCVll·DC

32-Kbyte CMOS Memory

Memory (ROM) Options

MRVll-C

PROM/ROM module with 16 sockets; accommodates
24-pin devices

MRVll·D

PROM/ROM module with 16 sockets; accommodates 24- and
28-pin devices

Communications Options

DELQA.SA/SP* Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller for systems in

BA200-series enclosures
DEQNA-M

Ethernet communications controller

DHQll.M

8-line asynchronous dual-height multiplexer (modem control)

DZQll-M

4-line asynchronous multiplexer (modem control)

DHFll-AA/AB

16-line fiber optic terminal controller

DHFll.BA/BB

32-line fiber optic terminal controller

DLVJI-M

4-line asynchronous interface (modem control)

DLVE1·M

Single-line asynchronous interface (modem control)

DMVll·M

Single-line, synchronous interface (EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V. 28,
CCITT V. 35, or EIA RS-423/RS-449)

DMVll·N

Single-line, synchronous interface (integral modem)

DPVll·M

Single-line, synchronous interface (EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V. 28
or EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V. 11)

KMVIA-M

Single-line synchronous/asynchronous interface (EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V. 28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V. 11, or EIA
RS-423/CCITT V. 10)

CXY08·AA/AP* 8-line asynchronous interface (modem control) (EIA RS-232-C)
CXA16·AA/AP* 16-line asynchronous interface (no modem control)

(EIA RS-423A)
CXB16-AA/AP* 16-line asynchronous interface (no modem control)

(EIA RS-422)
*AA/SA denotes factory installed. AF/SF denotes field service installed.

Svliltems

1.7

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Options

Realtime Options

Disk Storage Options

AAVll-C

Digital-to-analog converter

ADVll-C

Analog-to-digital converter

AXVII-C

Analog I/O device

KWVII-C

Realtime clock

DRVll-B

DMA parallel interface

DRVll-J

Four 16-line parallel interfaces

DRVll-L

Parallel interface

DRVll-WA

22-bit DMA parallel interface

IEQll-AD/AF

Bit-parallel, byte-serial DMA Q-bus interface controllers

RA81-HA/HD

Integrated 456-Mbyte fixed-disk drive, 120/240 V

RQA81

RA81 with KDA50 controller

RA60-AF

Integrated 205-Mbyte removable-disk drive, 120/240 V

RQA60

RA60 with KDA50 controller

KDA50-QA

RA81 and RA60 disk controller

RD54A

Integrated 159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD54-D, -R

Add-on 159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD54A.SA/SF*

Integrated 159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive for the BA213 enclosure

RD53A

Integrated 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD53-D, ·R

Add-on 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD53A·SA/SF*

Integrated 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive for the BA213 enclosure

RD31A·AA

Integrated 20-Mbyte "half-height" fixed-disk drive for BA23

RD31A·AB

Integrated second 20-Mbyte "half height P fixed-disk drive,
with cables and stacking hardware

RX33A·AA

Integrated 1.2-Mbyte "half-height" floppy-disk drive for
BA23

RX33A·AB

Integrated second 1.2-Mbyte "half-height" floppy-disk drive,
with cables and stacking hardware

RX50A

Integrated 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive

RX50-D, ·R

Add-on 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive

RQDX3

RD/RX disk controller

RQDXE

Extender module for the RQDX3 controller

*AA/SA denotes factory installed. AF/SF denotes field service installed.

1.8

Systems

MicroPDP-ll Q-bus Multiuser Systems
Options

Tape Storage Options

TK;O·AA

Integrated 95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive

TK;O·D, ·R

Add-on 95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive

TK;OE.SA/SF*

Integrated 95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive for the BA213
enclosure

TQK;O

TK50 tape controller

TQK;O·SA/SF* TK50 tape controller for the BA213 enclosure

Q-bus Expansion Hardware

Storage Expansion Hardware

TSVO;.AA/AB

40-Mbyte streaming-tape drive, 120/240 V

BA2.3·A

Master expansion box

BA2.3.CC/DD

BA23 expansion box, 120/240 V

BAll.SE/SF

5 .25-inch 9-slot expander box, no console, 120/240 V

H9642.JAIJB

Micro system cabinet with I/O, 120/240 V

H9642·C

40-inch stand-alone front-load cabinet

H9642.AP/AR

Storage cabinet, 120/240 V

H9646·CA

60-inch stand-alone communications cabinet

*AA/SA denotes factory installed. AF/SF denotes field service installed.

SYstems 1.9

MicroPDP.llQ·bus Multiuser Systems
Options

Information Kit Options

Diagnostics

Documentation

1.10 Systems

The MicroPDP-11 information kits contain all diagnostics and documentation
for the entire MicroPDP-11 Multiuser System family (MicroPDP-11/83, 11/73,
11/53 PLUS, and 11/53). The MicroPDP-11/53 will use the RX50-based kits; the
RX33 will both read and write RX50 format.
ZYAAE-P3

English-language diagnostics and documentation on RX50
media for the H9642-JA/JB systems

ZYAAE-P5

English-language diagnostics and documentation on TK50
media for the H9642-JA/JB systems

ZYAAB-P3

English-language diagnostics and documentation on RX50
media for the BA 123 systems

ZYAAB.P5

English-language diagnostics and documentation on TK50
media for the BA 123 systems

ZYAAS·P5

English-language diagnostics and documentation on TK50
media for the BA2l3 systems

ZYAAA·P3

English-language diagnostics and documentation on RX50
media for the BA23 systems

ZYAAA·P5

English-language diagnostics and documentation on TK50
media for the BA23 systems

The following diagnostics may be ordered separately:
ZYA03-P3

English-language diagnostics on RX50 media

ZYA03·P5

English-language diagnostics on TK50 media

ZYA03·P4

English-language diagnostics on RC25 media

ZYA03·P6

English-language diagnostics on TK25 media

The following documentation may be ordered separately:
ZYAAE·GZ

English-language documentation for the H9642-JA/JB systems

ZYAAB·GZ

English-language documentation for the BA123 systems

ZYAAS·GZ

English-language documentation for the BA2l3 systems

ZYAAA·GZ

. English-language documentation for the BA23 systems

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Upgrades

Q-bus System Upgrades

MicroPDP-ll/73 Upgrade Kits

MicroPDP-ll/83 Upgrade Kits

Micro VAX II
Upgrade Kits

Backplane Upgrade

11/73-UA

KDJ11-BB (11/73) CPU board and cabinet kit, diagnostics on
RX50, documentation, and Field Service installation.
(MicroPDP-ll/23 to 11/73)

11/73-UB

KDJ11-BB (11/73) CPU board and cabinet kit, diagnostics on
RX50, documentation, and Field Service installation.
(MicroPDP-ll/23 PLUS to 11/73)

11/73-UC

KDJ11-BB (11/73) CPU board, 512 Kbytes memory, BA23-A,
RLV12 disk controller, diagnostics on RL02, documentation,
and Field Service installation. (MicroPDP-11/03 or 11/23-A to
11/73)

11/83-UA

KDJ11-BF (11/83) CPU board and cabinet kit, 2 Mbytes PMI
memory, diagnostics on RX50, documentation, and Field
Service installation. (MicroPDP-11/73 to 11/83)

11/83-UB

KDJ11-BF (11/83) CPU board and cabinet kit, 2 Mbytes PMI
memory, diagnostics on RX50, documentation, and Field
Service installation. (MicroPDP-11/23 to 11/83)

11/83-UC

KDJ11-BF (11/83) CPU board and cabinet kit, 2 Mbytes PMI
memory, diagnostics on RL02, documentation, and Field
Service installation. (MicroPDP-11/23 PLUS to 11/83)

630XR-CA

MicroPDP-11 to MicroVAX II, VMS/license, TK50, 120 V.

630XR-CB

MicroPDP-11 to MicroVAX II, VMS/license, TK50, 240 V.

630XR-CC

MicroPDP-11 to MicroVAX II, VMS/license, 120/240 V.

630XR-DA

MicroPDP-l1 to MicroVAX II, ULTRIX/license, TK50, 120 V.

630XR-DB

MicroPDP-ll to MicroVAX II, ULTRIX/license, TK50, 240 V.

630XR-DC

MicroPDP-ll to MicroVAX II, ULTRIX/license, 120/240 V.

llE23-UA

Four- to eight-slot system upgrade. Includes Field Service
installation.

Systems

1.11

MicroPDP·ll Q.bus Multiuser Systems
Upgrades

MicroPDP·ll to MicroVAX II Upgrade Kit Variations
Part No.

Description

RQDX3-M
QZOO2·C.5
QZOO2.H5
QZZEK.UZ
QLZEL·UZ

RX/RD disk controller
Micro VMS 8-user license & key
MicroVMS 8-user
ULTRIX-32 MicroVAX II license
ULTRIX-32, 2-8 user upgrade license

TQK50·AB
TK50·DA
TK50·DB

Controller for TK50
TK50 drive, desktop, 120V
TK50 drive, desktop, 240V

QZZEK.H5
QLZEL.H5

ULTRIX-32 MicroVAX II
ULTRIX-32 capacity key media/documentation, TK50

KA630·AA
MS630·CA
ZNAAA·C.5
CK-KA630·AB
M9407

MicroVAX II CPU/floating-point unit, 1 Mbyte of memory
8 Mbytes of memory, one quad
Hardware information kit w/ diagnostics
CPU distribution panel w/ cables
Grant continuity card
Product variation label
n ... __ -' ___ ..o.T T"II>. ,~_~ _1_11~ ___
r J.:uuu\';~ L.U. lUCUIUUUll

EK-63XRA.IN

1.12

Systems

Installation guide
Field Service deinstallation and installation

1
1

1
1
1

1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1

MicroPDP·ll Q·busMultiuser Systems
MicroPDP-l1/83 Systems

Product Description

The MicroPDP-ll/83 is Digital's most powerful 16-bit supermicrosystem. The
MicroPDP-ll/83 combines Digital's 18-MHzJ-11 chip and a companion floating-point accelerator chip with a private memory interconnect (PMI) to produce system throughput that approaches PDP-11/70 integer performance. This
chipset and PMI-memory combination boosts realtime computing power to the
highest supermicro performance levels.
The MicroPDP-11/83 is fully compatible with the 16-bit PDP-11 architecture
and its entire collection of system and application software and offers a wide
array of mass-storage devices and communications interfaces that are all compatible with the Q22 bus.
The MicroPDP-l1/83 also has the widest of any range of configuration flexibility. It is offered in four enclosures: the MicroPDP-11 system BA23, BA123,
BA213, and H9642 cabinet. The storage devices offer range from half-height
RD/RX devices to high-capacity RA devices formerly available only on much
larger systems.
The MicroPDP-11/83 is also supported by Ethernet local area networking for
low-cost, high-speed local area communications.

Systems 1.13

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 Standard System

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the
minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system
must be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH.183Ql·BA

Includes MicroPDP-ll/83 CPU,
2-Mbyte(MSVll-JE) PM!
memory, floating-point
accelerator, RD54 159-Mbyte
disk drive, RQDX3 disk
controller, TK50 95-Mbyte tape
drive and tape controller,
DHQll, BA23 pedestal/tabletop
enclosure. us 120-V oower cord.
and English-Ianguag~
,
documentation and installation
diagnostics, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

1.14

Systems

Choose one. -BA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal, a BC22D-10
serial-line cable, and 8 modem/data serial
lines (mudem cuntrol) on the DHQi1.
RT-ll and CTS-300 are not supported
on Standard Systems due to lack of
DHQ11 support.

DH.183Ql·B2

Same as DH-183Q1-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation
- see Step 4 to order separately,
120 V

DH·183Ql·B3

Same as DH-183Q1-BA except
does not include a 240-V power
cord, diagnostics or documentation - see Steps 2 and
4 to order separately, 240 V

Choose one power cord.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

0
0

1
1

BN02A·2E
BN02A·2E

0
0

1
1

BN04A·2E
BN05A·2E

0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A.2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J·IK

UKfIreland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V
@6A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan - 200 V @ 6 A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821·UZ
QY029.UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800.UZ
QY430.UZ
QY628.UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642·UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS

Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Refer to Table 1.3 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.4.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Ptoduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 15 is optional for a functioning system.
0

lYAAA.P3

lYAAA·P5

5 Additional
Memory

0
0

6 Add·on
Mass Storage
(external)
Required Selections

4 Diagnostics
and Documentation

English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -B2 and -B3. Included in
DH-183Q1-BA.

MSVll.JD
MSVll.JE

1-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose only one.

BC17Y.IJ

Daisychain cable (Required if 2
external RDxx and/or RXxx
devices are selected.)

An RQDX3 supports a total of four
devices, with the following device
definitions:
RX50 = 2 devices
RX33 = 1 device
RDxx = 1 device

RQDXE·AA

RQDX3 extender module
(Required for addition of any
external RD/RX drives.)

RD54-DA/DB

159-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RD53·DA/DB

71-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RXSO-DA/DB

800-Kbyte tabletop-disk drive

RQDXE.AA

RQDX3 extender module

0
0

TKSO.DA/DB
TQIGO-AB

95-Mbyte tabletop-tape drive
TK50 controller

TSV05-BA/BB

CK·TS05·14

40-Mbyte industry standard
1,600-bpi streaming-tape
drive in cabinet
Cabinet kit

DELQA.M
CK·DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

DEQNA·M
CK.DEQNA·KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Environmental
Power Product

H7229·AD

Standby uninterruptable power
system (1,440 VA, 1,050 W)

9 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 9 serial lines using 3 B-size slots. This leaves 1 additional B-size slot
in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 183QY configuration template.

Disks

Tapes

7 Ethernet
Interface

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections.

DZQll.M
CK.DZQll.DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead.

DLVJ1.M
CK.DLVJI-LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose zero, one, or two combinations in
this step, along with one RQDXE.

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
step 11.

Systems l.tS

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (9) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.1 and 1.2 for country variations.

Product Description

Text

0
0
0
0

DL.VT320-~ White video terminal
DL· VT320-B_ Green video terminal
DL. VT320-C_ Amber video terminal
DL· VT320-F_ WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0

VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_

VT340-D_

0
0
0
0

LA"-_
LA75X.SF
LA210-_
LA21X·BT

LA21X·SF

LA21X·SH

0
0

LN03-_
LN03S._

LG31-A2

LG31-A3

0
0

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

1.16

Part Number

Systems

VT330·~

VT340-~

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.2
for country variations.

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal
250 chis dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O, 8.5 by 11
Single·tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser
printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

See Table 1.1 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31
with the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

11 Cables

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB and CK.DZQll-DB):

o
o
o

BC22D.25
BC22D-50
BC22D.AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

12 Operating
System

Media and
Documentation

13 Layered
Product
License,

Media, and
Documentation

0
0

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8751·A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

Choose desired order codes from Table
104. Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 104
for appropriate part number and
SPD number.)

0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1

Q_-H3
Q_-H5
Q_.HM
Q_.GZ

RX50 media/documentation kit
TK50 media/documentation kit
TSV05 media/documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3
Q_-H5
Q_-HM
Q_-GZ

Single-use license
RX50 media/documentation kit
TK50 media/documentation kit
TSV05 media/documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Systems 1.17

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

14 Software
Services

ORX50
OTK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B;

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport, DECstart
PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

ORX50
OTK50

1) Hardware

Q-_-7J
Q-_-7;

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation,
media/documentation, and
training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

For hardware maintenance services after
the one-year onsite hardware warranty,
choose one type of service per system.

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to 7
days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

Maintenance
Services

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software Maintenance
Services

1.18

Systems

OEM
Sales Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

ORX50
OTK50
o TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-3;
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

ORX50
OTK50
o TSV05

Q_-S3
Q_-S;
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database {for most
products}

DRX50

Q_-93

DECsupport Service Agreement
- access to a service database
{for most products}

ORX50
OTK50
o TSV05

Q_-I3
Q_-I.s
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part, number for
the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To vet;ify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). {Refer to Table 1.4 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.}
Contact your local Software Product
Services {SPS} Business Account
Specialist if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Bunding Block

Configuration Rules for MicroPDP·
11/83 BA23·based System
Bunding Blocks

The BA23 pedestal or rackmount enclosure backplane has a total of eight slots.
It contains a 230-watt power supply and dedicated space for up to four halfheight storage devices. Use the following rules when configuring the BA23 pedestal or rackmountable systems with devices that are not included on the menu.
• Write the module and mass-storage device names in the left column beside the
slot and shelf numbers. When configuring these systems, please note that
quad-height modules use both the "AB" and "CD" portions of a slot.
• Slot 1 is always reserved for the CPU module, and slot 2 is reserved for the
memory option.
• Slots 3 through 8 can accommodate either two dual-height or one quadheight option.
• Mass-storage shelf devices can be either one full-height (Le. RD54, RD53,
TK50) or two half-height devices (Le. RX33, RD31, RD32) per cavity.
• Enter the 5-V and 12-V currents, power, the ac and dc bus loads, and I/O panel
inserts required for each module and mass-storage device. The column totals
must not exceed the limits listed at the bottom.

MicroPDP.ll/83 PLUS Configuration
Template for 183QY, 183QZ
SLOT MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 AB
CD
4 AB
CD
; AB
CD
6AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8AB
CD

KDJ11-BF
MSVll-JE

Current (Amps)
; Vdc
12Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus] oads
ac
dc

I/O I ~serts
B
A

5.5
4.1

0.2
0

29.9
18.5

2.3
2.5

1.0
0.5

1
N/A

N/A
N/A

36A

230W

- -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - --

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
lA
lB
2A
2B

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

Systems

1.19

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/83 BA23 System Building Block

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 4, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the mini- .
mum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Ptoduct Description

Ptoduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

183QY·D2

Includes MicroPDP-ll/83 CPU,
2-Mbyte (MSVll-JE) memory,
asynchronous console serial line
on the CPU module, BC22D-I0
serial-line cable, BA23A-AF pedestal/tabletop enclosure, and a
US 120-V power cord. Does not
include diagnostics or user docume!!t2ticn - see Step 5 to order
separately, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

183QY-D3

Same as 183QY-D2 except does
not include a 240-V power cord see Step 2 to order separately,
240V

183QZ-D2

Same as 183QY-D2 except includes a BA23A-AR rackmount
enclosure instead ofa BA23A-AF
enclosure, 120 V

183QZ-D3

Same as 183QY-D3 except includes a BA23A-AR rackmount
enclosure instead of a BA23A-AF
enclosure, 240 V

D
D
D
D

BN02A-2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A-2E
BN05A-2E

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V@6A
Japan - 200 V@6A
Israel- 230V@6A
US -208-240V@6A

D
D
D
D
D

1.20

Systems

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A-2E
BN07A-2E
BN18K-IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J·IK

Choose one. - D2 recommended for

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

us.

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Buading Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

3 Base Software System

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4·UZ
QY821.UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430.UZ
QY628·UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642·UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS·300
DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSx
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

1
1
1

RDS4A·AA
RQDX3-AA
TKSO·AA
TQIGO·AA

l59-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RDS4A·AA
RX33A·AA
RQDX3·AA
Z'YA06·P3

l59-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

1
1
1
1
1

RDS4A-AA
RX33A-AA
RX33A·AB
RQDX3-AA
Z'YA06·P3

l59-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RX50A.AA
RQDX3·AA

l59-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

1
1
1
1

RD53A·AA
RQDX3·AA
TK50·AA
TQK50·AA

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RDS3A·AA
RX33A-AA
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

RDS3A·AA
RX33A·AA
RX33A·AB
RQDX3-AA
ZYA06·P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

RDHA-AA
RXSOA·AA
RQDX3·AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

RD32A·AA

42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (internal)

1
RD54, TK.50

RD54,RX33

RD54, 2 RX33s

RD54,RX50

RD53, TK50

RD53,RX33

1
1
1
1

RD53, 2 RX33s

1
RD53,RX50

RD32, TK50

1
1
1

RQDX3·AA
TIGO·AA
TQIGO·AA

Choose only one combination.
BA23 box supports up to two RX33s
and/or two RD32s. The -AA variation
is used for the first drive and the -AB
variation is used for the second drive.

Systems 1.21

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/8l BA2l System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Pmduct Description

4 Integrated Mass Storage
(internal) (Continued)

RD32A.AA

42·Mbyte half·height
fixed-disk drive
42·Mbyte half-height
fixed·disk drive
RD/RX controller
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

RD32A.AB

1
1
1

2 RD32s, TK50

RD32A.AA

1
1
1

RD32,RX33

RQDX3.AA
TKSO·AA
TQKSO·AA

RX33A·AA
RQDD-AA
ZVA06-P3

RD32A·AA
RD32A.AB

2 RD32s, RX33

RD32,2 RX33s

1
1
1

RX33A.AA
RQDD-AA
ZYA06-P3

RD32A·AA

1
1
1
1

RX33A-AA
RX33A.AB
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3,

2 RD32s, 2 RX33s

0
RD32,RX50

RD32A-AA

RD32A.AB

1
1
1
1

RX33A.AA
RX33A-AB
RQDX3-AA
ZVA06·P3

RD32A-AA

1
1

RXSOA-AA
RQDD·AA

2 RD32s, RX50

RD32A-AA
1

RD32A.AB

1
1

RXSOA-AA
RQDX3.AA

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

42-Mbyte half·height
fixed-disk drive
1.2.Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP·ll RX33
formatter kit
42.Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

Note: Selection from Steps 5 through 16 is optional fora functioning system.
S Diagnostics and

ZYAAA-P3

0
0

1
1

Choose one.

ZYAAA.PS

English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on TK50 media

MSVll.JD
MSVll.JE

I-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose only one.

Documentation

6 Additional Memory

1.22

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

7 Add·on Mass

Be17Y·1)

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Storage (external)

Daisychain cable (Required if 2
external RDxx and/or RXxx

Required Sdections

devices are sdected.)

IlQDXE·AA

RQDX3 extender module
(Required for addition of any
external RD/RX drives.)

H9}()2

Rac1anount kit (Required for all
external rackmount devices - one
kit for every 2 devices.)

Disks

Tapes

IlDS4·DA/DB

159-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

IlDS4.1lA/IlB

159-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive

IlDS3·DA/DB

71-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

1lDS3.1lA/IlB

71-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive

RXSO·DA/DB

800-Kbyte tabletop-disk drive

RXSO.1lA/IlB

800-Kbyte rackmount-disk drive

TKSO.DA/DB
TQKSO·AB

95-Mbyte tabletop-tape drive
TK50 controller

TKSO.1lA/IlB
TQKSO·AB

95-Mbyte rackmount-tape drive
TK50 controller

TSVOS·BA/BB

CK-TSOS·14

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-bpi streaming-tape
drive in cabinet
Cabinet kit

1
1

DELQA·M
CK-DELQA.YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

1
1

DEQNA-M
CK-DEQNA-KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Ethernet

Interface

9 Additional Asyndttonous
Serial Lines

An RQDX3 supports a total of four devices,
with the following device definitions.
RX50 = 2 devices

RX33 = 1 device
RDxx = 1 devic~
Depending on what was sdected in Step 4,
choose zero, one, or two combinations in
this step, along with one RQDXE.

Choose only one.
Sdect cable from
Step 12.

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 1 seria1line, using 1 B-size distribution slot. This leaves 3 B-size slots
in the distribution pand available for options. Please refer to the 183QY configuration template.

DHQll·M
CK·DHQll.AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are sdected. Sdect cable from
Step 12. DHQll is not supported by
RT-ll and CTS-300.

DHQll.M
CK-DHVll·WB

8 seria1lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are sdected.
Sdect cable from Step 12. DHQll
is not supported by RT-ll and
CTS-300.

DZQll·M
CK-DZQll·DB

4 seria1lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead.

DLVJ1.M

4 seria1lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

CK~DLVJ1.LB

Choose up to two if no other asynchronous
options are sdected.
Sdect cable from Step 12.

Systems

1.23

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (1) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.1 and 1.2 for country variations.

Product Description

Text

D
D
D
D

DL. VT320·A-DL. VT320·B_
DL· VT320-C_
DL· VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

D
D
D
D
D
D

VT330-A-VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-A-VT340-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

D
D
D
D

LA75-_
LA7.sX·SF
LA210-_
LA21X·BT

LA21X·SF

LA21X·SH

D
D

LN03·_
LN03S·_

LG31·A2

LG31-A3

D
D

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

250 chIs dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA2lO
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser
printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

H7229-AD

11 Environmental
Power Product

1.24

Part Number

Systems

Standby uninterruptable power
system (1,440 VA, 1,050 W)

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.2
for country variations.

See Table 1.1 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Produc:t/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Cables

o
o

BNE3M.xx
H4000

Ethernet right·angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA{DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, ·xx equals:
·05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
·40 = 40-ft

For 25-pinconnections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, AB, CK-DHQll-AB, and CK-DZQll-DB):

BC22D·2S
BC22D·SO
BC22D.AO

o
o

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

13 Operating System

o
o

BC16E·2S
BC16E·SO

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571·A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
sdected in Step 10.

Q_.H3

Q_.HS

Q_.HM

Q_.GZ

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table 1.4.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 1.4 for
appropriate part number and SPD number.)

Media and
Documentation

14 Layered Product
License,

0
0

1
1

Q_.UZ
Q_.H3

Q_.HS

Media, and
Documentation

15 Software
Services

Q_.HM

Q_~GZ

DRX50
DTK50

Q_.B3
Q_.BS

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Startup Service Levd III includes DECsupport,
DECstart PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

DRX50
DTK50

0-·73

Q_.7S

Repeat Step 14 if more than one layered
product is desired.

When ordering from Step 15, do not order
from Steps 16 and 17.
All software products must have the same
levd service.

Startup Service Levd II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation,
media/documentation, and

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

training

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

Systems 1.25

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order LitJi&tions or Remarks

16 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service
per system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

17 Software
Maintenan~~

Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

o RX50
o TK50
o TSV05

Q_-33

Self-Maintenance Service
.Agreement - lildudes updates

o RX50
o TK50

Q_-S3
Q_-S5
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

o RX50

Q_-93
Q_-95
Q_-9M

DECsupport Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

o TSV05
o TK50
o TSV05

o RX50
o TK50

o TSV05

1.26

Svstems

1..r:

"'--""
Q_-3M

Q_-I3
Q_-I>
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. Ali software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number
with the same five digits as the part number for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.4 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.1 . Multinatio~al Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

English
United States
Belgium
Flemish
French
Canada
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Kiltakana
Japan
French
Switzerland
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Italian
Switzerland
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
English
New Zealand

LA"
Printer

LA210
Printer

LN03S
Printer

LG31
Printer

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AA

LA75-AB

LA2l0-AB

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AC

LA75-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK3l-AD

LA75-AE

LA2l0-AE

LJ250-AD

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK3l-AE

LA75-CC

LJ250-AE

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK3l-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA2l0-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK3l-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA2l0-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK3l-AA

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK3l-AA

LA75-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK3l-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LGK3l-CA

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AA

LN03S-AY

LGK3l-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK3l-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA210-AZ

LN03
Printer

LJ250
Printer

LJ250-AZ

Systems 1.27

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.2 . Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Country/
Region

Language

United States
English
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
Spain
Spanish
Portugal
Portuguese
Australia/
New Zealand
English

VT320
StdKit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
Std Kit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
StdKit

VT340
WPSKit

VT320---A

VT330---A

VT340---A

VT320-~

VT320---A
VT320-_B
VT320-_C
VT320-_D

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-_G

VT330-_G

VT340-_F
VT340-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320---I

VT330---I

VT340---I

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT320-_L

VT330-~

VT340--L

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_N
VT320-_P
VT320---A
VT320-_S

VT320-_N
VT320--P
VT320---A
VT320-_S

VT330-_N
VT330--P

VT340-_N
VT340--P

VT330-_S

v .&...,~v-_v

"')n

'(T

...vT"""
..."
... .,.
~;J~V-_V

VT330-_V

VT340-_S
VT340-_V

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT320-_C

IT'T''l

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT330-_C

VT340-_C
VT340--D

VT340-_C

VT340-~

VT330-~

Table 1.3 • Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
RSTS/E Micro/ MPPRT
RSTS

MPP·
RSX

MPPMicro/ DSM
RSX
-11

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

--------- RSX-ll ---------

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLVJl
TSV05

M+

Micro/ A-to-Z
RSX

N
yl

y4
yl

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

y3
y3

N
N

Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

y2
y

RT-11

CTS300

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD53
RD54
RX50
RX33
TK50
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Multiple DLVJ1s are not supported
3Supported for target systems, not host systems
4Supported in DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

1.28

Systems

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.4 . Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Operating Systems

SPD#

License
Only

RX;O
Media/Doc.

TK;O
Media/Doc.

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-11
MicroPowet/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-11M
RSX-IIM-PLUS
RSX-11S
RT-ll

lS.16
12.09
12.1S

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QYS21-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QYS21-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QYS21-H5

lS.24
14.S3
19.12
lS.12
14.2S
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

QJ013-H3

QYS29-H5
QYSOO-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

18.19
lS.17
lS.26
lS.20
lS.18
lS.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

BASIC-PLUS-2
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
18.06
14.54
lS.09

QY91S-UZ
QYS05-UZ
QY916-UZ
QYS09-UZ

QYS09-H3

QY91S-H5
QYS05-H5
QY916-H5
QY809-H5

BASIC-PLUS
RT-ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

COBOL-81
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
18.03
13.16
lS.08

QY994-UZ
QYS02-UZ
QY993-UZ
QY808-UZ

DATATRIEVE-ll
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.48
18.15
12.48
lS.30

QY301-UZ
QYS19-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-llM
RSX-llM PLUS
RSTS/E

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ708-UZ
QY845-UZ
QJ706-UZ

DECmail-ll
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QY816-UZ
QR451-UZ
QYS15-UZ

DECnet
RSX-llM - Full Node
10.75
RSX-llM - End Node
10.75
RSX-llM-PLUS - Full Node 10.66
RSX-llM-PLUS - End Node 10.66
RSX-llS - Full Node
10.74
RSX-llS - End Node
10.74
Micro/RSX-End Node Only lS.27
RT-ll
10.72
DECnet/E
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ687-UZ
QY692-UZ

TSVO;
Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

QJS21-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QY821-GZ

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QYS29-H3
QYSOO-H3

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QYS29-GZ
QYSOO-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ628-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Products

QYS05-H3

QYS08-H3

QY994-H5
QY802-H5
QY993-H5
QYS08-H5

QYS19-H3

QYS19-H5

QYS02-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY91S-HM
QY916-HM

QJ913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QY816-H3
QYS15-H3

QY766-H3
QJ6S7-H3

QR454-H5
QY816-H5
QR451-H5
QY815-H5
QJ764-H5
QJ765-H5
QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QJ762-H5
QJ763-H5
QY766-H5
QY692-H5

QY918-GZ
QYS05-GZ
QY916-GZ
QY.S09-GZ

QY994-GZ
QY802-GZ
QY993-GZ
QY80S-GZ
QY301-GZ
QY819-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ708-HM
QY845-HM
QJ706-HM

QJ708-GZ
QY845-GZ
QJ706-GZ

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QY816-GZ
QR451-GZ
QY815-GZ

QR451-HM

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM
QJ6S7-HM
QY692-HM

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ687-GZ
QY692-GZ

Systems 1.29

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/83 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.4 (Continued) • Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)
DECtype
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS
DIBOL
RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
FMS
RSX-llM, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RT-ll
RSTS/E
FORTRAN IV
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
RT-11, CTS-300
RSTS/E

License
Only

RX50

TK50

TSV05

Media/Doc.

18.14

QR03B-UZ
QY03B-UZ

QY03B-H3

QY03B-H5

13.14
13.14

QR4BO-UZ
QY4BO-UZ

QY4BO-H3

14.2B

QYBOO-UZ
QYB30-UZ

QYBOI-H3
QYB30-H3

QYBOI-H5

QYB07-H3

QYB07-H5

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

SPD#

14.B2

18.12

14.24
IB.05
14.0B
14.0B

12.27

QY540-UZ
QYB07-UZ
QY52B-UZ
QY519-UZ

QY715-UZ
QY322-UZ

QY322-H3

12.22

rlT71 ~ TT'7
"""c!J' ... ..,-u~

'lJ 1.J..J-n.J

13.17

QY716-UZ

14.63
12.10
12.41

QP230-UZ
QYB13-UZ
QR435-UZ

14.31

IB.34

FORTRAN-77
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-11

A3.55

QY66B-UZ
QYB03-UZ
QYI00-UZ
QYB10-UZ
QA609-DZ

Pascal
RSX-11M, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.1B
IB.07

QY12B-UZ
QYB06-UZ

12.7B

IB.11

QY232-UZ
QYB04-UZ
QY233-UZ
QYB11-UZ

15.63
15.63
15.63

12.07

PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RTEM-11
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
SORT/MERGE
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

1.30

Systems

IB.04

14.49
IB.I0

14.79
12.79

IB.13

QR03B-HM

QR03B-GZ
QY03B-GZ

QR4BO-HM

QR4BO-GZ
QY4BO-GZ

QYBOI-GZ
QYB30-GZ

QY830-H5

QY540-HM

QY540-GZ

QY52B-HM

QYB07-GZ
QY52B-GZ

QY519-GZ

QY715-HM
r\T,1.,

TT"

QY716-HM

QJB13-H3

QYB03-H3

QJB13-H5

QY66B-H5
QYB03-H5

Documentation
Only

QY715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ713-GZ
QY716-GZ

QP230-HM

QP230-GZ

QJB13-HM

QJB13-GZ

QR435-HM

QR435-GZ

QY66B-HM

QY66B-GZ
QYB03-GZ

QY100-HM

QY100-GZ

QA609-CM

QA609-GZ

QY12B-GZ
QYB06-GZ

QYBI0-H3

QYBI0-GZ

QA609-C3

QY12B-H5
QYB06-H5

QY12B-HM

QYB06-H3

QY232-H5

QY232-HM

QYB04-H3

QYB04-H5

QY233-H5
QYBll-H3

QYB11-H5

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QY004-UZ

QY004-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QY004-H5

QP602-UZ
QYB12-UZ

QYB12-H3

QY232-GZ
QYB04-GZ

QY233-HM

QY233-GZ
QYBll-GZ

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-HM

QP602-GZ
QYB12-GZ

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 RD.54·based BA2l3 Standard System

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH.183QS·AA

Includes MicroPDP·ll/83 CPU
with FPA, 2-Mbyte (MSV11-JE)
PMI memory, (1) RD54
159-Mbyte disk drive, RQDX3
disk controller, TK50 95-Mbyte
tape drive and tape controller,
CXY08, BA213 floorstand
enclosure, US 120-V power cord,
and English-language
documentation and diagnostics,
120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

DH·183QS·A2

Same as DH-183Q5-AA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately, 120 V

DH.183QS·A3

Same as DH-183Q5-AA except
240 V, and does not include a
240-V power cord, diagnostics,
or documentation - see
Steps 2 and 4 to order separately,
240V

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN20E·2E
BN20D·2E
BN2OF·2E
BN2OC·2E

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN20H·2E
BN20J.2E
BN20B·IK
BN20L·2E
BN20A·IK

UK/Ire1and - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy- 220 V @6A
]apan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QYSOO·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628·UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642.UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS

Choose one. - AA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal, a BC16E-10
serial-line cable, with 1 H8571-A 25-pin
cable adapter, and 8 modem/data serial
lines (modem control) on the CXY08.
RT -11 and CTS-300 are not supported on
Standard Systems due to lack of CXY08
support.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 9O-day limited
warranty.
Referto Table 1.7 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating system.
Not all hardware options are supported by
all operating systems.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution device
that is selected. Refer to Table 1.8.

Systems 1.31

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 RD.54·based BA2l3 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Pmduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

lYAAS-P.5

English-language diagnostics/
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -Al and -A3. Included in
DH-183Q5-AA .

.5 Additional
Mass Storage

0 (1-2)

RD.54A-SA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

o (1-2)

RD.53A-SA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

The Base System includes (1) RD54.
Choose up to two additional disks in any
combination.

The base hardware system (Step 1) uses 5 of the 12 available bulkhead slots, leaving a total of 7 slots available for additional options. Choose up to a total
of 7 options from Steps 6-8.

6 Additional
Memory

7 Ethemet Interface

0 (1-2)

MSVll-JD

1-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

MSVll-JE

2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

DEJ,QA-SA

Ethernet interface

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. Choose one MSV11-JE or up
to two MSV 11-JD modules.

ChOOSe olJyone.
Order cable from Step 10.

0
8 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

9 Terminals

1.32

OEQNA-SA

Ethernet interface

CXA16-AA

16 serial lines, RS-423-A, no
modem control

CXB16-AA

16 serial lines, RS-422, no
modem control

CXY08-AA

8 serial lines, RS-232-C, modem
control

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (9) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables I.5 and I.6 for country variations.

Text

0
0
0
0

OL-VT320-AOL-VT320-B_
OL-VT320-C_
OL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT330-AVT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-0_
VT340-A-VT340-0_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

0
0
0
0

LA7.5-_
LA7.5X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

0
0

LN03-_
LN03S-_

250 chIs dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240 chIs dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LAl10
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LAllO, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LAllO,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer

Systems

Order cable from Step 10.

Terminals include keyboard. See Table I.6
for country variations.

See Table I.5 for country variations.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 RD54·based BA2l3 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

9 Terminals

LG01.EA

LG02·EA

The LPVll can support up to two
LGOl/LG02 printers. The -EA variation,
which includes the LPVll, is prerequisite
for the -JA variation.

LG01.JA

LG02.JA

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPVll and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPVll and cables
600-li/min text-only printer with
cable only
600-li/min text/graphics line
• impact matrix printer with cable
only

o
o

BNE3M·xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = lO-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

(Continued)

Line printers

10 Cables

Serial cables for use with the CXY08:

o
o
o

BC22D·25
BC22D·50
BC22D·AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
lOO-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one lO-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

Serial cables for use with the CXA16 and CXB16:

BC16E.10

BC16E.25

BC16E·50

11 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

0
0

Q_.GZ

12 Layered Product
License,
Media,and·
Documentation

o
o

1
1

Q_.UZ
Q_.H5

10-ft null modem MMJ serial
cable
25-ft null modem MMJ serial
cable
50-ft null modem MMJ serial
cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one lO-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571·A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

Q_.H5

TK50media/
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table
1.8. Not all operating systems and layered
products have TK50 kits. Order codes
for the license, media kits, and
documentation-only are not always
the same. Repeat Step 12 if more than 1
layered product is desired. (Refer to
Table 1.8 for appropriate part number
and SPD number.)

Q_.GZ

Single-use license
TK50media/
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Systems 1.33

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/83 RD54·based BA213 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

~ct~uon

~ct/Order Limitations or Remarks

USoftware
Services

DTK50

Q_-B;

Startup Service Levd III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
order from Steps 14 and 15.

DTK50

14 Hardware Maintenance
Services

OEMChannd
Options

Q_-7;

Startup Service Levd II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation, media/
documentation, and training

All software products must have the same
levd service.
Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.
Order media and documentation
separately at no extra charge.

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Onsite services. Choose only one type of
service agreement per system.

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Fidd Service products

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

OTK50

Q_-,3;

Sell-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

o TK50

Q_-8;

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, tdephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

consult your lc~al Field Sen'-icc office.

15 Software Maintenance
Services

1.34 Systems

o TK50

Q_-9;

DECsupport Service Agreement
- includes updates, tdephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

o TK50

Q_-I;

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with the same five digits as the part
number for the media and documentation
kit. For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-IIM-PLUS distribution on a
TK50. To verify correct service part numbers, refer to the latest Software Product
Description (SPD). (Refer to Table 1.8
for appropriate part number and
SPD number).
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/8) BA21) System Ordering Tables
Table 1. .5 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

United States
English
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finnish
Finland
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Katakana
Japan
Switzerland
French
German
Switzerland
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
French
France
Canada
English
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
New Zealand
English

LA7S

LA210

LN03

LN03S

Printer

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LA75-AB

LA2l0-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LA75-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LA75-AE

LA2l0-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LA75-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LA75-AH

LA2l0-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LA75-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LA75-A]

LA2l0-A]

LN03-A]

LN03S-A]

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LA75-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LA75-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LA75-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA2l0-AZ

Systems 1.35

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/8.3 BA21.3 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.6· Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Language

Country/
Region

English
United States
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Danish
Denmark
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
French
France
Canada
English
Spain
Spanish
Portugal
Portuguese
Australia/
English
New Zealand

VT320
StdKit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
StdKit

VT330
WPSKit

VT.340
Std Kit

VT.340
WPSKit

VT320--A

VT330--A

VT340--A

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_C

VT330-_C

VT340-_C

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_G

VT330-_G

VT340-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT320-_P
VT320--A
VT320-_S

VT320--P
VT320--A
VT320-_S

VT330-_N
VT330--P

VT340--P

VT320-_V

VT.320-_V

VT330-_S
VTl30-_V

VT340-_S
VT340-_V

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

VT340-_C
VT340-~

VT340-~

Table I. 7 • Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
••••••••• RSX.ll •••••••••

DELQA
DEQNA
CXA16
CXB16
CXY08

M+

N
yl
y
y
Y

yl
y
y
Y

Micro/ A·to·Z
RSX
N

yl
y
y
Y

yl
Y
Y
Y

RT·11

CTS·
300

Y
N
N
N

Y
N
N

RSTS/E Micro/ MPP·
RT
RSTS

MPP·
RSX

y3
yl
Y
Y
Y

y3
Y
Y
N
N

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD54
TK50
IDECnet required
2Supported for target systems, not host systems
3Supported in DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

1.36 Systems

N
Y
Y
Y

y3
Y
y2
N
N

MPP·
Micro/ DSM
RSX
·11
y3
y3
y
Y
y
Y
Y
N
Y
N

MicroPDP-l1/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 BA213 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.8 . Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Operating Systems

Li&:ense
Only

RX50

TK50

TSV05

Media/Do&:.

Do&:umentation
Only

lS.16
12.09
12.1S

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QYS21-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QYS21-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QYS21-H5

QJS21-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QYS21-GZ

lS.24
14.S3
19.12
lS.12
14.2S
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

QJ013-H3

QYS29-H5
QYSOO-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

lS.19
1S.17
lS.26
lS.20
lS.lS
lS.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

BASIC-PLUS·2
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
lS.06
14.54
lS.09

QY91S-UZ
QYS05-UZ
QY916-UZ
QYS09-UZ

BASIC-PLUS
RT-ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

COBOL-S1
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
lS.03
13.16
lS.0S

QY994-UZ
QYS02-UZ
QY993-UZ
QY80S-UZ

DATATRIEVE-ll
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.4S
lS.15
12.4S
lS.30

QY301-UZ
QYS19-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-llM
RSX-llM PLUS
RSTS/E

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ70S-UZ
QYS45-UZ
QJ706-UZ

DECmail-ll
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QYS16-UZ
QR451-UZ
QYS15-UZ

DECnet
RSX-llM - Full Node
10.75
RSX-llM - End Node
10.75
RSX-llM-PLUS - Full Node 10.66
RSX-llM-PLUS - End Node 10.66
RSX-llS - Full Node
10.74
10.74
RSX-llS - End Node
Micro/RSX-End Node Only lS.27
RT-ll
10.72
DECnet/E
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ6S7-UZ
QY692-UZ

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-11
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-11S
RT-11

SPD#

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QYS29-H3
QYSOO-H3

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QY829-GZ
QYSOO-GZ
QR430-GZ
QY628-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Produ&:ts

QYS09-H3

QY91S-H5
QYS05-H5
QY916-H5
QYS09-H5

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

QYS05-H3

QYSOS-H3

QY994-H5
QYS02-H5
QY993-H5
QYSOS-H5

QYS19-H3

QYS19-H5

QYS02-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY91S-HM
QY916-HM

QY913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QYS16-H3
QYS15-H3

QR454-H5
QYS16-H5
QR451-H5
QYS15-H5

QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5

QY766-H3
QJ6S7-H3

QY994-GZ
QYS02-GZ
QY993-GZ
QYS08-GZ

QY301-GZ
QYS19-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ70S-HM
QYS45-HM
QJ706-HM

QJ708-GZ
QYS45-GZ
QJ706-GZ

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QYS16-GZ
QR451-GZ
QYS15-GZ

QR451-HM

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM

QY766-H5
QY692-H5

QY918-GZ
QY80S-GZ
QY916-GZ
QY809-GZ

QJ6S7-HM
QY692-HM

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ687-GZ
QY692-GZ

Systems

1.37

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA213 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.8 (Continued) • Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)

SPD#

License
Only

RX50

TK50

TSV05

Media/Doc.

QY038-H5

DEC type
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.82
18.14

QR038-UZ
QP038-UZ

QY038-H3

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR480-UZ
QY480-UZ

QY480-H3

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.28
18.12

QY801-UZ
QY829-UZ

QY801-H3
QY830-H3

QY801-H5
QY830-H5

DIBOL
RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.24
18.05
14.08
14.08

QP540-UZ
QP807-UZ
QP528-UZ
QP519-UZ

QY807-H3

QY807-H5

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

FMS
RSX-llM, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RT-ll

12.27
18.34
13.17
12.22

QJ715-UZ
QP322-UZ
QJ716-UZ
QJ713-UZ

FORTRAN IV
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
RSTS/E
RT-ll, CTS-300

14.63
12.41
12.10

QP230-UZ
QR435-UZ
QY813-UZ

FORTRAN-77
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-ll

14.31
18.04
14.49
18.10
A3.55

QJ668-UZ
QP803-UZ
QRI00-UZ
QP810-UZ
QA609-DZ

Pascal
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.18
18.07

QYI28-UZ
QY806-UZ

PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.78
14.79
12.79
18.11

QY232-UZ
QY804-UZ
QY233-UZ
QY811-UZ

RTEM-ll
RSX-IIM
RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

15.63
15.63
15.63

SORT/MERGE
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.07
18.13

1.38

Systems

QR038-HM

QR038-GZ
QY038-GZ

QR480-HM

QR480-GZ
QY480-GZ

QY801-GZ
QY830-GZ

QY540-HM
QY528-HM

QJ715-HM
QY322-H3
QJ716-HM
QJ713-H3

QR435-H3
QJ813-H3

QJ813-H5

QY803-H3

QY668-H5
QY803-H5

QY540-GZ
QY807-GZ
QY528-GZ
QY519-GZ

QJ715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ716-GZ
QJ713-GZ

QP230-HM
QR435-HM
QJ813-HM

QP230-GZ
QR435-GZ
QJ813-GZ

QY668-HM

QY668-GZ
QY803-GZ
QRI00-GZ
QY810-GZ
QA609-GZ

QRI00-HM
QY810-H3
QA609-C3

Documentation
Only

QY810-H5
QA609-CM

QY128-H5
QY806-H5

QYI28-HM

QYI28-GZ
QY806-GZ

QY232-HM

QY811-H3

QY232-H5
QY804-H5
QY233-H5
QY811-H5

QY232-GZ
QY804-GZ
QY233-GZ
QY811-GZ

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QYOO4-UZ

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QY004-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QYOO4-H5

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-UZ
QY812-UZ

QP602-HM
QY812-H3

QP602-GZ
QY812-GZ

QY806-H3

QY804-H3

QY233-HM

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 RD54·Based BA123 Standard System

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Deac:ription

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH.183Q2.CA

Includes MicroPDP-11/83 CPU
with FPA, 2-Mbyte (MSVll-JE)
PM! memory, (1) RD54
159-Mbyte disk drive, RQDX3
disk controller, TK50 95-Mbyte
tape drive and tape controller,
(2) DHQlls, BA123 floorstand
enclosure, US 120-V power cord,
and English-language documentation and diagnostics, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

RT-ll and CTS-300 are not supported
on Standard Systems due to
lack of DHQ 11 support.

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

DH.183Q2.C2

Same as DH-183Q2-CA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately, 120 V

DH·183Q2·C3

Same as DH-183Q2-CA except
and does not include a240-V
power cord, diagnostics, or
documentation - see Steps 2
and 4 to order separately, 240 V

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A.2E
BN05A·2E

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BNl8L·2E
BNl8J.IK

UKfIreland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan-200V@6A
Israe1-230V@6A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628-UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642·UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSx
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/Rsx
RSTSfE
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-llS

Choose one. - CA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal, a BC22D-10
serial-line cable, and 16 modem/data
serial lines (modem control) on the
DHQlls.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finlandf Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.11 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating system.
Not all hardware options are supported by
all operating systems. Refer to the SPO for
more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distnbution device
that is selected. Refer to Table 1.12.

SYstems

1.39

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP· I 1/83 RD54·Based BAl23 Standard System
Step

Cheek Qty

Part Number

~ct~don

Product/Order Limitadons or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnosdcs and
Documentation

English-language diagnostics/
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics/
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -C2 and -C3. Included in
DH-183Q2·CA.

MSVll.JD
MSVll.JE

1-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose one MSVll-JE or two MSVll-JD
modules.

1
1

RX33A-BA
ZVA06·P3

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

Choose only one.

0 (1-2)

RDS4A-BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

1
1
1

RDS4A-BA
RX33A-BA
ZVA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

1
1

RDS4A-BA
RXSOA-BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive

0 (1-2)

RD53A-BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD53A.BA
RX33A·BA
ZVA06·P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

RDS3A.BA
RXSOA-BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive

RXSOA-BA

800-Kbyte diskette drive

TSVOS·BA/BB

CK·TSOS·ll

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600 b/in streaming-tape drive
in cabinet
Cabinet kit

DELQA·M
CK-DELQA-YA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

DEQNA.M
CK·DEQNA-KA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

S Additional
Memory

6 Additional
Mass Storage
RX33
RD54

RD54,RX50

RD53,RX33

RD53,RX50
RX50

TSV05

7 Ethernet Interface

1.40 Systems

0
0

RD54,RX33

RD53

ZVAAB·P3

1
1
1

ZVAAB·PS

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-II/83 RD54-Based BAl23 Standard System
Check Qty

8 Additional Asyncmonous
Serial Lines

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 17 serial lines, using 5 B-size distribution slots. This leaves 1
additional B-size slot in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 183QY configuration
template.

9 Terminals

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Step

DHQll.M
CK-DHQll-WA

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

DZQll-M
CK-DZQll-DA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJ1-M
CK-DLVJ1-LA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (17) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are UO V. Refer to
Tables 1.9 and 1.10 for country variations.

Text

D
D
D
D

DL-VT320-A...DL-VT320·B_
DL-VT320·C_
DL-VT320·F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

D
D
D
D
D
D

VT330·A...VT330·B_
VT330·C_
VT330·D_
VT340·A...VT340·D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

D
D
D
D

LA75·_
LA75X·SF
LA210._'_
LA21X·BT

Hardcopy output-only printers are not
suitable as console terminals.

LA21X·SF

LA21X·SH

D
D
D

LN03·_
LN03S·_
LG31·A2

LG31·A3

LGK31._

250 chIs dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240 chIs dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-li/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U. S.
version
300-li/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3

LG01·BA

LG02·BA

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPVll and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPV11 and cables

Includes the printer, controller module,
and all cables and accessories needed for
installation.

Line printers

Terminals include keyboard. See Table
1.10 for country variations.

See Table 1. 9 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Systems 1.41

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 RD54-Based BAl23 Standard System
Step

Cheek Qty

Part Number

Product Description

10 Environmental
Power Products

H7229-AD

Standby uninterruptable
power system
(1,440 VA, 1,050 W)

11 Cables

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5 ft.
-10 = 10 ft.
-20 = 20 ft.
-40 = 40ft.

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LA and CK-DZQll-DA):

o
o
o

BC22D-2S
BC22D-SO
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WA):

BC16E-2S
BC16E-SO

25 -ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each BC16E cable ordered
above.

12 Operating
System

Q_-H3

Media and

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table I.12.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 1.12
for appropriate part number .and
SPD number.)

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50 medial
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Q_-HS

Documentation

13 Layered Product
License,

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

0
0

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Media, and
Documentation

1.42

Systems

Q_-HS

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/83 RD,54·Based BAl23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Ptoduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

14 Software
Services

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-B.3
Q_-B.s

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation,
media/documentation, and
training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year hardware warranty,
choose one type of service per system.

DRX50
DTK50

15 Hardware Maintenance
Services

Q_-7.3
Q_-7.s

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.
OEM Channel
Options

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

Partnersbip

16 Software Maintenance
Services

o RX50
o TK50
o TSV05

Q_-.3.3
Q_-.3.s
Q_-.3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

o TK50
o TSV05

DRX50

Q_-S.3
Q_-S.s
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

o RX50
o TK50
o TSV05

Q_-9.3
Q_-9.s
Q_-9M

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

DRX50
TK50
TSV05

Q_-I.3
Q_-I.s
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

o
o

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RXS-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify correct service part numbers,
refer to the latest Software Product
Description (SPD). (Refer to Table 1.12
for appropriate part number and SPD
number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.43

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA123 System Building Block

Configuration Rules

The MicroPDP-ll/83 BA123 enclosure uses a 460-watt power supply that consists of two regulators. Regulator "A" supplies power for slots 1,3,5, 7, 9, and
11 and mass-storage shelves 3,4, and 5. Regulator "B" supplies power for slots
2,4,6,8, 10 and 12 and mass-storage shelves 1 and 2. When configuring the
BA123 caster-mounted enclosure:
• Use the 12-s10t configuration template for the system building blocks. Write
the module and mass-storage device names in the left column beside the slot
and shelf numbers. When configuring these systems, please note that quadheight modules use both the "AB" and "CD" portions of a slot.
• Slots 1 through 4 are limited to either one dual- or one quad-height Q-bus
option.
• Slots 5 through 12 can accommodate either two dual-height or one quad-height
options.
• Enter the 5 V and 12 V currents, power, the ac and de bus loads and I/O panel
inserts required for each module and mass-storage device. Be sure that you enter the power for each option in the columns of the appropriate regulator. The
column totals must not exceed the limits listed at the bottom.
• Due to start-up current limitations in the BA123 power supply, if an RD54 disk
drive is connected to the same 12-volt power supply regulator as another RDtype disk drive, then only five of the seven amperes provided by that regulator
can be used for powering the two disks and any additional options.

1.44

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA123 System Building Block

Configuration Template for l83QB
MicroPDP.ll/83 System Building Block
Regulator A
SLOT MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 AB
CD
4 AB
CD
S AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD
9 AB
CD
10 AB
CD
11 AB
CD
12 AB
CD
13 AB
CD

Curren (Amps)
SVdc
12 Vdc
5.5

signal
dist.

0.2

.52

Regulator B
Power
(Watts)

Curren (Amps)
SVdc
12Vdc

Power
(Watts)

29.9

I/O Inserts

Loads

2.3
2.5

1.0
0.5

1
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0

2.60

Mass-storage
SheHDevice

Sr--------+------r------r----~
4

3r--------+------r------r----~

2r-______~
1 '----------+'-

Total these
columns:
WithRD54
must not
exceed

36A

230W

36A

230W

Without RD54
must not
exceed

36A

230W

36A

230W

Systems 1.45

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BAl23 System Building Block

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 4, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

183QB.D2

Includes MicroPDP.11/83 CPU
with FPA, 2·Mbyte (MSV11·JE)
PM! memory, BA123 £loorstand
enclosure, and US 120·V power
cord. Does not include diagnos·
tics or user documentation. See
Step 4 to order separately, 120 V

Each system includes one·year onsite
warranty.

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software System

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (internal)
RX33

RD54, TK50

1.46

Systems

183QB.D3

Same as 183QB-D2 except does
not include a 240-V power cord see Step 2 to order separately,
240 V

Choose one. - D2 recommended for'US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal and a BC22D10 serial-line cable.

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BNOSA·2E

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·1K
BN18L·2E
BN18J.1K

uK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A'
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @6A
Japan - 200 V@6A
Israel-230 V@6A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4·UZ
QY821.UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430.UZ
QY628.UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642.UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

1
1
1

RX33A.BA
RQDX3·BA
ZVA06·P3

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

Choose only one combination.

D (1-3)

RDS4A.BA
RQDX3·BA
TKSO·AA
TQKSO.BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Refer to Table I.11 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table I. 12 .

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-Il/83 BAl23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

4 Integrated Mass Storage
(internal) (Continued)

1
1
1
1

RDS4A·BA
RX3)A·BA
RQDX3·BA
lYA06·P3

159·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDjRX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

D (1-2)

RDS4A.BA
RQDD·BA
RXSOA·BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RDjRX controller
800.Kbyte diskette drive

1
1
1

RDS4A·BA
RX3)A·BA
RQDX3.BA
lYA06·P3

1
1

TKSO·AA
TQIGO.BA

159-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDjRX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit
95·Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

D (1-2)

RDS4A·BA
RXSOA·BA
RQDX3·BA
TKSO·AA
TQIGO-BA

159·Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RDjRX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1

RDS3A·BA
RQDX3·BA
TKSO·AA
TQIGO·BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RDjRX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RDS3A·BA
RX33A·BA
RQDX3·BA
lYA06·P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDjRX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

D (1-2)

RD53A.BA
RQDX3·BA
RX50A·BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RDjRX controller
800·Kbyte diskette drive

1
1
1

RD53A·BA
RX33A·BA
RQDX3·BA
lYA06·P3

1
1

TIGO·AA
TQIGO-BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

D (1-2)

RD53A-BA
RX50A-BA
RQDX3-BA
TIGO·AA
TQIGO-BA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RDjRX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

RD54,RX33

1
1

RD54,RX50

D (1-2)

RD54,RX33,
TK50

1
1
1
1

RD54,RX50
TK50

D (1-3)
RD53, TK50

D
RD53,RX33

1
1

RD53,RX50

D (1-2)

RD53,RX33
TK50

1
1
1
1

RD53,RX50
TK50

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 5 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
5 Diagnostics and
Documentation

6 Additional
Memory

lYAAB-P3

lYAAB-P5

D
D

1-2
1

MSVll-JD
MSVll.JE

English-language diagnostics!
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics!
documentation on TK50 media

1-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose one MSVll-JE or up to two
MSV11-JD additional memory modules.

Systems 1.47

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus·Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BAl23 System Bunding Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Pmduct Description

Pmduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

7 Ethernet Interface

1
1

DELQA-M
CK-DELQA-YA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DEQNA-M
CK-DEQNA-KA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Asynchronous Serial Lines

9 Terminals

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll-AA

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 11.
DHQll is not supported by RT-ll and
CTS-300.

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll-WA

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to five if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 11.
DHQll is not supported by RT-ll and
CTS-300.

DZQll-M
CK.DZQll.DA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJl.M
CK·DL VJl-LA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected
Select cable from Step 11.

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (17) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables I. 9 and 1.10 for country variations.

Text

0
0
0
0

DL-VT320-A-DL· VT320-B_
DL. VT320-C_
DL· VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT330-A-VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-A-VT340-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

0
0
0
0

LA75-_
LA75X.SF
LA210-_
LA21X·BT

See Table I. 9 for country variations.

LA21X·SF

LA21X·SH

0
0
0

LN03·_
LN03S·_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

0
0

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O, A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

LGOl-BA

LG02-BA

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPVll and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPVll and cables

Includes the printer, controller module,
and all cables and accessories needed
for installation.

Line printers

1.48

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 1 serial line, using 1 B-size distribution slot. This leaves 5 additional
B-size slots in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 183QB configuration template.

Systems

Terminals include keyboard. See Table
1.10 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/83 BAl23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

10 Environmental
Power Product

H7229·AD

Standby uninterruptable power
system (1,440 VA, 1,050 W)

11 Cables

D
D

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5 ft.
-10 = 10 ft.
-20 = 20 ft.
-40 = 40 ft.

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LA, CK-DHQll-AA, and CK-DZQll-DA):

BC22D·25
BC22D·50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WA):

12 Operating System

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571·A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75- type printer
selected in Step 9.

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table 1.12.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, ,and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 1.12 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Media and
Documentation

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

13 Layered Product
License,

D
D

Q_·UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

Q_-HM

Media, and
Documentation

Q_-GZ

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-B3
Q_-B5

14 Software
Services

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-7,3

CJ--75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation,
media/documentation, and
training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

Systems 1.49

MicroPDP.ll/83 Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP· I 1/83 BAl23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Produet/Order Limitations or Remarks

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-3'
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0
0
0

Q_-83
Q_-8'
Q_-8M

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and .online access to a
service database (for most

RX50
TK50
TSV05

produc.t~)

1.50

Systems

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-9'
Q_-9M

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most products)

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-U
Q_oI'
Q_oIM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number
with the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-I1M-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.12 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/83 BAl23 System Ordering Tables
Table I. 9 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

English
United States
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Katakana
Japan
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Swedish
Sweden
Norwegian
Norway
France
French
English
Canada
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
English
New Zealand

LA7S

LA210

LN03

LN03S

LG31

LJ2S0

Printer

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AB

LA2l0-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK3l-AD

LJ250-AD

LA75-AE

LA2l0-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK3l-AE

LJ250-AE

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK3l-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA2l0-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK3l-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA2l0-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK3l-AA

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK3l-AA

LA75-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK3l-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LGK3S-AU

LGK31-CA

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LGK3l-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK3l-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA2l0-AZ

LJ250-AZ

Systems

1.,51

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 BA12} System Ordering Tables
Table 1.10· Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Language

Country/
Region

VT320
Std Kit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
Std Kit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
Std Kit

VT340
WPSKit

VT320--A

VT330--A

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-_C

VT330-_C

VT340--A
VT340-_B
VT340-_C

VT340--A

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_G
VT320-_H
VT320--I

VT320-_G

VT330-_G

VT340-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320--I

VT330--I

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT320--I-

VT330-~

VT340--I
VT340-_K
VT340-_L

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_N

VT330-_N

VT340-_N

VT330-~

VT340-_C

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320--A
VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT330-_S
VT330-_V

VT340-_S
VT340-_V

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

VT340-~

Table 1.11 . Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
••••••••• RSX. fl·········

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLVJl
TSV05

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

M+

N
yl

y4
yl

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y'
Y'
Y

CTS·

MPP·
Micro/ DSM
RSX
·11

RT·ll

MPP·
RSX

A-to·Z

RSTS/E Micro/ MPP·
RSTS
RT

Micro/
RSX

300

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD53
RD54
RX50
RX33
TK50
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Multiple DLVJ1s are not supported
'Supported for target systems, not host systems
4Supported in DEQNA mode only.
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

1•.52

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP· 1 1/83 BA123 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.12 . Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Note: The SPD number is provided for additional reference.
Operating Systems

License
Only

RXSO
Media/Doc.

TK50

TSV05

Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

IS.16
12.09
12.1S

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QYS21-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QY821-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QYS21-H5

QYS21-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QYS21-GZ

lS.24
14.S3
19.12
18.12
14.2S
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

QJ013-H3

QY829-H5
QYSOO-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

18.19
lS.17
18.26
lS.20
lS.1S
lS.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

BASIC-PLUS-2
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
lS.06
14.54
lS.09

QY918-UZ
QYS05-UZ
QY916-UZ
QYS09-UZ

BASIC-PLUS
RT·ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

COBOL-Sl
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
lS.03
13.16
lS.0S

QY994-UZ
QYS02-UZ
QY993-UZ
QYSOS-UZ

DATATRIEVE-ll
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.48
lS.15
12.4S
18.30

QY301-UZ
QYS19-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSTS/E

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ70S-UZ
QYS45-UZ
QJ706-UZ

DECmail-ll
RSX-llM·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QYS16-UZ
QR451-UZ
QYS15-UZ

DECnet
RSX-llM-Full Node
RSX-llM-End Node
RSX-llM-PLUS-Full Node
RSX-llM-PLUS-End Node
RSX-llS-Full Node
RSX-llS-End Node
Micro/RSX-End Node only
RT-11
DECnet/E

10.75
10.75
10.66
10.66
10.74
10.74
lS.27
10.72
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ687-UZ
QY692-UZ

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-IIM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

SPD#

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QY829-H3
QY800-H3

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QYS29-GZ
QYSOO-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ62S-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Products

QY809-H3

QY91S-H5
QYS05-H5
QY916-H5
QY809-H5

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

QY805-H3

QY80S-H3

QY994-H5
QYS02-H5
QY993-H5
QYS08-H5

QY819-H3

QYS19-H5

QY802-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY918-HM
QY916-HM

QY913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QY816-H3
QY815-H3

QR454-H5
QY816-H5
QR451-H5
QYS15-H5

QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QY766-H3
QJ687-H3

QY994-GZ
QYS02-GZ
QY993-GZ
QYSOS-GZ
QY301-GZ
QYSI9-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ708-HM
QYS45-HM
QJ706-HM

QJ70S-GZ
QYS45-GZ
QJ706-GZ

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QYS16-GZ
QR451-GZ
QYS15-GZ

QR451-HM

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM

QY766-H5
QY692-H5

QY91S-GZ
QYS05-GZ
QY916-GZ
QY809-GZ

QJ687-HM
QY692-HM

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ687-GZ
QY692-GZ

Systems 1.53

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q;.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 BA123 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.12 (Continued) - Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
SPD#

License
Only

RXSO
Media/Doc.

TKSO
Media/Doc.

DECtype
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.B2
1B.14

QR03B-UZ
QP03B-UZ

QY03B-H3

QY03B-H5

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR4BO-UZ
QY4BO-UZ

QY4BO-H3

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.2B
1B.12

QYBOO-UZ
QYB29-UZ

QYB01-H3
QYB30-H3

QYB01-H5
QYB30-H5

mBOL
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.24
1B.05
14.0B
14.0B

QP540-UZ
QPB07-UZ
QP52B-UZ
QP519-UZ

QYB07-H3

QYB07-H5

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

Layered Products
(Continued)

FMS
RSX-11M, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E

RT-ll
FORTRAN IV
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
RSTS/E
RT-ll

12.27
13.17
12.22

QJ715-UZ
QP322-UZ
QJ716-UZ
QJ713-UZ

14.63
12.41
12.10

QP230-UZ
QR435-UZ
QYB13-UZ

14.31

1B.34

FORTRAN-77
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-ll

1B.10
A3.55

QJ668-UZ
QP803-UZ
QR100-UZ
QPB10-UZ
QA609-DZ

Pascal
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.1B
1B.07

QY12B-UZ
QYB06-UZ

12.7B

1B.11

QY232-UZ
QYB04-UZ
QY233-UZ
QYB11-UZ

RTEM-11
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

15.63
15.63
15.63

SORT/MERGE
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.07
1B.13

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

1.;4 Systems

1B.04

14.49

14.79
12.79

TSVOS
Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

QR03B-HM

QR03B-GZ
QY03B-GZ

QR4BO-HM

QR4BO-GZ
QY4BO-GZ

QYB01-GZ
QYB30-GZ

QY540-HM

QY540-GZ

QY52B-HM

QYB07-GZ
QY52B-GZ

QY519-GZ

QJ715-HM
QY322-H3
QJ716-HM
QJ713-H3

QR435-H3
QJ813-H3

QJB13-H5

QYB03-H3

QY668-H5
QYB03-H5

QP230-HM
QR435-HM
QJ813-HM

QP230-GZ
QR435-GZ
QJ813-GZ

QY668-HM

QY66B-GZ
QYB03-GZ

QR100-HM
QYB10-H3
QA609-C3

QJ715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ716-GZ
QJ713-GZ

QYB10-H5

QR100-GZ
QYB10-GZ

QA609-CM

QA609-GZ

QY12B-H5
QYB06-H5

QY12B-HM

QY12B-GZ
QYB06-GZ

QY232-HM

QYBll-H3

QY232-H5
QYB04-H5
QY233-H5
QY811-H5

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QY004-UZ

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QY004-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QY004-H5

QP602-UZ
QYB12-UZ

QYB12-H3

QYB06-H3

QYB04-H3

QY232-GZ
QYB04-GZ

QY233-HM

QY233-GZ
QYB11-GZ

QP602-HM

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-GZ
QYB12-GZ

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
Mic:roPDP.ll/83 Cabinet Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH·18.3Q.3.BA

Includes MicroPDP-11/83 CPU
with FPA, 2-Mbyte (MSVll-JE)
PM! memory, RA81456-Mbyte
disk drive, KDA50 disk controller, TK50 95-Mbyte tape drive
and tape controller, (2) DHQlls,
H9642-style (-JA/JB) cabinet
w/dual BA23 boxes, US 120-V
power cord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

.3 Base Software
System

DH.18.3Q.3.B2

Same as DH-183Q3-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation
- see Step 4 to order separately,
120 V

DH.18.3Q.3.B.3

Same as DH-183Q3-BA except
does not include a 240-V power
cord, diagnostics, or
documentation - see Steps 2 and
4 to order separately, 120 V

0
0

BN18B·4E
BN18C·4E

BN18D·4E

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

BN18E·4E
BN18C·4E
BN18p·4E
BN18H·4E
BN18T·4E
BN18p·4E
BN18T·4E

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 13 A
Central European - 220 V
@16A
AustraliajNew Zealand 240/230 V @ 15 A
Italy - 220 V @ 16 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 16 A
Israel - 230 V @ 16 A
India - 220 V @ 15 A
Japan - 200 V @ 12 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 16 A
US- 208V@12A

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY4.30·UZ
QY628·UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642·UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTSjE
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-llS

Choose one. - BA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal, a BC22D-10
serial-line cable, and 16 modem/data
serial lines (modem control) on the
DHQlls.
RT-ll and CTS-300 are not supported on
Standard Systems due to lack of DHQll
support.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.15 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.16.

Systems 1.55

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
D

ZVAAE·P3

ZVAAE·P5

5 Additional
Memory

D
D

1
1

6 Additional
Mass Storage

4 Diagnostics
and Documentation

English.language diagnostics/
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics/
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -B2 and -B3. Included in
DH-183Q3-BA.

MSVll.JD
MSVll·JE

1-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose only one.

1
1
1

RA81-HA/HD
H9544·CF
BC26V·6D

456-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
Top trim kit
6-ft cable

Choose only one.

1
1
1

RA60-AF
H9544·CD
BC26V·6D

205-Mbyte removable-disk drive
Top trim kit
6-ftcable

TSVOj·ZA/ZB

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive

TSVOj·ZA/ZB

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive
205-Mbyte removable-disk drive
in cabinet

RA60.CA/CD

RX33A·AA

RX33A·AB
1

7 Ethernet
Interface

Systems

The RA60 or TSV05 should be mounted in
the top slot of the CPU cabinet.

If both the RA60 and TSV05 are desired, a
separate cabinet is required for the RA60
(RA60-CA/CD) .

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
(first drive)
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
(second drive)
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

Can have up to two RX33s.

Choose up to two. Requires an RQDX3-AA
controller. If two are selected, then
an RQDXE-FA is required.

Requires an RQDX3-AA controller.

RD54A·AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RD53A-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

RX50A·AA

800-Kbyte diskette drive

Choose one only if no RX33s are selected.
Requires an RQDX3-AA controller.

RQDX3-AA

RD/RX controller

Choose only one.

RQDXE-FA

RQDX3 extender module

Choose one if RD or RX drives are in
second BA23 box.

DELQA-M
CK.DELQA.YF

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from step 10.

DEQNA.M
CK-DEQNA-KF

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

1.56

ZVA06·P3

Note that the RA81 and TSV05 have one
order number for 120 V and one for
240 V. The RA60 has one order number
for both 120 V and 240 V.

1
1

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 Cabinet Standard System

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Step

Check Qty

8 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 17 serial lines, using 7 B-size distribution slots. This leaves 4
additional B-size slots in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 183QE configuration
template.

9 Terminals

Part Number

Product Description

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll.AF

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead.

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.

DHQll-M
CK.DHQll-WF

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS·423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to four if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.

DZQll-M
CK.DZQll·DF

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJ1.M
CK-DLVJl.LF

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA 75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (17) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.13 and 1.14 for country variations.

Text

o
o
o
o

DL-VT320-LDL· VT320-B_
DL· VT320-C_
DL· VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

o
o
o
o
o
o

VT330-LVT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-LVT340·D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

o
o
o
o

LA75-_
LA75X·SF
LA2l0-_
LA21X·BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X·SH

LN03-_
LN03S._
LG3l-A2

LG3l·A3

o
o

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single·tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

LG01-BA

LG02-BA

Line printers

Choose up to two if no other options are
selected. Select cable from Step 10.

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPVll and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPV11 and cables

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.14
for country variations.

See Table 1.13 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-US LG31-A3 selected.

Includes the printer, controller module,
and all cables and accessories needed for
installation.

Systems 1.;7

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product·Desc:ription

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

10 Cables

o
o

BNE)M·:xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJI-LF, CK-DHQll-AF, and CK-DZQll-DF):

BC22D-25
BC22D·50
BC22D.AO

o
o

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WF):

0
0

BC16E.25
BC16E·50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
induded in Step I).

HS571.A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

Choose desired order codes from Table
I.16. Not all operating systems and
layered products have RX50, TK50, and
TSV05 kits. Order codes for the license,
media kits, and documentation-only are
not always the same. (Refer to Table I. 16
for appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

11 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1

Q_-H.3
Q_.H5
Q_-HM
Q_-GZ

RX50 media/documentation kit
TK50 media/documentation kit
TSV05 media/documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

12 Layered
Product
License,
Media, and
Documentation

0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3
Q_-H5
Q_-HM
Q_-GZ

Single-use license
RX50 media/documentation kit
TK50 media/documentation kit
TSV05 media/documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

1.3 Software

ORX50
OTK50

Q_-B.3
Q_-B5

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport, DECstart
PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
orderfrom Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, media/documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

Services

ORX50
OTK50

Q_.7.3
Q_.7,S

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

1.58

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 Cabinet Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Produet/Order Limitations or Remarks

14 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to 7
days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

OEM
Sales Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

Partnership

15 Software Maintenance
Services

DRX50
DTK50
o TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-l5
Q_-3M

Self·Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

DRX50
DTK50
o TSV05

Q_-83
Q_-8S
Q_-8M

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

DRX50
DTK50
o TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-9S
Q_-9M

DEC support Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

DRX50
DTK50
o TSV05

Q_-I3
Q_-IS
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number
with the same five digits as the part
number for the media and documentation
kit. For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.16 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.59

MicroPDP.l1/83 Q-busMultiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block

Configuration Rules for 183QE
System Building Block

The cabinet enclosure houses two BA23 chassis that include two eight-slot
backplanes for a total offering of fourteen backplane slots (two slots are reserved for cable management), two 230-watt power supplies, two control panels, one large I/O distribution panel, four fans, and space for four 5.25-inch
storage devices and two 13-inch storage devices. Use the following rules when
configuring the cabinet enclosure.
• The PMI memory module is installed in slot 1 of the upper BA23 frame.
• Additional PMI memory and the CPU module installed in slots 2 and 3 of the
upper BA23 frame.
• The M9404 interconnect module is installed in the last slot of the upper BA23
frame which has the grant signal.

• If other dual-height modules are installed in slots 2 or 3 of either BA23 frame,
they must be placed in the AB rows. No grant continuity card is necessary in
the CD rows of slot rows 1,2, or 3 of either BA23 frame.

• If a RQDX3 disk controller is present, it must be installed in the upper BA23
frame.
• Dual-height modules installed in slots 4-8 can be located in either the AB or CD
rows. The opposite row must contain either another dual-height module or an
M9047 grant continuity card.

• If a TSV05 tape controller is present, it must be installed in slot 4 of the upper
BA23 frame.

• If a TK50 tape controller and drive is present, it must be installed in the lower
BA23 frame. A second TK50 tape controller and drive may be installed in the
upper BA23 frame.
183QE Configuration Template
Upper BA23 Chassis

SLOT MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 ABCD
4 AB
CD
5 AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD

MSVll-JE
KDJll-BF

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ae
de

I/O Inserts
B
A

4.1
5.5

0
0.2

8.5
29.9

2.5
2.3

0.5
1.0

0
1

- --

- - - - - - - - - - M9404-

- - - -

- - -

- -- - - - - --

- -- - --

- --

- -- - - -

- -- - --

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

1.60

Systems

- - - -

Mass-storase
Shelf Device
1
2

Current (Amps)
12Vde
5 Vde

36A

230W

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Bunding Block

Lower BA23 Chassis

SLOT MODULE
1 AB
CD
2 AB
CD
3 AB
CD
4 AB
CD
S AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD

-M9405-YB
- --

Current (Amps)
SVdc
12Vdc
0.5

Power
(Watts)
2.5

Bus Loads
ac
dc

I/O Inserts
B
A

- - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1 - - 2 - -- -

- -- - -- - -- -- - -- - --

- - - - --

--- - --

-- -- -- - --

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

36A

230W

11*

*Both Upper and Lower Chassis share the same I/O inserts as listed in the Lower BA23 Chassis.

Systems 1.61

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 "Base Hardware System

183QE-D2

Includes MicroPDP-ll/83 CPU
with FPA, 2-Mbyte (MSVll-JE)
PM! memory, asynchronous console serial line on the CPU module, BC22D-10 serial-line cable,
H9642-style (-JA/JB) cabinet w/
dual BA23 boxes, and a US 120V power cord. Does not include
diagnostics or user documentation - see Step 5 to order
separately, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
warranty.

2 Power Cords

183QE-D3

Same as above, except does
not include a 240-V power
cord - see Step 2 to order
separately, 240 V

0
0
0

1
1
1

BN18B·4E
BN18C·4E
BN18D·4E

Choose one power cord.

0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

BN18E·4E
BN18C·4E
BN18p·4E
BN18H·4E
BN18T·4E
BN18p·4E
BN18T·4E

UKjIreland - 240 V @ 13 A
Central European - 220 V @ 16 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @.15 A
Italy - 220 V@ 16 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 16 A
Israel- 230 V@ 16 A
India - 220 V@ 15 A
Japan -200V@ 12A
Denmark - 220 V @ 16 A
US - 208 V @ 12 A

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3.54·UZ
QY821·UZ
QY029.UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029.UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430.UZ
QY628·UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642.UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

1
1
1
1

RA60-AF
H9544·CD
BC26V·6D
KDA50.QA

205-Mbyte removable-disk drive
Top trim kit
6-ft cable
RA60 disk controller

3 Base Software System

4 Integrated
Mass Storage
(internal)
RA60

1.62

Systems

Choose one. - D2 recommended for US.

Central European countries include Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Finland,
Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,
and Sweden.

Refer to Table 1. 15-for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.16.

Choose only one combination from the
first seven combinations. These combinations are to be integrated into the top and
bottom slots of the CPU cabinet.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (Continued)
RA81

1
1
1

RA81.HA/HD
BC26V·6D
KDASO·QA

456·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
6·ft cable
RA81 disk controller

Note that the RA81 and TSV05 have one
order number for 120 V and one for 240
V. The RA60 has one order number for
120 V and 240 V.

1
1
1
2
1

RA60·AF
H9S44·CD
RA81.HA/HD
BC26V·6D
KDA50.QA

205·Mbyte removable-disk drive
Top trim kit
456-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
6·ft cable
RA60/RA81 disk controller

The RA60 should be moUnted in the top
slot of the CPU cabinet.

2
1
2
1

RA81.HA/HD
H9544·CP
BC26V·6D
KDASO.QA

456·Mbyte fixed disk drive
Top trim kit
6·ft cable
RA81 disk controller

TSV05.ZA/ZB

40·Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive

The TSV05 should be mounted in the top
slot of the CPU cabinet.

TSV05·ZA/ZB

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive
205-Mbyte removable-disk drive
RA60 disk controller

If both the RA60 and TSV05 are desired, a
separate cabinet is required for the RA60
(RA60-CA/CD).

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-b/in streaming-tape drive
456-Mbyte fixed disk drive
6-ft cable
RA81 disk controller

The TSV05 should be mounted in the top
slot of the CPU cabinet.

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

Choose only one combination from the
next 25 combinations. These combinations
are to be integrated into the dual BA23
boxes that reside in the CPU cabinet.

RA60, RA81

2RA81s

TSV05

D
1
1

TSV05, RA60

TSV05,RA81

1 to 4 RX33s

TSV05.ZA/ZB
1
1
1

RA81.HA/HD
BC26V·6D
KDMO-QA

1-2
1
1
1-2
1

RX33A-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE.PA
RX33A-AB
lYA06·P3

1
1

TK.50·AA
TQIGO-AA

95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1

RX50A-AA
RQDX3.AA

800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller

1
1
1
1

RD54A.AA
RQDX3·AA
TK.50·AA
TQIGO.AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TQK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RX33A.AA
RQDX3·AA
lYA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

1
1
1
1
1

RD54A.AA
RX33A.AA
RX33A·AB
RQDX3·AA
lYA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33
formatter kit

1
1
1

RD54A.AA
RXSOA.AA
RQDX3·AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller

TK50

RX50

RD54, TK50

RD54,RX33

RD54, 2 RX33s

RD54,RX50

RA60.CA/CD
KDMO-QA

Each BA23 box supports up to two RX33s.
The -AA variation is used for the first
drive, and the -AB variation is used for the
second drive.

Systems

1.63

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (Continued)

2
1
1
1
1

RD;4A·AA
RQDX3·AA
RQDXE.FA
TIGO·AA
TQK50.AA

159·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
95·Mbyte cartridge.tape drive
TK50 controller

2
1
1
1
1

RD;4A·AA
RX33A·AA
RQDX3·AA
RQDXE.FA
ZYA06·P3

159·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2·Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

2
1
1
1
1
1

RD;4A-AA
RX33A-AA
RX33A.AB
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE.FA
ZYA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

2
1
1
1

RD;4A-AA
RX;OA-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE.FA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX.3 extender module

2
1
1
1
1
1
1

RD;4A-AA
RX33A.AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06·P3
TK50-AA
TQK50-AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

2
1
1

RD;4A·AA
RX33A-AA
RX33A.AB
RQDX3·AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06-P3
TK50·AA
TQK50·AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

RD;4A.AA
RX;OA.AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE.FA
TK50-AA
TQK50·AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

RD53A-AA
RQDX3-AA
TK50-AA
TQK50-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

RD;3A·AA
RX33A·AA
RQDX3-AA
ZYA06-P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-U RX33 formatter kit

RD53A.AA
RX33A·AA
RX33A·AB
RQDX3.AA
ZYA06-P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

2 RD54s, TK50

2 RD54s, RX33

2 RD.54s, RX50

2 RD54s, RX33,
TK50

1
1
1
2 RD54s, 2 RX33s,
TK50

1
1

2
1
1

1
2 RD54s, TK50,
RX50

1
1

1
1
1
1

RD53, TK50

1
1
1
1

RD53, RX33

1
1
1
RD53,2 RX33s

1.64

Systems

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block

Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (Continued)
RD53,RX50

1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RX50A-AA
RQDX3-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller

2
1
1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RQDD-AA
RQDXE-FA
TKSO-AA
TQIGO-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

2
1
1
1
1

RDSJA-AA
RX33A-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06-P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

2
1
1
1
1
1

RDSJA-AA
RX33A-AA
RX33A-AB
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06-P3

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

2
1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RX50A-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RDfRX controller
RQDX3 extender module

2
1
1
1
1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RX33A-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06.P3
TIGO-AA
TQIGO-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDfRX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TKSO controller

2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RXJ3A-AA
RXHA-AB
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
ZYA06·P3
TIGO-AA
TQIGO-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDfRX controller
RQDX3 extender module
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

2
1
1
1
1
1

RDS3A-AA
RX50A-AA
RQDX3-AA
RQDXE-FA
TIGO-AA
TQIGO-AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RDfRX controller
RQDX3 extender module
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

2 RD53s, TK50

2 RD53s, RX33

2 RD53s, 2 RX33s

2 RD53s, RX50

2 RD53s, RX33,
TK50

2 RD53s, 2 RX33s,
TK50

2 RD53s, TK50,
RX50

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 5 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
S Diagnostics and

ZYAAE.P3

ZYAAE.PS

0
0

1
1

MSVll-JD
MSVll.JE

Documentation

6 Additional
Memory

English-language diagnostics/
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics/
documentation on TK50 media

Choose one.

I-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory
2-Mbyte PM! ECC MOS memory

Choose only one.

Systems 1.65

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MieroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

7 Ethernet
Interface

1
1

DELQA.M
CK.DELQA.YF

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 10.

1
1

DEQNA·M
CK.DEQNA.KF

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Additional Asynchronous

Serial Lines

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 1 serial line, using 1 B·size distribution slot. This leaves 10
additional B-size slots in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 183QE configuration
template.

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll.AF

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS·232 signalling
supporting 8 25·pin connections
on the bulkhead.

Choose up to four if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.
DHQ11 is not supported by RT·11 and
CTS·300.

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll·WF

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to eight if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.
DHQ11 is not supported by RT·11 and
CTS·300.

9 Terminals

DZQll oM

4 serial lines

CK-DZQII.DP

Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS·232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJI.M
CK·DL VJI.LP

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA 75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (1) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.13 and 1.14 for country variations.

Text

0
0
0
0

DL. VT320·A-DL· VT320·B_
DL. VT320·C_
DL· VT320·P_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT330·AVT330·B_
VT330·C_
VT330·D_
VT340·AVT340·D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

0
0
0
0

LA7S·_
LA7SX.SP
LA210·_
LA2IX·BT

LA2IX·SP

LA2IX·SH

0
0
0

LN03·_
LN03S._
LG31·A2

LG31·A)

0
0

LGK3I-_
LJ2S0-_

250-ch/s dot·matrix printer
Single-tray sheet feeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single·tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 85 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31·A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

1.66 Systems

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.14
for country variations.

See Table 1.13 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.) includes
country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-US LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

9 Terminals (Continued)

LOOl-BA

Line printers

10 Cables

o
o

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

LOO2-BA

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPV11 and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPV11 and cables

Includes the printer, controller module,
and all cables and accessories needed
for installation.

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 1O-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pinconnections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LF, CK-DHQ11-AF, and CK-DZQ11·DF):

BC22D-25
BC22D·50
BC22D·AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WF):

11 Operating System

BC16E.25
BC16E·50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

HS571·A

MMJ to 25 -pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

Q_.H3

Q_·H5

Q_·HM

Q_-GZ

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table 1.16.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 1.16 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Media and
Documentation

12 Layered Product
License,

D
D

1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_·H3

Media, and
Documentation

13 Software
Services

Q_·H5

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

DRX50
OTK50

Q_-B3
Q_·B5

DRX50
OTK50

Q_-73
Q_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 media!
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
orderfrom Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, media!
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

Systems 1.67

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

14 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to 7
days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

15 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-35
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-S3
Q_-S5
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-95
Q_-9M

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

1.68

Systems

Q_-I3
Q_-I5
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-11M-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.16 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Ordering Tables
Table 1.13 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

United States
English
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
w. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Katakana
Japan
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
English
New Zealand

LA7S

LA210

LN03

LN03S

LG31

LJ2S0

Printer

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AB

LA210-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK3l-AD

LJ250-AD

LA75-AE

LA2l0-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK3l-AE

LJ250-AE

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK3l-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA21O-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK3l-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA2l0-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK3l-AA

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK3l-AA

LA75-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK3l-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LGK3l-CA

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LGK31-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK3l-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA2l0-AZ

LJ250-AZ

Systems 1.69

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.11/83 Cabinet System Ordering Tables
Table 1.14 • Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Country/
Region

Language

VT320
Std Kit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
StdKit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
Std Kit

VT340
WPS Kit

United States
Belgium
Canada

English

VT320-~

Flemish
French

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

Denmark
UK/Ireland
Finland

Danish
English

VT320-~

VT330-~

Finnish

VT320-~

W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French

VT320-_G

VT320--Y
VT320-_G

VT330--Y
VT330-_G

VT340-_F
VT340-_G
VT340-~

VT320-_C

VT330-_C

VT340-_C

VT320--D

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~
VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320---I

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320--J.

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-_L

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

Spanish
Portuguese

VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT330-_S
VT330-_V

VT340-_V

English

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

Switzerland
Sweden
Norway
France
Canada

German
Swedish
Norwegian
French
English

Spain
Portugal
Australia/
New Zealand

VT340-_C
VT340-~

VT340-_S

Table 1.1.5 • Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
••••••••• RSX-ll •••••••••

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLV] 1
TSV05

RT-11

RSTS/E Micro/ MPPRSTS
RT

MPPRSX

MPPMicro/
RSX

DSM
·11

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y

M+

Micro/ A-to·Z
RSX

N
yl

y4
yl

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

y3
y3

N
N

Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

y2
y

CTS300

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems.
RD53
RD54
RX50
RX33
TK50
RA81
RA60
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Multiple DLVJ 1s are not supported
'Supported for target systems, not host systems
4Supported in DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

1.70 Systems

MicroPDP.ll/83 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/83 Cabinet System Ordering rabies
Table 1.16 • Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Operating Systems

License
Only

RXSO
Media/Doc.

TKSO
Media/Doc.

18.16
12.09
12.18

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QY821-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QY821-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QY821-H5

18.24
14.83
19.12
18.12
14.28
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QY829-UZ
QY800-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY628-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

QJ013-H3

QY829-H5
QY800-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

18.19
18.17
18.26
18.20
18.18
18.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

BASIC-PLUS-2
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
18.06
14.54
18.09

QY918-UZ
QY805-UZ
QY916-UZ
QY809-UZ

QY809-H3

QY918-H5
QY805-H5
QY916-H5
QY809-H5

BASIC-PLUS
RT-ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

COBOL-81
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
18.03
13.16
18.08

QY994-UZ
QY802-UZ
QY993-UZ
QY808-UZ

DATATRIEVE-ll
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.48
18.15
12.48
18.30

QY301-UZ
QY819-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSTS/E

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ708-UZ
QY845-UZ
QJ706-UZ

DECmail-ll
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QY816-UZ
QR451-UZ
QY815-UZ

DEC net
RSX-llM - Full Node
10.75
RSX-llM - End Node
10.75
RSX-llM-PLUS - Full Node 10.66
RSX-llM-PLUS - End Node 10.66
RSX-llS - Full Node
10.74
RSX-llS - End Node
10.74
Micro/RSX-End Node Only 18.27
RT-ll
10.72
10.73
DECnet/E

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ687-UZ
QY692-UZ

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-11
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-11S
RT-11

SPD#

Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

QJ821-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QY821-GZ

TSVOS

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QY829-H3
QY800-H3

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QY829-GZ
QY800-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ628-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Products

QY805-H3

QY808-H3

QY994-H5
QY802-H5
QY993-H5
QY808-H5

QY819-H3

QY819·H5

QY802-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY918-HM
QY916-HM

QJ913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QY816-H3
QY815-H3

QY766-H3
QJ687-H3

QY918-GZ
QY805-GZ
QY916-GZ
QY809-GZ

QY994-GZ
QY802-GZ
QY993-GZ
QY808-GZ
QY301-GZ
QY819-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ708-HM
QY845-HM
QJ706-HM

QJ708-GZ
QY845-GZ
QJ706-GZ

QR454-H5
QY816-H5
QR451-H5
QY815-H5

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QY816-GZ
QR451-GZ
QY815-GZ

QJ764-H5
QJ765-H5
QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QJ762-H5
QJ763-H5
QY766-H5

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM

QY692-H5

QR451-HM

QJ687-HM
QY692-HM

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ687-GZ
QY692-GZ

Systems 1.71

MicroPDP-ll/83 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP -11/83 Cabinet System Ordering Tables
Table 1.16 (Continued) - Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)

SPD#

License
Only

RX50

TK50

TSV05

Media/Doc.

QY038-H5

DECtype
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.S2
lS.14

QR03S-UZ
QY03S-UZ

QY03S-H3

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR4S0-UZ
QY4S0-UZ

QY4S0-H3

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.2S
lS.12

QYSOO-UZ
QYS30-UZ

QYSOI-H3
QYS30-H3

QYSOI-H5
QYS30-H5

DrBOL
RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.24
lS.05
14.0S
14.0S

QY540-UZ
QYS07-UZ
QY52S-UZ
QY519-UZ

QYS07-H3

QYS07-H5

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

FMS
RSX-11M, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RT-11
RSTS/E

12.27
lS.34
12.22
13.17

QY715-UZ
QY322-UZ
QJ713-UZ
QY716-UZ

FORTRANrV
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
RT-11, CTS-300
RSTS/E

14.63
12.10
12.41

QP230-UZ
QYS13-UZ
QR435-UZ

FORTRAN-77
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
. RT-11

14.31
lS.04
14.49
lS.10
A3.55

QY66S-UZ
QYS03-UZ
QYlOO-UZ
QYSI0-UZ
QA609-DZ

Pascal
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.1S
lS.07

QY12S-UZ
QYS06-UZ

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger
RSX-IIM,M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.7S
14.79
12.79
lS.11

QY232-UZ
QYS04-UZ
QY233-UZ
QYS11-UZ

RTEM-11
RSX-llM
RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

15.63
15.63
15.63

SORT/MERGE
RSX-IIM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.07
lS.13

1.72

Systems

QR03S-HM

QR03S-GZ
QY03S-GZ

QR4S0-HM

QR4S0-GZ
QY4S0-GZ

QYSOI-GZ
QYS30-GZ

QY540-HM
QY52S-HM

QY715-HM

QYS03-H3

QJS13-H5

QY668-H5
QYS03-H5

QY716-HM

QP230-HM
QJS13-HM
QR435-HM

QP230-GZ
QJS13-GZ
QR435-GZ

QY66S-HM

QY66S-GZ
QYS03-GZ
QYI00-GZ
QYSI0-GZ
QA609-GZ

QYI00-HM
QYSI0-H3
QA609-C3

QY540-GZ
QYS07-GZ
QY52S-GZ
QY519-GZ

QY715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QY713-GZ
QY716-GZ

QY322-H3
QJ713-H3

QJS13-H3
QR435-H3

Documentation
Only

QA609-CM

QY128-H5
QYS06-H5

QY12S-HM

QY12S-GZ
QYS06-GZ

QY232-HM

QYSll-H3

QY232-H5
QYS04-H5
QY233-H5
QYS11-H5

QY232-GZ
QYS04-GZ
QY233-GZ
QYSll-GZ

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QY004-UZ

QY004-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QY004-H5

QP602-UZ
QYS12-UZ

QYS12-H3

QYS06-H3

QYS04-H3

QY233-HM

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-HM

QP602-GZ
QYS12-GZ

MicroPDP·ll Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 Systems

Product Description

The MicroPDP-ll/73 computer, featuring theJ-ll CPU chipset, is a powerful
midrange system that provides 70 percent of the MicroPDP-l1/83 performance
at a lower price.
The MicroPDP-ll/73 supports a wide range of realtime or multitasking applications for as many as 41 users, depending on the enclosure. There is a pedestal
enclosure designed to sit beside or under the desk. For applications that require more storage space, the system can be configured with up to 477 Mbytes
of integrated disk space in a floorstand enclosure with casters. Or with an
expander cabinet, the system can be configured with more than 1 Gbyte of
storage space.
As a member of Digital's Q-bus family of l6-bit supermicrosystems, the
MicroPDP-ll/7 3 can use a wide variety of software already written for
PDP-l1s, including operating systems, languages, application packages, and
communications software.
The MicroPDP-1l/73 also is supported by Ethernet local area networking for
low-cost, high-speed local area communications.

~vat"'nut

1_71

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser System
MicroPDP.ll/7l BA2l Standard System

Note: The selection of Steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH.l73Ql.CA

Includes MicroPDP-ll/73 CPU,
1-Mbyte (MSVll-QA) memory,
RD53 71-Mbyte disk drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, TK50
95-Mbyte tape drive and tape
controller, DHQll, BA23
pedesta1/tabletop enclosure,
US 120-V power cord, and
English-language documentation
and installation diagnostics,
120V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

DH.173Ql.C2

Same as DH-173QI-CA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately, 120 V

DH.173Ql·C3

Same as DH-173QI-CA except
240 V, and does not include a
240-V power cord, diagnostics or
documentation - see Steps 2 and
4 to order separately, 240 V

o
o
o
o

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BNOSA·2E

o
o
o

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J.IK

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800.UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628.UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642·UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS

3 Base Sohware
System

1.74

SYstems

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Choose one. - CA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal, a BC22D-10
serial-line cable, and 8 modemidata serial
lines (modem control) on the DHQll.
RT -11 and CTS-300 are not supported on
Standard Systems due to lack of DHQ11
support.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.19 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.20.

MieroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA2l Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Part Number

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 15 is optional for a functioning system.
D

ZVAA,A.P3

ZVAAA.P5

S Additional
Memory

D
D

6 Add·on

4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

Mass Storage
(eDernal)
Required Selections

Disks

Tapes

Optional for -C2 and -C3. Included in
DH-l73Ql-CA.

MSVll·QA
MSVll.QB

l-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 1 Mbyte is included in the
Base Hardware System.

BC17Y.IJ

Daisychain cable (Required if
2 external RDxx and/or RXxx
devices are selected.)

RQDXE.AA

RQDX3 extender module
(Required for addition of any
external RD/RX drives.)

The embedded RQDX3 chosen in Step 1
can support a total of four internal and
external devices, with the following device
definitions:

H9302

Rackmount kit (Required for all
external rackmount devices one kit for every 2 devices.)

RDS4·DA/DB

159-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RDS4·RA/RB

159-Mbyte rackmount-disk
drive

RDS3.DA/DB

71-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RDSJ·RA/RB

71-Mbyte rackmount·disk drive

RX.50·DA/DB

800-Kbyte tabletop-disk drive

RX.50.RA/RB

800-Kbyte rackmount-disk drive

TKSO.DA/DB
TQIGO.AB

95-Mbyte tabletop-tape drive
TK50 controller

TKSO.RA/RB
TQIGO.AB

95-Mbyte rackmount.tape drive
TK50 controller

TSVOS·BA/BB

CK.TSOS·14

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-bpi streaming-tape drive
in cabinet
Cabinet kit

1
1

DELQA-M
CK-DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

1
1

DEQNA.M
CK.DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

7 Ethernet
Interface

English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on TK50 media

RX50 = 2 devices
RX33 = 1 device
RDxx = 1 device
Choose zero, one, or two RD or RX
devices in this section, along with one
RQDXE.

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 10.

SYstems I.7S

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

8 Additional

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 9 serial lines using 3 B-size distribution slots. This leaves
1 additional B-size slot in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 173QY and 173QZ
configuration template.

Asynchronous

Serial Lines

9 Terminals

Text

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

1.76

Systems

Product Description

1
1

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll·WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

1
1

DZQll.M
CK.DZQll·DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

1
1

DLVJ1.M
CK.DLVJ1.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 10.

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (9) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Table 1.17 and 1.18 for country variations.

0
0

D
D
Text and Graphics

Part Number

D
D
D
D
D
D

DL.VT320·~

White video terminal
DL. VT320·B_ Green video terminal
DL· VT320·C_ Amber video terminal
DL-VT320·P_ WPS amber video terminal
VT330·~

VT330·B_
VT330·C_
VT330·D_
VT340·~

VT340·D_

D
D
D
D

LA75·_
LA75X.SP
LA210·_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SP

LA21X-SH

D
D
D

LN03·_
LN03S-_
LG31·A2

LG31·A3

D
D

LGK31-_
LJ250._

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.18
for country variations.

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal
250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240~ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

See Table 1.17 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-US LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

10 Cables

o
o

BNE3M·xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = lO-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK-DZQll-DB, and DHQll included in Base System):

o
o
o

BC220·2S
BC220·S0
BC220.AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

11 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

12 Layered Product
License,
Media and
Documentation

13 Software
Services

o
o

BCI6E-2S
BCI6E-SO

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8S71.A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit

Choose desired order codes from Table
1.20. Not all operating systems and
layered products have RX50, TK50, and
TSV05 kits. Order codes for the license,
media kits, and documentation-only are
not always the same. (Refer to Table 1.20
for appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Q_-H3

Q_-HS

Q_.HM

0
0

1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-HS

Q_-HM

DRX50
DTK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-BS

DRX50
DTK50

Q-_-73
Q-_-7S

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
order from Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation, medial
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

Systems 1.77

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

~ct~non

~ct/Order Limitanons or Remarks

14 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

15 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

DRX50
DTK50
D TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-35
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.

DRX50
DTK50
D TSV05

Q_-S3
Q_-S;
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

DRX50
DTK50
o TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-95
Q_-9M

DEC support Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.20 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)

DRX50
DTK50
D TSV05

1.78

Systems

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Q_-I3
Q_-I5
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q,.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.11/73 BA23 System Building Block

Configuration Rules for 173QY and
173QZ System Building Block

The BA23 pedestal or rackmount enclosure backplane has a total of eight slots.
It contains a 230-watt power supply and dedicated space for two 5.25-inch
mass-storage devices. Use the following rules when configuring the BA23
pedestal or rackmountable systems.
• Use the eight-slot configuration template for the system building blocks. Write
the module and mass-storage device names in the left column beside the slot
and shelf numbers. When configuring these systems, please note that quadheight modules use both the "AB" and "CD" portions of a slot.
• Slot 1 is always reserved for the CPU module.
• Slots 2 through 8 can accommodate either two dual-height or one quad-height
option.
• Mass-storage shelf devices can be either one full-height device (i.e., RD54,
RD53, TK50) or two half-height devices (Le. RX33, RD31, RD32) per cavity.
• Enter the 5-V and 12-V currents, power, the ac and dc bus loads, and I/O panel
inserts required for each module and mass-storage device. The column totals
must not exceed the limits listed at the bottom.

173QYand 173QZ
Configuration Template

SLOT MODULE
1 ABCD KDJII-BB
2 ABCD MSVII-QA
3 AB
- - -CD
4 AB
- - -CD
5 AB
- - -CD
6 AB
- - -CD
7 AB
-- CD
8 AB
- -- CD

Current (Amps)
5Vdc
12 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus Loads
ac
dc

I/O Inserts
B
A

5.5
2.4

29.9
12.0

2.3
2.0

1
0

0.2
0

1.0
1.0

0
0

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1 - - -2 - - --

- - - - - - - -- -- - -- - --

- -- - - - -- ---

- - - - --- - - - -

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

36A

230W

Systems 1.79

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Building Block

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

173QY.C2

Includes MicroPDP.ll/73 CPU,
1-Mbyte (MSVll-QA) memory,
asynchronous console serial line
on the CPU module, BC22D-10
serial-line cable, BA23A·AF
pedestal/tabletop enclosure, and
a US 120-V power cord. Does
not include diagnostics or user
documentation - see Step 5 to
order separately, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

1.80

Systems

173QY.C3

Same as 173QY·C2 except does
not include a 240-V power
cord - see Step 2 to order
separately, 240 V

173QZ·C2

Same as 173QY·C2 except
includes a BA23A·AR rackmount
enclosure instead of a BA23A·AF
enclosure, 120 V

173QZ·C3

Same as 173QY·C3 except
includes a BA23A·AR rackmount
enclosure instead of a BA23A·AF
enclosure, 240 V

173QY.D2

Includes MicroPDP.ll/73 CPU,
2-Mbyte (MSVll-QB) memory,
asynchronous console serial line
on the CPU module, BC22D-10
serial-line cable, BA23A·AF
pedestal/tabletop enclosure, and
a US 120-V power cord. Does
not include diagnostics or user
documentation - see Step 5 to
order separately, 120 V

173QY.D3

Same as 173QY·D2 except does
not include a 240-V power
cord - see Step 2 to order
separately, 240 V

173QZ.D2

Same as 173QY·D2 except
includes a M23A.AR rackmount
enclosure instead of a BA23A·AF
enclosure, 120 V

173QZ.D3

Same as 173QY-D3 except
includes a BA23A·AR rackmount
enclosure instead of a BA23A·AF
enclosure, 240 V

Choose one. -C2/.D2 recommended for US.

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

2 Power Cords

D
D
D
D

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BN05A·2E

3 Base Software
System

4 Integrated Mass
Storage (Internal)

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·1K
BN18L·2E
BN18J·1K

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY354·UZ
QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029.UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628·UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642·UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

1
1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RQDX3.AA
TK50·AA
TQK50.AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX Controller
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RX33A.AA
RQDX3-AA
ZYA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-11 RX33 formatter kit

1
1
1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RX33A·AA
RX33A.AB
RQDX3-AA
ZYA06·P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

1
1
1

RD54A·AA
RX50A·AA
RQDX3·AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

1
1

RD53A·AA
RQDX3·AA
TK50·AA
TQK50.AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RD53A·AA
RX33A.AA
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

71.Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2·Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

1
1
1
1
1

RD5}A·AA
RX33A·AA
RX33A·AB
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

71·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

RD54, TK50

RD54,RX33

RD54,2 RX33s

RD54,RX50

RD53, TK50

RD53, RX33

RD53, 2 RX33s

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks
Choose one power cord.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

Central European coUntries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Refer to Table 1.19 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table
1.20.

Choose only one combination.
BA23 box supports up to two RX33s
and/or two RD32s. The ·AA variation is
used for the first drive and the ·AB
variation is used for the second drive.

Systems 1.81

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.1l/73 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

4 Integrated Mass Storage
(Internal) (Continued)
RD53,RX50

1
1
1

RD53A.AA
RX.SOA.AA
RQDX3·AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

RD32A·AA

1
1
1

RQDD·AA
TK50.AA
TQIGO·AA

42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

RD32A·AA

RD32A·AB

1
1
1

RQDX3·AA
TK50.AA
TQIGO.AA

RD32A·AA

1
1
1

RX33A·AA
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06.P3

RD32A·AA

RD32A·AB

1
1
1

RX33A.AA
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

RD32A.AA

1
1
1
1

RX33A.AA
RX33A.AB
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

RD32A·AA

RD32A.AB

1
1
1
1

RX33A.AA
RX.33A.AB
RQDX3·AA
ZYA06·P3

RD32A·AA

1
1

RX50A.AA
RQDX3·AA

RD32A·AA

RD32A.AB

1
1

RX50A.AA
RQDX3·AA

RD32, TK50

2 RD32s, TK50

RD32,RX33

2 RD32s, RX33

RD32, 2 RX33s

2 RD32s, 2 RX33s

0
RD32,RX50

2 RD32s, RX50

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half·height
fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RDtRX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
1.2·Mbyte diskette drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP·ll RX33 formatter kit
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller
42-Mbyte half-height
fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte half.height
fixed-disk drive
800-Kbyte disk drive
RD/RX controller

Note: Selection from Steps 5 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
5 Diagnostics and
Documentation

1.82

Systems

ZYAAA·P3

ZYAAA·P5

English.language diagnosticsl
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnosticsl
documentation on TK50 media

Choose one.

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/7} BA2} System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

6 Additional Memory

0
0

MSVll-QA
MSVll-QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 1 Mybte is included in the C2
Base Hardware Systems and 2 Mybtes are
included in the D2 Base Hardware Systems.

7 Add-on Mass
Storqe (external)
Required Selections

BC17Y-IJ

Daisychain cable (Required if
2 external RDxx and/or RXxx
devices are selected.)

An RQDX3 supports a total of four
devices, with the following device
definitions.

RQDXE-AA

RQDX3 extender module
(Required for addition of any
external RD/RX drives.)

TQIGO-AB

TK50 controller (One required
for each TK50 selected.)

H9302

Rackmount kit (Required for all
external rackmount devices one kit for every 2 devices.)

RDS4-DA/DB

159-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RDS4-RA/RB

159-Mbyte rackmount-disk
drive

RDS3-DA/DB

71-Mbyte tabletop-disk drive

RDSJ-RA/RB

71-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive

RXSO-DA/DB

800-Kbyte tabletop-disk drive

RXSO-RA/RB

800-Kbyte rackmount-disk drive

TKSO-DA/DB

95-Mbyte tabletop-tape drive

7 Add-on Mass
Storage (external)
Disks

TKSO-RA/RB

95-Mbyte rackmount-tape drive

TSVOS-BA/BB

CK-TSOS-14

40-Mbyte industry-standard
1,600-bpi streaming-tape drive
in cabinet
Cabinet kit

1
1

DELQA·M
CK.DELQA.YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

1
1

DEQNA·M
CK.DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Etbemet
Interface

9 Additional

Asynchronous
Serial Lines

RX50 = 2 devices
RX33 = 1 device
RDxx = 1 device
Depending on what was selected in Step
4, choose zero, one, or two combinations
in this step, along with one RQDXE.

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 1 serial line, using 1 B-size distribution slot. This leaves 3 B-size slots
in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 173QY and 173QZ configuration template.

DHQll.M
CK.DHQll.AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with £u1l modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25·pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQ11 is not supported by
RT-11 and CTS-300.

DHQll.M
CK.DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 11.
DHQ11 is not supported
by RT-11 and CTS-300.

DZQll·M
CK.DZQll.DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with £u1l modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25·pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJ1.M
CK·DLVJl.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are used.
Select cable from Step 11.

Systems 1.83

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA 75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (1) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.17 and 1.18 for country variations.

Product Description

Text

0
0
0
0

DL-VT320-A.....DL-VT320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT330-A.....VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

0
0
0
0

LA7S-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

0
0
0

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

0
0

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

1.84

Part Number

Systems

VT340-~

VT340-D_

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U .S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table
1.18 for country variations.

See Table 1.17 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-US LG31-A3 selected.

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/73 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

11 Cables

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 1O-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK-DHQll-AB, and CK-DZQll-DB):

0
0
0

BC22D-2S
BC22D-SO
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

12 Operating System

0
0

BC16E-2S
BC16E-SO

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

Q_-H3

Q_-HS

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 media/
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Media and
Documentation

13 Layered Product
License,

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

0
0

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-HS

Q_-HM

Media, and
Documentation

14 Software

Services

Q_-GZ

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-B3
Q_-BS

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-73
Q_-7S

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 media/
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support,
DECstart PLUS, installation,
media/documentation,
and training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16_

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation, media{
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

Systems 1.85

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

~ct~don

~ct/Order Limitadons or Remarks

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-33
Q_-35
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-S3
Q_-85
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-95
Q_-9M

DEC support Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0 RX50
0 TK50
0 TSV05

1.86 Systems

Q_-I3
Q_-I5
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service o££ice.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.20 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/7.3 BA2.3 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.17 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country!
Region

Language

United States
English
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Katakana
Japan
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
French
France
English
Canada
Spanish
South America
Spanish
Spain
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
English
New Zealand

LA7S

LA210

LNO}

LNO}S

LG31

LJ2.50

Printer

LA75-CA

LA210-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AB

LA210-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA210-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AD

LA210-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK31-AD

LJ250-AD

LA75-AE

LA210-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK31-AE

LJ250-AE

LA75-CC

LA210-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA210-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK31-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA210-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK31~CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA210-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK31-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA210-A]

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK31-AA

LA75-CB

LA210-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA210-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA210-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM .

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA210-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA210-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA210-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA210-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK31-AA

LA75-AS

LA210-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA210-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK31-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA210-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LGK31-CA

LA75-CC

LA210-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA210-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LGK.3I-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK31-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA210-AZ

LJ250-AZ

Systems 1.87

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.11/73 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.18 . Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Country/
Region

Language

VT320
Std Kit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
StdKit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
Std Kit

VT340
WPSKit

United States
Belgium
Canada
Denmark
UK/Ireland
Finland

English
Flemish
French
Danish
English

VT320---.-A

VT330---.-A

VT340---.-A

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_C

VT320-_C
VT320---D

VT320-_G

VT330-_C
VT330-_D
VT330-_E
VT330-_F
VT330-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-_C
VT340-_D
VT340-_E
VT340-_F
VT340-_G
VT340-_H
VT340--I

VT320-_K
VT320-_L

VT320-_K
VT320---L

VT330-_K
VT330---L

VT340-_L

VT320---D
VT320-_E
VT320-_F
VT320-_G

Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
Spain
Spanish
Portugal
Portuguese
Australia/
English
New Zealand

VT320-~
VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-_C
VT340-_E

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_P

VT320-~

VT330-_P

VT340-_P

VT320---.-A
VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT320~--.-A

VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT330-_S
VT330-_V

VT340-_S
VT340-_V

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

Table 1.19 . Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
••••••.•• RSX·ll .••.•••••

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLVJl
TSV05

RSTS/E Micro/
RSTS

MPP·
RT

MPP·
RSX

MPP·
Micro/
RSX

Y
Y
Y
Y

M+

Micro/ A·to·Z
RSX

N
yl

y4
yl

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

y3
y3

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y

y2
Y

RT·11

CTS·
300

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD53
RD54
RX50
RX33
TK50
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Multiple DLVJls are not supported
3Supported for target systems, not host systems
4Supported in DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

1.88 Systems

DSM
·11
y4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.20· Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Operating Systems

SPD#

License
Only

RX.sO
Media/Doc.

TK;O
Media/Doc.

TSVO;
Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

A-to-Z Base System
CTS·300
DSM·ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-11M·PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

lS.16
12.09
12.1S

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QYS21-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QJS21-H3

QY950-H5
Q]354-H5
QYS21-H5

QJS21-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QYS21-GZ

lS.24
14.S3
19.12
lS.12
14.2S
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

A·to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

lS.19
lS.17
lS.26
lS.20
lS.lS
lS.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

BASIC·PLUS·2
RSX·llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
lS.06
14.54
lS.09

QY91S-UZ
QYS05-UZ
QY916-UZ
QYS09-UZ

BASIC·PLUS
RT·ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

COBOL-S1
RSX·llM, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
lS.03
13.16
lS.0S

QY994-UZ
QYS02-UZ
QY993-UZ
QYSOS-UZ

DATATRIEVE·ll
RSX'l1M, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.48
lS.15
12.4S
lS.30

QY301-UZ
QYS19-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX·llM
RSX·llM·PLUS
RSTSjE

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ70S-UZ

QJ70S-HM

QJ70S-GZ

QJ706-UZ

QJ706-HM

QJ706-GZ

DECmail-ll
RSX·llM·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTSjE
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QYS16-UZ
QR451-UZ
QYS15-UZ

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QYS16-GZ
QR451-GZ
QYS15-GZ

DECnet
RSX·llM - Full Node
10.75
RSX·llM - End Node
10.75
RSX·llM·PLUS - Full Node 10.66
RSX·llM·PLUS - End Node 10.66
RSX·llS - Full Node
10.74
RSX·llS - End Node
10.74
Micro/RSX-End Node Only lS.27
RT-ll
10.72
DECnet/E
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ6S7-UZ
QY692-UZ

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QYS29-H3
QYSOO-H3

QJ013-H3

QYS29-H5
QYSOO-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QYS29-GZ
QYSOO-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ62S-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Products

QYS09-H3

QY91S-H5
QYS05-H5
QY916-H5
QYS09-H5

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

QYS05-H3

QYSOS-H3

QY994-H5
QYS02-H5
QY993-H5
QYSOS-H5

QYS19-H3

QYS19-H5

QYS02-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY91S-HM
QY916-HM

QJ913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QYS16-H3
QYS15-H3

QY766-H3
QJ6S7-H3

QR454-H5
QYS16-H5
QR451-H5
QYS15-H5
QJ764-H5
QJ765-H5
QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QJ762-H5
QJ763-H5
QY766-H5
QY692-H5

QY91S-GZ
QYS05-GZ
QY916-GZ
QYS09-GZ

QR451-HM

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM
QJ6S7-HM
QY692-HM

QY994-GZ
QYS02-GZ
QY993-GZ
QYSOS-GZ
QY301-GZ
QYS19-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ6S7-GZ
QY692-GZ

SYstems

1.89

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.20 (Continued) • Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)

SPD#

License
Only

RX'O

TK'O

TSVO,

Media/Doc.

QY03S-H5

DECtype
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.S2
lS.14

QR03S-UZ
QY03S-UZ

QY03S-H3

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR4S0-UZ
QY4S0-UZ

QY4S0-H3

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.2S
lS.12

QYSOO-UZ
QY830-UZ

QYSOI-H3
QY830-H3

QYS01-H5
QY830-H5

DIBOL
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.24
lS.05
14.0S
14.0S

QY540-UZ
QYS07-UZ
QY52S-UZ
QY519-UZ

QY807-H3

QYS07-H5

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

FMS
RSX-llM, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RT-11
RSTS/E

12.27
lS.34
12.22
13.17

QY715-UZ
QY322-UZ
QJ713-UZ
QY716-UZ

QY322-H3
QJ713-H3

FORTRAN IV
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
RT-ll, CTS-300
RSTS/E

14.63
12.10
12.41

QP230-UZ
QYS13-UZ
QR435-UZ

QJS13-H3

QJ813-H5

FORTRAN-77
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-ll

14.31
lS.04
14.49
lS.10
A3.55

QY66S-UZ
QY803-UZ
QY100-UZ
QY810-UZ
QA609-DZ

QYS03-H3

QY66S-H5
QYS03-H5

QYS10-H3
QA609-C3

Pascal
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.1S
lS.07

QY12S-UZ
QYS06-UZ

QY806-H3

PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.7S
14.79
12.79
lS.11

QY232-UZ
QYS04-UZ
QY233-UZ
QYSll-UZ

RTEM·ll
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

15.63
15.63
15.63

SORT/MERGE
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.07
lS.13

1.90

Svstems

Documentation
Only

QR03S-HM

QR03S-GZ
QY03S-GZ

QR4S0-HM

QR4S0-GZ
QY4S0-GZ

QYSOI-GZ
QYS30-GZ

QY540-HM
QY52S-HM

QY715-HM

QY540-GZ
QYS07-GZ
QY52S-GZ
QY519-GZ

QY716-HM

QY715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ713-GZ
QY716-GZ

QP230-HM
QJS13-HM
QR435-HM

QP230-GZ
QJS13-GZ
QR435-GZ

QY668-HM

QY668-GZ
QYS03-GZ
QY100-GZ
QYS10-GZ
QA609-GZ

QYI00-HM
QA609-CM

QY128-H5
QY806-H5

QYI2S-HM

QYI2S-GZ
QYS06-GZ

QY232-HM

QY811-H3

QY232-H5
QYS04-H5
QY233-H5
QYSll-H5

QY232-GZ
QYS04-GZ
QY233-GZ
QYSll-GZ

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QYOO4-UZ

QYOO4-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QY004-H5

QP602-UZ
QYS12-UZ

QYSI2-H3

QYS04-H3

QY233-HM

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-HM

QP602-GZ
QY812-GZ

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/73 BAl23 System Building Block

Configuration Rules

The MicroPDP-11/73 BA123 enclosure uses a 460-watt power supply that consists of two regulators. Regulator "A" supplies power for slots 1,3,5, 7, 9, and
11 and mass-storage shelves 3, 4, and 5. Regulator "B" supplies power for slots
2,4,6,8, 10 and 12 and mass-storage shelves 1 and 2. When configuring the
BA123 caster-mounted enclosure:
• Use the 12-slot configuration template for the system building blocks. Write
the module and mass-storage device names in the left column beside the slot
and shelf numbers. When configuring these systems, please note that quadheight modules use both the "AB" and "CD" portions of a slot.
• Slots 1 through 4 are limited to either one dual- or one quad-height Q-bus
option.
• Slots 5 through 12 can accommodate either two dual-height or one quad-height
options.
• Enter the 5 V and 12 V currents, power, the ac and dc bus loads and I/O panel
inserts required for each module and mass-storage device. Be sure that you
enter the power for each option in the columns of the appropriate regulator.
The column totals must not exceed the limits listed at the bottom.
• Due to start-up current limitations in the BA123 power supply, if an RD54
disk drive is connected to the same 12-volt power supply regulator as another
RD-type disk drive, then only five of the seven amperes provided by that
regulator can be used for powering the two disks and any additional options.

Systems 1.91

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BAl23 System Building Block

Configuration Template for l73QB
MicroPDP.ll/73 System Building Block
Regulator A

1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 AB
CD
4 AB
CD
AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD
9 AB
CD
10 AB
CD
11 AB
CD
12 AB
CD
13 AB
CD

RegulatorB

I/O Inserts

Loads

2.3
2.0

1.0
1.0

1
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
0

signal
dist.

.52

2.60

Mass-storage
SheHDevice

,r--------+------~----~----~
4

3r--------+------~----~----~

2
1 t------,--

Total these
columns:

1.92

WithRD54
must not
exceed

36A

230W

36A

230W

Without RD54
, must not
exceed

36A

230W

36A

230W

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BAl23 System Building Block

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

173QB.C2

Includes MicroPDP-ll/73 CPU,
1 Mbyte (MSVll-QA) memory,
BA123 floorstand enclosure and
US 120-V power cord. Does not
include diagnostics or user
documentation - see step 3 to
order separately, 120 V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

173QB.C3

Same as 173QB-C2 except does
not include a 240-V power cord see Step 2 to order separately,
240 V

173QB.D2

Same as 173QB-C2 except 2
Mbytes (MSV11-QB) instead of
1 Mbyte (MSVll-QA), 120 V

173QB.D3

Same as 173QB-C3 except 2
Mbytes (MSVll-QB) instead of
1 Mbyte (MSV11-QA), 240 V

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BN05A·2E

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BN18L-2E
BN 18J· lK

UKfIreland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V@ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY354.UZ
QY821·UZ
QY029.UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029·UZ
QY829.UZ
QYSOO·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628.UZ
QY505.UZ
QY642.UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/Rsx
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/Rsx
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

D
D
0

D
D
D
D
0

3 Base Software
System

D
0

D
D
D
D
D
0

D
D
D
D

Choose one. -C2/-D2 recommended for US.
Base Hardware System includes 1 serial
line for a console terminal and a
BC22D-lO serial-line cable.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.23 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating system.
Not all hardware options are supported by
all operating systems. Refer to the SPD for
details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution device
that is selected. Refer to Table 1.24.

Systems 1.93

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/73 BAl23 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

~ct~non

~ct/Order Limitanons or Remarks

4 Integrated
Mass Storage
(Internal)

1
1
1

RX33A-BA
RQDX3·BA
lYA06.P3

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

Choose only one combination.

D (1-3)
1
1
1

RD54A-BA
RQDX3-BA
TIGO.AA
TQK50.BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
95-Mbyte cartridge-tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RD54A-BA
RX33A-BA
RQDX3-BA
ZYA06-P3

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-11 RX33 formatter kit

D (1·2)

RD54A.BA
RQDX3-BA
RX50A-BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
RD/RX controller
800-Kbyte diskette drive

RD54A-BA
RX33A·BA
RQDX3-BA
ZYA06-P3
TK50·AA
TQK50.BA

159-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDp·ll RX33 formatter kit
95-Mbyte cartridge.tape drive
TK50 controller

RD54A.BA
RX50A.BA
RQDX3-BA
TK50·AA
TQK50-BA

159-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
800·Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1

RD53A.BA
RQDX3-BA
TIGO-AA
TQK50.BA

71·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
RD/RX controller
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

1
1
1
1

RD53A.BA
RX33A.BA
RQDX3-BA
ZYA06-P3

71·Mbyte fixed·disk drive
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP·ll RX33 formatter kit

D (1·2)

RD53A.BA
RQDX3·BA
RX50A·BA

71-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
RD/RX controller
800·Kbyte diskette drive

RD53A·BA
RX33A·BA
RQDX3-BA
lYA06·P3
TK50-AA
TQK50.BA

71.Mbyte fixed-disk drive
1.2·Mbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

RD53A.BA
RX50A·BA
RQDX3-BA
TK50·AA
TQK50.BA

71-Mbyte fixed·disk drive
800-Kbyte diskette drive
RD/RX controller
95·Mbyte cartridge·tape drive
TK50 controller

RX33

RD54, TK50

D
RD54,RX33

1
1

RD54,RX50

D (1·2)
1
1
1
1
1

RD54,RX33,
TK50

D (1·2)
1
1
1
1

RD54,RX50,
TK50

D (1·3)
RD53, TK50

D
RD53, RX33

RD53,RX50

1
1

D (1·2)

RD53,RX33,
TK50

1
1
1
1
1

D (1·2)
RD53,RX50,
TK50

1.94

Systems

1
1
1
1

MicroPDP.ll/7} Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA123 System BuUding Block
Step

Check Qty

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Part Number

Note: Selection from Steps 5 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
S Diagnostics and

lYAAB·P3

lYAAB·PS

6 Additional
Memory

0
0

MSVll.QA
MSVll.QB

I-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 1 Mbyte is included in the C2
Base Hardware System and 2 Mbytes are
included in the D2 Base Hardware System.

7 Ethernet

1
1

DELQA.M
CK.DELQA.YA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 10.

1
1

DEQNA.M
CK.DEQNA-KA

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Documentation

Interface

8 Additional Asyncbl'Onous

Serial Lines

English-language diagnostics!
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics!
documentation on TK50 media

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 1 serial line, using 1 B-size distribution slot. This leaves 5
additional B-slots in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 173QB configuration
template.

DHQll.M
CK.DHQll-AA

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10. DHQll is
not supported by RT-ll and CTS-300.

DHQll.M
CK-DHQll.WA

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to five if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10. DHQll is
not supported by RT -11 and CTS-300.

DZQll.M
CK-DZQll.DA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVll·M
CK-DLVJ1-LA

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Choose up to two if no other
asynchronous options are selected.
Select cable from Step 10.

Systems 1.9;

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BAl23 System Building Block
Part Number

Product Description

Step

Check Qty

9 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (17) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.21 and 1.22 for country variations.

Text

0
0
0
0

DL-VT320-LDL-VT.320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT.320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT.330-LVT.330-B_
VT.3.30-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-LVT340-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

0
0
0
0

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

0
0
0

LN03-_
LNO.3S-_
LG.31-A2

LG.31-A.3

0
0

LGK.31-_
LJ250-_

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

Line printers

10 Cables

LG01-BA

LG02-BA

600-li/min text-only printer with
LPV11 and cables
600-li/min text/graphics line
impact matrix printer with
LPV11 and cables

o
o

BNE.3M.xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table
1.22 for country variations.

See Table 1.17 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-US LG31-A3 selected.

Includes the printer, controller module,
and all cables and accessories needed
for installation.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25·pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LA, CK-DHQ11-AA, and CK-DZQ11-DA):

o
o

BC22D·25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WA):

1.96

Systems

o
o

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (one 10-ft console serial cable is
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA123 System Building Block
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

11 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

Q_-HS

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 media/
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

Choose desired order codes from Table
1.24. Not all operating systems and
layered products have RX50, TK50, and
TSV05 kits. Order codes for the license,
media kits, and documentation-only are
not always the same. (Refer to Table 1.24
for appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Q_-HS

Q_-HM

Q_-GZ

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit
Documentation-only kit

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-B3
Q_-BS

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation,
and training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
order from Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation, media/
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

For hardware maintenance services after the
initial one-year onsite hardware warranty,
choose one type of service per system.

12 Layered Product
License,
Media, and
Documentation

13 Software
Services

DRX50
DTK50

14 Hardware Maintenance
Services

Q_-n
Q_-7S

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.
OEM Channel
Options

15 Software Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

o TK50
o TSV05

DRX50

Q_-33
Q_-3S
Q_-3M

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

o RX50
D TK50
o TSV05

Q_-S3
Q_-S5
Q_-SM

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

o RX50
o TK50
o TSV05

Q_-93
Q_-95
Q_-9M

DEC support Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and
remedial support, and online
access to a service database (for
most products)

o RX50
o TK50
o TSV05

Q_-U
Q_-I5
Q_-IM

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system.

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50. To
verify service part numbers, refer to the
latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.24 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.97

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BA123 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.21 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

United States
English
Belgium
Flemish
Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
UK/Ireland
English
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Japan
Katakana
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
New Zealand
English

1.98

Systems

LA7;
Printer

LA210
Printer

LN03
Printer

LN03S
Printer

LG31
Printer

LJ2;0
Printer

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AB

LA2l0-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK3l-AD

LJ250-AD

LA75-AE

LA2l0-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK3l-AE

LJ250-AE

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK3l-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA2l0-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK3l-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA2l0-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK3l-AA

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK3l-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK31-AA

LA75-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK3l-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LGK3l-CA

LA75-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK3l-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK3l-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LGK3l-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK3l-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA2l0-AZ

LJ250-AZ

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.II/73 BAl23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.22· Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Language

Country/
Region
United States
Belgium
Canada
Denmark

English
Flemish
French
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French
German
Switzerland
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
Spain
Spanish
Portugal
Portuguese
Australia/
New Zealand
English

VT320
Std Kit

VT320
WPS Kit

VT330
Std Kit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
Std Kit

VT340
WPSKit

VT320---A

VT330---A

VT340---A

VT320-_C

VT320---A
VT320-_B
VT320-_C

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT330-_C

VT340-_C

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_E

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT320-_F
VT320-_G

VT330-~

VT330-_G

VT340-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~
VT340-~

VT320-_G
VT320-_H

VT330-~

VT340-_C

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_L

VT330-~

VT340--L

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_N

VT330-_N

VT340-_N

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320---A
VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT330-_S
VT330-_V

VT340-_S
VT340-_V

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

Table 1.23 • Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
••••••••• RSX·l1·········

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLVJl
TSV05

MPPMicro/
RSX

DSM
-11

Y
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

MPPRT

MPPRSX

y4
Y

M+

N
yl

y4
yl

N
N

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y

y3
y3

Y
Y

N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y

RT-11

RSTS/E Micro/
RSTS

Micro/ A-to-Z
RSX

CTS300

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD53
RD54
RX50
RX33
TK50
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Multiple DLVJls are not supported
3Supported for target systems, not host systems
4Supported for DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by the table.

Systems I. 99

MicroPDP-ll/73 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BAl23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.24 • Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Note: The SPD number is provided for additional reference.
TSVO'
Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

QJ821-HM

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QY821-GZ

Operating Systems

SPD#

License
Only

RX'O
Media/Doc.

TK'O
Media/Doc.

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/
RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

18.16
12.09
12.18

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QY821-UZ

QY950-H3
QJ354-H3
QY821-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QY821-H5

18.24
14.83
19.12
18.12
14.28
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QY829-UZ
QY800-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY628-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

18.19
18.17
18.26
18.20
18.18
18.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

BASIC-PLUS-2
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
18.06
14.54
18.09

QY918-UZ
QY805-UZ
QY916-UZ
QY809-UZ

BASIC-PLUS
RT-ll

12.05

QY913-UZ

COBOL-81
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
18.03
13.16
18.08

QY994-UZ
QY802-UZ
QY993-UZ
QY808-UZ

DATATRIEVE-ll
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.48
18.15
12.48
18.30

QY301-UZ
QY819-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSTS/E

13.39
13.39
13.32

QJ708-UZ

QJ708-HM

QJ708-GZ

QJ706-UZ

QJ706-HM

QJ706-GZ

DECmail-ll
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QY816-UZ
QR451-UZ
QY815-UZ

QR454-HM

QR454-GZ
QY816-GZ
QR451-GZ
QY815-GZ

DEC net
RSX-llM-Full Node
10.75
RSX-llM-End Node
10.75
RSX-llM-PLUS-Full Node 10.66
RSX-llM-PLUS-End Node 10.66
RSX-llS-Full Node
10.74
RSX-llS-End Node
10.74
Micro/RSX-End Node Only 18.27
RT-11
10.72
DECnet/E
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ687-UZ
QY692-UZ

QP029-HM
QJ029-H3
QY829-H3
QY800-H3

QJ013-H3

QY829-H5
QY800-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

QR430-HM
QJ676-HM
QR500-HM
QJ642-HM
QJ013-HM

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QY829-GZ
QY800-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ628-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

Layered Products

1.100

SYstems

QY809-H3

QY918-H5
QY805-H5
QY916-H5
QY809-H5

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

QY805-H3

QY808-H3

QY994-H5
QY802-H5
QY993-H5
QY808-H5

QY819-H3

QY819-H5

QY802-H3

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ
QY918-HM
QY916-HM

QY913-GZ
QY994-HM
QY993-HM

QY301-HM
QY300-HM
QY302-H3

QY816-H3
QY815-H3

QR454-H5
QY816-H5
QR451-H5
QY815-H5

QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QY766-H3
QJ687-H3

QR451-HM

QJ764-HM
QJ765-HM
QJ766-HM
QJ767-HM
QJ762-HM
QJ763-HM

QY766-H5
QY692-H5

QY918-GZ
QY805-GZ
QY916-GZ
QY809-GZ

QJ687-HM
QY692-HM

QY994-GZ
QY802-GZ
QY993-GZ
QY808-GZ
QY301-GZ
QY819-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ687-GZ
QY692-GZ

MicroPDP.ll/73 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/73 BAl23 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.24 (Continued). Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)

SPD#

License
Only

RX.50
Media/Doc.

TK.50
Media/Doc.

DECtype
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.S2
lS.14

QR03S-UZ
QP03S-UZ

QY03S-H3

QY03S-HS

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR4S0-UZ
QY4S0-UZ

QY4S0-H3

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.2S
18.12

QYSOO-UZ
QY829-UZ

QYS01-H3
QY830-H3

QYS01-HS
QYS30-HS

DIBOL
RSX-llM-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.24
lS.0S
14.0S
14.0S

QPS40-UZ
QPS07-UZ
QPS2S-UZ
QPS19-UZ

QYS07-H3

QYS07-HS

QYS19-H3

QYS19-HS

FMS
RSX-11M, S, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RT-ll

12.27
lS.34
13.17
12.22

QJ71S-UZ
QP322-UZ
QJ716-UZ
QJ713-UZ

FORTRAN IV
RSX-llM, M-PLUS
RSTS/E
RT-ll

14.63
12.41
12.10

QP230-UZ
QR43S-UZ
QYS13-UZ

FORTRAN-77
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-ll

14.31
18.04
14.49
lS.10
A3.SS

QJ66S-UZ
QPS03-UZ
QR100-UZ
QP810-UZ
QA609-DZ

QYS10-H3
QA609-C3

Pascal
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.18
lS.07

QY12S-UZ
QYS06-UZ

QYS06-H3

PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.78
14.79
12.79
lS.11

QY232-UZ
QYS04-UZ
QY233-UZ
QYS11-UZ

RTEM-11
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

lS.63
lS.63
lS.63

SORT/MERGE
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.07
lS.13

TSVO.5
Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

QR03S-HM

QR03S-GZ
QY03S-GZ

QR4S0-HM

QR4S0-GZ
QY4S0-GZ
QYS01-GZ
QYS30-GZ

QYS40-HM
QYS2S-HM

QJ71S-HM
QY322-H3
QJ716-HM
QJ713-H3

QR43S-H3
QJS13-H3

QJS13-HS

QYS03-H3

QY66S-HS
QYS03-HS

QYS40-GZ
QYS07-GZ
QYS2S-GZ
QYS19-GZ

QJ715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ716-GZ
QJ713-GZ

QP230-HM
QR43S-HM
QJS13-HM

QP230-GZ
QR43S-GZ
QJS13-GZ

QY668-HM

QY66S-GZ
QYS03-GZ
QR100-GZ
QYS10-GZ
QA609-GZ

QR100-HM
QYS10-HS
QA609-CM
QY12S-HS
QYS06-HS

QY12S-HM

QY12S-GZ
QYS06-GZ

QY232-HM

QYS11-H3

QY232-HS
QYS04-HS
QY233-HS
QYS11-HS

QY232-GZ
QYS04-GZ
QY233-GZ
QYS11-GZ

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QY004-UZ

QY004-H3

QJ291-HS
QJ304-HS
QY004-HS

QP602-UZ
QYS12-UZ

QY812-H3

QY804-H3

QY233-HM

QJ291-HM
QJ304-HM

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-HM

QP602-GZ
QYS12-GZ

Systems 1.101

MicroPDP-ll Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/53 Systems

Product Description

The MicroPDP-ll/53 and MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS are the entry-level 16-bit
Q-bus supermicrosystems. They provide the PDP-II reliability and growth
potential at an attractive price.
The MicroPDP-ll/53 replaces the MicroPDP-ll/23, offering twice the performance for about the same price. The MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS provides a 30
percent performance boost over the MicroPDP-ll/53 in applications that
utilize the extra onboard memory. Both systems use the J-11 chipset and are
designed to handle realtime or multitasking operations cost-effectively.
The MicroPDP-ll/53 and MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS use onboard memory that
conserves power and frees backplane slots. They also use half-height storage devices which use less space and power while providing greater capacity and flexibility. They are both configured in the BA23 pedestal and tabletop enclosures,
allowing them to be among the most compact low-cost systems in the industry.
The MicroPDP-ll/53 and MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS are also supported by
Ethernet local area networks for low-cost, high-speed, local area
~ommunications.

1.102

Systems

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Standard Systems

Configuration Rules for MicroPDP·
11/53 PLUS and MicroPDP.ll/53
Standard Systems

Write the modu1e and mass-storage device names in the left column beside the
slot and shelf numbers. When configuring these systems, please note that
quad-height modules use both the "AB" and "CD" portions of a slot.
Slot 1 is always reserved for the CPU modu1e.
Slots 4 through 8 can accommodate either two dual-height or one quad-height
option.
Enter the 5-V and 12-V currents, power, the ac and dc bus loads, and 1/0 panel
inserts required for each modu1e and mass-storage device. The column totals
must not exceed the limits listed at the bottom.
MicroPDP.11/53 PLUS Configuration
Template for 153Q3, 153Q4
SLar MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 ABCD
4AB
CD
.5 AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD

KDJ11-DB
RQDX3
TQK50-A
'p H..,91.!-M_

Curren1 (Amps)
12Vdc
5 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus 1 oads
ac
dc

I/O I ~serts
B
A

3.2
2.48
2.9
1.8

.19
0.06
0.0
0.3

18.2
13.1
14.5
12.6

4.8
1.9
2.8
3.2

1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5

1
N/A
N/A
2

NA
NA
NA
NA

1.35
0.9

2.4
2.5

35.55
34.5

N/A
N/A

36A

230W

- - - - - - - - - - - - -

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1 TK50A-AA
2 RD53A-AA

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

SYstems 1.103

MicroPDP-ll/.53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 Standard Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 PLUS Configuration
Template for 1.53Q7, 1.53Q8
SLOf MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 ABCD
4 AB
CD
.s AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD

KDJll-DB
RQDX3
TQK50-A

Curren1 (Amps)
12 Vdc
.sVdc

Power
(Watts)

Busloads
dc
ac

I/O ~ serts
B
A

3.20
2.48
2.9

.19
0.06
0.0

18.2
13.1
145

4.8
1.9
2.8

1.0
05
05

1
N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A

1.35
.9

2.4
.6

3555
33.0

N/A
N/A

36A

230W

Current (Amps)
12Vdc
.sVdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus loads
dc
ac

1/01 serts
B
A

3.47
2.48

.19
0.06

20.0
13.1

3.0
1.9

1.0
05

1
N/A

N/A
N/A

.39

8.60

N/A

1.105

155

N/A

36A

230W

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - --

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1
TK50A-AA
2A RD32A-AA
2B

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

MicroPDP.ll/.53 Configuration Template
for 1.53Ql, 1.53Q2
SLOf MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 ABCD
4AB
CD
.sAB
CD
6AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8AB
CD

KDJ11-DA
RQDX3

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - --

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
1A RX33A-AA
1B
2A RD31A-AA
2B

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

1.104 Systems

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Standard Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Configuration Template
for 153Q5, 153Q6
SLOT MODULE
1 ABCD
2 ABCD
3 ABCD
4 AB
CD
5 AB
CD
6 AB
CD
7 AB
CD
8 AB
CD

KDJ11-DA
RQDX3

Curren1 (Amps)
5Vdc
12 Vdc

Power
(Watts)

Bus]~ads

I/O I serts

ae:

de:

3.47
2.48

.19
0.06

20.0
13.1

3.0
1.9

1.0
0.5

1
N/A

N/A
N/A

.39

.54

8.60

N/A

33.0

N/A

36A

230W

- - -- - -- - -- - -- - --

Mass-storage
Shelf Device
lA RX33A-AA
IB
2A RD32A-AA
2B

Total these
columns:
Must not
exceed

Systems 1.105

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD53·Based Standard System

Note: The selection of steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the minimum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

1 Base Hardware System

DH.153Q3·BA

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software System

1.106 Systems

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks
Includes enhanced MicroPDP11/53 PLUS System Module with
1.5 Mbytes of onboard memory,
RD53 71-Mbyte disk drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, TK50
95-Mbyte tape drive and controller, DHQl18-serial-line interface, BA23 pedestal/tabletop enclosure, U.S. 120-V power cord,
and English-language documentation and installation diagnostics, 120V

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

DH.153Q3·B2

Same as DH-153Q3-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation
- see Step 4 to order separately

RT-11 and CTS-300 are not supported on
Standard Systems due to lack of DHQll
support.

DH.153Q3·B3

Same as DH-153Q3-BA except
240 V, and does not include a
240-V power cord, diagnostics or
documentation - see Steps 2 and
4 to order separately

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BN05A·2E

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18J·IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J·IK

uK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan - 200 V @ 6 A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628.UZ
QY505·UZ
QY642·UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-11S

Choose one. -BA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardw~e System includes two
RS-423 serial ports and eight modem/data
serial lines (modem control) on the
DHQ11, two 25-foot Rs-423 cables with
MMJ connectors, and two H8571-A
adapters (MMJ to 25-pin). Cabinet kit for
the DHQll supports modem COll.trol.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.27 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.28.

MicroPDP.ll/5'j Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/;3 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK;O/RD;3·Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Part Number

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 15 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

o
o

English·language diagnosticsl
documentation on TK50 media
EngIish·language diagnosticsl
documentation on RX50 media

Optional for ·B2 and ·B3. Included in
DH·153Q3·BA.

MSVll.QA
MSVll.QB

l·Mbyte MOS memory
2.Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system.
1.5 Mbytes is included in the Base
Hardware System.

159·Mbyte tabletop-disk drive
71·Mbyte tabletop-disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Daisychain cable

Choose up to two ROxx drives.

1
1

RDS4.DA/DB
RDS3.DA/DB
RQDXE.AA
BCl7Y.IJ

1
1

TIGO.DA/DB
TQKSO.AB

95-Mbyte tabletop-tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA.M
CK.DELQA.YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from step 10.

1
1

DEQNA·M
CK.DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Memory

0
0

6 Additional
Mass Storage

0
0

S Additional

(external)

7 Ethemet
Interface

8 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

9 Terminals

ZVAAA·PS

ZVAAA.P3

The daisychain cable (BCl7Y-IJ) is required
if two external ROxx devices are selected.

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 10 serial lines, using 3 B·size distribution slots. This leaves 1
additional B-size slot in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 153Q3 and 153Q4
configuration template.

1
1

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote Ml\ij
DEC-connect connections

1
1

DZQll.M
CK.DZQII-DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

1
1

DLVJI-M
CK.DLVJ1.LB

4 seria1lines
Cabinet kit

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from Step 10.

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with an
LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number of
serial lines (9) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to Tables
1.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Text

0
0
0
0

DLVf320·A..- White video terminal
DL-Vf320·B_ Green video terminal
DL-Vf320·~ Amber video terminal
DL-Vf320·F_ WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0

Vf330·A..Vf330·B_

Vf330·~

Vf330·D_
Vf340·A..Vf.340·D_

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Systems 1.107

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK.50/RD.53·Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

9 Terminals (Continued)

0
0
0
0

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

0
0
0

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31.A2

LG31.A3

0
0

LGI01·_
LJ250._

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/minenhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

0
0

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

10 Cables

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK~DZQ11-DB and DHQ11 included in Base System):

o
o
o

BC22D·25
BC22D·50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WB):

11 Operating System

o
o

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75- type printer
selected in Step 9.

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit

Choose desired order codes from Table 1.28.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have RX50, TK50, and TSV05
kits. Order codes for the license, media
kits, and documentation-only are not
always the same. (Refer to Table 1.28 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

Q_-HM

0
0

1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Media and
Documentation

12 Layered Product

License,
Media,and
Documentation

0
0

1.108

Systems

Q_-H5
1

Q_-HM

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 media!
documentation kit

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD53.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Pl'oduct Description

Pl'oduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

13 Software
Services

ORX50
OTK50

Q_-B3
Q_-BS

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support,
DECstart PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
order from Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, media!
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

ORX50
OTK50

Q_-7)
Q_-7S

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and separately
documentation at no extra charge.

14 Hardware

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

Maintenance
Services

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

1S Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-3S

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-8S

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-9S

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventative and
remedial support, and online
access to a service database
(for most products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-U
Q_-I.5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify correct service part numbers,
refer to the latest Software Product
Description (SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number).
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems

1.109

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD53·Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

1 Base Hardware System

DH.153Q4·BA

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software System

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

DH.153Q4·B2

Same as DH-153Q4-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation
- see Step 4 to order separately

RT-11 and CTS-300 are not supported on
Standard Systems due to lack of DHQll
support.

Choose one. -BA recommended for US.
Base Hardware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports and eight modem/data
serial lines (modem control) on the
DHQll, two 25-foot RS-423 cables with
MMJ connectors, and two H8571-A
adapters (MMJ to 25-pin). Cabinet kit for
the DHQll supports modem control.

DH.153Q4·B3

Same as DH-153Q4-BA except
240 V, and does not include a
240-V power cord, diagnostics or
documentation - see Steps 2 and
4 to order separately

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A.2E
BN05A·2E

Choose one power cord.

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18J-IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J.IK

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan- 200V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY821-UZ
QY029-UZ
QP029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY628.UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642.UZ

DSM-ll
MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-llS

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

D
D
D

Systems

Includes enhanced MicroPDP·
11/53 PLUS System Module with
1.5 Mbytes of onboard memory,
RD53 71·Mbyte disk drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, TK50
95·Mbyte tape drive and control·
ler, DHQ118·serial·line interface,
BA23 rackmount enclosure, U.S.
120-V power cord, and Englishlanguage documentation and installation diagnostics, 120 V

D
D

1.110

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Central European countries include:
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway,
Portugal, Spain, and Sweden.

Refer to Table I.27 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table I.28.

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/;) PLUS Rackmount TK;O/RD;).Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 15 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and

ZVAAA.PS

ZVAAA·P3

S Additional
Memory

0
0

6 Add-on

0
0

English-language diagnostics!
documentation on TK50 media
English-language diagnostics!
documentation on RX50 media

Optional for -B2 and -B3. Included in
DH-153Q4-BA.

MSVll-QA
MSVll.QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 15 Mbytes is included in
the Base Hardware System.

mS4-RA/RB
mS3-RA/RB
RQDXE-AA
H9302
BC17Y.IJ

159-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive
71-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Rackmount kit
Daisychain cable

Choose up to two.

TIGO.RA/RB
TQKSO.AB
H9302

95-Mbyte rackmount-disk drive
TK50 controller
Rackmooot kit

Choose only one.

DELQA-M
CK.DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 10.

DEQNA.M
CK.DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Documentation

Mass Storage
(external)

0
0

7 Ethernet

Interface

8 Additional
Asyncluonous
Serial Lines

9 Terminals

Text

Text and Graphics

1
1

The daisychain cable (BCl7Y-l]) is required
if two external ROxx devices are selected.

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 10 serial lines, using 3 B-size distribution slots. This leaves 1
additional B-size slot in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 153Q3 and 153Q4
configuration template.

DHQll-M
CK.DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote ~
DECconnect connections

DZQll·M
CK.DZQll·DB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJ1.M
CK.DLVJ1.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 10.

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with an
LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number of
serial lines (9) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 8. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to Tables
I.25 and I.26 for country variations.

o
o

DL·VT320·A.....DL·VT320·B_
DL· VT320·~
DL.VT320·F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

o
o
o
o
o
o

VT330·A.....VT330·B_
VT330·C_
VT330·D_
VT340·A.....VT340·D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Terminals include keyboard. See Table I.26
for country variations.

Systems 1.111

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 PLUS Rackmount TK.50/RD.53·Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Pl'Oduct Description

Pl'Oduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

9 Terminals (Continued)
Hardcopy
(Output Only)

D
D
D
D

LA7S-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

D
D
D

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31·A2

LG31-A3

D
D

LGI01·_
LJ250-_

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor for
LA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O, 85 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

D
D

BNE3M-x:x
H4000

10 Cables

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA
Ethernet interface is ordered. For
appropriate cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJI-LB, CK-DZQ11-DB and DHQ11 included in Base System):

D
D
D

BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WB):

11 Operating System
Media and
Documentation

12 Layered Product
License,
Media,and
Documentation

D
D

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8571·A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 9.

Q_-H3

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media!
documentation kit
TSV05 media!
documentation kit

D
D

Q_-H5

Q_-HM

D
D

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

1.112

Systems

Q_-HM

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit
TSV05 medial
documentation kit

Repeat Step 12 if more than one layered
product is desired.

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD53-Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Pmduct Description

Pmduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

13 Software
Services

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-B3
Q_-B5

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 13, do not
order from Steps 14 and 15.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, media!
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

DRX50
DTK50

Q_-73
Q_-75

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation
separately at no extra charge.

14 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

15 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0 RX50
0

TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and
remedial support, and online
access to a service database
(for most products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-I3
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify correct service part numbers,
refer to the latest Software Product
Description (SPD). (Refer to Table I.28 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number).
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.113

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD32.Based Standard System

Note: The selection of steps 1 through 3, plus the selection of one console terminal from the Terminals Step, is the mini·
mum necessary for a fully functional system. Customer requests to sell or quote less than a fully functional system must
be referred to the District Operations Manager.
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH·153Q7·BA

Includes enhanced
MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS System
Module with 1.5 Mbytes of
onboard memory, RD32
42-Mbyte disk drive, TK50
95-Mbyte cartridge tape,
RQDX3 disk controller, TQK50
tape controller, BA23 pedestal!
tabletop enclosure, US 120-V
power cord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V.

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

DH·153Q7.B2

Same as DH-153Q7-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately

DH·153Q7.B3

Same as DH-153Q7-BAexcept
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately

Choose one power cord.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A.2E
BNOSA·2E

D
0
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J·IK

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
Japan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V@6A

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4·UZ
QY821.UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628-UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

D
D
D
D
D

Systems

Base Hardware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports for a console terminal
and an additional terminal or printer, two
25-foot RS-423 cables with MMJ
connectors, and two H8571-A adapters
(MMJ to 25 pin).

D
D
D

1.114

Choose one. - BA model recommended
for US.

Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Refer to Table 1.27 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.28.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Produet/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.

ZVAAA-P.s

ZVAAA-P3

.s Additional
Memory

o
o

6 Additional
Mass Storage
(internal)

7 Additional
Mass Storage
(external)

4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media

Optional for -B2 and -B3. Included in
DH-153Q7-BA.

MSVll-QA
MSVll-QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. Base Hardware System
includes 1.5 Mbytes.

o
o

RD31A-AB
RD32A-AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

0
0

159-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
71-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
RDQX3 extender module
Daisychain cable

Choose up to two.

1
1

RD.s4-DA/DB
RD.s3-DA/DB
IU>QXE-AA
BC17Y-IJ

1
1

TKSO-DA/DB
TQKSO-AB

95-Mbyte tabletop tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA-M
CK-DELQA- YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DEQNA-M
CK-DEQNA-KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 Ethernet
Interface

9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

The daisychain cable (BC 17Y-1J) is required

if two external RDxx devices are selected.

The Base Hardware System (Step 1) includes 2 serial lines, using 1 B-size distribution slot. This leaves 3 B-size
slots in the distribution panel available for options. Please refer to the 153Q7 and 153Q8 configuration
template.

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll-AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQll is not supported by
RT-ll andCTS-300.

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll-WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select
cable from Step 11. DHQ11 is not
supported by RT-11 and CTS-300.

DZQll-M
CK-DZQll-DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJI-M
CK-DLVJI-LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

Systems 1.115

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD32~Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Table 1.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Product Description

Text

o
o
o
o

DL-VT320-A..DL-VT320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

o
o
o
o
o
o

VT330-A..VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-A..VT340-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

o
o
o
o

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

o
o
o

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

11 Cables

o
o

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.

It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate
cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK-DHQ11-AB, and CK-DZQ11-DB):

o
o
o

BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WB):

1.116 Systems

o
o

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Pedestal/Tabletop TK50/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

~ct~uon

~ct/Order Limitauons or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentauon

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

RX50medial
documentation kit
TK50medial
documentation kit

13 Layered Product

D
D

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Choose desired order codes from Table 1.28.
Not all operating systems and layered
products have both RX50 and TK50 kits.
Order codes for the license, media kits,
and documentation-only are not always
the same. (Refer to Table 1.28 for
appropriate part number and SPD
number.)

Q_-H5

License,
Media, and
Documentauon

14 Software
Services

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

Q-_-73
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50medial
documentation kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level IIIincludes DECsupport, DECstart
PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level IIincludes Basic, DEC start,
installation, medial
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

15 Hardware

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

Maintenance
Services

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite warranty,
choose one type of service per system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

D
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-13
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems

1.117

MicroPDP.ll/.53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/;3 PLUS Rackmount TK;O/RD32.Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

1 Base Hardware System

DH-153QS-BA

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

1.118

Systems

Pl'Oduct/Order Limitations or Remarks
Includes enhanced
MicroPDP-11/53 PLUS System
Module with 1.5 Mbytes of
onboard memory, RD32
42-Mbyte disk drive, TK50
95-Mbyte cartridge tape,
RQDX3 disk controller, TQK50
tape controller, BA23 rackmount
enclosure, US 120-V power cord,
and English-language
.documentation and installation
diagnostics, 120 V.

DH-153QS·B2

Same as DH-153Q8-BA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately

DH·153QS·B3

Same as DH-153Q8-BA except
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately

0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1

BN02A-2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A-2E
BNOSA-2E

0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A-2E
BN07A-2E
BN1SK-IK
BNlSL-2E
BN1SJ-IK

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V@6A
]apan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V@6A
US - 208-240 V@6A

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4-UZ
QYS21-UZ
QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430·UZ
QY62S-UZ
QYSOS-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.
Choose one. - BA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports for a console terminal
and an additional terminal or printer, two
25-foot RS-423 cables with MMJ
connectors, and two H8571-A adapters
(MMJ to 25 pin).

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
,Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table I.27 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for more details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table I.28.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/S3 PLUS Rackmount TKSO/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Cheek Qty

Part Number

Pmduct Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

S Additional
Memory

6 Additional

Mass Storage
(internal)

7 Additional
Mass Storage
(external)

ZVAAA·PS

ZVAAA·Pl

0
0

1
1

0
0
0

8 Ethemet
Interface

9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media

Optional for -B2 and -B3. Included in
DH-153Q8-BA.

MSVll·QA
MSVll·QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 1.5 Mbytes is included in the
Base Hardware System.

RDllA·AB
RDl2A-AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

RD54·RA/RB
RDSl·RA/RB
RDQXE.AA
H9302
Be17Y.lJ

159-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
71-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
RDQX3 extender module
Rackmount kit
Daisychain cable

Choose up to two.
The daisychain cable (BC 17Y-IJ) is required

if two external RDxx devices are selected.

1
1

TKSO.RA/RB
TQIGO·AB

95-Mbyte rackmount tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA.M
CK.DELQA.YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DEQNA.M
CK.DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll·AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead.

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQ11 is not supported by
RT-11 andCTS-300.

DHQll·M
CK.DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections.

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select
cable from Step 11. DHQll is not
supported by RT-ll and CTS-300.

DZQll.M
CK.DZQll.DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJl·M
CK.DLVJl.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

Systems

1.119

MicroPDP .. ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
a~LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of Serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
. Tables 1.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Text

D
D
D
D

Text and Graphics

D
D
D
D
D
D

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

11 Cables

Part Number

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

DL- VT320-~
DL-VT320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

VT330-~

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-~

VT340-D_

D
D
D
D

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

D
D
D

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

LGI01-_
L]250-_

D
D

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA2lO
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate
cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,'
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJI-LB, CK-DHQ11-AB, and CK-DZQll-DB):

D
D
D

BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

1.120

Systems

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 PLUS Rackmount TK50/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

13 Layered Product
License,
Media, and
Documentation

0
0

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

14 Software
Services

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

Q-_-73
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50 medial
documentation kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support,
DEC start PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, medial
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DECsupport Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-I3
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per cpu.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify correct service part numbers,
refer to the latest Software Product
Description (SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for
appropriate part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD31.Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Pmduc:t/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH·1S3Ql.AA

Includes MicroPDP.ll/53
System Module with 0.5 Mbytes
of onboard memory, RD31
20-Mbyte disk drive, RX33
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, BA23
pedestal/tabletop enclosure, US
120-Vpowercord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

ZVA06·P3

DH·1S3Ql.A2

ZVA06·P3

DH·1S3Ql.A3

ZVA06·P3

2 Power Cords

0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BNOSA.2E

1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0

3 Base Software
System

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

"III"'~

~ ___ L _

Choose one. - AA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports for a console terminal
and an additional terminal or printer, two
25-foot RS-423 cables with MMJ
connectors, and two H8571-A adapters
(MMJ to 25 pin).

Same as DH-153Q1-AA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-11 RX33 formatter kit
Same as DH-153Q1-AA except
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

Choose one power cord.

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·IK
BN18L·2E
BN18J·IK

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
]apan-200V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

QY3S4·UZ
QY821.UZ
QY029.UZ
QP029.UZ
QJ029·UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800·UZ
QY430·UZ
QY628.UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642·UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.

Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD31.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Part Number

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

S Additional
Memory

6 Additional
Mass Storage
(internal)

7 Additional
Mass Storage
(external)

o
o

ZVAAA-P3
ZVAAA-PS

English-language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -A2 and -A3. Included in
DH-153Q1-AA.

0
0

MSVll-QA
MSVll-QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. Base Hardware System
includes 0.5 Mbytes.

0
0

1
1

RD31A.AB
RD32A·AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

RX33A.AB

1.2-Mbyte floppy-disk drive

Choose only one.

0
0

RDS4-DA/DB
RDH-DA/DB
RQDXE.AA
BC17Y-1J

159-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
71-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Daisychain cable

Choose only if less than two devices are
selected in Step 6.

1
1

If only one device is selected in Step 6,
choose only one. If no devices are selected
in Step 6, choose up to two.
The daisychain cable (BC 17Y-1J) is
required if two external ROxx
and/or RXxx devices are selected.

8 Ethemet
Interface

9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

1
1

TIGO-DA/DB
TQIGO-AB

95-Mbyte tabletop tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA.M
CK-DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DEQNA-M
CK-DEQNA-KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

DHQll.M
CK-DHQll-AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQll is not supported by
RT-ll andCTS-300.

DHQll-M
CK.DHQll-WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select
cable from Step 11. DHQll is not
supported by RT-ll and CTS-300.

DZQll-M
CK-DZQll-DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJ1-M
CK.DLVJ1-LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

CiiI:............~ ..

T.1?~

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-busMultiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD31.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Part Number

Product Description

o
o
o

DL-VT.320-ADL-VT.320-B_
DL-VT.320-C_
DL-VT.320·F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

o
o
o
o
o
o

VT.3.30·AVT.3.30-B_
VT.3.30-C_
VT.3.30-D_
VT.340-AVT.340-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

o
o
o
o

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

o
o
o

LNO.3-_
LNO.3S-_
LG.31-A2

LG31-A.3

o
o

LGK.31-_
LJ25 0-_

250-chfs dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA 75
240-chfs dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Text

11 Cables

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate
cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DVLJI-LB, CK-DHQII-AB, and CK-DZQII-DB):

o
o
o

BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQII-WB):

o
o

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD31.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

0--H5

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

13 Layered Product
License,
Media, and
Documentation

0
0

1
1

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

14 Software
Services

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q-_-73
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support,
DECstart, PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, medial
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
0--35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-I3
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Service (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

SYstems

1.12S

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/.53 Rackmount RX33/RD31-Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

1 Base Hardware System

DH·1.53Q2.AA

ZVA06·P3

DH·1.53Q2.A2

ZYA06·P3

DH·1.53Q2.A3

ZYA06·P3

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

0
0
0
0
0

1
1

1
1
1

BN06A·2E
BN07A·2E
BN18K·1K
BN18L·2E
BN18J.1K

UK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy -220V@6A
Japan - 200 V@6A
Israel- 230 V@6A
US -20B-240V@6A

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4·UZ
QY821·UZ
QY029·UZ
QP029·UZ
QJ029.UZ
QY829·UZ
QY800.UZ
QY430.UZ
QY628·UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642·UZ
QY013·UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

o
o
o
o
o

Same as DH-153Q2-AA except
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-11 RX33 formatter kit

BN02A·2E
BN03A·2E
BN04A·2E
BNOSA·2E

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

Same as DH-153Q2-AA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-11 RX33 formatter kit

1
1
1
1

o
o
o

Svstems

Includes MicroPDP-ll/53 System
Module with 0.5 Mbytes of
onboard memory, RD31
20-Mbyte disk drive, RX33
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, BA23
rackmount enclosure, US
120-V power cord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

0
0
0
0

1.126

Pmduct/Order Limitations or Remarb

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table I.27 for list of hardware
options suppor~ed by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.2B.

MicroPDP-ll/;} Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/53 Rackmount RX33/RD31-Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
0

ZVAAA~P3

ZVAAA-PS

S Additional
Memory

0
0

6 Additional
Mass Storage
(internal)

0
0

1
1

4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

7 Additional
Mass Storage

English-language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -A2 and -A3. Included in
DH-153Q2-AA.

MSVll-QA
MSVll-QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 0.5 Mbytes is included in the
Base Hardware System.

RD31A-AB
RD32A-AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

RX33A-AB

1.2-Mbyte floppy-disk drive

Choose only one.

0
0

RDS4-RA/RB
RDSJ-RA/RB
RQDXE-AA
H9302
BC17Y-IJ

159-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
71-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Rackmount kit
Daisychain cable

Choose only if less than two devices are
selected in Step 6.

(external)

1
1

If only one device is selected in Step 6,
choose only one. If no devices are selected
in Step 6, choose up to two.
The daisychain cable (BC17Y-1J) is
required if two external RDxx and/or
RXxx devices are selected.

8 Ethemet
Interface

1
1
1

TKSO-RA/RB
TQKSO-AB
H9302

95-Mbyte rackmount tape drive
TK50 controller
Rackmount kit

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA-M
CK.DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

DEQNA.M
CK-DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

o
9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

1
1

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll-AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DHQll.M
8 serial lines
CK-DHQll·WB Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections.

DZQll·M
CK-DZQll.DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
onthe bulkhead

DLVJI-M
CK.DLVJI-LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQll is not supported by
RT-11 and CTS-300.

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select
cable from Step 11. DHQ11 is not
supported by RT-11 and CTS-300.

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

SYstems 1.127

MicroPDP-ll/53Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/53 Rackmount RX33/RD31.Based Standard System
Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables I.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Text

D
D
D
D

Text and Graphics

D
D
D
D
D
D

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

11 Cables

Part Number

OL-VT320·~ White video terminal
OL-VT320-B_ Green video terminal
OL-VT320·C_ Amber video terminal
OL-VT320-F_ WPS amber video terminal

VT330·~

VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_
VT340-~

VT340-D_

D
D
D
D

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

D
D
D

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

D
D

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

D
D

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Terminals include keyboard. See Table I.26
for country variations.

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal
250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S ..
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface
Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

See Table I.25 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate cable
length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = lO-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJI-LB, CK-DHQ11-AB, and CK-DZQ11-DB):

D
D

BC22D-25
BC220-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the system
(two 25-ft console serial cables are included
in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WB):

1.128

SYstems

D
D

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the system
(two 25-ft console serial cables are included
in Step 1).

H8571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA75-type printer
selected in Step 10.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Rackmount RX33/RD31.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50 medial
documentation kit

13 Layered Product
License,
Media and
Documentation

D
D

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

14 Software
Services

0
0

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

Q-_-7J
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support,
DEC start, PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation, medial
documentation, and training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

0
0

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

0
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DECsupport Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-U
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.129

MicroPDP-ll/S3 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
Mic:roPDP.U/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD32.Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH-1.53Q5-AA

Includes MicroPDP-ll/53 System
Module with 0.5 Mbytes of
onboard memory, RD32
42-Mbyte disk drive, RX33
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, BA23
pedestal/tabletop enclosure, US
120-V powercord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

2 Power Cords

ZYA06-P3

DH·1.53Q5-A2

ZYA06-P3

DH·1.53Q5·A3

ZYA06-P3

3 Base Software
System

1.130

Systems

Same as DH-153Q2-AA except
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

BN02A-2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A·2E
BN05A-2E

o
o

BN06A·2E
BN07A-2E
BN18K-lK
BN18L-2E
BN18J·IK

uK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand 240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V@6A
Japan - 200 V@6A
Israel- 230 V @ 6 A
us - 208-240 V@6A

QY354-UZ
QY821-UZ
QY029-UZ
QP029.UZ
QJ029.UZ
QY829-UZ
QY800-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY628-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642·UZ
QY013-UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPower/pascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RSX
MicroPower/pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

o
o

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1

1
1
1
1
1

1
1

Base H~dware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports for a console terminal
and an additional terminal or printer, two
25-foot RS-423 cables with MMJ
connectors, and two H8571-A adapters
(MMJ to 25 pin).

Same as DH-153Q5-AA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

o
o
o
o

Choose one. - AA model recommended
for US.

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

Each license includes 90-day limited
warranty.
Refer to Table 1.27 for list of hardware
options supported by each operating
system. Not all hardware options are
supported by all operating systems.
Refer to the SPD for details.
Check that the operating system software
chosen is available on the distribution
device that is selected. Refer to Table 1.28.

MicroPDP.ll/S3 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/S3 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.
4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

ZYAAA·P3

English·language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -A2 and -A3. Included in
DH-153Q5-AA.

ZYAAA.PS

S Additional
Memory

0
0

MSVll.QA
MSVll.QB

I-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. Base Hardware System
includes 0.5 Mbytes.

6 Additional
Mass Storage
(internal)

0
0

RD3lA-AB
RD32A-AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

RX33A·AB

1.2-Mbyte £loppy-disk drive

Choose only one.

0
0

RDS4.DA/DB
RDS3·DA/DB
RQDXE-AA
BCl7Y.lJ

159-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
71-Mbyte tabletop disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Daisychain cable

Choose only if less than two devices are
selected in Step 6.

7 Additional
Mass Storage
(external)

1
1

If only one device is selected in Step 6,
choose only one. If no devices are selected
in Step 6, choose up to two.
The daisychain cable (BC 17Y-1J) is
required if two external RDxx and/or
RXxx devices areselected.

8 Etbemet
Interface

9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

1
1

TKSO.DA/DB
TQKSO·AB

95-Mbyte tabletop tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

1
1

DELQA-M
CK-DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DEQNA-M
CK-DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interfaCe
Cabinet kit

1
1

DHQll·M
CK-DHQll.AB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

8 serial lines
DHQll·M
CK-DHQll.WB Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

DZQll.M
CK-DZQll-DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJl.M
CK-DLVJl.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQll is not supported by
RT-ll andCTS-300.

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select .
cable from Step 11. DHQ11 is not
supported by RT-ll and CTS-300.

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

Systems

1.131

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices selected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines selected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables I.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Part Number

Product Description

Text

0
0
0
0

DL-VT320-ADL-VT320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

0
0
0
0
0
0

VT330-AVT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

0
0
0
0

LA75-_
LA75X-SF
LA210-_
LA2iX-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

0
0
0

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

11 Cables

VT340-~

VT340-D_

0
0

LGK31-_
LJ250-_

0
0

BNE3M-xx
H4000

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA21O, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface
Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.

It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 selected.

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate
cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK-DHQ11-AB, and CK-DZQ11-DB):

BC22D-25
BC22D-50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
100-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the system
(two 25-ft console serial cables are included
in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQll-WB):

1.132

Systems

o
o

BC16E-25
BC16E-50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the system
(two 25-ft console serial cables are included
in Step 1).

HB571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
selected in Step_ 10.

MicroPDP.ll/5} Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Pedestal/Tabletop RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

13 Layered Product
License,
Media, and
Documentation

D
D

14 Software
Services

D
D

1
1

D
D

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3
Q_-H5

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

Q-_-73
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50 media/
documentation kit

Startup Service Level III includes DECsupport, DEC start
PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training
Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DECstart,
installation,
media/documentation, and
training

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.
All software products must have the same
level service.
Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.
Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DEC support Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventive and remedial
support, and online access to a
service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-I3
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.133

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/.53 Rackmount RX33/RD32.Based Standard System

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

1 Base Hardware System

DH-153Q6-AA

Includes MicroPDP-ll/53 System
Module with 0.5 Mbytes of
onboard memory, RD32
42-Mbyte disk drive, RX33
1.2-Mbyte diskette drive,
RQDX3 disk controller, BA23
rackmount enclosure, US
120-V power cord, and Englishlanguage documentation and
installation diagnostics, 120 V
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

Each system includes one-year onsite
hardware warranty.

ZYA06-P3

DH-153Q6-A2

ZYA06-P3

DH-153Q6-A3

ZYA06-P3

2 Power Cords

3 Base Software
System

1.134

Systems

Choose one. - AA model recommended
for US.
Base Hardware System includes two
RS-423 serial ports for a console terminal
and an additional terminal or printer, two
25-foot RS-423 cables with MMJ connectors, and two H8571-A adapters
(MMJ to 25 pin).

Same as DH-153Q6-AA except
no diagnostics or documentation - see Step 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit
Same as DH-153Q6-AA except
240 V, no power cord, diagnostics or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately
MicroPDP-ll RX33 formatter kit

D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1

BN02A-2E
BN03A-2E
BN04A-2E
BNOSA-2E

D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1

BN06A-2E
BN07A-2E
BN1SK-IK
BN1SL-2E
BN1SJ-IK

uK/Ireland - 240 V @ 5 A
Central European - 220 V @ 6 A
Switzerland - 220 V @ 6 A
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V @ 6 A
Denmark - 220 V @ 6 A
Italy - 220 V @ 6 A
]apan-200V@6A
Israel - 230 V @ 6 A
US - 208-240 V @ 6 A

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

QY3S4·UZ
QYS21-UZ
QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29.UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QYSOS·UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

CTS-300
DSM-ll
MicroPowerfPascal-Micro/RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RSX
MicroPowerfPascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-llM
RSX-llM-PLUS
RSX-llS
RT-ll

Choose one power cord.
Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, France, Germany,
Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 Rackmount RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Produet/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 16 is optional for a functioning system.

o
o

lYAAA·P3

S Additional
Memory

0
0

6 Additional
Mass Storage
(internal)

0
0

4 Diagnostics and
Documentation

7 Additional
Mass Storage
(external)

English-language diagnostics and
documentation on RX50 media
English-language diagnostics and
documentation on TK50 media

Optional for -A2 and -A3. Included in
DH-153Q6-AA.

MSVll·QA
MSVll.QB

1-Mbyte MOS memory
2-Mbyte MOS memory

Maximum allowable memory is 4 Mbytes
per system. 0.5 Mbytes is included in the
Base Hardware System.

RD31A.AB
RD32A-AB

20-Mbyte fixed-disk drive
42-Mbyte fixed-disk drive

Choose only one.

RX33A-AB

1.2-Mbyte floppy-disk drive

Choose only one.

0
0

RDS4-RA/RB
RDS3-RA/RB
RQDXE.AA
H9302
BC17Y-1J

159-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
71-Mbyte rackmount disk drive
RQDX3 extender module
Rackmount kit
Daisychain cable

Choose only if less than two devices are
selected in Step 6.

lYAAA·PS

1
1

1
1
1

If only one device is selected in Step 6,
choose only one. If no devices are selected
in Step 6, choose up to two.
The daisychain cable (BC 17Y-lJ) is
required if two external RDxx and/or
RXxx devices are selected.

8 Ethernet
Interface

9 Additional
Asynchronous
Serial Lines

TKSO·RA/RB
TQKSO-AB

95-Mbyte rackmount tape drive
TK50 controller

Choose only one.

Choose only one.
Select cable from Step 11.

1
1

DELQA.M
CK-DELQA-YB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

1
1

DEQNA.M
CK-DEQNA.KB

Ethernet interface
Cabinet kit

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 8 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11. DHQ11 is not supported by
RT-11 and CTS-300.

DHQll-M
CK-DHQll.WB

8 serial lines
Cabinet kit with no modem
control, RS-423 signalling
supporting 8 remote MMJ
DECconnect connections

Choose up to three if no other
asynchronous options are selected. Select
cable from Step 11. DHQ11 is not
supported by RT-11 and CTS-300.

DZQll-M
CK.DZQll.DB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit with full modem
control, RS-232 signalling
supporting 4 25-pin connections
on the bulkhead

DLVJI-M
CK-DLVJ1.LB

4 serial lines
Cabinet kit

1
1

Choose only one if no other asynchronous
options are selected. Select cable from
Step 11.

!i:........._ ..

Tn'i

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.U/53 Rackmount RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Part Number

Step

Check Qty

10 Terminals

For a console device, it is recommended that one video terminal and one hardcopy printer (e.g., the VT320 with
an LA75) be ordered for each system. Total devices sdected in this section should not exceed maximum number
of serial lines (2) plus additional number of serial lines sdected in Step 9. Most terminals are 120 V. Refer to
Tables 1.25 and 1.26 for country variations.

Product Description

Text

o
o
o
o

DL-VT320-A-DL-VT320-B_
DL-VT320-C_
DL-VT320-F_

White video terminal
Green video terminal
Amber video terminal
WPS amber video terminal

Text and Graphics

o
o
o
o
o
o

VT330-A-VT330-B_
VT330-C_
VT330-D_

White graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

o
o
o

LA75-_
LA75.X-SF
LA210-_
LA21X-BT

LA21X-SF

LA21X-SH

o
o
o

LN03-_
LN03S-_
LG31-A2

LG31-A3

o
o

LGK31-_
L]2.50-_

o
o

BNE3M-xx
H4000

Hardcopy
(Output Only)

11 Cables

VT340-~

VT340-D_

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Terminals include keyboard. See Table 1.26
for country variations.

250-ch/s dot-matrix printer
Single-tray sheetfeeder, LA75
240-ch/s dot matrix printer
Bidirectional forms tractor
forLA210
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210, 8.5 by 11
Single-tray sheetfeeder for
LA210,A4
8-pp/min laser printer
8-pp/min graphics laser printer
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, U.S.
version
300-1/min enhanced text line
matrix impact printer, non-U.S.
version
Country kit for LG31-A3
Companion color printer serial
interface

See Table 1.25 for country variations.

Ethernet right-angle cable
Ethernet transceiver

Required if the DEQNA/DELQA Ethernet
interface is ordered. For appropriate
cable length, -xx equals:
-05 = 5-ft
-10 = 10-ft
-20 = 20-ft
-40 = 40-ft

LG31-A2 (recommended for U.S.)
includes country kit.
It is necessary to order one LGK31 with
the appropriate country variation,
selected from the country variation table,
for each non-U.S. LG31-A3 sdected.

For 25-pin connections (cabinet kits CK-DLVJ1-LB, CK-DHQ11-AB, and CK-DZQ11-DB):

o
o
o

BC22D-2.5
BC22D-.50
BC22D-AO

25-ft null modem serial cable
50-ft null modem serial cable
lOO-ft null modem serial cable

Number of serial terminals should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

For MMJ connections (cabinet kit CK-DHQ11-WB):

o
o

BC16E-2.5
BCI6E-.50

25-ft serial cable
50-ft serial cable

Number of serial cables should at least
equal the number of terminals on the
system (two 25-ft console serial cables are
included in Step 1).

H8.571-A

MMJ to 25-pin adapter

Order one for each LA 75-type printer
sdected in Step 10.

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 Rackmount RX33/RD32.Based Standard System
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

12 Operating
System
Media and
Documentation

Q_-H3

Q_-H5

RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50mediaf
documentation kit

13 Layered Product
License,
Media and
Documentation

0
D

Q_-UZ
Q_-H3

Q_-H5

14 Software
Services

D
D

15 Hardware
Maintenance
Services

RX50
TK50

Q-_-B3
Q-_-B5

Q-_-73
Q-_-75

Single-use license
RX50media/
documentation kit
TK50media/
documentation kit

Repeat Step 13 if more than one layered
product is desired.

Startup Service Level III includes DEC support , DEC start
PLUS, installation,
media/documentation, and
training

When ordering from Step 14, do not
order from Steps 15 and 16.

Startup Service Level II includes Basic, DEC start,
installation,
media/documentation, and
training

Complete the part number with the same
five digits as the part number for the
license.

DECservice

Up to 24 hours per day, up to
7 days per week

Basic

8 hours per day, Monday-Friday

All software products must have the same
level service.

Order media and documentation at no
extra charge.

For hardware maintenance services after
the initial one-year onsite hardware
warranty, choose one type of service per
system.
For specific ordering information and
quotations, consult your local Field
Service office.

OEM Channel
Options

16 Software
Maintenance
Services

OEM Sales
Agent

OEM offers end user full range of
Field Service products

OEM Service
Distributor

OEM purchases service in
volume and resells to end user

OEM
Partnership

Digital support for OEMs who
maintain their own and/or their
end user's equipment

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-33
Q_-35

Self-Maintenance Service
Agreement - includes updates

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-83
Q_-85

Basic Service Agreement includes updates, telephone
support, and online access to
a service database (for most
products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-93
Q_-95

DECsupport Service Agreement
- includes updates, telephone
support, preventative and
remedial support, and online
access to a service database (for
most products)

D
D

RX50
TK50

Q_-I3
Q_-I5

Installation Service - installation
of software products on system

Indirect reseller programs. For specific
ordering information and quotations,
consult your local Field Service office.

Choose only one type of service
agreement per system. All software
products must have the same type of
service agreement per CPU.
In general, complete the part number with
the same five digits as the part number
for the media and documentation kit.
For example, order QY505-x5 for
RSX-llM-PLUS distribution on a TK50.
To verify service part numbers, refer to
the latest Software Product Description
(SPD). (Refer to Table 1.28 for appropriate
part number and SPD number.)
Contact your local Software Product
Services (SPS) Business Account Specialist
if you have questions.

Systems 1.137

MicroPDP-ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.25 . Multinational Order Codes for Printers
Country/
Region

Language

English
United States
Belgium
Flemish
French
Canada
Danish
Denmark
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Katakana
Japan
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
South America
Spanish
Spain
Spanish
Israel
Hebrew
South America
Portuguese
Portugal
Portuguese
Switzerland
Italian
Hiragana
Japan
Australia/
New Zealand
English

1.138

Systems

LA75

LA210

LN03

LN03S

LG31

LJ250

Printer

LA75-CA

LA210-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AB

LA210-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AB

LA75-CA

LA210-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-AD

LA210-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LGK31-AD

LJ250-AD

LA75-AE

LA210-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LGK31-AE

LJ250-AE

LA75-CC

LA210-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AG

LA210-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LGK31-AG

LJ250-AG

LA75-AH

LA210-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AH

LA75-AI

LA210-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LGK31-AI

LJ250-AI

LA75-AJ

LA210-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

LGK31-AA

LA75-CB

LA210-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CB

LA210-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LA75-CC

LA210-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CC

LA210-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-AP

LA210-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AP

LA75-CA

LA210-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LGK31-AA

LJ250-CA

LA75-CA

LA210-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

LGK31-AA

LA75-AS

LA210-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

LGK31-CA

LJ250-AS

LA75-AT

LA210-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

LGK31-AT

LJ250-AT

LA75-CA

LA210-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

LGK31-CA

LA75-CC

LA210-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LGK31-CA

LJ250-CC

LA75-CB

LA210-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LGK31-AK

LJ250-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LGK31-AA

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

LGK31-AZ

LA75-AZ

LA210-AZ

LJ250-AZ

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q.bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/.53 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.26 • Multinational Order Codes for Video Terminals
Country/
Region

Language

VT320
Std Kit

VT320
WPSKit

VT330
Std Kit

VT330
WPSKit

VT340
Std Kit

VT340
WPSKit

United States
Belgium

English
Flemish

VT320--..A

VT330~-..A

VT330--..A

VT340--..A

VT320-_C

VT320--..A
VT320-_B
VT320-_C

VT330-_C

VT340-_C

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT320--Y
VT320-_G

VT330--Y
VT330-_G

VT340-_F
VT340-_G

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_L

VT320-~

VT330-_L

VT340-_L

VT320-~

VT330-~

VT340-~

VT320-_N

VT330-_N

VT340-_N
VT340-_P

VT320--..A
VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT320-_N
VT320-_P
VT320--..A
VT320-_S
VT320-_V

VT330-_S
VT330-_V

VT340-_S

VT320-_Z

VT330-_Z

VT340-_Z

VT320-~

Canada
French
Denmark
Danish
English
UK/Ireland
Finland
Finnish
W. Germany/Austria German
Holland
Dutch
Italy
Italian
Switzerland
French
Switzerland
German
Sweden
Swedish
Norway
Norwegian
France
French
Canada
English
Spain
Spanish
Portugal
Portuguese
Australia/
English
New Zealand

VT320-~

VT340-~

VT330-~

VT340-_C

VT340-~

VT340-_V

Table 1.27· Support for Hardware Options by Operating System
--------- RSX-ll -----••••

DELQA
DEQNA
DHQll
DHVll
DLVJl

M+

Micro/ A-to·Z
RSX

N
yl

Y
Y

RT·11

CTS·
300

RSTS/E Micro/ MPPRSTS
RSX

y4
yl

N
N

N
N
yl

N
N

Y
Y

MPPMicro/
RSX

MPP·
RT

Y
Y
Y
Y'

y2
y2
yl

DSM
·11
y4
Y
Y
Y

The following devices are supported by all of the above operating systems:
RD31
RD32
RX50
RX33
TK50
DZQll
IDECnet required
2Supported for target systems, not host systems
'Multiple DLVJls are not supported
4Supported in DEQNA mode only
Note: Refer to the SPD for hardware option support information not supplied by this table.

Systems

1.139

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q-bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP.ll/53 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.28 - Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Operating Systems

License
Only

RX50

TK50

Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

lS.16
12.09
12.1S

QY950-UZ
QY354-UZ
QYS21-UZ

QY950-H3
Q]354-H3
QYS21-H3

QY950-H5
QJ354-H5
QYS21-H5

QY950-GZ
QJ354-GZ
QYS21-GZ

lS.24
14.S3
19.12
lS.12
14.2S
13.01
14.35
14.70
9.21
12.01

QY029-UZ
QP029-UZ
QJ029-UZ
QYS29-UZ
QYSOO-UZ
QY430-UZ
QY62S-UZ
QY505-UZ
QY642-UZ
QY013-UZ

QY029-H3

QJ013-H3

QYS29-H5
QYSOO-H5
QR430-H5
QJ676-H5
QR500-H5
QJ642-H5
QJ013-H5

QY029-GZ
QP029-GZ
QJ029-GZ
QYS29-GZ
QYSOO-GZ
QR430-GZ
QJ62S-GZ
QR500-GZ
QJ642-GZ
QJ013-GZ

A-to-Z Layered Products
Business Graphics
Data Inquiry
Electronic Mail
Developer's Kit
Word Processing
Document Transfer

lS.19
lS.17
lS.26
lS.20
lS.lS
lS.31

QY953-UZ
QY952-UZ
QY955-UZ
QY954-UZ
QY951-UZ
QY957-UZ

QY953-H3
QY952-H3
QY955-H3
QY954-H3
QY951-H3
QY957-H3

QY953-H5
QY952-H5
QY955-H5
QY954-H5
QY951-H5
QY957-H5

QY953-GZ
QY952-GZ
QY955-GZ
QY954-GZ
QY951-GZ
QY957-GZ

BASIC-PLUS-2
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.11
lS.06
14.54
lS.09

QY91S-UZ
QYS05-UZ
QY916-UZ
QYS09-UZ

QYS09-H3

QY91S-H5
QYS05-H5
QY916-H5
QYS09-H5

QY91S-GZ
QYS05-GZ
QY916-GZ
QYS09-GZ

BASIC-PLUS
RT-11

12.05

QY913-UZ

QJ913-H3

QJ913-H5

QJ913-GZ

COBOL-S1
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

14.26
lS.03
13.16
lS.0S

QY994-UZ
QYS02-UZ
QY993-UZ
QYSOS-UZ

QY994-H5
QYS02-H5
QY993-H5
QYSOS-H5

QY994-GZ
QYS02-GZ
QY993-GZ
QYSOS-GZ

DATATRIEVE-11
RSX-11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.4S
lS.15
12.4S
lS.30

QY301-UZ
QYS19-UZ
QY300-UZ
QY302-UZ

DECdx
RSX-11M
RSTS/E

13.39
13.32

QJ70S-UZ
QJ706-UZ

DECmail-11
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.27
13.27
13.19
13.19

QR454-UZ
QYS16-UZ
QR451-UZ
QYS15-UZ

DECnet
RSX-11M - Full Node
RSX-11M - End Node
RSX-11M-PLUS - Full Node
RSX-11M-PLUS - End Node
RSX-llS - Full Node
RSX-11S - End Node
Micro/RSX-End Node Only
RT-11
DECnet/E

10.75
10.75
10.66
10.66
10.74
10.74
lS.27
10.72
10.73

QJ764-UZ
QJ765-UZ
QJ766-UZ'
QJ767-UZ
QJ762-UZ
QJ763-UZ
QY766-UZ
QJ6S7-UZ
QY692-UZ

A-to-Z Base System
CTS-300
DSM-11
MicroPower/PascalMicro/RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
MicroPower/Pascal-RT
Micro/RSTS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RSX-11M
RSX-11M-PLUS
RSX-11S
RT-11

SPD#

QYS29-H3
QYSOO-H3

Layered Products

1.140

Systems

QYS05-H3

QYS02-H3
QYSOS-H3

QY301-GZ
QYS19-GZ
QY300-GZ
QY302-GZ

QYS19-H3
QY302-H3

QJ70S-GZ
QJ706-GZ

QYS16-H3
QYS15-H3

QY766-H3
QJ6S7-H3

QR454-H5
QYS16-H5
QR451-H5
QYS15-H5

QR454-GZ
QYS16-GZ
QR451-GZ
QYS15-GZ

QJ764-H5
QJ765-H5
QJ766-H5
QJ767-H5
QJ762-H5
QJ763-H5
QY766-H5

QJ764-GZ
QJ765-GZ
QJ766-GZ
QJ767-GZ
QJ762-GZ
QJ763-GZ
QY766-GZ
QJ6S7-GZ
QY692-GZ

QY692-H5

MicroPDP.ll/53 Q·bus Multiuser Systems
MicroPDP-ll/.53 System Ordering Tables
Table 1.28 (Continued) - Ordering Information for Operating Systems and Layered Products
Layered Products
(Continued)

SPD#

License
Only

RX50

TK50

Media/Doc.

Documentation
Only

DECtype
RSX·11M·PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.B2
1B.14

QR03B-UZ
QY03B-UZ

QY03B-H3

QR03B-GZ
QY03B-GZ

DECword
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

13.14
13.14

QR4BO-UZ
QY4BO-UZ

QY4BO-H3

QR4BO-GZ
QY4BO-GZ

Development Kits
Micro/RSX
Micro/RSTS

14.2B
1B.12

QYBOO-UZ

14.24

14.08

QY540-UZ
QYB07-UZ
QY52B-UZ
QY519-UZ

FMS
RSX·llM, S, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
RT-ll

12.27
18.34
13.17
12.22

QY715-UZ
QY322-UZ
QY716-UZ
QJ713-UZ

FORTRAN-IV
RSX·11M, M·PLUS
RT·ll, CTS·300
RSTS/E

14.63
12.10
12.41

QP230-UZ
QYB13-UZ
QR435-UZ

FORTRAN-77
RSX·11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS
RT-ll

14.31
18.04
14.49
18.10
A3.55

QY668-UZ
QYB03-UZ
QY100-UZ
QY810-UZ
QA609-DZ

Pascal
RSX·llM, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX

14.18
18.07

QY128-UZ
QYB06-UZ

Peripheral Processor Tool Kit
RT·ll
RSX·11M, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

12.70
13.25
18.48

QJV51-UZ
QJV52-UZ
QYV52-UZ

PDP-II Symbolic Debugger
RSX·llM, M-PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

12.78
14.79
12.79
1B.ll

QY232-UZ
QY804-UZ
QY233-UZ
QY811-UZ

RTEM·ll
RSX·llM
RSX-11M-PLUS
Micro/RSX

15.63
15.63
15.63

12.07

orBOL
RSX·11M·PLUS
Micro/RSX
RSTS/E
Micro/RSTS

SORT/MERGE
RSX-llM, M·PLUS
Micro/RSX

1B.05
14.0B

1B.13

QYB01-H3
QY830-H3

QY801-H5
QY830-H5

QYB01-GZ

QYB07-H3

QY807-H5

QYB07-GZ
QY52B-GZ

QY519-H3

QY519-H5

QY519-GZ

QY830-GZ

QY540-GZ

Q]715-GZ
QY322-GZ
QJ716-GZ
QJ713-GZ

QY322-H3
QJ713-H3

QP230-GZ
QJB13-H3

QJB13-H5

QJB13-GZ

QR435-GZ

QY66B-H5
QYB03-H3
QYB10-H3

QY803-H5
QYIOO-H5
QY810-H5

QA609-H3

QY806-H5

QYBll-H3

QY232-H5
QY804-H5
QY233-H5
QY811-H5

QJ291-UZ
QJ304-UZ
QY004-UZ

QY004-H3

QJ291-H5
QJ304-H5
QY004-H5

QP602-UZ
QY812-UZ

QY812-H3

QY804-H3

QY100-GZ
QYB10-GZ

QA609-GZ

QY12B-H5

QY806-H3

QY66B-GZ
QYB03-GZ

QY12B-GZ
QYB06-GZ

QY232-GZ
QYB04-GZ

QY233-GZ
QY811-GZ

QJ291-GZ
QJ304-GZ
QY004-GZ

QP602-GZ
QY812-GZ

Systems 1.141

Systems II
PDP-ll UNIBUS Multiuser Systems

PDP-11 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Introduction

Introduction

Today Digital offers new, enhanced variations of the high-performance
PDP-11/84 system. Based on our highly successful UNIBUS technology, this
product provides a wide range of minicomputer solutions; from small, dedicated control, communications, and computational applications to larger
business and scientific timesharing systems. The UNIBUS is a bidirectional,
asynchronous interconnect that links this versatile processor with the industry's most comprehensive set of mass storage systems and communications
interfaces. It provides the configuration flexibility and growth capacity that
make this processor the ideal solution for a broad spectrum of applications.
The PDP-ll/84 executes a common instruction set, runs under the control of
any of Digital's PDP-ll operating systems, and makes available the problemsolving power of Digital's proven languages, data management, communications, and networking products.

PDP· 11/84

The PDP-11/84 is the newest high-end member of the PDP-ll family. It delivers PDP-11/70-class performance for a fraction of the cost. It is the most powerful, yet cost-effective UNIBUS processor ever designed. The PDP-11/84 is
uniquely suited to span the entire range of traditional PDP-U applications.
It effectively combines all the advantages of today's technology with a proven
architecture and more than a decade of system engineering enhancements.
Digital's continued investment and commitment to the PDP-II family and
our installed base of PDP-II customers is reflected in the new, enhanced
PDP-II/84 system packaging designs highlighted throughout this catalog
edition.

Features

• Powerful, high-performance single-board CPU features Digital's C-MOS
I8-MHz ]-11 chipset
• The full PDP-11 instruction set including floating-point and EIS instructions,
plus an integral floating-point co-processor
• Sophisticated 22-bit memory management, dual register set, separate instruction and data space, and three system modes: kernel, supervisor, and user
• Large 8-Kbyte CPU cache memory speeds program execution
• 2 Mbytes of memory, expandable up to 4 Mbytes with high-density
PMI ECC MOS memory
• Private Memory Interconnect (PMI) architecture for high-speed data transfers
between CPU and memory
• 32-Kbyte bootstrap/diagnostic ROM facility and 8-Kbyte EEPROM
• Program-controlled line-frequency clock
• One switch-selectable EIA/CCITT serial-line asynchronous interface for
console terminal connection.
• ASCII console logic for system control and debugging with optional console
terminal

n.2

Systems

PDP·tt UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Introduction

Features
(Continued)

• High-speed DMA cache that delivers faster memory access for DMA
peripheral devices
• Concurrent processing that allows the simultaneous execution of instructions
and D MA transfers
• Programmable bus management that offers the CPU bus mastership regardless
of pending DMA I/O requests
• New compact design that requires less power and floor space and offers more
expansion capacity and flexibility than comparable system configurations
• New 9-slot backplane, housed in new 5.25-inch and l0.5-inch-by-19-inch rackmount OEM design centers
• The lO.5-inch OEM design center is expandable to 27 slots with optional
DDll-DK expansion backplanes
• New, enhanced system packaging that offers more configuration flexibility and
growth capacity than ever before

Systems 11.3

PDP-11 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Introduction
PDP-ll/84 Models
Memory

Enclosure

11/84-DC/DD
-DE/DF

13.3-cm (5.25-in)
rackmount box

11/84-EC/ED
-EE/EF

2
4

26.6-cm (lO.5-in)
rackmount box

lIX84-EC/ED
-EE/EF

2
4

H9642 cabinet
single-body

lIW84-EC/ED
-EC/EF

2
4

H9645 cabinet
wide-body

11 Y84-EC/ED
-EE/EF

H9647 cabinet
four-high

Model

SWLic

New OEM Design Centers

New Kernel Systems

New System Building Block Configurations
SX-JX200-EC/ED
-EE/EF

2
4

H9642 cabinet

Yes

SX-JX300-EC/ED
-EE/EF

2
4

H9645 cabinet

Yes

SX-JX400-EC/ED
-EE/EF

2
4

H9647 cabinet

Yes
Yes

11/84-U2

11/84-P upgrade

11/84-UH/UJ

13.3-cm (5.25-in)
rackmount box

Yes

11/84-UK/UL

26.6-cm (lO.5-in)
rack mount box

Yes

* 11/84-UD/UE

13.3-cm (5.25-in)
rack mount box (only)

* 11/84-UF/UG

26.6-cm (lO.5-in)
rackmount box (only)

New System Upgrade Packages

Hardware Enclosures Only

*Processor and memory modules not included.
All 11/84-U variations include installation, deinstallation, and select PDP-11
operating system licenses as specified. All PDP-11/84 models include
1-year DEC service warranty.

n.4

Systems

PDP-II UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Options

UNIBUS Options

The following is a partial listing of available system options for the PDP-ll/84.
These options and all ordering details are completely described in the Options
and Disks and Tapes chapters. PDP-l1/84 systems also support a wide range of
older UNIBUS interfaces and device options.

Memory Options

MSVll-JD

I-Mbyte PMI ECC MOS memory

MSVll·JE

2-Mbyte PMI ECC MOS memory

DHUll·M

16-line asynchronous DMA multiplexer

DUPll·M

Single-line synchronous interface

DMRll·M

Single-line synchronous interface

DMPll·M

Single-line synchronous interface

PCLll·B

Multipoint parallel communications link

KMSlp·M

Single-line synchronous communications front-end processor

KMSll.BDjBE

8-line synchronous communications front-end processor

DELUA·M

High-performance Ethernet communications controller

H7231·E

l1X84 A-series battery backup option (cabinet level)

H7231·F

11/84 A-series battery backup option (box level)

H7231·H

l1X84 and 11 Y84 E-series battery backup option

H7231·J

11 W84 E-series battery backup option

DRll-C

General purpose parallel interface

DRll-W

General purpose DMA parallel interface

DRll-WC

DRII-WP with adapter module, cables, test connectors, and
I/O distribution panel

DRll-WD

DRII-WC without interface module

DRSll-A

48-channel output module

DRSll-B

48-channel output module with open collector drivers

DRSll·MP

Optically isolated dc drivers with open collectors

DRUll-CC

Alternate buffer interface with TTL drivers

DRUll-CD

Alternate buffer interface with differential drivers

DSSll-A

Digital input device (TTL)

DSSll-B

Digital input device

DSSll-MP

Contact sense input

IECll-AB

IEEE-488 UNIBUS interface

IEUll-AB

UNIBUS to dual IEEE-488 interface

KWll-P

Programmable realtime clock

IPl12-A

Industrial I/O subsystem

Communications Options

Battery Backup Options

Realtime Options

Systems

n.5

PDP-II UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Options

Disk Storage Options

Tape Storage Options

SA482-AA/AD

2.5-Gbyte storage array, four 622-Mbyte drives, 120/240 V

SA482-HA/HD

1.244-Gbyte storage array, two 622-Mbyte drives, 120/240 V

SA482-LA/LD

1.866-Gbyte storage array, three 622-Mbyte drives, 120/240 V

RA82-EA/ED

1.866-Gbyte storage array, three 622-Mbyte drives, 42-inchhigh cabinet, 120/240 V

RA82-DA/DD

1.244-Gbyte storage array, two 622-Mbyte drives, 42-inchhigh cabinet, 120/240 V

RA82-CA/CD

622-Mbyte drive, 42-inch-high cabinet, 120/240 V

RA82-AA/AD

622-Mbyte fixed-disk drive, 120/240 V

RA81-AA/AD

456-Mbyte fixed-disk drive, 120/240 V

RA60-AA/AD

205-Mbyte removable-disk drive, 120/240 V

UDA50-A

RA81, RA80, and RA60 disk controller

RUC25·AA/AB

52-Mbyte (26 fixed/26 removable) disk drive and UNIBUS
controller, 120/240 V

RX50.DA/DB

800-Kbyte tabletop dual-floppy diskette drive

RX50-RA/RB

800-Kbyte rackmount dual-floppy diskette drive

RUX50·YA

UNIBUS controller for 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive

TU81E.AA/AB

145/40-Mbyte magnetic-tape drive, 6,250 b/in (GCR), 1,600
b/in (PE) (25 and 75 in/sec), 120/240 V (Consult the SPD to determine whether operating system will support this device as a
TU81 or TU81E.)

TU80.AA/AB

40-Mbyte magnetic-tape drive (25 and 100 in/s), 120/240 V

TSU05·AA/AB

40-Mbyte magnetic-tape drive (25 and 100 in/s), 120/240 V

TK50.DA/DB

95-Mbyte tabletop cartridge-tape drive, 120/240 V

TK50-RA/RB

95-Mbyte rackmount cartridge-tape drive, 120/240 V

TUK50·AB

Controller for all rackmount and tabletop installations except
11/84 A-series 10.5-inch Design Center

TUK50·BB

Includes 3-ft cable for use with 11/84 A-series only

Note: All rackmount TK50 and RX50 variations require H9302 installation kit
and H9504-SC blank filler panel.

I/O Cabinet Kit and
Bulkhead Expansion Options

CK·DHUll· VD Remote 1/0 distribution cabinet kit; 8 lines with modem control,

8 without; 2 panel units (11/84 D- and E·series box, all cabinets)
CK·DHUll· VF

Remote 1/0 distribution cabinet kit; 8 lines with modem
control, 8 without; 2 panel units (11/84 A-series box only)

CK·DZll .. vn

Remote 1/0 distribution cabinet kit; 8 lines with modem
control, 8 without; 2 panel units (11/84 D- and E-series box,
all cabinets)

CK·DZll·VF

Remote 1/0 cabinet kit; 8 lines without modem control, 1 panel
unit (11/84 A-series box only)

H9544·EX

1/0 bulkhead expansion kit for H9645 cabinets; extends FCCshielding to bottom 10.5-inch bay and adds 16 additional 1/0

panel units
D.6

Systems

PDP-II UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Options

UNIBUS Expansion Hardware

Storage Expansion Hardware

BAII-LE/LF

5 .25-inch-high rackmount UNIBUS expansion box

BAIIA-EX/EY

Standard 10.5-inch-by-19-inch rackmount UNIBUS expansion
·box. 6-system unit (27-s10t capacity).

DBll-MP

UNIBUS repeater. Adds 19 unit bus loads and extends the
UNIBUS length to 15.2 meters (50 feet).

DDII-CK

Four-slot UNIBUS expansion backplane

DDII-DK

Nine-slot UNIBUS expansion backplane

H9642-FA/FB

Standard partitioned UNIBUS system expansion cabinet.
Includes shielded mounting space for BA11A-EX/EY, and one
10.5-inch device option. Provides 13 I/O distribution panel
inserts.

H9642-FC/FD

Standard unpartitioned UNIBUS system expansion cabinet.
Includes mounting space for BA11A-EX/EY. Provides 29 I/O
distribution panel inserts.

H9642-EA/EB

Standard (42-inch-high) H9642 shielded single-bay UNIBUS
CPU cabinet with 877 power controller.

H9645-EA/EB

Standard (42-inch-high) H9645 shielded widebody UNIBUS
CPU cabinet with 877 power controller.

H9647-EX/EY

Standard 4-HI H9647 (60.5-inch-high) shielded wide body
UNIBUS CPU cabinet with three-phase power controller.

H9647-A

Tall (60.5-inch), general purpose, four-high, widebody, EMI/RFI,
shielded system cabinet with 877 power controller.

H9646-AH/AJ

60-inch tall, four-high, deep cabinet with three-phase power
controller for mounting RA-type disks including RA60.

H9642-AP/AR

Top-loading deep cabinet for the RA60 removable disk. Can accommodate any combination of three RA60s, RA82s, and
RA81s in the middle and bottom cabinet bays.

H9642.AS/AT

Top-loading standalone cabinet for RA81 or RA82.

H9642-DB/DC

Standard 42-inch-high, general purpose, storage/expansion
cabinet. Can accommodate three 5 .25-inch or 10.5-inch massstorage devices. Does not accommodate RA60s. This cabinet is
intended for integration with an existing pre-FCC unshielded
system cabinet and includes a joiner panel but no end panels.
Alternate uses require ordering two H9544-A end panels.
(When ordering for alternate uses, please state "for onsite
system integration" in the notes section of your order form
to avoid delayed shipment.)

Systems

n.7

PDP·tt UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Configuring Guidelines

Configuring Guidelines

New PDP-11/84 E-series systems are available in four levels of integration
• Two rackmountable box-level OEM design centers provide significant capacity
and expansion space tp span the gamut of traditional PDP-11 applications.
• The Cabinet-based Kernel Systems provide a foundation for OEM system
integration by providing a selection of system and load devices plus a wide assortment of peripheral options. All product variations are based upon the 10.5inch OEM design center.
• The System Building Blocks (SBBs) are based upon the kernel systems and
include a choice of PDP-11 software licenses.
• The standard system offering consists of a subset of typical SBB configurations. These packages are offered periodically to simplify ordering high-volume
variations of the base product set.

System Building Blocks

System building blocks allow you to take maximum advantage of Digital's
packaging flexibility and to help keep the physical size and price ofa system
configuration to a minimum. With system building blocks, it is easy to order a
system configuration that matches your precise requirements. The menu below
is intended to provide a list of recommended storage and console terminal
options for today's UNIBUS system building blocks.
A console terminal and at least one removable medium are required to install
and service a system. Consult the Software Product Descriptions for minimum
configuring requirements and detailed device support information.
Console Terminals

System Devices

Load Devices

VT300

RA81-AA/AD

TU80-AA/AB

VT200

RA60-AA/AD

TU8IE-AA/AB

LAIOO

RA82-EA/ED, -DA/DD, -CA/CD, -AAfAD

TSU05-AA/AB

LA210

SA482-EAfED, -HAfHD, -LA/LD

RX50-D/R
TK50-D/R

1/0 Distribution Panel

Along with the EMI/RFI advantages of today's UNIBUS systems packaging
come some new configuration considerations. The most important of these is
the I/O distribution panel (IODP). The IODP provides the transition between
internal cabling and the external shielded cabling to the peripheral devices.
All cables that enter or exit cabinets must pass through the IODP.
The I/O device connections are made with three components - an internal
cable that originates at the option module or controller, a shielded external
cable from the I/O panel to the peripheral, and a panel insert that mounts in
the IODP and joins the internal and external cables. With the IODP, the panel
insert provides the shielding and filtering necessary to contain potential
EMI/RFI interference within the cabinet.
The IODP is an integral part of the CPU system cabinet. The panel insert and
internal cable are provided with the specific option. The capacity of the IODP
varies with the cabinet and CPU type. The type and style of inserts vary
depending on the amount and type of connectors required by each option.
Each IODP accepts multiple inserts. Unused IODP space is filled with blank
inserts to maintain shielding integrity.

D.8

Systems

PDP-II UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Configuring Guidelines

PDP.ll/84 Kernel System
and System Building
Block Configurations
(llX84, llW84, llY84, SX·JX200,
SX.JX300, and SX·JX400)

These PDP-11/84 product variations feature the new expandable 10.5-inch design center packaged in a choice of shielded 42-inch and 60-inch high cabinets.
The base configurations include the 11/84 CPU and 2 or 4 Mbytes of memory.
The system building block product also includes a choice of several PDP-11 operating system licenses. All product variations offer 10.5 inches of mounting
space either above or both above and below the processor design center for
combinations of 5 .25-inch and 10.5-inch rackmount device options. At the
rear of the cabinet there is a large IODP bulkhead that provides panel space
for option connection. These configurations are generally used to create large
systems that include many disks, magnetic tapes, and/or many (more than
32) terminals or communication lines.

Horizontal I/O Connection Panel
Standard on H9642 CPU Cabinets

Dedicated panel unit
for SLU connector

llX84·E and
SX·JX200.E

Dedicated panel space
for RL02 connector

Dedicated panel space
for 2 SLU connectors

Dedicated panel space
for 877 power controller

Blankranel unitI
total 0 12 panel units ~' ~, _
available for option,
'
connection

lI "- "--JI"
llW84·E and
SX·JX300·E

Systems

ll.9

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
PDP-ll/84 S.2S-inch Rackmount Design Center

Product Description

The PDP-11/84 is offered in a new 5 .25-inch rackmount variation with either
2 or 4 Mbytes of memory. The box configuration offers memory expansion to
4 Mbytes using MSV11-J PMI memory modules.

Features

• PDP-11/84 CPU and power supply {400 watts available}
• 2 Mbytes or 4 Mbytes of PMI ECC MOS memory
• 9-slot backplane {five slots for system expansion}
• Standard 13.3-cm {5 .25-inch-by-19-inch} rackmount enclosure
• 1-year warranty

CPU Box Expansion

The PDP-11/84 box products are designed around a 9-slot backplane that
includes 5 slots for system option expansion. An extended battery backup
option is available {H7231-F}.

Memory Expansion

Additional memory may be added in 1- or 2-Mbyte increments, up to a maximum of 4 Mbytes {MSV11-JD or MSV11-JE}.

System Expansion

PDP-11/84 box products may be expanded by adding internal options and
external mass storage. The UNIBUS may be extended outside of the box with
a standard UNIBUS cable and UNIBUS PDP-11 expansion boxes.

n.IO

Systems

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
PDP.ll/84 S.2S·inch Rackmount Design Center

Ordering Information

11/84.DC/DD

PDP-11/84-D 5.25-inch-high design center with 2 Mbytes of
memory (MSV11-JE) in 13.3 cm (5.25-inch) box.

11/84-DE/DF

PDP-11/84-D 5.25-inch-high design center with 4 Mbytes of
memory (2 MSV11-JE) in 13.3-cm (5.25-inch) box.

Diagnostics are not included with the standard OEM base product. Order
separately.
Configuration Template
Power
Wattl Anil.
uled
able

Slot

Option

KDJll-B

11/84 CPU

MSVI1-JD or MSVI1-JE

Memory

MSVI1-JD or MSVI1-JE

Memory

KTJll-B

UBA Interface

de Power
, VOItI
U Volta
Ampi Avail· Ampi Avail.
able
uled
able
uled

400

120

280

13.4

36.6

-UVOItI
Ampi Anil·
able
uled

1.9

BUI
Loadl
Loadl Avail.
Uled
able
20

Hu or Quad UNIBUS Optionl

Slotl

Hu or Quad UNIBUS Optionl

Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hu or Qnad UNIBUS Optionl
Hu or Quad UNIBUS Optionl

Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.

Systems 11.11

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
PDP.U/84 lO.;·inch Rackmount Design Center

Product Description

The PDP-l 1/84 is offered in a new lO.5-inch rackmount variation with either
2 or 4 Mbytes of memory. The box configuration offers memory expansion to
4 Mbytes using MSVll-J PMI memory modules and offers added expansion
capacity for a total of 27 slots (23 slots for additional system options).

Features

• PDP-l 1/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power available
• 2 or 4 Mbytes of MSV11-J PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DDll-DK or DDll-CK backplanes
• Standard 26.6-cm (l0.5-inch-by-19-inch) rackmount enclosure

CPU Box Expansion

The PDP-l 1/84 box products are designed around a 9-slot CPU backplane that
includes five slots for system option expansion. The 9-slot backplane can be extended up to 27 module slots with optional DDll-DK and DDll-CK expansion
backplanes. An optional battery backup unit is available (H723l-J).

Memory Expansion

An additional MSVll-J memory may be added in 1- or 2-Mbyte increments, up
to a maximum of 4 Mbytes (MSVll-JD or -JE).

System Expansion

PDP-l 1/84 box products may be expanded by adding internal options and
external mass storage. The UNIBUS ,may be extended outside of the box with
a standard UNIBUS cable and UNIBUS PDP-II expansion boxes.

Ordering Information

11/84-EC/ED

PDP-l 1/84 E-series design center with 2 Mbytes of memory
(1 MSV11-JE) in lO.5-inch box.

ll/84-EE/EF

PD P-1l/84 E-series design center with 4 Mbytes of memory
(2 MSVll-JE) in lO.5-inch box.

Diagnostics are not included with the product. Order separately.

n.l2· Systems

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
PDP.l1/84 lO.S·inch Rackmount Design Center
Configuration Template
CPU backplane

Power

Watu
u.ed

Slot

Option

Available

de Power
5 Volta
is Volt.
Ampi Avail. Amp. Avail.
able
u.ed
.ble
u.ed

736

100

-is Volta

Amp.
u.ed

Avail.
.ble

BUI
Load.
Loadl Avail·
u.ed
able

11/84 CPU

KDJll-B
MSVll-JD or MSVll-JE

Memory

MSVII-JD or MSVII-JE

Memory

KTJll-B

UBA Interface

120

~96

13.4

86.6

4.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Slot.

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Modified
UNIBUS
~ified
U BUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane
Slot
10

Power
WIIU Avail·
uled
able

de Power
5 Volu
is Volt.
Ampi Avail. Amp. Avail.
able
u.ed
able
uled

Amp.
u.ed

Avail.
able

Bu.
Loadl
Loadl Avail.
u.ed
able

Power
Watts Avail.
uled
able

de Power
5Voltl
15Voltl
Amps Avail· Amps Avail·
used
able
able
uled

-15 Volts
Amps Avail.
u.ed
able

BlII
Load.
Loadl A •• iI.
used
.ble

-is Volt.

Option
UNIBUS In

11
12

16
17
18

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane
Slot
19

Option
UNIBUS In

20
21
22
23
24

25
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.
Optional expansion backplane 5-volt curent rating is 28 A maximum.

Systems II.13

PDP· 11/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
llX84 Single-bay Kernel Systems

Product Description

The l1X84 is offered in two single-bay kernel system configurations, providing
either 2 or 4 Mbytes of memory. These systems feature the 27 -slot-capacity
10.5-inch design center enclosed in a shielded 42-inch.;high H9642-style cabinet. These configurations offer memory expansion to 4 Mbytes using MSVI1-J
memory modules, and provide four system units of additional backplane
mounting space. Optional system options may be selected from the list of
UNIBUS options highlighted in the introduction.

Features

• PDP-ll/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power available
• 2 or 4 Mbytes of MSVII-J PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DDII-DK or DDII-CK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 13 panel units for FCC compliant system I/O
• Flexible system packaging - 42-inch-high H9642 cabinets with power controllers and mounting space for one 10.5-inch peripheral option

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PDP-ll/84 system cabinet products provide six system units of space for
backplane expansion. The 9-slot backplane can be extended with DDII-CK or
DDII-DK expansion backplanes. Mounting space is provided for an optional
H7231-H battery backup unit.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSVII-JD or -JE memory
modules.

Mass Storage and System Expansion

There is one 26.6-cm (lO.5-inch) cavity for mounting disk or tape options.
The RA81, RA82, RC25, RL02, RX50, TS05, and TK50 options may be
integrated into this configuration. Additional expansion can be provided via
additional H9642 cabinets and UNIBUS PDP-II expansion boxes.

II.14

Systems

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
llX84 Single-bay Kernel Systems

Ordering Information

llX84-EC/ED

PDP-11/84 kernel system with 2 Mbytes of memory
(1 MSV11-JE) in shielded H9642-style cabinet.

llX84-EE/EF

PDP-11/84 kernel system with 4 Mbytes of memory
(2 MSV11-JE) in shielded H9642-style cabinet.

When a kernel system is ordered, system diagnostics are included. The load
medium (RL02, tape, RC25, etc.) must be specified in the notes section of the
Manufacturing Order Form. The default medium is 1,600-b/in magtape.
Configuration Template

CPU backplane
A

Power
Watts Avail.
used
able

Slot

Option

KDJ11-B

11/84 CPU

MSV11-JD ~r MSV11-JE

Memory

MSV11-JD or MSV11-JE

Memory

KTJ11-B

UBA Interface

d. Power
15 Volts
'Volu
Amps Avail. Ampi Avail.
uled
able
uled
able

736

100

-15 VOItI
Ampi
uled

Avail.
able

BUI
Loadl
Loadl Avail.
uled
able

Panel
Units
Avail·
U.ed
able

120

596

13.4

86.6

4.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Slots

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane
Slot
10

Power
Watt. Avail.
used
able

d.Power
is Volts
5 Volt.
Amp. Avail. Amp. Avail.
uled
able
u.ed
able

Amp.
uled

Avail.
able

Bu.
Load.
Load. Avail.
able
uled

Panel
Units
Avail.
U.ed
able

Power
Watt. Avail.
u.ed
able

d.Power
5 Volts
15 Volt.
Amp. Avail.
Amp. Avail·
used
able
u.ed
able

-15 Volt.
Amp. Avail·
uled
able

BUI
Load.
Load. Avail.
uled
able

Panel
Unit.
Avail·
Used
able

-15 Volt.

Option
UNIBUS In

11
12
1}

15
16

17
18

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane
Slot
19

Option
UNIBUS In

21
22
23

24
25
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt· current rating is 50 A maximum.
Optional expansion backplane 5-volt current rating is 28 A maximum.
Systems

n.15

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
llW84 Widebody Kernel Systems

Product Description

The 11 W84 is offered in two kernel system configurations, providing
either 2 or 4 Mbytes of memory. These systems feature the 27-slot 10.5-inch
design center enclosed in a shielded 42-inch-high H9645-style cabinet. These
configurations offer memory expansion to 4 Mbytes using MSVII-J memory
modules, and provide four system units of additional backplane mounting
space. Optional system options may be selected from the list of UNIBUS options highlighted in the introduction.

Features

• PDP-ll/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power
• 2 or 4 Mbytes of MSVII-JE PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DDII-DK or DDII-CK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 12 panel units for FCC-compliant system I/O connectivity (optional expansion)
• Flexible system packaging - 42-inch-high H9645 cabinets with power controller and mounting space for two 10.5-inch peripheral options

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PD P-ll/84 system cabinet products provide six system units of space for
backplane expansion. The 9-slot backplane can be extended with DDII-CK
or DDII-DK expansion backplanes. Mounting space is provided for an
optional H7231-J battery backup unit.

I/O Expansion

Standard configuration with 12 I/O distribution panels can be boosted to 28 I/O
distribution panels with H9544-EX I/O bulkhead expansion kit. H9544-EX
adds shielding and 16 I/O disbribution panels to bottom 10.5-inch bay, in lieu
of a mass storage device.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSV II-JD or -JE memory modules.

Mass Storage and System Expansion

There are two 26.6-cm(10.5-inch) cavities for mounting disk or tape options.
The RA81, RA82, RC25, RL02, RX50, TS05, and TK50 options may be integrated into this configuration. Additional system expansion can be provided
via additional H9642 cabinets and UNIBUS expansion boxes.

n.16

Systems

PDP-l1/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
11 W84 Widebody Kernel Systems

Ordering Information

llW84·EC/ED PDP-ll/84 kernel system with 2 Mbytes of memory
(1 MSVII-JE) in shielded H9645-style cabinet.
llW84·EE/EF

PDP-ll/84 kernel system with 4 Mbytes of memory
(2 MSVII-JE) in shielded H9645-style cabinet.

Power
Watt. Availuled
able
D

Slot

11/84 CPU

MSV11-JD or MSV11-JE

Memory

MSV11-JD or MSVll-JE

Memory

KTJll-B

UBA Interface

100

736

Option

KDJll-B

dc:Power
1SVolt.
SVolt.
Ampl Avail- Amps Availuled
able
uled
able

-iSVOItI
Amps Availuled
able

Bu.
Loadl
Loadl Availuled
able
20

Panel
Unit.
AvailUled
able
12
1

120

596

13.4

46.6

1.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Optionl
Siotl

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watt. Availused
able
Slot
10

de Power
S Volt.
is Volt.
Amps Avail- Amp. Availuled
able
uled
able

Available

Loads
Loads Availuled
able

Panel
Units
AvailUsed
able

- 1.5 Volt.
Amp. Availused
able

Bus
Load.
Load. Availused
able

Panel
Unit.
AvailUsed
able

BUI

- U Volts

Amps
u.ed

Option
UNIBUS In

12
13

16
17

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane

Power.
Watts Availused
able
Slot
19

Option

d.Power
5 Volts
1.5 Volt.
Amp. Avail- Amp. Availused
able
used
able
28

UNIBUS In

20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.

Systems

D.l7

PDP-ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
11 Y84 Four-high Kernel Systems

Product Description

The 11 Y84 is offered in two kernel system configurations, providing
either 2 or 4 Mbytes of memory. These systems feature the 11/84 E-series
10.5-inch design center enclosed in a shielded 60-inch H9647 cabinet. These
configurations offer memory expansion to 4 Mbytes using MSV11-J memory
modules, and provide four system units of additional backplane mounting
space. Optional system options may be selected from the list of UNIBUS
options highlighted in the introduction.

Features

• PDP-11/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts de output power
• 2 or 4 Mbytes of MSV11-JE PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DD11-DK orDD11-CK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 24 panel units for FCC-compliant system I/O connectivity (optional expansion)
• Flexible system packaging - 60-inch-high H9647 cabinets with three-phase
power controllers and mounting space for two 10.5-inch peripheral options and
one BA11A-EX/EY UNIBUS expansion box

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PDP-11/84 system cabinet products provide six system units of space for
backplane expansion. The 9-slot backplane can be extended with DD11-CK
or DD11-DK expansion backplanes for a total of 27 slots. Mounting space is
provided within the cabinet for an optional H7231-H battery backup unit.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSV11-JD or -JE memory
modules.

Mass Storage and System Expansion

There are two 10.5-inch cavities for mounting disk or tape options (RA82,
RA81, RC25, RL02, TSU05, TK50, and RX50) in the upper half of the cabinet.
There is also one shielded 10.5-inch cavity below the processor, intended for a
BAllA expansion box. Additional expansion capacity external to cabinet is
available with H9642 expansion cabinets.

D.1S

Systems

PDP-ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
llY84 Four-high Kernel Systems

Ordering Information

llY84-EC/ED

PDP-11/84 kernel system with 2 Mbytes of memory
(1 MSV11-JE) in shielded H9647-style cabinet.

llY84-EE/EF

PDP-11/84 kernel system with 4 Mbytes of memory
(2 MSV11-JE) in shielded H9647-style cabinet.

Power
Watts Availuled
able
D

Slot

Option

KDJ11-B

11/84 CPU

MSVll-JD or MSVll-JE

Memory

MSVll-JD or MSVll-JE

Memory

KTJll-B

UBA Interface

de Power
IS Volta
'VOItI
Ampi Avail- Amp. Availuacd
able
uaed
able

736

100

-IS VOItI

Amp.
uled

Available

BUI
Loads
Loadl Availused
able

Panel
Units
AvailVied
able

24
1

120

596

13.4

36.6

1.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Slotl

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Optionl
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watll Availu.ed
able
Slot
10

Option

dcPower
15 VOItI
'Volts
Amps Avail- Amps Availu.ed
able
used
able

-15 Volts
Amp. Availused
able

Bus
Load.
Loads Availuaed
able

Panel
Unill
AvailUsed
able

-15 Volu
Amp. Availused
able

Bus
Loads
Loads Availused
able

Panel
Units
AvailUsed
able

UNIBUS In

11
12
13

14
15

16
17
18

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watts Availused
able
Slot

Option

de: Power
, Volts
IS Volts
Amps Avail- Amps Availused
able
u.ed
able
28

UNIBUS In
20
21

2'
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.

Systems

n.19

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX200 Single-bay System Building Blocks

Product Description

The PDP-11/84-E is available in two system building block configurations.
These configurations offer all the features of the 11X84 kernel systems and include a choice of four PDP-II operating system licenses. Select from the assortment of system options listed in the UNIBUS Options section of this chapter.
A supportable system requires at least one removable media (tape or disk) for
loading software and diagnostics. A console terminal should be ordered separately.

Features

• PDP-11/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power available
• 2 to 4 Mbytes of MSV 11-JE PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DD11-DK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 13 panel units for FCC-compliant system I/O system capacity
• Flexible system packaging - 42-inch-high H9642 cabinets with power controllers and mounting space for one 10.5-inch peripheral options
• RSTS/E, RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS, or DSM-11 license (-UZ) included

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PDP-11/84 system cabinets include six system units of backplane mounting
space. The 9-slot CPU backplane can be extended with additional DD11-DK
expansion backplanes for a total of 27 slots. Mounting space is available in the
cabinets for an H7231-H battery backup unit.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSV11- JD or -JE memory
modules.

Mass Storage Expansion

There is one 26.6-cm (lO.5-inch) cavity available for mounting disk or tape options. The RA81, RA82, RL02, RC25, RX50, TS05, and TK50 options may be
integrated into these configurations. Additional system expansion can be provided via UNIBUS PDP-II expansion boxes and H9642 expansion cabinets.

n.20

Systems

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX200 Single-bay System Building Blocks

SX-JX200-EC/ED PDP-ll/84 system building block with 2 Mbytes of memory

Ordering Information

in a H9642-style cabinet with a choice of PDP-II
operating system licenses.
SX-JX200-EE/EF PDP-ll/84 system building block with 4 Mbytes of memory in

a H9642-style cabinet with a choice of PDP-II operating system licenses.
When a system building block is ordered, diagnostics are included. The load
medium must be specified in the notes section of the Manufacturing Order
Form. The default medium is 1,600-b/in magnetic tape.
Configuration Template
CPU backplane
B

Power
Wattl Avail.
uled
able
D

Slot

Option

de Power
SVolts
iSVOlt1
Ampi Avail.
Ampi Avail.
able
uled
able
uled

736

100

-is VOItI

Ampi
uled

Avail·
able

Bus
LOldl
Loadl AVlil.
uled
able
20

MSV11·JD or MSV11·JE

Memory

MSVll·JD or MSV11·JE

Memory

KTJ11·B

UBA Interface

11/84 CPU

KDJ11·B

Panel
Units
Avail.
Uled
able

120

596

13.4

46.6

1.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Slot.

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Optionl
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane

Power
Wattl Avail·
uled
able
Slot
10

Option

de Power
S Volts
is VOItI
Amps Avail.
Ampi Avail·
uled
able
uled
able

-IS Volts

Amps
u.ed

Avail.
able

BUI
Loadl
Loads Avail·
u.ed
able

Panel
Units
Avail.
Uled
able

Bus
Loads
Load. Avail·
used
able

Panel
Unit.
Avail·
able
Uled

UNIBUS In

16
17

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watt. Avail.
uled
able
Slot
19

Option

de Power
SVolt.
IS Voltl
Avail.
Avail.
Amps
Ampi
used
able
uled
able

-IS Volt.

Amps
uled

Avail·
able

UNIBUS In

20
21
22
2}

24
2S
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.
Systems

n.2l

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX300 Widebody System Building Blocks

Product Description

The PDP-ll/84-E is available in two system building block configurations.
These configurations offer all the features of the 11 W84 kernel systems and include a choice of four PDP-II operating system licenses. Select from the assortment of system options listed in the UNIBUS Options section of this chapter.
A supportable system requires at least one removable media (tape or disk) for
loading software and diagnostics. A console terminal should be ordered separately.

Features

• PDP-ll/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power available
• 2 to 4 Mbytes of MSVII-J PMI memory with ECC
• 9-slot CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DDI1-DK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 12 panel units for FCC-compliant system I/O
• Flexible system packaging - 42-inch-high H9645 cabinets with power controller and mounting space for one or two 10.5-inch peripheral options
• RSTS/E, RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS, or DSM-ll license (-UZ) included

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PDP-l1/84 system cabinets include six system units of backplane mounting
space. The 9-slot CPU backplane can be expanded with additional DDII-DK
expansion backplanes for a total of 27 slots. There is mounting space in the
CPU box for an additional9-slot backplane, for a total of 27 slots. Mounting
space is available in the cabinets for an optional H7231-J battery backup unit.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSVII-JD or -JE memory
modules.

Mass Storage Expansion

There are two 26.6-cm (lO.5-inch) cavities available for mounting disk or tape options. The RA81, RA82, RL02, RC25, RX50, TS05, and TK50 options may be
integrated into these configurations. Additional system expansion can be provided via UNIBUS PDP-II expansion boxes and H9642 expansion cabinets.

n.22

Systems

PDP-ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX300 Widebody System Building Blocks

SX.JX300-EC/ED PDp· 11/84 system building block with 2 Mbytes of memory

Ordering Information

and a H9645·style cabinet with a choice of PDp·II operating
system licenses.
SX·JX300-EE/EF PDP· 11/84 system building block with 4 Mbytes of memory

in a H9645-style cabinet with a choice of PDP-II operating
system licenses.
When a system building block is ordered, diagnostics are included. The load
medium must be specified in the notes section of the Manufacturing Order
Form. The default medium is 1,600-b/in magnetic tape.
Configuration Template
CPU backplane
A

Power
Watts Available
uled
D

Slot

Option

KDJll-B

11/84 CPU

MSVll-JD or MSVll-JE

Memory

MSVll-JD or MSV11-JE

Memory

KTJ11-B

UBA Interface

de Power
5Volt.
is Volts
AmpI
AvailAmps
AVlilused
able
used
able
100

736

-is Volts
AvailAmps
uled
able

Bus
Loadl
Loadl
Available
uled

Panel
Units
AvailUsed
Ible
12

20
1

120

596

13.4

36.6

1.9

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Slots

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Hex or Quad UNIBUS Options
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane

Power
Wattl Available
used
Slot
10

de Power
is Volts
5 Volts
Amps
AvailAmps
Availuled
able
used
able

-is Volts
AvailAmps
used
able

BUI
Loads
Loads Availused
able

Panel
Units
Avail·
Used
able

-is VOItI
AmpI
Avail·
able
uled

Bus
Loads
Loads Avail.
used
able

Panel
Units
AvailUsed
able

Option
UNIBUS In

11
12

16
17
18

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watts Avail.
used
able
Slot
19

Option

de Power
15 Volts
5 Volts
Amps
AvailAmps
Availused
able
used
able
28

UNIBUS In

20
21
22

24
25
26

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.

Systems D.23

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX400 Four-bigh System Building Blocks

Product Description

The PDP-11/84-E-series is available in two four-high system building block
configurations. These configurations offer all the features of the 11 Y84 kernel
systems and include a choice of PDP-II operating system licenses. Select from
the assortment of system options listed in the UNIBUS Options section of this
chapter. A supportable system requires at least one removable media (tape or
disk) for loading software and diagnostics. A console terminal should be
ordered separately.

Features

• PDP-11/84 CPU and power supply with 736 watts dc output power available
• 2 to 4 Mbytes of MSV11-J PMI memory with ECC
• 9-s10t CPU backplane, with 5 slots available for system options; expandable to
27 total slots with optional DD11-DK backplanes
• I/O distribution panel with 24 panel units for FCC-compliant system I/O
• Flexible system packaging - 60-inch-high H9647 cabinets with three-phase
power controller and mounting space for two IO.5-inch peripheral options
• RSTS/E, RSX-11M, RSX-1IM-PLUS, or DSM-1llicense (-UZ) included

CPU Cabinet Expansion

All PDP-11/84 system cabinets include six system units of backplane mounting
space. The 9-s10t CPU backplane can be expanded with additional DDll-DK or
DD11-CK expansion backplanes for a total of 27 slots. Mounting space is provided within the cabinet for an optional H7231-H battery backup unit.

Memory Expansion

Memory may be expanded to 4 Mbytes using MSVI1-JD or -JE memory
modules.

Mass Storage Expansion

There are two IO.5-inch cavities for mounting disk or tape options (RA82,
RA81, RL02, RC25, TSU05, TK50, RX50) in the upper half of the cabinet.
There is also one shielded 10.5-inch cavity below the processor, intended for a
BAllA expansion box. Additional expansion capacity external to the cabinet is
available with H9642 expansion cabinets.

n.24 Systems

PDP.ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
SX-JX400 Four-high System Building Blocks

Ordering Information

SX.JX400·EC/ED PDp· 11/84 system building block with 2 Mbytes of memory

and a H9647-style cabinet with a choice of PDP-11 operating
system licenses.
SX.JX400-EE/EF PDP· 11/84 system building block with 4 Mbytes of memory

in a H9647-style cabinet with a choice of PDP-11 operating
system licenses.
When a system building block is ordered, diagnostics are included. The load
medium must be specified in the notes section of the Manufacturing Order
Form. The default medium is 1,600-b/in magnetic tape.
Configuration Template

CPU backplane
A

Porer
Watt. A.n·
a.ed
able

Slot

Option

KD]l1·B

11/84 CPU

MSV11·]D or MSVll·JE

Memory

MSVll·JD or MSV11·JE

Memory

KTJ11·B

UBA Interface

dePcnrer
UVolt.
'Volt.
Amp. AftU. Amp. A.n·
aeed
able
aeed
able

736

100

-UVolt.
Amp. AftU.
aeed
able

Ba.
Load.
Load. A..n·
aeed
able

Panel
Unit.
AftU.
Ueed
able

24
1

120

'96

13.4

36.6

1.9

He>: or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Slot.

He>: or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Modified
UNIBUS
Modified
UNIBUS
UNIBUS
Out

He>: or Quad UNIBUS Option.
He>: or Quad UNIBUS Option.
Quad Option

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

First optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watt. AVln·
a.ed
able
Slot
10

Option

de Power
UVolt.
'Volt.
Amp. AVln. Amp. A.n.
a.ed
able
able
aeed

-U Volt.
Amp. A.aiI.
a.ed
able

Ba.
Load.
Load. A..n.
a.ed
able

Panel
Unit.
AftU·
U.ed
able

-UVolt.
Amp. AVln.
aeed
able

Ba.
Load.
Load. Avan.
aeed
able

Panel
Unit.
AftU·
U.ed
able

UNIBUS In

12
13
14
IS

16
17

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

Second optional expansion
backplane

Power
Watt. A.aiI·
a.ed
able
Slot
19

Option

de Power
UVolt.
'Vol..
Amp. AVln· Ampo A.aiI.
aeed
able
aeed
able
28

UNIBUS In

20
21
22

23
24

2'
26
27

UNIBUS Out
TOTAL

CPU backplane 5-volt current rating is 50 A maximum.
Systems B.2'

PDP·tt UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
Upgrades/Growth Paths

UNIBUS System Upgrades

The new, enhanced 11/84 extends the PDP-11/84 to a wider range of upgrade
possibilities than ever before. Existing UNIBUS PDP-II applications can be
upgraded to the processing power of the PDP-11/84 with both box- and cabinet-level upgrade components. Older UNIBUS PDP-11 processors can be enhanced and expanded to handle more users and more applications. These upgrade paths offer unbeatable hardware and software investment protection.
The PDP-11/84 is a form, fit, and function enhancement for virtually any previous UNIBUS processor. It is compatible with an extensive range of previously installed UNIBUS peripherals and options. Upgrades should be examined from a total system perspective. For example, more serial lines and/or
additional disk storage capacity may complement a processor upgrade and
further leverage your investment in PDP-11s, by enhancing reliability and
reducing operating costs.
The 11/84 upgrade packages include the 11/84 processor and are configured
with 2 Mbytes of memory in a 5.25-inch (13.3-cm) or 10.5-inch (26.6-cm)
enclosure. All include one year of DECservice warranty as well as a license to
replace an existing RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS, RSTS/E, or DSM-11 operating
system license. All upgrade packages include de-installation of the existing
CPU and installation of the new 11/84 to simplify your system growth needs.
For information regarding processor trade-in programs and system-upgrade
programs, contact your Digital sales representative. Enclosure-only hardware
upgrades, (with no module set), are also available, for customers who wish to
update system packaging as part of the upgrade process.

Design Center (Box-level)
Upgrade Packages

Enclosure Hardware Only
(No Module Sets) Upgrade
Packages

n.26

Systems

11/84·U2

11/84-P module set upgrade includes 11/84 CPU and 2 Mbytes
of memory.

11/84·UH/UJ

5.25-inch box-level upgrade includes the 11/84-DC/DD with
2 Mbytes of memory, diagnostics, documentation, and service,
120/240V.

11/84·UK/UL

10.5-inch box-level upgrade includes the 11/84-EC/ED with
2 Mbytes of memory, diagnostics, documentation, and service,
120/240V.

11/84·UD/UE

5 .25-inch box and backplane-only package (used with the 11/84
module set). Includes documentation and service, 120/240V.

11/84·UF/UG

10.5-inch box and backplane-only package (used with the 11/84
module set). Includes documentation and service, 120/240V.

H9642.EA/EB

H9642 42-inch-high, Fcc-shielded CPU cabinet with power
controller and mounting space for a single 10.5-inch (26.6-cm)
peripheral option, 120/240 V.

H9645·EA/EB

H9645 42-inch-high, 29-inch widebody Fcc-shielded CPU
cabinet with power controller and mounting space for two
10.5-inch (26.6-cm) peripheral options, 120/240 V.

H9647.EX/EY

H9647 60-inch-high, 29-inch-wide, four-high, Fcc-shielded
CPU cabinet with power controller and mounting space for
three 26.6-cm system expansion and peripheral options,
120/240 V (three-phase).

PDP-ll/84 UNIBUS Multiuser Systems
11/84 CPU Site Preparation Data

Table 11.1: CPU Site Preparation Data

Model

Voltage Freq
Number
Nominal Nominal of
Current
V
Hz
Phases acAmps

PCS/PDS

Thermal
Dissipation
Watts

Receptacle
Type

Cable
Type

Physical Size
Height
in [em]

Btu/h

Width
in [em]

Depth Weight
in [em] lb [kg]

11/84.DC/DE

120

8.5

650

2218

5-15R

5.25

19.0

27.0

67.0

11/84-DD/DF

240

4.2

650

2218

6-15R

[13.3]

[48.2]

[68.6]

[30.5]

11/84-EC/EE

120

15.0

1100

3750

5-20R

10.5

19.0

27.0

70.3

11/84-ED/EF

240

7.5

1100

3750

6-15R

[26.6]

[48.2]

[71.0]

[32.0]

11X84-EC/EE

120

24.0

1100*

3750

L5-30R

41.7

21.3

31.5

279.0

11X84-ED/EF

240

12.0

1100*

3750

6-15R

[106.6]

[54.1]

[80.0]

[127.0]

11 W84-EC/EE

120

24.0

1100*

3750

L5-30R

41.7

29.0

31.5

336.0

11 W84-ED/EF

240

12.0

1100*

3750

6-15R

[106.6]

[73.6]

[80.0]

[153.0]

l1Y84-EC/EE

120

208/120

24.0

1100*

3750

L21-30R

60.5

29.0

31.5

490.0

11 Y84-ED/EF

240

415/240

16.0

1100*

3750

IEC 390-16A

[153.6]

[73.6]

[80.0]

[223.0]

SK-JX200-EC/EE

120

24.0

1100*

3750

L5-30R

41.7

21.3

31.5

279.0

SK-JX200-ED/EF

240

12.0

1100*

3750

6-15R

[106.6]

[54.1]

[60.0]

[127.0]

SK-JX300-EC/EE

120

24.0

1100*

3750

L5-30R

41.7

29.0

31.5

336.0

SK-JX300-ED/EF

240

12.0

1100*

3750

6-15R

[106.6]

[73.6]

[80.0]

[153.0]

SK-JX400-EC/EE

208/120

24.0

1100*

3750

L5-30R

60.5

29.0

31.5

490.0

SK-JX400-ED/EF

415/240

16.0

1100*

3750

IEC 390-16A

[153.6]

[73.6]

[80.0]

[223.0]

*These figures are based on kernel systems containing fully loaded CPU box only.

Svstems

11.27

Systems III
Industrial Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial Family of Products

Introduction

Digital's Industrial Family of Products consists of standard PDP-11/83 computers packaged in Digital's newest enclosure, the BA200-series. The BA200
is suitable for use in harsh factory environments. Functions of the Industrial
Family include supervisory control, factory data collection, process control,
shop floor information management, and cell or area control. Because they are
all based upon Digital computer platforms, the Industrial Family systems and
services can also perform general purpose computing in manufacturing. Digital
also offers the E-series IPDP packaged in a rugged enclosure and sealed to
NEMA-12 standards to withstand tough manufacturing environments. For a
complete description of the E-series IPDP, refer to Chapter 8.
The Industrial Family can withstand higher temperatures, greater shocks, and
more vibration than standard computers. The large box (12 slots) withstands
40 degrees C. The relative humidity range is as follows: from 20 to 80% with a
disk, and 10 to 95% without a disk. The Industrial Family can also withstand
greater shocks than standard equipment. During operation, the system with
disks and tape can withstand 8g for 10ms. When not operating, the system can
withstand 20g for 30ms. The systems are protected against greater vibration,
power surges, and power spikes with a three-cycle power loss ride through.
These features make them well-suited for typical factory environments.
These specifications apply to the factory systems' metal chassis only. When
mounted in a cabinet, any degradation of these specifications cannot exceed
the stated range. For more information on environmental requirements for installing these systems into user enclosures, please see the Factory Systems Site
Preparation Guide (order number EK-074AA-SP).
The mounting styles are flexible because the factory systems' module slots are
accessible from the front of the system. Customers can mount the metal chassis
into any 19-inch EIA cabinet, or on the wall of a cabinet. The metal chassis
systems include hardware for rack and wall mounting. Custom packaging is
available upon request.
The Industrial PDP (IPDP) systems support RSX-11M-PLUS. Most factory systems offer expanded memory and disk storage options, and a variety of communications options including DEC423, RS-422, and RS-232. See the individual
system menus and the Industrial PDP Common Options section beginning on
page III. 9 for further information.
All systems are backed by Digital's support services groups including Field
Service, Educational Services and Software Services. All systems carry a oneyear hardware warranty.

Systems Matrix Table - Unsealed Systems
System Name

CPU Type

Slots

Operating Software

Industrial PDP-ll/S3
Hardware Only

PDP-H/S3

Purchased separately; system supports most
PDP-11 Operating Systems

Industrial PDP-H/S3
Complete System

PDP-H/S3

RSX-11M-PLUS

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP.ll/S} (Hardware Only)

Product Description

The General Purpose IPDP (Hardware Only) is a standard PDP-ll/83 packaged for an industrial environment. It does not include any operating system or license.
Customers can purchase the IPDP (Hardware Only) for use with existing
PDP-ll applications. Both discrete manufacturing industries and process
manufacturing industries will find the IPDP (Hardware Only) suitable for
such typical applications as machine automation, process control, supervisory/cell control, data-acquisition control, transfer of information to MRP
and plant host systems.

Systems

m.3

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP· 1 l/S} (Hardware Only)

Check Qty

1 Base Hardware

Includes PDP-Il/83 CPU in 12-slot metal chassis, FPU, MSVII-]E 2-Mbyte memory, RD53 71-Mbyte disk drive
and RQDX3 disk controller, TK50 95-Mbyte tape and TQK50 tape controller, 16 DEC423 serial lines, (CXA16),
2 H3104 distribution units, 2 BC16D-25 cables, 1 EIA 423-A serial line, BC16E-10 null modem cable, H8571-A
(25 pin D-sub to MMJ) adapter, rack and wall mount kit. U.S. 120-V power cord.

3 Diagnostics
and Documentation

Pl'Oduct Description

Pl'Oduct/Order Limitations or Remarks

Choose one. - AA model recommended
for US.

DH-183Hl-AA

IPDPhardware, U.S. power cord,
120 V, English-language
documentation and installation
diagnostics

DH-183Hl-A4

Same as DH-183H1-AA except
240 V, no power cord,
diagnostics, or documentation see Steps 2 and 3 to order
separately

0
0

BN20B-2E
BN20C-2E

Required only for -A4 configuration.
DH-183H1-AA includes US 120-V
power cord.

0
0
D
D
D
D
D

BN20D-2E
BN20E-2E
BN20F-2E
BN20H-2E
.BN20J-2E
BN20K-2E
BN20L-2E

U.S./Japan - 208-240 V
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V
Central Europe - 220 V
UK/Ireland - 240 V
Switzerland - 220 V
Denmark - 240 V
Italy-220V
India/South Africa
Israel- 230 V

English-language
diagnostics/documentation on
TK50media
*-language
diagnostics/documentation on
TK50media

ZYAHH-P5 is optional for DH-183H1-A4.
It is included in DH-183H1-AA.

2 Power Cords

Part Number

ZYAHH-P5

ZY*HH-P5

Central European countries include
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France,
Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden .

All cord lengths are 2.5 m, 10 A.

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 8 is optional for a functioning system.
Seven slots are available for expansion.
4· Additional
Memory

ID.4

Systems

D
D

1
1

MSVll-JE
MSVll-JD

2-Mbyte PMI memory
1-Mbyte PMI memory

Maximum of two memory modules per
system. Base Hardware System includes
one, so at most select one additional
module.

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP.tt/S} (Hardware Only)
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

5 Additional
Mass Storage

0
0

RD53A.SA
RD54A·SA

71·Mbyte fixed disk
159-Mbyte fixed disk

Maximum of three disks per system.
Hardware System includes one, so at most
order two additional drives. RD53 and
RD54 may be mixed in the same system.

6 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

CXA16·AA

16 lines, DEC423

Includes 2 BC16D-25 (25-ft) cables and 2
H3104 8-line distribution units.

CXB16·AA

16 lines, RS·422

Includes 2 BC 16D-25 (25-ft) cables and 2
H3104 8-line distribution units.

DRQ3B·SA

0
0

IEQll·SA
DPVll·SA

Customer must supply device - specific
drivers for the DRQ3B, IEQll, DPVll,
andDRVII.

DRVll·SA

2-port 16-bit DMA parallel
interface
IEEE 488 interface
I-line synchronous RS·232
w/modem control
16-bit parallel interface

CXY08·AA

8 lines, RS-232 w/full modem

Includes 2 BC19N-12 (12-ft) cables.

0
0
0

DZQll·SA
BC23H·06
BC23H·25

4 lines, RS-232
6-ftcable
25-ft cable

Choose 1 cable minimum; 4 cables per
module max. BC23H cable for use with
modems, PLCs. DZQ 11 should not be used
for terminal support.

DEQNA·SA

Ethernet communications
controller
PVC cable with right angle bend
Teflon cable w/right angle bend

Maximum of one DEQNA per system.

7 Networking Options

8 Base Software

0
0

1
1

BNE3K·xx
BNE3M·xx

0
0

1
1

QR500.UZ
QR500·H5

RSX-llM-PLUS class-H license
RSX-llM-PLUS TK50 distrib and
documentation

Select PVC or Teflon cable in appropriate
length.

All media/documentation kits come on
TK50 cartridge tapes.

Note: For additional system options and field upgrade options see the Industrial PDP Common Options section beginning on
page III.9. System includes installation and one year hardware warranty at the DEC Service level. System should be installed in
an appropriate cabinet. See Factory Systems Site Preparation Guide (EK-074AA-SP) for more information.

Systems

m.5

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP· I 1/8) (Complete System)

Product Description

The General Purpose IPDP (Complete System) is a standard PDP-ll/B3 packaged for an industrial environment. It contains the RSX-IlM-PLUS operating
system and license.
Customers can purchase the IPDP (Complete System) for use with existing
PDP-ll applications. Both discrete manufacturing industries and process manufacturing industries will find the IPDP (Complete System) suitable for such
typical applications as machine automation, process control, supervisory/cell
control, data acquisition control, transfer of information to MRP and plant host
systems.

ID.6

Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP.ll/S3 (Complete System)

Step

Check Qty

1 Packqed System

Includes PDP-H/83 CPU in 12-slot metal chassis, FPU, MSVH-JE 2-Mbyte memory, RD53 71-Mbyte disk
drive and RQDX3 disk controller, TK50 95-Mbyte tape and TQK50 tape controller, 16 DEC423 serial lines,
(CXA16), 2 H3104 distribution units, 2 BC16D-25 cables, 1 DEC423 serial line, BC16E-10 null modem cable,
H8571-A (25 pin D-sub to MMJ) adapter, rack and wall mount kit. RSX-llM-PLUS license (QR500-UZ) and
RSX-11M-PLUS TK50 distribution (QR500-H5). U.S. 120-V power cord.

2 Power Cords

3 Diagnostics
and Documentation

Product Description

DJ.183H1.A2

IPDP system, U.S. power cord,
120 V, English-language
documentation and installation
diagnostics

DJ.183Hl.A3

Same as DJ-183H1-A2 except
240 V, no power cord,
diagnostics, or documentation see Steps 2 and 4 to order
separately

D
D

BN20B·2E
BN20C·2E

U.S./]apan - 208-240 V
Australia/New Zealand240/230 V
Central Europe - 220 V
UK/Ireland - 240 V
Switzerland - 220 V
Denmark - 240 V
Italy- 220 V
India/South Africa
Israel- 230 V

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

BN20D·2E
BN20E·2E
BN20F·2E
BN20H·2E
BN20J.2E
BN20K·2E
BN20L·2E

ZYAHH.P5

ZY*HH·P5

English-language
diagnostics/documentation on
TK50media
*-language
diagnostics/documentation on
TK50media

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Choose one. - A2 model recommended for
U.S.

Required only for -A3 configuration.
DJ-183H1-A2 includes U.S. 120-V
power cord.
Central European countries include:
Austria, Belgium, Finland, France,
Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and Sweden.
All cord lengths are 2.5 m, 10 A.

ZYAHH·P5 is optional for DJ-183H1-A3.
It is included in DJ-183H1-A2.

Note: Selection from Steps 4 through 7 is optional for a functioning system.
Seven slots are available for expansion.
4 Additional
Memory

1
1

MSVll.JE
MSVll.JD

2-Mbyte PMI memory
1-Mbyte PM! memory

Maximum of two memory modules per
system. Packaged System includes one, so
at most select one additional module.

Systems

m.7

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP.II/S3 (Complete System)
Step

Check Qty

Part Number

5 Additional
Mass Storage

D
D

RD53A·SA
RD54A.SA

71·Mbyte fixed disk
159·Mbyte fixed disk

Maximum of three disks per system.
Packaged System includes one, so at most
order two additional drives .. RD53 and
RD54 may be mixed in the same system.

6 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

CXA16·AA

16 lines, DEC423

Includes 2 BC16D-25 (25-ft) cables and 2
H3104 8-line distribution units.

CXB16·AA

16 lines, RS·422

Includes 2 BC16D-25 (25-ft) cables and 2
H3104 8-line distribution units.

CXY08·AA

8 lines, RS-232 w/full modem

Includes 2 BC19N-12 (12-ft) cables.

D
D
D

DZQll·SA
BC23H.06
BC23H.25

4 lines, RS-232
6-ftcable
25-ft cable

Choose 1 cable minimum; 4 cables per
module max. BC23H cable for use with
modems, PLCs. DZQ11 should not be used
for terminal support.

DEQNA·SA

Maximum of one DEQNA per system.

D
D

BC23H·06
BC23H·25

Ethernet communications
controller
PVC cable w/right-angle bend
Teflon cable w/right-angle bend

7 Networking Options

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Select PVC or Teflon cable in appropriate
length.

Note: For additional system options and field upgrade options see the Industrial PDP Common Options section beginning on
page III. 9. System includes installation and one year hardware warranty at the DEC Service level. System should be installed in
an appropriate cabinet. See Factory Systems Site Preparation Guide (EK·074AA·SP) for more information.

m.8

Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers

Note: All keyboard kits and most models in Steps 1 and 2 below are 120 V/U.S. Refer to Tables IIL1 and IIL2 for
Non-120 V alternate language kits and models.
Step

Check Qty

1 Terminals

One terminal (video, hardcopy, or graphics) is necessary as a console for a system to function.

Hardcopy

Video

Graphics

Ruggedized

2 Printers
LA75

LA210

LN03

Part Number

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

D
D
D
D

LAlOO-BA
LAlOO-BB
LAl20-DA
LAl2X-SL

D
D
D
D

DL-Vf320-~ Black/white video terminal
DL-Vf320-B_ Green video terminal
DL-Vf320-C_ Amber video terminal
DL-Vf320-F_ WPS amber video terminal

D
D
D
D
D
D

Vf330-~

Vf330-B_
Vf330-C_
Vf330-D_
Vf340-~

Vf340-D_

Tabletop printing term., 120 V
Tabletop printing term., 240 V
Floor stand print term., 120/240 V
European Char set keycaps,
ROM

LAI00-BB includes European Keycap set
and serial cable.
European Keycap set is required for
Europe.

Terminals include keyboard.
See Table III.2 for country variations.

Black/white graphics terminal
Green graphics terminal
Amber graphics terminal
WPS white graphics terminal
Color graphics terminal
WPS color graphics terminal

(See Section on Ruggedized Terminals in Chapter 8.)

LA75-_

LA75P-_

250 CPS Companion printer
BC16E MMJ cable
Parallel model

Choose appropriate printers and
accessories. LA75 includes modified
modular jack (MMJ) cable.

LA75 includes parallel interface cable.
240 CPS matrix printer
LA2l0-AA
LA75 requires a separate adapter if
LA2lX-BT
Bi-dir forms trctr for LA210
connected to a host/video with other than
Sngl-tray
sht
fdr,
LA210,
LA2lX-SF
8.5xll
D
DEC423 (MMJ) printer port. Select from
LA2lX-SH
Sngl-tray sht fdr, LA210, A4 size
D
the following:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H8571-A for VT100 family
H8571-B for VT200/DECmate/pro
LN03-_
D
8 pp/min laser printer
family
LN03S-_
8 pp/min graphic laser printer
D

D
D

Other printers designed for 25-pin or
9-pin RS-232-D cables.
Base system (part 1,2 or 3 - step 1)
includes 3 25-pin to-MMJ adapters and 3
MMJcables.
See Table III. 1 for country variations.

Systems

m.9

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers
Table 111.1 - Multinational Order Codes for Printers
LA7S*

LJ2S0 t

LA210

LN03

LN03S

Printer

English

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA210-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

Flemish

LA75-AB

LJ250-AB

LA210-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

Canada

French

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA210-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

Denmark

Danish

LA75-AD

LJ250-AD

LA210-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

UK/Ireland

English

LA75-AE

LJ250-AE

LA210-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

Finland

Finnish

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA210-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

W. Germany/Austria

German

LA75-AG

LJ250-AG

LA210-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

Holland

Dutch

LA75-AH

LJ250AH

LA210-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

Italy

Italian

LA75-AI

LJ250-AI

LA210-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

Japan

Katakana

LA75-AJ

LA210-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

Switzerland

French

LA75-CB

LJ250-CB

LA210-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

Switzerland

German

LA75-CB

LJ250-CB

LA210-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

Sweden

Swedish

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA210-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

Norway

Norwegian

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA210-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

France

French

LA75-AP

LJ250-AP

LA210-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

Canada

English

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA210-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

South America

Spanish

LA75-CA

LA210-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

Spain

Spanish

LA75-AS

LJ250-AS

LA210-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

Israel

Hebrew

LA75-AT

LJ250-AT

LA210-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

South America

Portuguese

LA75-CA

LA210-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

Portugal

Portuguese

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA210-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

Switzerland

Italian

LA75-CB

LJ250-CB

LA210-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

Japan

Hiragana

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

Australia/
New Zealand

English

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

Mexico

Spanish

Country/
Region

Language

United States
Belgium

LA75-AZ

LJ250-AZ

LA210-AZ

LJ250-CA

*To order the parallel version of the LA 75, use LA 75P with the respective suffix for country variation.
tTo order the parallel version of the LJ250, use LJ252 with the respective suffix for country variation.

m.to

Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers

Table 111.2 - Video Terminal Selection Chart
Refer to this table for ordering any VT300-family terminal.

VT320

VT330

VT340

USA (North American Model)
VT320-AA
VT320·BA
VT320·CA
VT320·DA
VT320·EA
VT320·FA

white text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
green text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
amber text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
white text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V
green text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V
amber text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V

VTHO·AA
VTHO·BA
VTHO·CA
VTHO·DA
VTHO·EA
VTHO·FA

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
white graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V
green graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V
amber graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V

VT340·AA

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

VT340·AB

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
amber graphics terminal
w/English WPS keyboard,
120V

VT340·AC

VT340·DA

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V

USA (International Model)
VT320·GA
VT320·HA
VT320.JA
VT320·NA
VT320·PA
VT320·RA

Belgium
VT320·AB
VT320·BB
VT320·CB
VT320·DB
VT320·FB

white text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
white text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V
amber text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

VTHO·AB

VTHO·AC

VTHO·BB
VTHO·CB
VTHO·FB

VT340·DB

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Canada
VT320·AC
VT320·BC
VT320·CC
VT320·DC
VT320-FC

VTHO·BC
VT330·CC
VT330·FC

VT340·DC

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
color graphics terminal
w/English WPS keyboard,
120V

Note: When ordering 100 or more VT320s (must be of same variant), add DB- prefix. For example: DB-VT320-AA for
100 or more VT320-AA.
When ordering VT320s with system, upgrade, or server, add DL- prefix. For example, DL-VT320-AA for VT320-AA
ordered with system, upgrade, or server.

Systems m.ll

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers

Table IIL2 - Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT320

VT340

VT330

Denmark
VT320-AD
VT320-BD
VT320-CD
VT320-DD
VT320-FD

white text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber text terminal
w/standard keyboard, 2~0 V
white text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V
amber text terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

VT330-AD

VT330-AE

VT330·AF

VT330-BD
VT330·CD
VT330·FD

VT340-AD

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
white graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

VT340-AE

VT340-AF

VT340·AG

VT340·DD

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

UK/Ireland
VT320·AE
VT320·BE
VT320-CE
VT320-DE
VT320-EE
VT320·FE

VT330-BE
VT330·CE
VT330-DE
VT330-EE
VT330·FE

VT340-DE

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

Finland
VT320·AF
VT320-BF
VT320·CF
VT320·DF
VT320·FF

VT330-BF
VT330·CF
VT330·FF

VT340-DF

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

West Germany/Austria
VT320·AG
VT320·BG
VT320·CG
VT320·DG
VT320·FG

VT330·AG
VT330·BG
VT330·CG
VT330·FG

VT340·DG

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

m.12

Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers

Table IIL2 - Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT320

VT330

VT340

Holland
VT320·AH
VT320·BH
VT320·CH
VT320·DH
VT320·FH

VT330.AH

VT330·AI

VT330-BH
VT330-CH
VT330·FH

VT340-AH

VT340-AI

VT340·AK

VT340·AL

VT340·AM

VT340·DH

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Italy
VT320·AI
VT320-BI
VT320·CI
VT320·DI
VT320-FI

VT330-BI
VT330·CI
VT330·FI

VT340·DI

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Switzerland (French)
VT320-AK
VT320-BK
VT320-CK
VT320-DK
VT320-FK

VT330-AK
VT330·BK
VT330·CK
VT330-FK

VT340-DK

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Switzerland (German)
VT320-AL
VT320-BL
VT320-CL
VT320-DL
VT320-FL

VT330-AL

VT330.AM

VT330-BL
VT330·CL
VT330-FL

VT340-DL

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Sweden
VT320-AM
VT320·BM
VT320-CM
VT320·DM
VT320-FM

VT330-BM
VT330·CM
VT330·FM

VT340·DM

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Note: When ordering 100 or more VT320s (must be of same variant), add DB· prefix. For example: DB·VT320-AA for
100 or more VT320-AA.
When ordering VT320s with system, upgrade, or server, add DL- prefix. For example, DL-VT320-AA for VT320-AA
ordered with system, upgrade, or server.

Systems m.l3

Industrial Systems·
Industrial PDP Common Options: Terminals and Printers

Table IIL2 - Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT320

VT340

VT330

Norway
VT320·AN
VT320·BN
VT320·CN
VT320·DN
VT320·FN

VT330·AN
VT330·BN
VT330·CN
VT330·FN

VT340.AN

VT340·AP

white graphics terminal
w/stand~rd keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

VT340·AS

VT340·AV

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

VT340·AZ

VT340·DN

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard; 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

France
VT320·AP
VT320·BP
VT320·CP
VT320·DP
VT320·FP

VT330·AP

VT330·AS

VT330·AV

VT330·BP
VT330·CP
VT330·FP

VT340·DP

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Spain
VT320·AS
VT320·BS
VT320·CS
VT320·DS
VT320·FS

VT330·BS
VT330·CS
VT330·FS

VT340·DS

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Portugal
VT320·AV
VT320·BV
VT320·CV
VT320·DV
VT320·FV

VT330·BV
VT330·CV
VT330·FV

VT340·DV

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Australia/New Zealand
VT320·AZ
VT320·BZ
VT320·CZ
VT320·DZ
VT320·EZ
VT320·FZ

VT330·AZ
VT330·BZ
VT330·CZ
VT330·FZ

VT340·DZ

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

m.14

Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial PDP Common Options: Field Upgrade Options
Part Number Part Number
Factory
Fteld
Step

Check Qty Upgrade

Upgrade

Product Description

Product/Order Limitations or Remarks

Note: Field upgrade options cannot be imbedded in a standard system order by the manufacturing facility. Field upgrade options include all necessary
installation hardware, plus the appropriate installation manual .
.3 Additional
Memory

0
0

4 Additional Mass
Storase

5 Additional Asynchronous
Serial Lines

6 Networking
Options

MSVll.JE
MSVll.JD

MSVll.JF
MSVll.JH

2-Mbyte PM! memory
1-Mbyte PM! memory

Maximum of two memory modules
per system.

0
0

RD5.3A·SA
RD5.3A·SA

RD5.3A.SF
RD54A.SF

71-Mbyte fixed disk
159-Mbyte fixed disk

Maximum of three disks per system.
RD53/RD54 can be mixed in the
same system.

CXA16·AA

CXA16·AF

16 lines, DEC423

2 BC16D-25 (25-ft) cables and 2
H3104 8-line distribution units.

CXB16·AA

CXB16·AF

16 lines, RS-422

Includes 2 BC16D-25 (25-ft) cables
and H3104 8-line distribution units.

CXY08·AA

CXY08·AF

8 lines, RS-232-D w/full modem

Includes 2 BC19N-12 (12-ft) cables.

DZQll·SA

DZQll·SF

Choose 1 cable minimum; 4 cables
per module maximum.

0
0

BC2.3H.06
BC2.3H.25

BC2.3H·06
BC2.3H.25

4 lines, RS-232-D with
limited-modem control
(U.S. only)
6-ftcable
25-ft cable

DEQNA.SA

DEQNA·SF

BNE.3K·xx
BNE.3M·xx

0
0

1
1

Ethernet communications
controller
PVC cable with right-angle bend
Teflon cable w/right-angle bend

BC23H cable for use with modems,
PLCs. DZQlls should not be used
for terminal support.

Select PVC or Teflon cable in
appropriate length.

Systems

m.IS

Systems IV
MIRA High Availability Microsystems

Systems
MIRA High Availability Microsystem

Product Description

A MIRA system (Microcomputer Implementation of a Reliable Architecture)
provides backup I/O capability for MicroPDP users. A MIRA system is comprised of dual MicroPDP-ll/83 computers, each supplied from its own power
source and mounted in a single cabinet, or in two cabinets for larger configurations. The configuration (e.g. I/O devices, tape, disk) of each computer is
normally identical, so that one computer is a backup for the other in the event
of failure.
The computers are linked via Ethernet and MIRA-unique hardware (a watchdog timer and switching modules). The software controls the status of each
computer, being either Master, Standby or Idle; it detects a computer failure
and changes the status of the system accordingly.
I/O devices which were previously connected to a failed Master computer will
be connected to the Standby computer, the status of which changes to Master.
The user can then restart the applications on the new Master and continue
operation.
The two computers operate independently; process and volume shadowing are
not currently features of MIRA. A MIRA system provides the hardware and
software environment required for the development of high availability control
applications.
The Ethernet link can be utilized by the application programs to exchange status information and to back up critical data on the Standby computer. Each
computer has a unique Ethernet address and node name.

IV. 2

Systems

Systems
MIRA High Availability Microsystem

Switched Devices

Switched Devices are those which are configured such that they can be connected to either computer. The devices are connected to the MIRA system via
a common I/O distribution panel and the hardware and software controls to
which they are assigned at any time.
The operator specifies whether a device should be connected to the Master or
Standby computer via a utility which creates the Switch Map File.
The MIRA switch control hardware and software exchange status messages via
a watchdog. If the Master computer fails to send its message then a system
Failover will occur.
In the event of a system Failover, the switched devices on the Standby are
disconnected, and the Master Devices are connected to the Standby processor.
The MIRA base system is comprised of two MicroPDP-ll/83s, each one with
the following:
• MicroPDP-ll/83 CPU
• 2 Mbyte·s main memory
• RD54 Winchester disk
• TK50 (tape cartridge) load device
• DEQNA (Ethernet interface)

Ordering Information

To simplify the ordering of MIRA systems, special "DS" packaged systems and
options have been created. This means a MIRA system is configured and ordered in the same way as a standard MicroVAX II system; all MIRA special
hardware is then configured and automatically included.
DS-183Ql-A2

MIRA Dual MicroPDP-ll/83 small configuration, 120 V

DS-183Q2-A2

MIRA Dual MicroPDP-ll/83 large configuration, 120 V in two
cabinets

DSKIT-XX

MIRA country kit (includes 2 power cords) - only applicable in
Europe
XX:AE = UK/Ireland
AI = Italy
AT = Israel
AD = Denmark
CA = Central European
CB = Switzerland

DS.UPGRD-A2

Upgrade kit: DS-183Q1 to DS-183Q2 MIRA 120-V (cabinet
with expansion BA23s and extended switching capacity)

Systems

IV. 3

Systems
MIRA High Availability Microsystem

Options Supported

Software

8 lines asynch MUX
8 lines asynch MUX
Multi-Pt RS-232
Multi-Pt V.35
Multi-Pt COAX
Multi-Pt RS-423
lline synch
4 lines asynch MUX
lline synch RS-232
lline synch RS-422
lline synch RS-423
Minimum length Ethernet kit; H4000s for
private interprocessor link
Thinwire Ethernet Kit

DSDHV.AB
DSDHQ.AB
DSDMV.AW
DSDMV.BB
DSDMV.CB
DSDMV.FB
DSDPV·AB
DSDZQ.DB
DSKMV.AB
DSKMV.EB
DSKMV·FB
DSNET.Ql

MIRA DHVll
MIRA DHQll
MIRA DMVll
MIRA DMVll
MIRA DMVll
MIRA DMVll
MIRA DPVll
MIRA DZQll
MIRA KMVlA
MIRA KMVlA
MIRA KMVlA
ETHERNET KIT

DSNET.Q2

ETHERNET KIT

QJZDM.UZ
QYZDM.UZ
QJZDM·*S
QYZDN.*S
ZNJAA.CS

RSX MIRA switch control software license
MicroRSX switch control software license
RSX MIRA software distribution (TK50) and documentation
MicroRSX software distribution (TK50) and documentation
MIRA Diagnostic/Installation kit

Notes: 1. Two MicroRSX (or RSX) licenses are required for each MIRA system.
2. As there are two MicroPDPs per system, all layered software requires
two licenses.

IV. 4

Systems

Chapter 2
System Expansion

System Expansion
BA200-Series Enclosure Bulkhead Design Kits

BA200-Series Enclosures

The BA200-series Q-bus system enclosures, now used by the MicroVAX 3500/
3600, VAXserver 3500/3600, VAXstation 3500, IVAX and IPDP systems, are
designed to meet the rigors of today's business and factory floor operations.
Their innovative features minimize the effects of the environmental hazards
inherent in those operating environments. These system enclosures are FCCand VDE-compliant, with or without skins and in or out of racks. Further, their
increased tolerance for higher temperature and humidity and noisy electronic
and high-vibration environments, as well as their front panel access, provide
for implementation of system solutions in geographical markets and environments not open to other packaging.
The packaging, sufficiently versatile to be equally at home in the office and
on the factory floor,· provides quiet operation and shock and vibration
resistance that surpass those of previous designs.

Comparison between
BA200-Series and
Other Enclosures

BA2l3

BAl23

MicroVAX 3500/3600,
VAXserver 3500/3600,
VAXstation 3500,
IVAX and IPDP

MicroVAX II,
VAXstation II/GPX

Rackmount Capability

Yes

Wallmount (NEMA)

Yes

Floor (pedestal)

Yes

Vibration Spec

0.5 G

O.25G

Noise Level

5.3 decibels

5.6 decibels

Excellent
(front access)

Moderate

Usually

System Enclosure Type
Typical Systems

Number of Quad Slots
Maintainability
Requires Adaption of
Existing Modules

2.2

System Expansion

System Expansion
BA200-Series Enclosure Bulkhead Design Kits
Implications of Newer
Bulkhead Assemblies

To improve access, indicator visibility and cabling, the space between backplane rows and hence modules is 0.95 inches, an increase from the O.5-inch
space used in previous enclosures. This increase allows for the attachment of
an integral I/O bulkhead, which provides filtering, if required, and improves
module rigidity, thereby improving tolerance to vibration and shock.
Operation of equipment without using the bulkheads is not recommended
because the cooling of internal components could be adversely affected.
Compliance with electromagnetic interference regulations, such as FCC
and VDE, requires the use of bulkheads.
Digital offers a series of kits to assist in evaluating adaptation options and
provide a source of finished and semi-finished parts for production use. The
kits enable customers who opt to purchase third-party modules or design
their own to incorporate those modules into the newer BA213 enclosure.
No Module Change Needed
Any module such as memories, arraY'processors and transform engines, that
connects only to the backplane, is not affected.
Change Needed
For modules with external connections, such as communications controllers
and lineprinter controllers, a module handle type should be selected and
adapted to the particular module design.

Bulkhead Design Kits

To help determine which handle kits are appropriate, Digital offers a Design
Evaluation Kit (H3650), which contains a sample of each handle, cover,
and bulkhead, as well as a copy of the BA200 Series Module Design Guide.
After evaluation is completed, it is possible to order the required bulkhead
(H3651-H3657).

Ordering Information

H3650

Evaluation kit - contains the design guide for the four bulkhead types and one of each of the parts listed below. (Each
part may also be ordered separately.)

H3651

Recessed bulkhead kit - fully assembled handle with two
50-pin "D-type" cut-outs and adapter plates for popular
connector sizes

H3652

Recessed blank bulkhead kit - ready for drilling and assembly

H3653

Flush blank bulkhead kit - ready for drilling and assembly

H3654

Double-width cover kit - blank

H3655

Single-width cover kit - blank

H3656

Plastic filler panel for use with dual modules

H3657

Gap filler kit

EK-BA200-DG

Included in H3650 above, or may be ordered separately here.
Includes case studies of Digital's experience in adapting
existing Q-bus modules to BA200 packaging.

BA200 Series Module
Design Guide

System Expansion

2.3

System Expansion
Q-bus System Expansion

Product Description

Three enclosure options that provide upgrade paths for BA23-based systems
are available. They allow for additional mass-storage devices, backplane
expansion up to 14 usable slots, and additional I/O connectivity.

H9642-JA/JB

The MicroSystems Cabinet used for the MicroPDP-11/83 standard system
(DH-183Q3) and system building block (183QE) is now available for customer
system integration. Modifications, which were necessary to accommodate rackmounting dual BA23s in the midsection, include the addition of vented side
panels for cooling and the H3490-A I/O distribution panel for FCC compliance
and additional I/O connectivity.
The H9642-JA/JB cabinets do not include the dual BA23s. However, they do
include one set of BA23 mounting brackets as well as a rackmount BA23 front
bezel, power cord (-JA variant only), the H3490-A, and an installation guide,
(EK-H964J-IN). A country -specific power cord is required on 240-V variation.

Site Preparation Specifications

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 65.6 cm (25.7 in)
• Depth: 91.4 cm (36 in)
• Weight: 163 to 311 kg (358 to 685 lb), depending on mass storage selected

Ordering Information

2.4

System Expansion

H9642-JA

40-in MicroSystem cabinet, 120 V

H9642-JB

40-in MicroSystem cabinet, 240 V

System Expansion
Q-bus System Expansion

BA23-CC/CD

The BA23-CCjCD, when used in conjunction with a BA23 system, creates a
dual BA23 configuration offering backplane expansion (total of 14 slots) and
additional 5 .25-inch mass-storage devices. The dual BA23 combination can
then be mounted in the H9642-JAjJB or a customer's own rack to create a
system with space for two RA-series disks.
The BA23-CCjCD includes a rackmount BA23 with front bezel and power cord,
brackets for mounting in the H9642-JAjJB, BCV2D-03 backplane expansion
cable assembly, plus an installation guide, EK-BA23C-IN.

Ordering Information

BA23-CC

BA23 expansion box, 120 V

BA23-CD

BA23 expansion box, 240 V

H3490-A

The FCC-compliant H3490-A is bundled in the H9642-JAjJB, so it should be
purchased only by dual BA23 customers planning to rackmount in a cabinet
other than the H9642-JAjJB. It features six A-type inserts (l-inch by 4-inches)
and eleven B-type (2-inches by 3-inches). An installation guide,
EK-H9642JA-IN, is included.

Ordering Information

H3490-A

System distribution panel for dual BA23

System Expansion

2.5

System Expansion
UNIBUS CPU Cabinets

Product Description

UNIBUS CPU cabinets are available for integrating the PDP-11/84, 11/44, and
11/24 CPU boxes with Digital mass-storage devices or non-Digital mounting
boxes.
Because of its depth, the RA60 disk subsystem cannot be mounted in this cabinet. It requires its own deep H9642-AP/AR cabinet. BAll expander boxes cannot be mounted in the CPU cabinet. The I/O is routed to the connection panel
that provides 12 panel units of mounting space.
Power controllers capable of furnishing 24 amperes of 120 Vac or 12 amperes of
240 Vac are supplied with the CPU cabinets.

Site Preparation Specifications
H9642-EA/EB

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 53.9 cm (21.2 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 91. 7 kg (202Ib) as configured
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R (120 Vac/60 Hz);
NEMA #6-15R (240 Vac/50 Hz)

Ordering Information

2.6

System Expansion

H9642·EA/EB

CPU cabinet includes mounting space for a 26.6-cm (l0.5-in)
or 13.3-cm (5.25-in) CPU, one additional 26.6-cm (lO.5-in)
or 13.3-cm (5.25-in) device, and a battery backup unit. The
I/O connection panel is included. This cabinet is included
with kernels and standard building block systems and can
accommodate one TU58-DA, RL211-AK, RUA81-AA(AD),
RUC25, or RX211- BK(BN).

System Expansion
UNIBUS CPU Cabinets

Site Preparation Specifications
H9645-EA/EB

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 117 kg (258Ib) as configured
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R (120 Vac/60 Hz)
NEMA #6-15R (240 Vac/50 Hz)

Ordering Information

H9645-EA/EB

Wide CPU cabinet provides mounting space for a 26.6-cm
(10.5-in) CPU and two additional 26.6-cm (10.5-in) or 13.3-cm
(5.25-in) devices. Side mounting space is provided for the battery backup unit. The I/O connection panel is included. This
cabinet is included with widebody building block systems and
can accommodate any combination of two TU58s, RL02s,
RUC25s, RX02s or RA81s, but not two RA81s.

H9544·EX

I/O bulkhead expansion kit for H9645 cabinets. Converts the
bottom 10.5-inch bay of an H9645 cabinet to a shielded area
with 16 additional I/O panel units. For I/O intensive applications, this kit raises the total I/O panel units of the H9645 cabinet to 28.

System Expansion

2.7

System Expansion
UNIBUS Expander Cabinets

Product Description

Expander cabinets are bolted to the right end of H9642 or H9645 CPU
cabinets; they do not have side panels. The existing right side panel of the CPU
cabinet is then used as the right side panel of the expander cabinet. A UNIBUS
cable passes through a shielded port between the cabinets. I/O connection panel
inserts for all options must be located in the same cabinet that contains the
associated device controller interface. Expander cabinets are supplied with power
controllers capable of furnishing 24 amperes of 120 Vac or 12 amperes of 240 Vac.

Site Preparation Specifications

• Height: 106 cm (41.8 in)
• Width: 53 cm (21 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 91.7 kg (2021b) as configured
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R (120 Vac/60 Hz)
NEMA #6-15R (240 Vac/50 Hz)

Ordering Information

2~8

System Expansion

H9642-FA/FB

Partitioned expander cabinet provides mounting space for a
BAllA-EX (EY) or BA11-KU (KV) UNIBUS expander box and one
26.6-cm (10.5-in) disk or tape. The expander box mounts in the
RFI shielded central position, and together with a shielded cable duct and an I/O connection panel (13 panel units of space)
provides an expansion enclosure for Digital options. The top
26.6-cm (10.5-in) mounting space is unshielded and can be
used to mount any of the Digital disk subsystems listed for the
UNIBUS CPU cabinets.

System Expansion
UNIBUS Expander Cabinets

Site Preparation Specifications

• Height: 106 cm (41.8 in)
• Width: 53 cm (21 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)
• Weight: 79.5 kg (175Ib)
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R (120 Vac/60 Hz)
NEMA #6-15R (240 Vac/50 Hz)

Ordering Information

H9642-FC/FD

Unpartitioned expander cabinet provides mounting space for
a BAllA-EX/EY or BA11-KU(KV) UNIBUS expander box and
two I/O connection panels, for a total of 29 panel units of I/O
connection space. No disk/tape options can be mounted in
this cabinet.

System Expansion 2.9

System Expansion
60.inch.high CPU Cabinet

Product Description

The H9647-EX/EYis a 153.6-cm (60.5-in) high, UNIBUS CPU cabinet developed
to provide an economical, high-density EMI/RFI shielded building block
expressly for OEM system development. It utilizes Digital extensive cabinet
shielding technology, which provides the OEM with broad configuration
latitude. Designed with large systems in mind, this cabinet features two
shielded 10.5-inch bays in the bottom half of the cabinet. These two shielded
bays allow in-the-cabinet system expansion from the CPU to UNIBUS
expansion box.

Features

• EMI/RFI shielding
• 24 vertical I/O panel space allows easy cable management
• Compatible with other H9646 and H9647 cabinets
• Pull-out stabilizer leg
• Integral mechanical shock isolating castor assemblies
• More system packaging density
• Two unshielded 10.5-inch bays in top half of cabinet
• Shielded lower half of cabinet designed for CPU and BAllA-EXlEY expansion
chassis
• Three-phase power controller

Site Preparation Specifications
(Outside dimensions)

• Height: 153.6 cm (60.5 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29.0 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)

anternal dimensions)

• Height: 131.3 cm (52.5 in)
• Width (total): 67.3 cm (26.5-in - 19-in rackmount space plus 7 .5-in cable
mounting)
• Depth: 67.9 cm (26.75 in)

Ordering Information

2.10

System Expansion

H9647-EX

60-inch-high CPU cabinet assembly with 120-V 3-phase power
controller

H9647-EY

60-inch-high CPU cabinet assembly with 240-V 3-phase power
controller

System Expansion
Expansion Hardware
UNIBUS Expansion Backplanes

DDll-CK

Four-slot expansion backplane mounting unit for BA11- KU/KV
and BA11A-EX/EY boxes or in PDP-11/84, 11/44, and 11/24
CPU boxes. Provides space for two hex and two quad slot
modules. Mounts in one SUo

DDll-DK

Nine-slot expansion backplane mounting unit for BA11-KU/KV
and BA11A-EX/EY boxes or in PDP-11/84, 11/44, and 11/24
CPU boxes. Provides space for seven hex and two quad
modules. Mounts in two SUs.

The DD11-CK backplane allows a maximum 5 V current of 16 A.
The DD11-DK backplane allows a maximum 5 V current equal to 28 A.

DD11-CK BACKPLANE
B

F
/

UNIBUS

QUAD SLOT

HEX OR QUAD SLOT

UNIBUS

QUAD SLOT

DD11-DK BACKPLANE

L
1

F
/

UNIBUS

QUAD SLOT

2
3

HEX OR QUAD SLOT

UNIBUS

QUAD SLOT

~ ............... li'~ .......;""...

., 11

System Expansion
UNIBUS Expansion Boxes

Product Description

BAIIA.EXlEY

Standard 10.5-in x 19-in (26.6-cm x 48.3-cm) rackmountable
expansion box with slides for use in expander cabinets. This
box uses an H7204 power supply and is rated at 100 A at 5 V,
5 A at + 15 V, and 6 A at -15 V. It provides six system units
(SUs) of mounting space and is compatible with the DD11CK/DK expansion backplanes. These backplanes are rated at
28 A at 5 V for SUl-2, 28 A at 5 V for SU3-4, 28 A at 5 V for
SU5-6, 5 A at + 15 V for SUl-6, and 6 A at -15 V for SUl-6.
A BC11A-10 UNIBUS cable is included for connecting to the
CPU box. Fans located between the power supply and modules
produce front-to-back cooling.
This expansion box must be mounted in a shielded enclosure
such as the H9647-EX/EY in order to meet RF emission regulations. It is recommended for use in H9642-FA/FB, FC/FD expander cabinets. Backplanes are not included.

Ordering Information

BAIIA·EX

10.5-inch-high, 6-system unit UNIBUS expansion box, 120 V

BAIIA.EY

10.5-inch-high, 6-system unit UNIBUS expansion box, 240 V

SU 1
1---------1 }

28 amps al + 5V

1---------1 }

28 amps al + 5V

1---------; }

28 amps al + 5V

SU2
SU3
SU4
SUS

SU6

2.12

System Exnansion

S amps at + 1SV,
6 amps at -1SV

System Expansion
UNIBUS Expansion Boxes
UNIBUS Expansion Worksheet
(BAllA-EXlEY)
OPTION

CARRY TO NEXT EXPANSION BOX ~

BA11A-E_# _SHEET_OF_

Notes:
*Panel inserts available; is cabinet dependent.
tCarry over only if next box is in same cabinet.

System Expansion 2.13

System Expansion
General Purpose System Cabinets

Product Description

The 153.6-cm (60.5-in)-high, general purpose, widebody system cabinet has
been developed to provide an economical, high-density EMI/RFI shielded
building block expressly for OEM system development. It utilizes Digital's
extensive cabinet shielding technology, which provides the OEM with broad
configuration latitude. The H9647 cabinet family is available in three specific
configurations, each with its own unique possibilities.

Features

• EMI/RFI shielding
• 52.5 inches of vertical rackmounting space
• 20 vertical I/O panel space allows easy cable management
• Expandable for multibay configurations
• Pull-out stabilizer leg
• Integral mechanical shock isolating castor assemblies
• More packaging density

Site Preparation Specifications
(Outside dimensions)

• Height: 153.6 cm (60.5 in)
• Width: 73.6 cm (29.0 in)
• Depth: 80 cm (31.5 in)

(Internal dimensions)

• Height: 131.3 cm (52.5 in)
• Width (total): 67.3 cm (26.5-to-19-in rackmount space plus 7.5-in cable
mounting)
• Depth: 67.9 cm (26.75 in)

H9647·A

This kernel or 60-in CPU cabinet assembly was developed for the OEM who requires a high degree of latitude in configuring a system. This·particular configuration is a 5.5-sided EMI/RFI shielded cabinet assembly that allows the
OEMs to tailor their requirements utilizing a wide range of accessories. There
are two cabinet versions in this family.

Ordering Information *

H9647·AA

Cabinet assembly, no power controller

H9647·AB

Cabinet assembly with 877-D 120-Vac, 24-A power controller
Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R
NEMA#5-20R

*Consult your DECdirect technical sales assistance representative at
1-800-343-4040 for additional ordering information.

2.14

System Expansion

System Expansion
General Purpose System Cabinets

H9647·EA

The H9647-EA is a kernel, 60-in CPU cabinet assembly. This configuration
has several options installed in it, which lends it to the development of highpackaging-density systems. The basic configuration is set up to accept 21
inches of class-A devices mounted at the top (Le., two RA81s), plus space to
mount one CPU (Le., PDP-ll/84, 11/44), a 5.25-in high system device or
blank. A lower front door to house device requiring shielding can be added
(not included).

Ordering Information

H9647·EA

H9647·FA

The H9647-FA is a universal60-in expander cabinet shielded on all six sides.
The front of the cabinet includes a front door that covers the entire 19-in
rackmounting section, from top to bottom. The door is extensively slotted
for optimum cooling.

Ordering Information

H9647·FA

Cabinet assembly with 877-D 120-Vac, 24-A power controller
Receptacle: NEMA #L5-30R
NEMA#5-20R

Optional Hardware

H9544-AC

Side panels for use with the H9647 System Cabinet. These
panels have light gray rollform edges, with contrasting charcoal
brown inserts. Two H9544-AC end panels are included with the
H9647-AA.

End Panels

Cabinet assembly with 877-D 120-Vac, 24-A power controller
Receptacle: NEMA #L5-30R
NEMA#5-20R

System Expansion

2.15

System Expansion
General Purpose System Cabinets
H9642.CA/CC
Product Description

The H9642-CA/CC cabinets are general purpose, front-loading, unshielded
cabinets. These cabinets are designed to house devices that do not require
shielding to meet FCC regulations for EMI/RFI. Both versions are stand-alone
cabinets. The H9642-CC includes a full front door, which is slotted for
proper cooling.
These cabinets can be used to rackmount BA23 boxed systems but are restricted to one BA23 device per cabinet due to cooling. These cabinets offer
a full line of optional hardware to complete the cabinet configuration. (This
cabinet is to be used only with box-level-compliant devices.)

Site Preparation Specifications
(Outside dimensions)

• Height: 105.7 cm (41.64 in)
• Width: 53.9 em (21.25 in)
• Depth: 76.2 cm (30 in)
• Load capacity: 450 lb maximum

(Internal dimensions)

• Height: 88.9 cm (35 in)
• Width: 48.3 cm (19 in)
• Depth: 67.9 cm (26.75 in)
• Load capacity: 450 lb maximum

Ordering Information *

Optional Hardware

H9642-CA

42-in stand-alone front-load cabinet

H9642·CC

42-in stand-alone front-load cabinet with full front door

H9642·DA

42-in stand-alone front-load cabinet with no end panels

H9504-VC

10.5-in filler panel

H9504-SC

5.25-in filler panel

00874-**

Power controllers

*Consult your DECdirect technical sales assistance representative at
1-800-34 3-4040 for additional ordering information.

2.16

System Expansion

System Expansion
Unshielded Mass- storage Cabinets

Product Description

There are a series of mass-storage cabinets that are used to rackmount Digital
disk products. They are not suitable for mounting BAll expander boxes or
devices that require shielded cabinets.

Site Preparation Specifications

• Height: 106 cm (41.7 in)
• Width: 54.1 cm (21.3 in)
• Depth: 91.4 cm (36 in)
• Weight: 90.7 kg (200 lb) as configured
• Receptacles: NEMA #L5-30R (120 Vac/60 Hz)
NEMA #6-15R (240 Vac/50 Hz)

Ordering Information

H9642-AD/AE

Top-loading stand-alone cabinet for the RL02.
Provides 53-cm (21-in) mounting space beneath the RL02.
Comes equipped with filler panels for mounting space below
top mounted disk.

H9642-AP/AR

Top-loading 36-inch deep cabinet for the RA60 removable disk.
Allows mounting of any combination of three RA60s, RA80s,
RA81s, and RA82s in the middle and bottom cabinet bays.
The first RA60, however, must be mounted in the top bay.

H9642-AS/AT

Same as H9642-AP except top mounted device must
be an RA81.

H9642-BD/BE

Top-loading expansion cabinet for 5.25-in. and 10.5-in. devices
such as the RL02, RC25, RA81, RA82, and TS05. Provides
53.3-cm (21-in) mounting space beneath the storage devices.

H9642-DB/DC

Standard 42-inch high, general purpose system/storage expansion cabinet. Accommodates three 10.5-inch mass-storage devices including RL02, RA81, RA82, RC25, and TS05. No
RA60s can be mounted in this cabinet.

System Expansion 2.17

System Expansion
Unshielded Mass -storage Cabinets

Product Description

The H9646-AH/AJ is a four-high deep storage cabinet that was specifically
designed to mount RA60s and RA81s. It offers a higher load capacity and
greater extended depth than the standard 60-inch cabinet.

Site Preparation Specifications

• Height: 156 cm (61.5 in)
• Width: 55.9 cm (22 in)
• Depth: 91.4 cm (36 in)
• Weight: 135 kg (300 lb) as configured
• Receptacles: lEe 309 type

Ordering Information

2.18

System Expansion

H9646-AH/AJ

Four-high disk cabinet with 881 three-phase power controller.
The H9646-AH/AJ will house up to four RA60s, RA81s, or
RA82s.

System Expansion
Communications Cabinets

Product Description

The H9646-CA/CD cabinets were designed specifically to house communications options. These cabinets are configured with a full-length smoked gray
transparent front door which allows visual access to displays, meters, switches
or front access to devices mounted in the cabinet. The front door is magnetically latched. The bottom of the rear door provides 48 square inches of cable
entry space and has a cable management bracket to secure cables.
This cabinet is ideally suited for housing the DF series rack mount modems,
DFM series statistical multiplexers (requires H9544-MK shelf assembly), and
remote DMZ32 distribution panels. The H9646 also has an optional shelf
assembly that allows nonrackmount devices to be stored in a cabinet.

Site Preparation Specifications
(Outside dimensions)

• Height: 156.2 cm (61.5 in)
• Width: 53.9 cm (21.25 in)
• Depth: 76.2 cm (30 in)
• Load capacity: 450 lb maximum

(Internal dimensions)

• Height: 133.3 cm (52.5 in)
• Width: 48.3 cm (19 in)
• Depth: 67.9 cm (26.75 in)
• Load capacity: 450 lb maximum

Ordering Information *

Optional Hardware

H9646·CA

60-in stand-alone communications cabinet

H9646·DA

60-in expansion communications cabinet
(no end panels included)

H9544·MK

Shelf assembly for H9646 cabinet

H9544·JD

60-in to 40-in joiner panel to mount H9642

H9544·MM

Power strip (6 outlets, 15-ft power cord)

*Consult your DECdirect technical sales assistance representative at
1-800-343-4040 for additional ordering information.

SY$tem. Expansion

2.19

System Expansion
Power Controllers

877 Product Description

The 877 series power controllers are general purpose, single-phase devices.
They are intended to be used in shielded cabinets in conjunction with the
H9544-S primary bulkhead assemblies.

Features

• Rackmountable using H9544-SK bulkhead assembly
• Local and remote switching
• Four switched and two unswitched outlets
• Convection cooled

874 Product Description

The 874 series power controllers are general purpose, single-phase devices.
The 874 distributes ac power in packaged systems. It is designed for use with
nonshielded cabinets where box level devices are used.

Features

• 48.3-cm (19-in) rackmount
• Local and remote switching
• Six switched and two unswitched outlets
• Filtered output

2.20

System Expansion

Chapter 3
Options

Options
Q-bus Processor Options and Memories

Q-bus Processor Options
Ordering Information

KEFll-AA

Single- and double-precision floating-point option. The
microcode to implement this option resides on two chips in
one 40-pin package. Performs microcode operations on 32-bit
and 64-bit floating~point numbers. Provides up to 17 digits of
precision. Provides integer-to-floating-point conversions.
Mounts on the CPU board.

Q-bus Memories
Ordering Information

MCVII-DC

32.;Kbyte CMOS static random access memory with onboard
battery backup. This battery backup provides minimum data
retention time of 50 days.

MSVII-MB

1-Mbyte dual-height parity MOS memory (field installation
only)

MSVll-QA

1-Mbyte parity MOS memory

MSVll-QB

2-Mbyte parity MOS memory

MSVll-QC

4-Mbyte parity MOS memory (field installation only)

MSVll-JD

1-Mbyte ECC PMI MOS memory (MicroPDP-ll/83 or 11/84)

MSVll-JE

2-Mbyte ECC PMI MOS memory (MicroPDP-ll/83 or 11/84)

MSVll-SA

2-Mbyte dual-height parity MOS memory

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at
.5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Options

I/O Panel
Insert Size

MSVll·MB

1 dual slot

2.2

0.0

11.0

2.0

1.0

NjA

MSVll.QA

1 quad slot

2.4

0.0

12.0

2.0

1.0

NjA

MSVll.QB

1 quad slot

2.3

0.0

11.5

2.0

1.0

NjA

MSVll·QC

1 quad slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

2.0

1.0

NjA

MSVll.JD

1 quad slot*

1.5

0.0

18.7

2.5

0.5

NjA

MSVll.JE

1 quad slot*

1.7

0.0

20.5

2.5

0.5

NjA

MSVll·SA

1 dual slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

2.0

1.0

NjA

*Q22jCD only. Insertion into Q22jQ22 may cause system damage.

3.2

Bus Loads
Drawn

Options
UNIBUS PMI Memory

PDP.ll/84 PMI Memory
Ordering Information

MSVII-JD

I-Mbyte ECC PMI MOS memory for the PDP-l1/84.

MSVll-JE

2-Mbyte ECC PMI MOS memory for the PDP-ll/84.

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

I/O Panel
Insert Size

MSVll.JD

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

18.7

2.5

0.5

N/A

MSVll.JE

1 quad slot

1.7

0.0

20.5

2.5

0.5

N/A

Options

3.3

Ethernet-to-Q-bus Synchronous Options

DEQNA
DEQNA

This Ethernet-to-Q-bus high-performance, synchronous communications controller connects Q-bus systems to Ethernet local area networks. The DEQNA
complies fully with the Ethernet specification, and operates at 10 Mbits per
second. The DEQNA provides Ethernet datalink layer functions and a portion
of the physical-channel functions. The DEQNA is supported under DECnet
Phase IV software. The DEQNA allows communication with up to 1,023
addressable devices on an Ethernet. It connects physically and electrically to
the Ethernet coaxial cable via transceiver cables (BNE3 series) and an H4000
transceiver or a local network interconnect (DELNI). The transceiver cable
can be a maximum of 45 meters (148 feet) in length for BNE3X series
transceiver cable.

Ordering Information

DEQNA.M

Ethernet-to-Q-bus single-line communications controller.
Includes base module only.

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits:
CK.DEQNA.KA For use with MicroPDP-11/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable length
is 21 inches.
CK.DEQNA.KB For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.
CK.DEQNA.KF For use with MicroPDP-11/83 H9642-JAjJB cabinet. Cable
length is 3 feet.

Configuring Information

Option

DEQNA

3.4 Options

Mounting
Requirements

1 dual slot

de Amps
Drawn@
'V

12V

3.5

0.5

Watts
Drawn

23.5

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

2.2

0.5

I/O Panel
Insert Size

Ethernet-to-Q-bus Synchronous Options
DELQA
DELQA

The DELQA is an Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller that connects
MicroPDP-ll and MicroVAX II systems to an Ethernet V2.0 or IEEE 802.3
local area network. It provides the firmware capability to support Maintenance
Operation Protocol (MOP), which offers enhanced network management features,
including remote circuit loopback, system identification messages, remote
booting of diskless systems, maintenance of data link counters, and IEEE
802.2 XID and Test. The DELQA physically and electrically connects to the
Ethernet coaxial cable by means of a CK-DELQA-xx cabinet kit, transceiver
cable (BNE3C or BNE3A series), and an H4000 Ethernet transceiver or a
Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). The DELQA also connects to ThinWire
Ethernet via a DESTA station adapter.

Ordering Information

DELQA-M

Ethernet-to-Q-bus single-line communications controller.
Includes base module only.

DELQA-SA

Factory-installed Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller for systems in BA200-series enclosures. No cabinet kit
required.

DELQA-SF

Field-installed Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller
for systems in BA200-series enclosures. No cabinet kit
required.

For system installation of the DELQA-M only, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
CK-DELQA-YA For BA123 and BAll-M enclosures. Cable length is 21 inches.
CK-DELQA-YB For MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is 12 inches.
CK-DELQA-YF

Configuring Information

Option

DELQA

For H9642 cabinet. Cable length is 3 feet.

Mounting
Requirements

1 dual slot

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

2.5

0.5

Watts
Drawn

18.5

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

2.2

0.5

I/O Panel
Insert Size

Options 3.5

Ethernet-to-UNIBUS Synchronous Options
DELUA
DELUA

This Ethernet/IEEE 802.3-to-UNIBUS high-performance, synchronous communications controller connects VAX and PDP-ll UNIBUS systems to both
Ethernet V2.0 and IEEE 802.3 local area networks. The DELUA is microprocessor-based, operates at 10 Mbits per second, and has 4 Mbits per second
throughput capability. The DELUA is the replacement product for the DEUNA.
The DELUA microcode ensures maximum throughput with minimum processor
intervention. It provides significant network maintainability features including
remote loopback of data from other stations, resident microdiagnostics, and
system identification.

Ordering Information

DELUA·M

Ethernet/IEEE 802.3-to·UNIBUS single-line communications
controller. Includes base module only.

For system installation of the DELUA-M, select the following cabinet kit:
CK·DELUA·KL For use in the PDP-11/84 OEM enclosure. Cable length is
4 feet.
CK·DELUA.KM For use with shielded UNIBUS cabinets and the PDP-11/84.

Cable length is 8 feet.

Configuring Information

Option

DELUA-M

3.6

Options

Mounting
Requirements

1 hex slot

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads Drawn

15 V

-15 V

8.0

1.0

0.0

4.0

1.0

I/O Panel
Units

Ethernet Option
H4000

H4000

The Ethernet transceiver (H4000) provides the functional interface between
network nodes and the Ethernet coaxial cable. It sends signals over the cable,
receives signals from the cable, and detects message collisions that occur. The
H 4000 uses a unique tapping mechanism for the physical connection to the
cable so that cutting the cable (and interrupting traffic on the network) is not
required. The H4000 can be customer installed using the Ethernet transceiver
Installation Tool Kit. This transceiver is used in conjunction with an Ethernet
communications controller at the host system. The transceiver cables must be
ordered separately.

Ordering Information

H4000

Ethernet transceiver.

H4000-BA

Ethernet transceiver (for use with a ThinWire DELNljDEMPR
combination) .

H4000 Transceiver
Installation Tool Kit

Self-installation of an H4000 transceiver requires the Ethernet Transceiver
Tool Kit (12-24664-02). The kit includes all the components necessary to install H4000 transceivers.
12-19817-01

Ethernet coaxial cable barrel connector.

12-19816-01

Ethernet coaxial cable terminator.

H4080

Ethernet turnaround connector.

H4054-00

Ethernet transceiver cable straight angle connector kit.

H4055-00

Ethernet transceiver cable right angle connector kit.

DEXJK

Etherjack.

DEXAR

Physical address ROM.

12-24664-02

Transceiver installation tool kit.

Options

3.7

Q-bus Asynchronous Options
DHQll Q-bus Controller

DHQll

The DHQ11 Q-bus communications controller provides eight asynchronous
DMA communications lines on one dual-size module. It supports RS-232 signalling with modem control and DEC423 (RS-423) signalling without modem
control. The DHQ 11 is the logical choice for connecting local terminals to
MicroVax II and MicroPDP-11 systems. It features eight asynchronous DMA
communications lines with software-programmable line speeds to 38.4 Kbits
per second, character lengths, XON/XOFF flow control, split receive and transmit speeds and full modem control (actual line speed depends on operating
system and user application); a 256-character input FIFO buffer that provides
improved system performance by supporting data-intensive input; and full
modem control with the RS-232 cabinet kit supporting full and half duplex,
and point-to-point modem communications.
The DEC423 cabinet kit supports local RS-232-compatible terminals at 9.6
Kbits per second at up to 250 foot distances with the H8571-A passive adapter.
The H3105-A active adapter and H8571-A passive adapter provide support at
distances up to 1000 feet. The DEC423 cabinet kit also reduces cable clutter in
the back of the CPU cabinet and significantly reduces the chances of damage
from static discharge, lightning, or ac-power impulses.
The DHQ11 is supported by the RSX, Micro/RSX, RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS,
MicroVMS, ULTRIX-32m, and VAXELN operating systems.

Ordering Information

DHQll-M

Asynchronous Q-bus communications controller.
Includes base module only.

Cabinet kits for RS-232 connection contain two B-size slot bulkhead distribution panels with 25-pin male connectors and associated cabling to connect the
module to the distribution panels. Data cables are not included.
CK-DHQ11-AA 21-inch cable for BA123 box
CK-DHQll-AB 12-inch cable for BA23 box
CK-DHQll-AF 36-inch cable for H9642 cabinet

Cabinet kits for DEC423 connection contain one B-size slot bulkhead distribution panel with a 36-conductor cable, compact remote terminal concentrator
and associated cabling to connect the control module to the distribution panel.
Data cables are not included.
CK-DHQII-WA 21-inch cable for BA123 box
CK-DHQII-WB 12-inch cable for BA23 box
CK:DHQll-WF 36-inch cable for H9642 cabinet

Configuring Information

3.8

Ootions

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

12 V

0.23

3.2

0.5

DHQll-M (RS-232)

1 dual slot

1.4

DHQll-M (DEC-423)

1 dual slot

2.0

I/O Panel
Insert Size

(2)B
(l)B

Q-bus Asynchronous Options
CX Q-bus Controllers

CX Communications
Controllers

The CX communications controllers provide asynchronous communications for
Q-bus systems that utilize the BA200-series system enclosures. The controllers
operate at speeds up to 38.4 Kbytes/s per line, and transmit data using either
Direct Memory Access (DMA) or programmed input.
Three CX communications controllers are available: the CXY08, CXA16, and
CXB16. The CXY08 provides 8 RS-232-C communications lines to terminals,
modems, or serial printers. All lines support full modem control, which permits
point-to-point dial-up or leased-line operation. The CXA16 provides 16 DEC423
lines for data-only connections (no modem control) using the DECconnect
modular plug connectors. The CXB16 provides 16 RS-422 communications
lines for data-only connections (no modem control). Cabinet kits are not
required with these options.

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

CXY08-AA

Factory-installed 8-line RS-232-C asynchronous controller with
modem control.

CXY08-AF

Field-installed 8-line RS-232-C asynchronous controller with
modem control.

CXA16-AA

Factory-installed 16-line DEC423 asynchronous controller,
data only.

CXA16-AF

Field-installed 16-line DEC423 asynchronous controller,
data only.

CXB16-AA

Factory-installed 16-line RS-422 asynchronous controller,
data only.

CXB16-AF

Field-installed 16-line RS-422 asynchronous controller,
data only.

Option

CXY08

Mounting
Requirements

1 quad slot

de Amps
Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

12 V

1.5

0.22

3.0

0.5

CXA16

1 quad slot

1.4

0.0

3.0

0.5

CXB16

1 quad slot

1.6

0.0

3.0

0.5

I/O Panel
Insert Size

Options

3.9

Q-bus Asynchronous Options
DHFll
DHFll

The DHFll is a fiber optic terminal interface that provides a maximum of 32
full-duplex, asynchronous, serial data channels on Q-bus systems. TheDHF11,
base on LSI technology, multiplexes 16 data lines onto one fiber optic cable.
The fiber optic terminal interface provides asynchronous connections to
Digital's Q-bus products where the environment prevents the use of copper
connections between the devices and the host system. The DHF11 also provides the ability to connect remote (up to one kilometer) clusters of terminals
to a Q-bus host where an Ethernet connection is not available. Therefore, the
DHF11 can be used in many applications including data concentration, near
or remote terminal interfacing, factory floor cell control, and terminal cluster
control. The fiber optic terminal Q-bus controller is fully compatible with existing software drivers, so new system software drivers are not required.
The DHF11 is a quad-height module that supports one or two 16-line ports.
Each 16-line port connects, via a dual fiber optic cable, to an active terminal
concentrator (H3132) that handles 16 full-duplex, asynchronous DEC423 serial
data lines.
The DHF11 is Q-bus compatible, so it can be used with any 16-, 18-, and 22-bit
address system (not supported on Q-bus processors that use the BA200-series
enclosure).

DHFll-AA

16-line fiber optic terminal controller, 120 V. Includes power
cords for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, andJapan.

DHF11-AB

16-line fiber optic terminal controller, 240 V. Requires
power cord.

DHF11-BA

32-line fiber optic terminal controller, 120 V. Includes power
cords for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, andJapan.

DHFll-BB

32-line fiber optic terminal controller, 240 V. Requires
power cord.

H3123-B2

16-line terminal concentrator upgrade for DHF11-AA, 120 V.
Includes power cord for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico,
and Japan.

H3123-B3

16-line terminal concentrator upgrade for DHF11-AB, 240 V.
Requires power cord.

Power Cords

BN19H-2E
BN19C-2E
BN19K-2E
BN19M-2E
BN19S-2E

Australia
Central Europe
Denmark
Italy
India

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

DHF11

1 quad slot

Ordering Information

3.10

Options

BN19U-2E
BN19E-2E
BN19A-2E
BN19P-1K

de Amps
Drawn at

Israel
Switzerland
United Kingdom
V.S./Canada (not required)

Bus Loads
Drawn

l-2-V

-12 V

5.0

0.0

3.7

1.0

I/O Panel
Insert Size

l(A)

Q-bus Asynchronous Options
DZQll

DZQll

The DZQ11 is a four-line, asynchronous multiplexer that provides local or
remote interconnection between MicroPDP-11 or MicroVAX systems and
RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 and EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10 terminals or other
systems. The DZQ 11 operates at program-selectable speeds of up to 9600
bits per second in full duplex, with limited modem control on each line. The
DZQ11 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 100 and
200 series modems and their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DZQll-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10.
Includes base module only.

For system installation of the DZQll-M only, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
CK-DZQll-DA For use with MicroPDP-11/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable length is
21 inches.

Configuring Information

CK-DZQll-DB

For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.

CK-DZQll-DF

For use with MicroPDP-11/83 H9642-JA/JB cabinet.
Cable length is 3 feet.

DZQll·SA

Factory-installed controller for BA200-series enclosures.
Includes base module only; no cabinet kit required.

DZQll·SF

Field-installed controller for BA200-series enclosures. Includes
base module only; no cabinet kit required.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

12V

DZQII-M

1 dual slot

1.1

0.24

8.38

1.5

1.0

DZQll-SA

1 dual slot

1.1

0.24

8.38

1.5

1.0

N/A

DZQll-SB

1 dual slot

1.1

0.24

8.38

1.5

1.0

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

Options

3.11

Q-bus Asynchronous Options
. DLVJl

DLVJl

The DLVJ1 is a four-line, asynchronous interface that provides local or
remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28,
EIA RS-422!CCITT V.11, and EIA RS-423/CCITT V.10 terminals. The DLVJ1
acts as four separate devices, making program operations more convenient
than they are with a multiplexer. The DLVJ1 operates at program or jumperselectable speeds from 150 to 38,400 bits per second in full duplex. Actual
device speed depends on current Digital operating systems and system configuration. Limited modem control is included. Split-speed transmit and receive
rates are supported on each line, making more efficient use of communications
facilities by reducing the software demand for the receive line. The DLVJ1 is
compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 100 and 200 series
modems and their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DLVJ1-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10
interface. Includes base module only.

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits:

Configuring Information

CK-DLVJ1-LA

RS-232 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure.
Cable length is 21 inches.

CK-DLVJ1-LB

RS-232 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure.
C~ble length is 12 inches.

CK-DLVJ1-LF

RS-232 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 H9642-JA/JB
cabinet. Cable length is 3 feet.

DL VJ1-M

EIA RS-422-C/CCITT V.U interface. Includes base module only.

CK-DLVJ1.EA

RS-422 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BAl23 enclosure.
Cable length is 21 inches.

CK.DLVJ1.EB

RS-422 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure.
Cable length is 12 inches.

CK.DLVJ1.EF

RS-422 cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 H9642 cabinet.
Cable length is 3 feet.

Option

DLVJ1.M

3.12 Options

Mounting
Requirements

1 dual slot

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

1.0

0.15

Watts
Drawn

6.8

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

1.0

IjOPanel
Insert Size

Q-bus Synchronous Options
DPVll
DPVll

The DPV11low-cost, single-line, synchronous, programmable interface provides
local or remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and other computer
systems with EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V. 11 interfaces.
It operates at speeds to 56,000 bits per second in half- or full-duplex with full
modem control. Actual device speed depends on current Digital operating systems and system configuration. The DPV11 is programmable for either byteoriented protocols (DDCMP or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (SDLC or
HDLC). It is suited for interfacing to medium-speed synchronous lines for
remote batch and remote job entry applications. The DPV11 is compatible
with Digital's family of modems and with the Bell 200 series modems and
their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DPVII-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.11
interface. Includes base module only.

For system installation of the DPVll-M only, select the following cabinet kits:

Configuring Information

CK-DPVll-AA

For use with MicroPDP-11/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable length is
21 inches.

CK-DPVII-AB

For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is 12
inches.

CK-DPVII-AF

For use with MicroPDP-11/83 H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable
length is 3 feet.

DPVll-SA

Factory-installed controller for BA200-series enclosures.
No cabinet kit required.

DPVll-SF

Field-installed controller for BA200-series enclosures.
No cabinet kit required.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

12V

DPVll-M

1 dual slot

1.2

0.3

9.6

1.0

DPVll·SA

1 dual slot

1.2

0.3

9.6

1.0

N/A

DPVll-SF

1 dual slot

1.2

0.3

9.6

1.0

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

Options

3.13

Q-bus Synchronous Options
DMVll
DMVll

The DMVll is a microprocessor-controlled, single-line, synchronous interface
that provides local or remote interconnection between Q-bus systems and
other computer systems with EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, CCITT V.35, or EIA
RS-423/EIA 449 interfaces. It operates at speeds from 2,400 bits per second to
56,000 bits per second (depending on the version selected) in half duplex or full
duplex. Actual device speed depends on current Digital operating systems and
system configuration. (19,200 bits per second is the maximum speed for RS-232
connection.) Depending on the operating system and layered software, the
DMVl1 can support up to 12 tributaries. In point-to-point configurations, the
DMVl1 can communicate with other DMVlls, DMClls, DUPlls, DPVlls, or
DMR11s. The DMVll is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with
Bell 200 series modems and their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DMV11-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-423/RS-449 interface.
Includes base module only.

CK-DMV11·AA For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure. Cable length

is 21 inches.
CK·DMV11·AB For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is

12 inches.
CK·DMVll·AF For use with H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable length is 3 feet.
DMVll·M

CCITT V.35 interface. Includes base module only.

CK·DMVll·BA For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure. Includes

a BC 17E cable for connection to modem. Cable length is
21 inches.
CK·DMVll·BB For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Includes a BC17E

cable for connection to modem. Cable length is 12 inches.
CK·DMV11·BF For use with H9642-JA/JBcabinet. Includes a BC 17E cable for

connection to modem. Cable length is 3 feet.
DMV11·M

EIA RS-423/RS-449 or CCITT V.10 interface. Includes base
module only.

CK·DMVll·FA

For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure. Cable length
is 21 inches.

CK·DMVll·FB

For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.

CK·DMVll·FF

For use with H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable length is 3 feet.

DMV11·N

Integral modem interface. Includes base module only.

CK·DMVll·CA For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure. Cable length

is 21 inches.
CK·DMVll·CB For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure. Cable length is

12 inches.
CK·DMVll·CF For use with H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable length is 3 feet.

Configuring Information

Option

DMVll-M(.B*)

12V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

I/O Panel
Units

1 quad slot

3.4

0.38

21.56

2.0

1.0

DMVll·M(.A*,.F*) 1 quad slot

3.4

0.38

21.56

2.0

1.0

1 quad slot

3.4

0.26

20.12

2.0

1.0

DMVll-N(·C*)

3.14 Options

Mounting
de Amps
Requirements Drawn at

Q-bus Synchronous Options
KMVIA

KMVIA

The KMVIA is a high-performance, direct memory access, single-line, programmable communications controller that provides interconnection between Q-bus
systems with EIA RS-232/CCITT V. 28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V. 11, and EIA
RS-423/CCITT V. 10 interfaces. It is capable of communications speeds of up
to 64,000 bits per second. Used on the MicroPDP-ll systems, it utilizes the
Micro/T -11 processor to perform user-defined communications functions,
thereby freeing the host to do more application computations. The KMVIA can
be programmed in synchronous or asynchronous modes. It also provides full
modem support for Digital's family of modems, for the Bell 200 Series or
equivalent, and for Eurqpean PPT -approved modems. KMVIA supports
Software Development Tools X.25 Link Level, HDLC Framing Software, and
VAX P.S.1. software. (See Software chapter for software ordering information.)
(VAX P.S.1. is limited to 19,200 bits per second.)

Ordering Information

KMV1A·M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA RS-422/CCITT V.ll, or
EIA RS-423/CCITT V.I0 interface. Includes controller
module only.

For system installation of the KMVIA-M only, select one of the following
cabinet kits:

Configuring Information

CK·KMV1A·AA

EIA RS-232 for MicroPDP-ll/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable
length is 21 inches.

CK·KMV1A·AB

EIA RS-232 for MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.

CK·KMV1A·AC

RS-232 for PDP-ll/23-PLUS cabinet. Cable length is
30 inches.

CK·KMV1A·AF

EIA RS-232 for MicroPDP-ll/83 H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable
length is 3 feet.

CK·KMV1A·EA

EIA RS-422 for MicroPDP-ll/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable
length is 21 inches.

CK·KMV1A·EB

EIA RS-422 for MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.

CK·KMV1A.EC

RS-422 for PDP-ll/23-PLUS cabinet. Cable length is 30 inches.

CK·KMV1A·EF

EIA RS·422 for MicroPDP-ll/83 H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable'
length is 3 feet.

CK·KMV1A·FA

EIA RS-423 for MicroPDP-ll/83 BA123 enclosure. Cable
length is 21 inches.

CK·KMV1A·FB

EIA RS-423 for MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable length is
12 inches.

CK·KMV1A·FC

RS-423 for PDP-ll/23-PLUS cabinet. Cable length is 30 inches.

CK·KMV1A·FF

EIA RS-423 for MicroPDP-ll/83 H9642-JA/JB cabinet. Cable
length is 3 feet.

Option

KMVIA·M

Mounting
de Amps
Requirements Drawn at

1 quad slot

12V

2.6

0.2

Watts
Drawn

15.4

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

3.0

1.0

1/0 Panel
Insert Size

Options 3.1;

UNIBUS Asynchronous Options
DHUll
DHUll

The DHU1l16-line, asynchronous multiplexer with direct memory access
provides local and remote interconnection between UNIBUS PDP-11 and VAX
systems and EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-423-A/CCIT V.10 terminals.
The DHU11 operates at program-selectable speeds of up to 38,400 bits per
second in half- or full-duplex. Actual device sp~d depends on current Digital
operating systems and system configuration. Full modem control is available
on all 16 lines. Split-second transmit and receive rates are supported on each
line, making for more efficient use of communications facilities by reducing
the software demand for the receive lines.

Ordering Information

DHUll-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 or EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.10
interface with full modem control and DMA. Includes base
module only.

For system installation of the new 11/84-E Series, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
CK-DHUll-AD For general purpose use in shielded UNIBUS cabinet with the
entire PDP-ll/84 E series. Cable length is 10 feet.
CK-DHUll- VD Remote distribution cabinet kit for DHU11. Requires only

two I/O distribution panels for shielded interconnect to two
8-connector distribution panels., Each distribution panel has
full international modem control signals for four of the eight
serial lines. Internal cable length is ten feet.
For system installation of the 1l/84-A Series, select one of the following cabinet kits:
CK-DHUll-AE For kernel cab of PDP-llX84 (A series). Cable length is
7 feet.
For use with 10.5-inch PDP-ll/84 (A series) OEM enclosure.
C able length is 3 feet.
CK-DHUll-VF Same as CK-DHUll-VD, except length of internal cable is 3
feet. For use with PDP-ll/84-A 10.5-inch OEM enclosure.
CK-DHUll-AF

Configuring Information

3.16

Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

DHUll-M

1 hex slot

Cabinet
Kit

Use On

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15 V

6.0

0.4

2.2

1.0

Internal Cable
Length

I/O Panel
Units

See below

External Cable I/O Panel
Length
Units

CK-DHUll-AD All PDP-ll/84-E

CK-DHUll-VD All PDP-ll/84-E

CK-DHUll-AE llX84 Kernel cab-A series

CK-DHUll-AF 1l/84-A 10.5-in OEM box

CK-DHUll-VF 1l/84-A 10.5-in OEM box

8
10

UNIBUS Synchronous Options
DMRll
DMRll

The DMRII is a high-performance, microprocessor-controlled, single-line,
synchronous interface that provides local or remote interconnection between
UNIBUS PDP-II and VAX systems and other computer systems with EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, CCITT V.35, EIA RS-423/RS-449, or EIA RS-422/RS-449
interfaces. The DMRII implements DDCMP in hardware and supports direct
memory access data transfers, DECnet point-to-point configurations, and full
modem control. It operates at speeds of up to 1 Mbyte per second in half- or
full-duplex. Actual device speed depends on current Digital operating systems
and system configuration. The DMRll can communicate with another DMRll,
a DMVll, or any other synchronous interface that implements DDCMP Version
3.1 or 4.0. Depending on the version selected, the DMRII is compatible
with Digital's family of modems and with Bell 200 series and Bell500a 11/5
modems and their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DMRll-M

Includes base module only.

For system installation, select the appropriate external cable and one of the
following cabinet kits:
CK-DMRll-AD EIA RS-232-C cabinet kit. For use with shielded UNIBUS
cabinets and the PDP-llX84. Cable length is 10 feet.
CK-DMRll-AL

EIA RS-232-C cabinet kit for use in the PDP-ll/84 (A series
only) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 4 feet.

CK-DMRll-BD V.35 cabinet kit. For use with shielded UNIBUS cabinets and

the PDP-llX84. Cable length is 10 feet.
CK-DMRll-BL

V.35 cabinet kit for use in the PDP-ll/84 (A series only)
10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 4 feet.

CK-DMRll-CD Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with shielded UNIBUS

cabinets and the PDP-llX84. Cable length is 10 feet.
CK-DMRll-CL

Integral modem cabinet kit for use in the PDP-ll/84 (A series
only) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 4 feet.

CK-DMRll·ED EIA RS-422/RS-449 cabinet kit. For use with shielded UNIBUS
CK-DMRll-EL

cabinets and the PDP-llX84. Cable length is 10 feet.
EIA RS-422/RS-449 cabinet kit for use in the PDP-ll/84
(A series only) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 4 feet.

CK-DMRll-FD

EIA RS-423/RS-449 cabinet kit. For use with shielded UNIBUS
cabinets and the PDP-llX84. Cable length is 10 feet.

CK-DMRll-FL

EIA RS-423/RS-449 cabinet kit for use in the PDP-ll/84
(A series only) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 4 feet.

The following cables are used for direct connect of CPUs with the CK-DMRllC* cabinet kits only (integral modem):
Cable

Frequency

Distance

BC55S
BC55S
BC55S
BC55T

1 Mbyte
500 Kbytes
250 Kbytes
56 Kbytes

6,000 ft (1,830 m)
7,000 ft (2,135 m)
8,000 ft (2,440 m)
16,000 ft (4,800 m)
Options

3.17

UNIBUS Synchronous Options
DMRll
Configuring Information

3.18

Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

.5V

1.5 V

-1.5 V

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

DMRll·M (.A*,·C*)

2 hex slots

12.0

0.08

0.19

1.0

DMRll·M (.B* ,.E*)

2 hex slots

12.0

0.11

0.20

1.0

DMRll·M (·F*)

2 hex slots

12.0

0.11

0.20

1.0

UNIBUS Synchronous Options
DUPll
DUPll

The DUPll high-performance, single-line, synchronous, programmable
interface provides remote interconnection between UNIBUS PDP-II and VAX
systems and other computer systems with EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface.
It operates at speeds of up to 9600 bits per second in half- or full-duplex with
full modem control. Actual device speed depends on current Digital operating
systems and system configuration. The DUPII is programmable for either byteoriented protocols (DDCMP or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (SDLC or
HDLC). It is suited for interfacing to a medium-speed synchronous line for remote batch and remote job entry applications. The DUPl1 is compatible with
Digital's family of modems and with the Bell 200 series and their equivalents.

Ordering Information

DUPll-M

EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface. Includes base module
only.

For system installation, select the following cabinet kit:
CK-DUPll-AD For use with shielded UNIBUS cabinets and the PDP-IIX84.
CK-DUPll-AF

Configuring Information

Option

DUPll-M

For use with PDP-ll/84 (A series only) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 3 feet.

Mounting
Requirements

1 hex slot

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15V

3.6

0.08

I/O Panel
Units

1.0

Options

3.19

UNIBUS Communications Processors/Controllers
KMSII-BD/BE
KMSII-BD/BE

The KMSll-BD/BE eight-line, synchronous, intelligent front end provides up
to eight lines of interconnection between UNIBUS PDP-ll or VAX systems and
other devices with ErA RS-232-c/ccrTT V.28 or CCITT V.35 (with optional
hardware module) interfaces. The KMS11-BD/BE operates at speeds of up to
56,000 bits per second in half- or full-duplex with full modem control (V.35 is
required for 56 Kbits per second). The KMS11-BD/BE supports direct memory
access data transfers, VAX and RSX-ll X.25 Link Level, and VAX HDLC/BSC
Framing Software (see Software chapter for software ordering information).
Maximum line speed depends on the software application. The X.25 link level
software is currently warranted for four lines at 56,000 bits per second (using
V.35) or eight lines at 19,200 bits per second.

Ordering Information

KMSll-BD

Eight-line communications multiplexer including a KMCll-B
auxiliary processor unit, line terminator, modem control unit,
I/O connection panel, double system unit, and internal cables.

KMSll-BE

Same as KMSll-BD without the double system unit.

Configuring Information

3.20 Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

lSV

-lSV

IjOPanel
Units

KMSll-BD

2SU

12.5

1.5

0.50

7.0

2.0

KMSll-BE

3 hex slots

12.5

1.5

0.50

7.0

2.0

UNIBUS Communications Processors/Controllers
KMS1P
KMS1P

The KMSlP single-line, synchronous, intelligent communications controller
provides interconnection between UNIBUS PDP-ll and VAX systems with EIA
RS-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA RS-423-A/CCITT V.lO, CCITT V.35, or RS-422--A/
CCITT V.ll interfaces. The microprocessor-based device operates at speeds of
up to 64,000 bits per second in half- or full-duplex with full modem control.
The KMS lP supports direct memory access data transfers, the VAX and
RSX-ll P.S.I. software package, and RSX X.25 link level software.
(See Software chapter for software ordering information).

Ordering Information

KMSIP·M

Single-line programmable synchronous intelligent
communications controller. Includes microprocessor and
line unit modules.

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits. All cabinet kits
include a lO-foot cable.
X.25 EIA RS-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface for shielded
cabinets.
CK·KMSIP·BD X.25 CCITT V.35 interface for shielded cabinets.
CK·KMSIP.AD

Configuring Information

CK·KMSIP·ED

X.25 EIA RS-422/RS-449/CCITT V.U interface for shielded
cabinets.

CK-KMSIP·FD

X.25 EIA RS-423/RS-449/CCITT V.lO interface for shielded
cabinets.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

KMS1P-M

2 hex slots

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15 V

10.5

0.15

0.2

5.0

1.0

I/O Panel
Units

Ootions

3.21

Q-bus Realtime Options
DRVll
DRVll

Base option. General purpose, program-controlled, parallel
line interface unit. Permits program-controlled data transfers
at rates up to 40 Kwords per second. External cables not included. BC04Z or BC07D are recommended. Includes only base
option module. Requires the following cabinet kits:

DRVll

CK-DRV1B-KA For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure.
CK-DRV1B-KB

For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure.

CK.DRV1B.KC

For use with H349.

CK·DRV1B-KF

For use with H9642-JA/JB cabinets.

DRVll-WA

Base option. General purpose direct memory access (DMA)
16-bit parallel interface unit with 22-bit addressing capability.
It permits data transfers at rates up to 250 Kwords per second
in a single cycle mode and up to 500 Kwords per second in burst
mode. External cables are not included. BC08R or BC04Z
cables are recommended. Includes only the base option
module. Requires the following cabinet kits:

CK·DRV1W.KA For use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure.
CK.DRV1W.KF For use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure and H9642-JA/JB

cabinets.
DRV1W-SA

General purpose, 16-bit parallel DMA Q-22 interface module.
Requires two BC08R or BC04Z cables to connect to user device. Includes base option module only. Factory-installed in
BA213, BA214, and BA220. Cabinet kit not required.

DRVl W ·SF

General purpose, 16-bit parallel DMA Q-22 interface module.
Requires two BC08R or BC04Z cables to connect to user device. Includes base option module only. Field-installed in
BA213, BA214, and BA220. Cabinet kit not required.

DRVll·J

Base option. General purpose program-controlled parallel line
interface. Contains 64 bidirectional input/output lines configured as four 16-bit ports. Bit interruptible on up to 16 lines.
Interrupt vectors may have fixed or rotating priorities. Includes
cabinet kit. Includes only base option module. Requires
the following cabinet kits:

Configuring Information

3.22

()Ptions

CK.DRV1J.KA

Cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure.

CK.DRV1J.KB

Cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-11 BA123 enclosure.

CK.DRV1J.KC

For use with H349.

CK-DRV1J.KF

For use with H9642-JA/JB cabinets.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

I/O Panel
Insert Size

DRVll

1 dual slot

0.9

0.0

4.5

2.8

1.0

(2)A

DRVll·WA

1 dual slot

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

DRVll·SA

1 dual slot

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

N/A

DRVll·SF

1 dual slo[--

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

N/A

DRVll.J

1 dual slot

1.8

0.0

9.0

2.0

1.0

(2)A

UNIBUS Realtime Options
DRll
DR11

DRll·C

General purpose digital interface. Permits bidirectional
16·bit parallel transfers between the user's device and the
UNIBUS. Cable for connection to user device is not included.
BC06R or equivalent is recommended. DR11 base option
module.

DRll·W

Base option. General purpose DMA controller that interfaces
user devices to the PDP-11 UNIBUS. In addition, the DR11·
WP provides a half-duplex interprocessor link between
UNIBUS, VAX, and Q-bus systems when connected to another
DR11-W (for UNIBUS or VAX) or DRV11-B (for Q-bus). Features include transfer of up to 64K 16-bit words at up to
500,000 words per second; word or byte transfers; and burst
data transfers. BC06R-xx or equivalent cables are required for
interconnect, the maximum length being 15.2 m (50 ft).
Includes only the DRll base option module. Requires one of
the following cabinet kits.

CK·DRll·LD

DR11-W and DR11-C cabinet kit for use with UNIBUS shielded
cabinets and the PDP-11X84. Required cables are included.
Cable length is 10 feet.

CK·DRll.LF

DR11-C and DR11-W cabinet kit. For use with the PDP-11/84
(A series) 10.5-inch OEM enclosure. Cable length is 3 feet.

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

.5V

1.5 V

-1.5 V

0.0

1.0

0.0

1.0

DRll·C

1 quad slot

1.5

DRll·W

1 hex slot

3.7

0.0

Options

3.23

UNIBUS Realtime Options
DRll.WC/WD
DRll.WC/WD

The DR 11-WC/WD is a long line version of the DR11-W general purpose interface. The DR11-WC/WD uses a differential adapter module along with the
standard DR11-W module to provide for interconnection cables of up to 1000
feet. The interface can be used for connecting customer equipment to UNIBUS
processors or for linking various combinations of PDP-11 and VAX processors.
The DR11-WC/WD utilizes DMA data transfers, providing 16-bit parallel data
transfers directly to and from memory. The DR11-WC/WD uses the standard
DR11-W diagnostics and drivers to make the two products software compatible. Cables for connection to user device or link cables are not included.
Available in the U. s. only.

Ordering Information

DR11-WC

DR11-W plus differential adapter module, interconnect cables,
test connectors for use on the adapter module and an FCC compliant user I/O distribution panel.

DR11-WD

Long-line upgrade kit for DR11-W. Includes all the items in the
DR11-WC except the DR11-W interface module.

CK.DR1WX·LE DR11-WC and DR11-WD cabinet kit. For field upgrades in

shielded UNIBUS cabinets. Cable length is 7 feet.

Configuring Information

3.24 Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15 V

-15V

I/O Panel
Units

DRll·WC

1 hex slot
1 quad slot

5.2

0.0

1.0

DRll·WD

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

N/A

UNIBUS Realtime Options
IEEE Interfaces

IEEE Interfaces

The IEUll, IEQll, and IEeil interfaces conform to the IEEE STD. 488-1978
for compliant test equipment. The IEUll and IEeil are for UNIBUS based
systems, and the IEQll is designed for Q-bus systems. The IEUll and IEQll
incorporate two independent general purpose interface bus (GPIB) controllers.
Each controller is capable of supporting up to 15 instruments, including
the controller itself. This gives the user the ability to connect up to 28 instruments to a single module. The lEe 11 is a single controller that connects up to
15 instruments, including the controller itself. The IEUll, IEQll, and IEeil
are bit-parallel byte-serial controllers that can perform transfers in either
program interrupt or DMA mode. DMA is standard with the IEUl1 and the IEQll
It is optional with the lEe 11. Each independent bus provides system
controller, controller-in-charge, talker, and listener capabilities. Termination
of data transfers are by E.O.I. or byte count. The IEUll and the IEQll also
offer termination of data transfers by match characters.

Ordering Information

IEUI1-AD

Bit-parallel, byte-serial DMA UNIBUS interface controller for
IEEE-488-1978 instruments. Includes interface module, test
cable, bulkhead/cable assembly for connecting to one of the
two IEEE controllers on the module. See the cable chart below.

IEQll.AD

Bit-parallel, byte-serial DMA Q-bus interface controllers for
IEEE-488-1978 instruments. Includes interface module, test
cable, bulkhead/cable assembly for connecting to one IEEE
STD 488 controller. For BA23 system packaging.

IEQll·AF

IEQll for BA123 and H9642 cabinet.

IEQll·SA

IEQll for Q-bus systems. Factory-installed in BA213, BA214,
andBA220.

IEQll·SF

IEQll for Q-bus systems. Field-installed in BA213 , BA214,
andBA220.

QJS37.X*

RSX-IIM/M-PLUS driver, sources (IEUll or IEQl1).

QJS37·DZ

RSX-IIM/M-PLUS driver, license to copy.

QJS02.X*

RSX-IIM/M-PLUS driver, sources (IEell).

*Designates media. Driver must be ordered separately.

Cable Information
for IEEE Interfaces

Option

Cable to
1st Controller

Cable to
2nd Controller

Cable to
User Device

IEUll·AB

Included

BNllD-02

BNOIA-02

IECll-AB

Included

N/A

BNOIA-02

IECII-CA

Included

N/A

BNOIA-02

IEQll.AD

Included

BNllL-OC

BNOIA-02

IEQll·AF

Included

70-20161-01

BNOIA-02

IEQll·SA

Included

N/A

BNOIA-02

IEQll·SF

Included

N/A

BNOIA-02

Options

3.25

UNIBUS Realtime Options
IEEE Interfaces/Realtime Clocks

Configuring Information

Realtime Clocks
Ordering Information

Option

3.26

Options

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

.5V

15V

-15V

0.0

1.0

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

1.0

IEUll-AB

1 hex slot

3.5

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at
.5V

15V

IEQll-AD

1 quad slot

3.5

0.0

17.5

2.0

IEQll.AF

1 quad slot

3.5

0.0

17.5

2.0

1.0

IEQ11-SA

1 quad slot

3.5

0.0

17.5

2.0

1.0

N/A

IEQll-SF

1 quad slot

3.5

0.0

17.5

2.0

1.0

N/A

KWll-P

I/O Panel
Insert Size

UNIBUS programmable realtime clock. Program-selectable

interrupts of 100 kHz, 10 kHz, line frequency or external
signal, counted down by 16-bit counters with automatic reload.
KWVll-C

Configuring Information

Mounting
Requirements

Option

Q-bus 16-bit programmable realtime clock. Four program·
mabIe modes and five crystal-controlled frequencies are userselectable.

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

.5V

15V

-15V de

I/O Panel
Units

KWll-P

1 quad slot

1.0

0.0

1.0

N/A

KWVll-C

1 dual slot

2.0

0.0

1.0

N/A

Environmental Products
Introduction/Power Conditioning System Plus/Power Distribution System Plus

Introduction

Proper site planning and preparation can simplify the overall installation process for efficient, reliable system operation. Digital's environmental power
products help solve power-related problems in two ways: they protect individual
circuits and control the power flowing into the system. Our power-related
solutions let you control the quality of electrical power flowing into your computer. Use the following checklist to help evaluate your site prior to installation
to ensure maximum system efficiency.
• Consider the space available for system components with adequate area for
operation, maintenance, and ventilation. (Digital recommends a one-meter
(39-inch) front, side, and rear service area for cabinets).
• Be sure to have an adequate power source for your system that is free from electrical disturbances.
• Install a dedicated power distribution panel for the system.
• Install and operate peripheral devices within recommended distance requirements.
• Check all construction requirements, including raised floors, floor loading and
grounding, and cable locations.
• Be sure of proper fire and safety precautions, including emergency shutdown
capability.
• Ensure the availability of additional space and power service for future system
expansion.
Remember, the computer area environment (temperature and humidity) has
a substantial effect on overall system reliability and should be evaluated by a
Digital Field Service Engineer. For configuration and ordering or more detailed information on these products, refer to the Environmental Products
Reference Guide and Price List, or call 603-884-5000, or write to
Digital Equipment Corporation
Environmental Products Group
Continental Boulevard, MK01/W83
Merrimack, NH 03054

Power Conditioning System Plus/
Power Distribution System Plus

The Power Conditioning System Plus (PCS +) offers comprehensive power conditioning, distribution, and environmental monitoring for medium-to-Iargesized (15 to 100 kVA) Digital computer systems. The PCS Plus offers a dependable solution to every power-related problem except a power outage. It corrects
electrical variations including sags, surges, brownouts, and spikes, and it is
offered in five electrical variations.
For owners of medium-to-Iarge computer systems who do not need voltage regulation or surge suppression, Digital offers five different sizes of Power Distribution Systems Plus. (PDS +). The PDS Plus offers advanced power monitoring and distribution. The Power Distribution System Plus, like the Power
Conditioning System Plus, replaces conventional wiring and monitors
electrical power.

Options

3.27

Environmental Products
Options/CVC/Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors/Standby Uninterruptable Power System

pes Plus/PDS Plus Options

The Remote Interface Alarm option (H7227-KB) allows interconnection with
building systems such as smoke and water detectors, halon and air conditioning
systems, and security setups.
Environmental Monitor/Repo Stations (H7227-KD/KE/KF) are now offered
for the Power Distribution and Power Conditioning systems. They feature
quick-read LCD temperature and humidity monitoring options, with an audible alarm silence and reset button, and automatic poweroff for high ambient
temperature conditions.

Constant Voltage Conditioner

The Constant Voltage Conditioner (CVC) products are available in two series:
the portable H7225 and the medium-sized system H7226. Each of these series
consists of self-contained, integrated power conditioning systems designed
specifically for use with single-phase Digital products. The CVC products were
developed to correct input voltage fluctuations as well as low-voltage "brownout" conditions often encountered during peak power usage situations. Protection from the effects of electrical noise, impulses, and "spikes" is also provided by the CVC products. The H7225 series is available in sizes from O.5-kVA
to 3.0 kVA single phase. The H7226 series is offered in 5.0- to 10.0-kvA
single-phase sizes.

Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors

High-energy impulses can damage your computer system. These energy transients can enter the system through the ac power lines or through the data communication lines. The H7007 family of Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
products are specifically designed to prevent this type of damage. The H7007-A
series, for ac power, provides fast-acting, high-energy power-line transient protection regardless of the cause. The H7007-B and C series offer single and multiple data line suppression for both RS-232 EIA and 20-mA configurations. The
H7007-D series provide complete terminal protection by combining H7007-A
and H7007-B in one package. The new H7007-P series features a low-profile
outline with a three-outlet distribution capability, ac power transient suppression, and a selection of data line suppressors in a wall hugging package that
plugs directly into a standard wall receptacle. This new design is also available
without the data line suppressor in the H7007-LB model. The H7007-M series
offer suppression for up to 24 data lines in one package, with the ability to
combine protection for RS-232, RS-422, and RS-423 standards.

Standby Uninterruptable
Power System

The Standby Uninterruptable Power System provides battery backup for critical applications for up to twelve minutes at full-rated load. It provides attenuation of impulses, receptacle panel distribution, and casters for ease of installation. It is available in three sizes: 500 VA, 1,000 Va, and 1,440 VA (120 VAC At
60 Hertz).

3.28

Options

Components
Single.board Processors

Ordering Information

KDFll·AA

PDP-11/23 single board with memory management unit (MMU).
This 16-bit dual-height central processor features 4-Mbyte
addressing, four-level vectored interrupts for fast response
without device polling, and 87 standard PDP-II instructions
including EIS.

KDFll-AC

PDP-11/23 single-board (without MMU), 16-bit central processing unit. This dual-height module features 64-Kbyte addressing, four-level vectored interrupts for fast response without
device polling, 87 standard PDP-II instructions including EIS,
and 46 optional floating-point instructions.

KDFll·BA

PDP-11/23-PLUS quad-height single-board CPU. Designed for
use in moderate-speed realtime applications, it includes all features of the KDFU-AA plus two serial lines, diagnostics, bootstrap ROM, and program-controlled line clock.

CK-KDFIB·KA

Cabinet kit for use with BA23 enclosure (includes selectable
baud switch). Cable length is 15 inches.

CK.KDFIB.KC

Cabinet kit for use with H349 I/O distributon panel (includes
selectable baud switch). Cable length is 30 inches.

KDJll-AB

High-performance, dual-height PDP-II processor with 8-Kbyte
cache memory, floating-point, memory management, and
system registers. It includes Q-bus 18- or 22-bit addressing,
four jumper selectable powerup options, and onboard diagnostics
with four microdiagnostic LEDs. A floating-point unit instructs
arithmetic, logical, and conversion operations, and the MMU
allows the processor to operate in kernel, supervisory, or user
processor mode.

KDJll·AC

Same as KD]ll-AB except the FP]ll-AA is installed on the
module.

KXJll-CA

A 16-bit, quad-height peripheral processor designed to enhance
the performance of a Q-bus system acting as a data aquisition/
control processor, co-processor or I/O communications processor which will run in either 16- or 32-bit environments. The
module is powered by the DC] 11 which supports the full
PDP-II instruction set. Memory features include 512 Kbytes of
DRAM, with dual-ported access that can be shared between the
local]ll bus and the Q-bus, and 64 Kbytes of PROM. A 16-bit
DMA controller facilitates data transfers to or from the local
I/O devices, local memory and Q-bus addresses. I/O structures
provided include dual channel synch/asynch SLU ports (one
with modem control), DL compatible asynch console SLU port
and a 20 line parallel port with three programmable interval
times. MicroPower/Pascal (MP/P) is the supported application
and development software for the KX]ll-CA. Peripheral Processor tool kits are available for RSX11-CA. Peripheral Processor
tool kits are available for RSX-11M, RSX-11M-PLUS,
Micro/RSX, RT-ll and MicroVMS operating systems.

Options 3.29

Components
Single-board Processors

Configuring Information

KXTll-AB

Single-board, 16-bit dual-height central processor. Its features
include 16 Kbytes of static RAM, 64 Kbytes of direct addressing capability, Q-bus interface, PDP-11 base-level instruction
set, and 50,60, or 800 Hz realtime clock. The KXT11-AB also
includes 24-line parallel I/O, two asynchronous serial I/O ports,
four 28-pin memory sockets for up to 16 Kbytes of additional
RAM and 16 Kbytes of ROM, or an extra 32 Kbytes of RAM or
32 Kbytes of ROM.

KXTll-CA

A 16-bit peripheral processor powered by the DCT11 microprocessor which executes the base level PDP-11 instruction set.
Memory includes 32 Kbytes of SRAM and 32 Kbytes of ROM.
The module has two DMA channels, two programmable synch/
asynch SLU ports, one console SLU port and one 20 line parallel
port. This product is fully supported by MicroPower/Pascal
and associated peripheral processor tool kits.

Option

Amps Amps Max Bus Loads Drawn Form
12V Watts ac
Factor
5V
dc

System
Size

Address
Range

KXTll·AB
2.5
(FALCON.PLUS)

60mA 13.2

2.7

0.5

DUAL N/A

64 Kbyte

KXJll.CA
6.0
(I/O Processor)

2.0

54.0

3.0

0.5

QUAD

Q18/Q22

512 Kbyte
programmable

KXTll·CA
3.5
(I/O Processor)

60mA 18.2

2.7

1.0

QUAD

Q18/Q22

64 Kbyte

KDFll·AC
(LSI.ll/23)

2.0

0.2

12.4

2.0

1.0

DUAL

Q18/Q22

64 Kbyte

KDFll·AA
(LSI. 11/23)

2.0

0.2

12.4

2.0

1.0

DUAL

Q18/Q22

4 Kbyte

KDJll.A
(LSI. 11/73)

4.5

0.0

22.5

3.4

1.0

DUAL

Q18/Q22

4 Kbyte

Processor Options
Processor
Option

3.30 Options

KXTll·AB

KXT11-A5

- Macro ODT ROMs

KDFll·AA

KEF11-AA

- Floating Point Chip; FPF11-AA - FloatingPoint Accelerator

KDJll.AB

FPJ11-AA

- Floating-Point Coprocessor Chip

Components
Single-board Processor Options

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

KEF11-AA

Single- and double-precision floating-point option for use with
the KDF11-AA. The KEF11-AA performs hardware operations
on 32-bit and 64-bit floating-point numbers, provides up to 17
digits of precision as well as integer-to-floating-point conversions. It has 40-pin DIP IC. The KEF11-AA mounts on the
KDF11 CPU board and requires a KTF11.

FPJll-AA

Floating-point coprocessor option for use with the KDJ11-AB/
AC modules. This single-chip option is designed to significantly
improve the performance three or four times of computationintensive applications. The FPJ11 is compatible with other
PDP-11 systems with floating point. The 40-pin package is
installed on the CPU board.

KTF11-AA

Memory management chip for use with the KDF11- AC. It features 4 Mbytes of 22-bit addressing, memory segmentation,
built-in memory protection, and 40-pin DIP IC.

KXTll-A5

This two-chip EPROM set provides a number of special utilities
used for developing, debugging, and downline-Ioading software
to the KXTI1-AB using MicroPower/Pascal.

KDFll-B3

Bootstrap ROM upgrade kit for use with KDF11- BA/-BF.
Provides bootstrap capability for RD52, RQC25, TK50, and
TSV05, in addition to RX50/RD51, and RX01/RX02, and
DECnet devices.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at
5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads Drawn
ae

KEFll-AA

KDFll module

N/A

FPJll-AA

KDFll-AC module

N/A

Options

3.31

Components
Single-board Processor Options

Ordering Information

12-bit, 4-channel digital-to-analog converter and CRT control.
Provides an output signal that meets the needs of many industrial and laboratory applications.

AAVII-C

Cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable
length is 12 inches.
CK-AAVIC-KC BA123 and deep cabinet {H9642-JA/JB}.

CK-AAVIC-KA

12-bit, 16-channel analog-to-digital converter with programcontrolled sampling rates to 25 kHz and external realtime
clock, input for AID trigger. Provides input capability for
many industrial and laboratory applications.

ADVII-C

CK-ADVIC-KA Cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable

length is 12 inches.
CK-ADVIC-KC BA123 and deep cabinet {H9642-JA/JB}.

Combination 16-channel analog input and 2-channel analog
output interface board. Features two analog output channels
with ranges identical to the input channels.

AXVII-C

Cabinet kit for use with MicroPDP-ll BA23 enclosure. Cable
length is 12 inches.
CK·AXVIC-KC BA123 and deep cabinet {H9642-JA/JB}.

CK-AXVIC·KA

Configuring Information

3.32 Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

.5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads Drawn
ac

AAVll-C

1 dual slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

N/A

ADVll·C

1 dual slot

2.0

0.0

10.0

N/A

AXVll·C

1 dual slot

2.0

0.0

10.0

N/A

Components
Memories and Multifunction Options

RAM Memories
Ordering Information

MeVll modules provide CMOS static Random Access Memory with onboard
battery backup.

MCVll·DC

32-Kbyte dual-height module with minimum data retention of
1,180 hours (50 days).

MSVll memory modules are complete dynamic MaS memory subsystems.

ROM Memories
Ordering Information

MSVll·MB

1-Mbyte dual-height module with 256K MaS RAM chips.
(Field installable only.)

MSVll·QA

1 Mbyte quad-height 64K MaS memory.

MSVll.QB

2-Mbyte quad-height 256K RAM MaS memory.

MSVll·QC

4-Mbyte quad-height 256K RAM MaS memory. (Field
installable only.)

MSVll·JD

1-Mbyte quad-height ECC PMI memory (11/83, 11/84).

MSVll.JE

2-Mbyte quad-height ECC PMI memory (11/83, 11/84).

MRVll PROM/ROM module with 16 sockets that accept customer-supplied,
erasable UVPROM, fusible link PROM, or masked ROM devices. It also accepts
several densities of ROM chips. The MRVll can operate in window mapping
address mode, and provides bootstrapping capability.

MRVll·C

Accommodates 24-pin devices up to and including 4K by 8
chips for a total capacity of 64 Kbytes of 18-bit addressing.

MRVll·D

Accommodates 24-pin and 28-pin devices including 8K by 8
static RAMs, and 32K by 8 chips for a maximum of 512 Kbytes
of 22-bit addressing. Requires MXVll-B2 bootstrap ROM for
bootstrapping capability.

Options 3.33

Components
Memories and Multifunction Options

Multifunction Modules
Ordering Information

IEEE Option
Ordering Information

MXVII multifunction module features dynamic MaS RAM with onboard
refresh, user-configuration with PROM or system device bootstrap ROM
option, acceptance of two 5.0-V, 24-pin UVPROM or fusible link PROM
chips, two serial lines meeting RS-432 standard (backward compatible with
RS-232-C), baud rates up to 38.4K, and 50/60-Hz crystal clock.

MXVll·BF

High-density multifunction module includes 128-Kbyte
RAM, two 28-pin user ROM sockets, two independently configurable asynchronous serial lines compatible with RS-232-C
and RS-423, and a realtime clock configurable at 50, 60, or 800
Hz. Supports 22-bit addressing. Requires MXVI1-B2 bootstrap ROM for bootstrapping capability.

MXVII-B2

8-Kword bootstrap/diagnostic ROM set for use with the
MXVI1-BF or MRVII-D. Supports 22-bit addressing and provides bootstrap support for TU58, RL01, RL02, and RX02.
Also supports RD51/RX50 and DECnet devices including
DPV11, DUV11, DLVI1-E, and DLVII-F.

IBVll·A

Instrumentation bus interfaces that connects the Q-bus to the
16-line IEEE-488 bus.

Note: Analog options are available as add-on options for installation by technically experienced customers. They are compatible with the system backplane
but are not installed in a Digital manufacturing facility. Analog options do
not include I/O connection panel inserts, nor are they qualified for use in an
FCC Class A system.

Configuring Information

3.34 Options

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads Drawn

12 V

MSVll·MB

1 dual slot

2.2

0.0

11.0

2.0

1.0

MSVll.QA

1 quad slot

2.4

0.0

12.0

2.0

1.0

MSVll·QB

0.0

11.5

2.0

1.0

1 quad slot

2.3

MSVll.QC

1 quad slot

2.5

0.0

12.5

2.0

1.0

MSVll·JD

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

18.7

2.5

0.5

MSVll.JE

1 quad slot

1.7

0.0

20.5

2.5

0.5

MXVll·BF

1 dual slot

3.4

0.1

18.2

2.3

0.5

IBVll·A

1 dual slot

0.8

0.0

4.0

1.9

1.0

Components
Enclosures and Cables

System Enclosures
Ordering Information

Cables
Ordering Information

These products are field add-on only:
BAll-SA(SB)

The BAll-SA master box contains a 4-by-9 slot backplane with
22-bit addressing on slots AlB only. The backplane accepts up
to nine dual- or nine quad-height modules and is compatible
with the RLV21 and the RLV22 options. Dimensions are 13.2
by 48.3 by 57.8 cm (5.2 by 19 by 22.7 in). The power supply
comes with a master console and provides 36 amps at 5 V and
5 amps at 12 V.

BAll-SE

Same as BAll-SA but without a master console.

BA23-A

The BA23 master box contains a 4-by-8 22-bit address backplane. Slots one through three provide 22-bit addressing on
slots AlB only and slots four through eight provide 22-bit
addressing on slots AlB and C/D. Up to eight quad-height,
or three quad-height and ten dual-height module, can be
mounted. The BA23 has mounting space for one RD51/RD52
and/or one RX50 mass-storage device.

BA23A·AF

BA23-A tabletop/pedestal enclosure.

BA23A·AR

BA23-A rackmount enclosure.

BA23A·CC

BA23-A expansion enclosure.

BCVIB·06

Jumper cable assembly used to expand the backplane from the
first to second backplane or expansion box. It consists of two
modules connected by two 1.8-m (6-ft), 40-conductor Bergto-Berg connectors.

Options 3.35

Components
Backplanes

Backplanes
Ordering Information

3.36

Options

H9270·Q

4·by-4 slot 22-bit backplane with card guide is a Q-bus that
will accept eight dual- or four quad-height boards on slots AlB
and C/D. The H9270 is compatible with the RLV12 and RLV22
options.

H9273·A

4-by-9-slot backplane with card guide is a Q-bus that will accept up to nine dual- or quad-height boards on slots AlB and a
special module interconnect bus on slots C/D. The H9273 is
compatible with the RLV21 and RLV22 options.

H9275·A

The H9275 4-by-9-slot backplane with card guide is a nonexpandable backplane with 22-bit addressing and built-in bus terminators. It contains the 22-bit addressing on slots AlB and
C/D and will accept 18 dual- or nine quad-height boards. It is
compatible with the RLV12 and RLV22 options.

H9281

A family of three 18- or 22-bit backplanes with card guides.

H9281.QA

2 by 4 slot backplane where the Q-bus on slots AlB accepts up
to four dual-height modules.

H9281·QB

2 by 8 slot backplane with built-in bus terminators, and the
Q-bus on slots AlB accepts up to eight dual-height boards.

H9281.QC

2 by 12 slot backplane that includes bus terminators. The
Q-bus on slots AlB accepts up to 12 dual-height boards.

Chapter 4
Cables

Cables
Coaxial Cables/Cable Assemblies

BNE2A/BNE2B

The BNE2A and BNE2B are the transmission mediums for the Ethernet system. These coaxial cables are designed to work with the H4000 Ethernet transceiver to provide complete network integrity.

Specifications

• Gauge: 11.5-AWG, 500HM

Connectors

• "N" type male coaxial connector, both ends

Ordering Information

BNE2A·MA

23.4 meters (76.8 feet)
Teflon™ coaxial cable

BNE2B·MA

23.4 meters (76.8 feet) PVC
jacketed coaxial cable

BNE2A·MB

70.2 meters (230.3 feet)
Teflon coaxial cable
117.0 meters (383.9 feet)
Teflon coaxial cable

BNE2B·MB

230.3 meters (230.3 feet)
PVC jacketed coaxial cable

BNE2B·MC

117.0 meters (383.9 feet)
PVC jacketed coaxial cable

500.0 meters (1640.4 feet)
Teflon coaxial cable

BNE2B·ME

500.0 meters (1640.4 feet)
PVC jacketed coaxial cable

BNE2A·MC
BNE2A·ME

BNE3H,K,L,M

The BNE3H, K, L, and M cable assemblies are used with the H4000 Ethernet.

Specifications

• Gauge: 20-AWG
• Straight (180°) or right-angled (90°) options

Connectors

• 15 pin "D" subminiature connectors, male and female

Ordering Information

Straight PVC
BNE3H·05

5 meters (16.4 feet)

BNE3H·I0

10 meters (32.8 feet)

BNE3H·20
BNE3H·40

BNE3L·20

20 meters (65.6 feet)

BNE3L·40

40 meters (131.2 feet)

10 meters (32.8 feet)

Right-Angle PVC
BNE3K.05

5 meters (16.4 feet)

BNE3M.05

BNE3K.I0

10 meters (32.8 feet)

BNE3M.I0

10 meters (32.8 feet)

BNE3M·20

20 meters (65.6 feet)
40 meters (131.2 feet)

BNE3K·40

Cables

5 meters (16.4 feet)

Right-Angle Teflon

BNE3K.20

4.2

20 meters (65.6 feet)
40 meters (131.2 feet)

Straight Teflon
BNE3L·05
BNE3L.I0

20 meters (65.5 feet)
40 meters (131.2 feet)

BNE3M·40

5 meters (16.4 feet)

Cables
Fiber Optic Cable

BN25B

The BN25B is a dual channel two-conductor fiber optic cable assembly
designed for use with the FOCFA/FOCMA-AA RS-232 to fiber optic
converters.

Specifications

• Conductors: Two
• Wiring: Transmit and receive lines are indicated by arrows, i.e. ---) pointing
away from connector = transmit opposite for receive.

Connectors

• SMA style (Amphenol906 series) (4)

Ordering Information

BN25C.OE

0.5 meters (1.64 feet)

BN25C·25

25 meters (82.02 feet)

BN25C·03
BN25C·I0

3 meters (9.84 feet)
10 meters (32.81 feet)

BN25C·50
BN25C·AO

50 meters (164.04 feet)
100 meters (328.08 feet)

FOCFA/FOCMA

The FOCFA/FOCMA is an RS-232-to-fiber-optic converter, which allows
any asynchronous, serial line device to utilize a fiber optic link between the
host CPU and a terminal or a serial printer and a terminal.

Specifications

• Features data security and maintains a bit error rate of 10-9
• ac input voltage: 95-128 ac 60 Hz; dc output current: 80-to-130 rnA

Connectors

Ordering Information

• One female and one male RS-232.

FOCFA·AA

Female RS·232 120 Vac

FOCMA-AA

Male RS·232 120 Vac

Cahies

4.3

Cables
Communications Cables

BC16D

The BC 16D is a 36-conductor shielded cable assembly used as an extension
cable in conjunction with the H3104 cable concentrator and a BC16C cable
assembly.

Specifications

• Conductors: 36 (18 twp)

Connectors

• 36-position male right angle

Ordering Information

BC16D·50

BC17C

The BC17C is a fully shielded modem cable designed for use with the DECSA
Ethernet communication server, and high-speed synchronous modems. This
cable can also be used with any other RS-232 synchronous or asynchronous
modem products.

Specifications

• Conductors: 17

15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC16D.AO

30.5 meters (100 feet)

• Gauge: 28-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid
• Wiring: Point-to-point

Connectors

Ordering Information

• One male and one female RS-232 25-position

BC17C·I0

3 meters (10 feet)

BC17C·AO

BC17C·25

7.6 meters (25 feet)
15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC17C·BO

BC17C·50

4.4

Cable.

BC17C.B5

30.5 meters (l00 feet)
60.9 meters (200 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

Cables
Communications Cables

BC17E

The BC17E is a 26-conductor (13 twp) fully shielded V.35 modem cable
assembly designed for high-speed V.35 modem applications on the DESCA
Ethernet communications server, but could also be used with a DMR11 and a
DMV11 with the appropriate cabinet kit.

Specifications

• Conductors: 26 (13 twp)
• Gauge - Conductors: 24-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid
• Wiring: Null modem

Connectors

• 34-position male; 37 -position female D-subminiature

Ordering Information

BC17E-25

BC17N

The BC17N is a 54-conductor (27 twp) fully shielded cable designed to interconnect a TU80 tape with a host CPU. Two cables are required per tape drive.

Specifications

• Conductors: 54 (27 twp)
• Gauge -

Connectors

Ordering Information

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BC17E·50

15.2 meters (50 feet)

Conductors: 26-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid

• One female and one male 50-position D-subminiature

BC17N-12

3.7 meters (12 feet)

BC17N-20

6.27 meters (20 feet)

BC17N-24

7.3 meters (24 feet)

BC22D

The BC22D is a fully shielded null modem cable designed to be used in
asynchronous applications including DMF32, or in place of BC03M or any
RS-232 communications optionfbulkhead.

Specifications

• Conductors: 6
• Gauge: 24-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid
• Wiring: Null modem

Connectors

Ordering Information

• Two RS-232 female D-subminiature

BC22D-I0
BC22D-25
BC22D-50

3.0 meters (10 feet)
7.6 meters (25 feet)
15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC22D-AO

30.5 meters (100 feet)

BC22D-BO
BC22D-B5

60.9 meters (200 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

Cables 4.5

Cables
Communications Cables

BC22E

The BC22E is a fully shielded asynchronous modem cable designed to be used
with DMF32, or in place of BC22B or any RS-232 communications optionJ
bulkhead.

Specifications

• Connectors: 16
• Gauge: 24-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid
• Wiring: Point-to-point

Connectors

Ordering Information

• One male and one female 25-position D-subminiature

BC22E·02

0.6 meters (2 feet)

BC22E·AO

30.5 meters (100 feet)

BC22E·10
BC22E·25
BC22E·50

3.0 meters (10 feet)
7.6 meters (25 feet)
15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC22E·BO
BC22E·B5

60.9 meters (200 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

BC22F

The BC22F is a fully shielded, 25-conductor ErA cable used as a replacement in
traditional BC05D asynchronous applications. It was also designed as the synchronous cable for use on the DMF32 sychronous port and synchronous
modems.

Specifications

• Conductors: 25
• Gauge: 24-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid
• Wiring: Point-to-point

Connectors

Ordering Information

4.6

Cables

• One male and one female 25-position D-subminiature

BC22F·10

3.0 meters (10 feet)

BC22F·AO

30.5 meters (100 feet)

BC22F·25
BC22F·50

7.6 meters (25 feet)
15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC22F·BO
BC22F·B5

60.9 meters (200 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

Cables
Communications Cables

BC55S/BC55T

The BC55S is triaxial RG59/U cable, and the BC55T is a twinaxial (ltwp)
cable. These fully shielded cables were designed for use with the integral
modem option available on the DMRll and the DMV11. Two cables are
required for full-duplex operation.

Specifications

• Conductors: 1
• Gauge -

Conductor: 20-AWG solid; Shield: 34-AWG bare copper braid

• Impedance: 75 ± 3 ohms

Connectors

Ordering Information

• Two BNC male

BCSSS-2S

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BCSST-2S

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BCSSS-SO
BCSSS-AO
BCSS'S-BS

15.2 meters (50 feet)
30.5 meters (100 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

BCSST-SO
BCSST-AO

15.2 meters (50 feet)
30.5 meters (100 feet)
76.2 meters (250 feet)

BCSSS-EO

152.4 meters (500 feet)

BCSST-EO

152.4 meters (500 feet)

BCSSS-LO

304.8 meters (1,000 feet)

BCSST-LO

304.8 meters (1,000 feet)

BCSST-BS

Cables 4.7

Cables
Interconnection Cables

BC26V

The BC26 V is designed as the interface cable between controllers and storage
interconnect (SI) type storage devices. This cable is used with the RA60, RA81,
RA82, TA78, and TA81 (SI devices only).

Specifications

• Conductors: 4
• Gauge: Conductors - 30-AWG drains - 28-AWG Stress member - 16-AWG

Connectors

• Two 8-position, 2 by 4 (four signal, four ground)

Ordering Information

BC26V-l2

3.7 meters (12 feet)

BC26V-50

15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC26V-25

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BC26V-80

24.4 meters (80 feet)

BC22M

The BC22M is a 16-conductor fully shielded cable designed for use with the
DFM series of multiplexing products. The cable is used to either interconnect
DFM to DFM channel to channel or to connect the tail circuit to a modem. Not
for use with the external modem.

Specifications

• Conductors: 16
• Gauge: Conductors: 24-AWG; Shield: 36-AWG tinned copper braid

Connectors

• Two 25-position male

Ordering Information

4.8 Cables

BC22M-lO

3 meters (10 feet)

BC22M-25

7.6 meters (25 feet)

Cables
Terminal Cables

BCC03/BCCI7

The BCC03/BCC 17 are cables that are used with the VT241 color monitor option. The BCC17 is used exclusively on the PCIOO with a VT241 color monitor,
and the BCC03 is used on all other VT241 applications.

Specifications

• Conductors: four - stranded, three - coaxial
• Gauge: Conductors: 20-AWG, stranded; 30-AWG, coaxial; Shield: 38-AWG
tinned copper braid

Connectors

• One 15-position female and 3 BNC male

Ordering Information

BCC03·06

BCC04/BCC 14

The BCC04 is the modem cable designed for use with the personal computer
product family and the VT200 series of products. This fully shielded cable is
used to connect any personal computer with a modem, and it is used as a
~ter cable for Rainbow 100s.

Specifications

• Conductors: 25-BCC04, 16-BCC14

1.8 meters (6 feet)

BCC17·06

1.8 meters (6 feet)

• Gauge: 26-AWG
• Wiring: Point-to-point

Connectors

Ordering Information

• One male and one female 25-position D-subminiature

BCC04·10

3 meters (10 feet)

BCC04-50

BCC04·25

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BCC14-10

15.2 meters (50 feet)
3 meters (10 feet)

BCC05

The BCC05 is the printer cable designed for the DECmate II, Professional 380
and VT200 series of products. This fully shielded cable is used to connect these
personal computers with any of the specified Digital printers (LA100).

Specifications

• Conductors: 7
• Gauge: 26-AWG
• Wiring: Null modem

Connectors

• One 9-position female D-subminiature and one 25-position female D-subminiature

Ordering Information

BCC05·10
BCC05~25

3.0 meters (10 feet)
7.6 meters (25 feet)

BCC05·50

15.2 meters (50 feet)

BCC05·AO

30.5 meters (100 feet)

Cables 4.9

Cables
DECconnect Products

BC16E

The BC16E (DEC DATALINE) is an unshielded 6-conductor flat cable. The
MMP is the DEC423 standard connector. To connect MMPs into existing terminals, passive physical adapters are required that allow both RS-232 and
RS-423 signaling to pass through. This cable supports data only connections. Modems must still be used via RS-232 connections.

Connectors

25-pin D-subminiature (for terminal connection); 9-pin D-subminiature (for
printer connection)

Ordering Information

BC16E·I0

3 meters (10 feet)

BC16E.25

7.6 meters (25 feet)

BC16E·50

15.2 meters (50 feet)

BC16M

The BC 16M is a Thinwire office cable used to connect the DECconnect
wallplate or faceplate to a ThinWire tranceiver (DESTA).

Specifications

• Conductors: 1
• Gauge: 20-AWG, coaxial tinned copper braid

Connectors

• MaleBNC

Ordering Information

BC16M·06

l.8 meters (6 feet)

BC16M·15

4.5 meters (15 feet)

BC16M·30

9.0 meters (30 feet)

DECconnect Terminal Interconnect
Cable

The DECconnect Terminal Interconnect Cable is an 8-conductor, 4-twisted
pair cable used to connect the faceplate or wallplate to the SER. This cable is
available in PVC or FEP (for environmental airspace) on unterminated reels.

Ordering Information

H8245·A

ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable

The ThinWire Ethernet cable is a thin, flexible, and easy-to-install coaxial
cable, making it very suitable for work area installation. Thirty devices may be
connected to a single segment. When a Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) is used,
29 stations may be connected to a single segment ThinWire cable. Current
Ethernet devices may be connected to ThinWire using a ThinWire Station
Adapter (DESTA). A maximum of eight ThinWire segments may be connected
to a ThinWire Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) to form a network of up to 232
stations. A local network interconnect (DELNI) may be used to concentrate
up to eight DEMPRs. For more information on ThinWire Ethernet Products,
consult the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide.

Ordering Information

H8243·A

4.10

Cables

1,000·foot reel PVC

1,000 foot reel, PVC

H8246·A

H8244·A

1,000·foot reel FEP

1,000 foot reel, Teflon

Cables
Cable Application Table

Communications

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

DELNI

BCC06

DECNA

BNE3H-M

DELNI

BCC06, BNE3A-D

DECNA

BNE2A-B, H-M

H4000

BNE3H-M

DEQNA, DSRVA, DELNI, DECSA, DELUA

BC22D

VT Series

H4000

DMF32

DMRll, DMPll,
DMVll

DFM04-16

BC22E

DF100-200 Series Asynchronous Modems

BC22F

DF100-200 Series Synchronous Modems
(2400 baud or less)

BC17C

DF100 Series Synchronous Modems
(over 2400 baud)

BC27A

LP25, LP26, LP27, LN01, LG01 and LG02
(except - DA versions)

BC27B

LP04-14

BC55D

RS-422/423 Modem Applications

BC55S or BC55T

DMRll, DMPll, DMVll (integral modem)

BC17C

DF100 Series Synchronous Modems
(over 2400 baud)

BC17E

V.35 Modems

BC22F

DF100-200 Series Synchronous Modems
(2400 baud or less)

BCC04 or BCC14

VT200 Series

BC22E

LA12-210, VT100-180

BC22M

DF100-200 Series Modems (from channel ports only)

BC22D

VT Series

BC22E

DF100-200 Series Asynchronous Modems

BC22F

DF100-200 Series Synchronous Modems
(2400 baud or less)

DSRVA-AA

BC22D

VT Series

DSRVB-AA

BC22D
BC22E

VT Series
DF100-200 Asynchronous Modems

DSRVA-BA,
DSRVB-BA

BC16E

H8751 and VT Series

DMZ32-M

BC18L
BC18M (Plenum)

DMZ32 Distribution Panel (H3014)

DHUll, DZQll,
DHVll, DMB32
DHQll

DMZ32-M
Distribution
Panel

BC22D

VT Series

BC22E

DF100-200 Series Asynchronous Modems

BC22F

DF100-200 Series Synchronous Modems
(2400 baud or less)

Cables 4.11

Cables
Cable Application Table

Tapes

Controllers

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

TU78

BC17M(FCC)

TU78

TU80, TU81

BC17N

UNIBUS Controller

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

BC26V

TA78,RA60,RA81,TA81

BNCIA

CI750, CI780

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

PC100

BCC14

LA12-21O, LQP, LN03

BC16E

LA75

BCC17

VT241

BCC19

LVP16

BCC04 or BCC14
and BC22D

DMF32
DLV] 1

BCC04 or BCC14

DFIOO-200 Series Asynchronous and Synchronous
Modems (2400 baud or less)

PC278
PC27-BA

BCC13

RL02

PC278/350

BCC03

VT241

BCC05

LA12-210, LQP, LN03

Controllers
UDA50, HSC50

PC Products

PC 100/278/350

Fiber Optics

4.U

Cables

BC16E

LA75

BCC20

LVP16

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

RF-FOAFB-AA

BN25B

RF-FOAFB-AA

RF-FOAMB-AA

BN25B

RF-FOAMB-AA

FOCFA, FOCMA

BN25B

FOCFA, FOCMA

Cables
Cable Application Table

Printers/Hardcopy Devices

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

LA12-210
LGOI-DA
LG02-DA

BC22D

VT100 Series

LN03

LA75

DMF32, DLV]1
BC22E

DFI00-200 Series Asynchronous
Modems

BC22F

DFI00-200 Series Asynchronous
Modems
(2400 baud or less)

BCC04/BCCI4

PCI00

BCC05

PC278/PC350, VT200 Series

BC16E

VT100/200 Series, PC Series

Non-compliant Systems

LPll

70-11212

LP04-14

70-16560

LP25,LP26

LP25
LP26
LP27
LNOI
LGOI-AA/BA/CA
LG02-AA/BA/CA

BC27A

DMF32, DMB32
LPll
LPVll

Non-compliant Systems

LQP

LVP16

Video Terminals/Workstations

BC22D

DMF32, DLVJl

BC22E

DFI00-200 Series Asynchronous
Modems

BCC19

PCI00

BCC20

PC278/PC350, VT200 Series

BCC24

LA Series, LN Serial Printers

Device from

Cable needed

Device to

VT200 Series

BC22F

DFI00-200 Synchronous Modems
(2400 baud or less)

BCC04 or BCC14

DFI00-200 Series Asynchronous and
Synchronous Modems (2400 baud or
less)

BCC05

LAI2-210, LQP, LN03

BC22D

DMF32, DLV]1

BC26R

DFI00-200 Series Asynchronous
Modems

BC26S

LAI2-210, LQP, LN03,
DMF32, DLV]1

VT278

Cables 4.13

Chapter 5
Disks and Tapes

Disks and Tapes
Digital Storage Architecture

Digital Storage
Architecture

Long established as a leader in the manufacture of computer systems, Digital
also sets the standard for the design and manufacture of storage systems with
our Digital Storage Architecture (DSA). DSA is a framework for an expanding
family of disk devices, storage arrays, tape drives, optical products, and controllers and 1/0 servers.
This carefully planned framework of standardized interfaces governs the interactions of all Digital host systems and storage subsystems. Today, virtually all
of Digital's storage subsystems - whether for the smallest PDP-ll or for the
largest VAxcluster - are based on DSA.
DSA protects your investment in Digital subsystems. With DSA, you can add
new storage products and incorporate new technologies without the need to
develop additional software drivers or modify applications software.
DSA includes several families of products, each of which is compatible within
itself, but not with other families.

Features

• The Standard Device Interconnect (SDI) family includes RA-series disk drives;
TA-series tape drives; HSC70 and HSC50 1/0 servers; and KDB50, KDA50, and
UDA50 board controllers.
• The midrange TU81-Plus tape drive has its own controller and complements
RA-series disk drives for nonclustered systems.
• The low-end family includes RD-series Winchester disk drives, RX-series flexible disk drives, and the RQDX3 disk controller. It is complemented by the
TK-series cartridge tape drives, which have their own controllers.
• DSA provides high standards of software compatibility for all of Digital's stor,age subsystems.
• Software written for one Digital system can be easily migrated to any other
DSA-supported system without affecting the way it works with a specific DSA
storage device.
• DSA allows new technologies to be incorporated in state-of-the-art storage
products that are fully compatible with existing storage devices.
• Subsystem-based intelligence offloads many of the functions that are normally
host-associated, thus providing more usable CPU power.

S.2

Disks and Tapes

Disks and Tapes
SDIPamily

SDIFamily

The architecture definition provides standards for data integrity that are
incorporated into each of theDSA components and subsystems. Standard
Device Interconnect (SDI) storage devices include the 2.5-Gbyte SA482
storage array, the 280-Mbyte 5.25-inch RA70 Winchester fixed disk, the
622-Mbyte RA82 Winchester fixed disk, the 456-Mbyte RA81 Winchester
fixed disk, and the 205-Mbyte RA60 removable-media disk. Any drive or
storage array can be connected to any controller port and can be mixed on the
same controller. The drives and storage array are dual-ported and can be
connected to the HSC70, HSC50, KDB50, KDA50, and UDA50.

Features

• Seek ordering - Reorders I/O requests, thereby improving effective I/O access
time
• Overlapped seeking - Transfers data from one disk while seeking on any other
disks with outstanding I/O requests
• Rotational optimization - Selects the disk nearest the beginning sector when
more than one disk is positioned on cylinder
• Express queue - Provides immediate servicing of I/O requests, if required
(architectural)
• Speed matching buffers - D,se high-speed RAM to smooth the disk data burst
rates to host CPU I/O bus (architectural)
• 170-bit error correction code (EeC) - Detects and corrects up to eight
independent 10-bit error bursts per section, reducing the possibility of uncorrectable data errors that result from media degradation
• Redundant header addresses - Records disk block header information four
times for more reliable sector location
• Automatic sector relocation - Automatically removes defective blocks
from service and replaces them with others, without causing shrinkage in
usable space
• Error detection code - Checks controller memory and data path errors as
well as ECC hardware operation
• Error reporting - Reports all significant errors to the host system, enabling
detection and preventive action before subsystem failure or data loss
(architectural)

n~C!1,..C! ..... ..IT........C!

. .;: 1.

Disk Controllers
KDA50

Product Description

The KDA50 implements the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) and allows SDr
disk drives to be used with a variety of Q-bus system configurations. The
KDA50 is an intelligent controller containing two high-speed microprocessors
for host-disk communication and data routing through the KDA50's onboard
memory buffer. The KDA50's advanced design allows for the controller to handle disk drives with sustained data transfer rates of up to 880 Kbytes/second.
The controller consists of two quad modules that can be mounted in adjacent
Q-bus backplane slots. Each controller can attach up to four RA-series disk
drives or up to four RA component drives in a storage array. This enhanced microcode typically provides a ten-percent performance improvement for transfer
sizes in the 4- to 8-Kbyte range seen in most VMS applications. Applications
optimized for maximum bandwidth can see an average improvement of fifty
percent.

Features

• Stores up to 20 host I/O requests for disk optimization
• Provides for buffering of up to 41 disk sectors in order to smooth the data rates
between the high-speed disks and the host Q-bus port
• Direct controller-host memory transfers
• Indicates fault conditions on LED displays and in a hardware register that is
readable by the host
• Aids subsystem troubleshooting by logging the last fault in an error registry
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

KDA50-QA

Confipring Information

Option

KDASO-QA

5.4 Disks and Taoes

Q-bus controller for SDr disk drives.

Mounting
Requirements

2 quad slots

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

13.5

0.04

Watts
Drawn

67.9

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

3.0

0.5

I/O Panel
Insert Size

(2)B

Disk Controllers
UDA50

Product Description

The UDA50 controller implements the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) and
allows SDI disk drives to be used with a variety of UNIBUS system configurations. The UDA50 is an intelligent controller containing two high-speed microprocessors for host and disk communication as well as data routing in and out
of the onboard memory buffers. The UDA50's advanced design permits the
controller to handle disk data rates up to 3 Mbytes per second. The controller
consists of two hex modules that can be mounted in any two adjacent UNIBUS
slots. Each controller can attach up to four RA-series disk drives or up to four
RA component drives in a storage array.

Features

• Stores up to 20 host I/O requests for disk seek optimization
• Provides for buffering of up to 52 disk sectors in order to smooth the data rates
between the high-speed disks and the host UNIBUS port
• Allows direct controller-host memory transfers
• Indicates fault conditions on LED displays and in a hardware register that is
readable by the host
• Aids subsystem troubleshooting by logging the last fault in an error register
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

UDA50-A

Configuring Information

Option

UDA.50-A

UNIBUS controller for SDI disk drives.

Mounting
Requirements

2 hex slots

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

.5V

15V

-15 V ae

12.0

0.04

1.4

1.0

4.3

I/O Panel
Units

Disks and 'fanes

5.5

Disks
SA482 2.5·Gbyte Storage Array

Product Description

The SA482 storage array is a high-performance, high-capacity storage device
designed for high-end systems. It has a formatted capacity of 2.5 Gbytes (3.4
Gbytes unformatted*) with a footprint of 452 Mbytes/square foot formatted.
Consisting of four independent, parallel disk drives connected through the SDI,
the SA482 offers multipath, multi-disk drive throughput capabilities that include four Winchester spindles, four disk drives, and 60 data heads. The
SA482 is designed for large PDP-11/84 configurations where high-performance, high-capacity storage is required. It is connected to the PDP-11/84 via
the UDA50 controller, which supports full DSA/SDI functionality. Two building-block variations of the SA482 are also available for mid-range and entrylevel configurations.

Features

• Capacity (formatted): 2.5 Gbytes
• Capacity (unformatted*): 3.4 Gbytes
• Peak transfer rate: 2.4 Mbytes/s/disk drive
• Average access time: 32.3 ms/disk drive
• Single-track seek: 6 mst
• Average latency time: 8.33 ms/disk drive t
• Dual access: Standard
• Media surfaces: 7 data, 1 servo/disk drive
• Sectors per track: 57
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Rotational speed: 3600 rpm
• Maximum spindles per UDA50: 4
• Disk drives per array: 2-4
• One-year onsite hardware warranty
*Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is user
accessible in any disk device.
tHardware capability only; does not reflect DSA optimization .

.5.6 Disks and Tapes

Disks
SA482 2 •.5.Gbyte Storage Array

Ordering Information

SA482-AA/AD

2.488-Gbyte storage array building block. (4 RA82 component
drives and a storage array).

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller or I/O server.
SA482-LA/LD

1.866-Gbyte storage array building block. (3 RA82 component
drives and a storage array).

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller or I/O server.
SA482-HA/HD

1.244-Gbyte storage array building block. (2 RA82 component
drives and a storage array).

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller or I/O server.

Configuring Information

Option

UDASO·A

Cables

Mounting
Requirements

2 hex slots

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

1.5 V

-1.5 V ae

12.0

.04

1.4

1.0

4.3

I/O Panel
Units

Option

Length

Where Used

BC26V·12
BC26V.2S
BC26V·SO
BC26V·80

3.7 m (12 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
24.4 m (80 ft)

Connects one SDI disk
drive to an SDI controller.

Note: Each SA482 is shipped with four BC26V-12 cables as a standard part of the package.
Cables of different lengths can be ordered. See cable options above. If dual porting is
desired, a duplicate set of cab1es must be ordered separately.

Disks and Tanes

5.7

Disks
RA82 622.Mbyte Fixed Disk

Product Description

The RA82 is a 14-inch, 622-Mbyte (855-Mbyte unformatted*) fixed Winchester disk drive featuring full DSA/SDI functionality, dual port, high reliability,
high performance, and high capacity. The read/write system employs an encoding/decoding scheme that yields over one-third more storage capacity than
drives using conventional encoding. Position information on a dedicated servo
surface enables high-speed seeking. Additional position information is embedded between sectors on every track for high-precision positioning. The RA82
features outstanding data reliability characteristics, including an industryleading 170-bit error correction code (ECC) and over 21,000 spare sectors
for dynamic defect compensation.
The RA82's size, capacity, and price range provide ideal, large Winchester disk
storage for the PDP-11/84 in computer room and laboratory environments. It is
available only in the 42-inch RA82-EA/ED (three-drive) cabinet configuration.
Customers also may purchase either one, two or three RA82 disk drives in an
H9642 (3 HI) cabinet for MicroVAX II, MicroVAX 3600, VAXBI, VAXcluster
CI, and PDP-11/84 systems.
As a member of the Digital Storage Architecture (DSA) family, the RA82 uses
the Standard Device Interconnect (SDI), and is fully compatible with the other
DSA/SDI products. On the PDP-11/84, it is supported by the DSA/SDI UDA50
controller with four ports for four RA-series drives.

Features

• Sectors per track: 57
• Capacity (formatted): 622 Mbytes
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Capacity (unformatted*): 855 Mbytes
• Rotational speed: 3600 rpm
• ~eak transfer rate: 2.4 Mbytes/s
• Average access time: 32.3 ms
• Dual access: Standard
• Number of data heads: 15
• Average seek time: 24 mst
• Average latency time: 8.3 mstt
• Number of disk drives: 1
• Track-to-track seek time: 6 msttt
• Media surfaces: 7 data, 1 servo
• Maximum seek time (1435 tracks): 35 mst • One-year onsite hardware warranty
*Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is accessible
to the user in any disk device.
tMeasured from the receipt of Motion command from the controller until Ready command is
sent to the controller.
ttHardware capability only; does not reflect DSA optimizations.

5.8

Disks and Taoes

Disks
RA82 622-Mbyte Fixed Disk

Ordering Information

RA82·AA

622-Mbyte rackmountable 120 V/60 Hz disk drive with one
BC26V-12 cable.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
RA82·AD

622-Mbyte rackmountable 240 V/50 Hz disk drive with one
BC26V-12 cable.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
RA82·AE

622-Mbyte rackmountable 120 V/60 Hz disk drive without
cable.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller and a BC26V -6D cable.
RA82·DA

Two 622-Mbyte 120 V/60 Hz disk drives mounted in an H9642
(3 HI) cabinet with two BC26V-12 cables.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
RA82·DD

Two 622-Mbyte 240 V/50 Hz disk drives mounted in an H9642
(3 HI) cabinet with two BC26V-12 cables.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
RA82·EA

Three 622-Mbyte 120 V/60 Hz disk drives mounted in an
H9642 (3 HI) cabinet with three BC26V-12 cables.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
RA82·ED

Three 622-Mbyte 240 V/50 Hz disk drives mounted in an
H9642 (3Hr) cabinet with three BC26V-12 cables.

Prerequisite: Existing SDr controller.
Note: Each RA82 disk drive comes with its own BC26V-12 cable with the exception of the
RA82-AE. Cables of different lengths can be ordered. See cable options below. If dual porting is

desired, a duplicate set of cables must be ordered separately.

Configuring Information

Option

UDA;O·A

Cables

Mounting
Requirements

2 hex slots

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

1; V

-15 V ae

12.0

.04

1.4

4.3

1.0

I/O Panel
Units

Option

Length

Where Used

BC26V·12
BC26V·2;
BC26V·;O
BC26V·80

3.7 m (12 ft)

Connects one RA82 disk
drive to an existing SDI
controller.

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
24.4 m (80 ft)

Disks and Tapes 5.9

Disks
RA81456.Mbyte Fixed Disk

Product Description

The RA81 is a high-capacity, rackmounted Winchester disk drive with a recording density of over 11 Mbits per square inch, providing a formatted capacity of
456 Mbytes (627 Mbytes unformatted).* The read/write system employs an
encoding/decoding scheme that yields one-third more storage capacity than
drives using conventional encoding. Position information on a dedicated servo
surface enables high-speed seeking. Additional position information is embedded between sectors on every track for high-precision positioning. The RA81
operates with any member of the high-performance SDr controller family.
The RA81 features outstanding data reliability characteristics, including an
industry-leading 170-bit error correction code (ECC) and over 17,000 spare
sectors-for dynamic defect compensation. Low-cost three- and four-drive configurations provide almost 1.4 gigabytes and over 1.8 gigabytes of formatted
storage, respectively, in only 1.68 square meters (5.5 square feet) of floor space.
The RA81-CA/CD stand-alone unit comes in the top bay of a 91.4-centimeter
(36-inch) deep cabinet. Two additional drives (RA82s, RA81s, or RA60s in any
combination) can be mounted in the middle and bottom cabinet bays. The
RA81-FA/FDcomes in a 154-centimeter (60.5-inch) high H9646 cabinet with
four mounting bays. Three additional drives (any combination of RA82s,
RA81s, RA80s, or RA60s) can be mounted in the H9646. The RA81-HA/HD is
available as part of an integrated MicroPDP-11/83 system using the H9642-JA/
JB cabinet. The RA81-AA/AD rackmountable drive can be added to the older
H9642-BM/BN shallow cabinet, as w~U as to newer H9642-A and H9646
cabinets. One BC26V 3. 7-meter (12-foot) cable is included with every drive
or subsystem to connect the RA81 to any SDr controller.
*Unformatted capacity provided for comparison purposes; only formatted capacity is useraccessible in any disk device.

Features

• Peak transfer rate: 2.2 Mbytes/s
• Average access time: 36.3 ms
• Average seek time: 28 mst
• Average latency time: 8.33 ms
• Dual access: Standard
• Media surfaces: 7 data, 1 servo
• Tracks per surface: 2,496

• Sectors per track: 51
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Track-to-track seek time: 6.5 mst
• Maximum seek time (1248 tracks): 52 mst
• Rotational speed: 3,600 rpm
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

tMeasured from the receipt of Motion command from the controller until Ready command is
sent to the controller.

Expansion Specifications

5.10 Disks and Tapes

• Drives per UDA50 or KDA50 controller: 4
• Drives per H9642 stand-alone cabinet: 3
• Drives per cabinet: 1-4

Disks
RA81456.Mbyte Fixed Disk

Ordering Information

Disk Drives
RA81 rackmountable disk drive with one BC26V-12 cable.

RA81.AA/AD

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller and a cabinet for mounting.
RQA81-AA/AD RA81-HA/HD with KDA50 controller and BC26V-6D cable.

RA81-AA disk drive mounted in a H9642-AP/AR cabinet.

RA81.CA/CD

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RQA81-CA/CD

RA81-CA/CD with KDA50 controller.

RA81.EA/ED

Three RA81-AA disk drives mounted in an H9642 (3-HI)
cabinet.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RA81-PA/PD

One RA81-AA disk drive mounted in an H9646 (4-HI) cabinet.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RA81-HA/HD

RA81-AA rackmountable disk drive without cable. Primarily
used on MicroPDP-ll/83 system building blocks.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller and a BC26V-6D cable.
RA81-JA/JD

Four RA81-AA disk drives mounted in an H9646 (4-HI)
cabinet.

RA81·UA

RA81 reconfiguration kit. Required for remounting RA81s
originally configured in an H9642 (3-H!) cabinet. Not required
for RA81-AA.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.

Additional Controllers
UDA50-A

DSA UNIBUS controller for 1-4 SDI drives.

Prerequisite: UNIBUS system and 1-4 SDI drives.
KDA50·QA

DSA Q-bus disk controller for 1-4 SDI drives.

Prerequisite: Q-bus system and 1-4 SDI drives.

Configuring Information

Option

UDA50·A

Option

KDA50·QA

Cables

Mounting
Requirements

2 hex slots

Mounting
Requirements

2 quad slots

Bus Loads
Drawn

de Amps Drawn at
5V

15 V

-15 V

12.00

0.04

1.4

4.3

1.0

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

13.5

0.04

Watts
Drawn

67.9

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

3.0

0.5

I/O Panel
Units

I/O Panel
Insert Size
(2)B

Option

Length

Where Used

BC26V·6D
BC26V·12
BC26V.25
BC26V·50
BC26V·80

2.0 m (6.4 ft)
3.7 m (12 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
24.4 m (80 ft)

Connects one RA81 or RA60
disk drive to an existing SDI
controller (KDA50 or UDA50)

Note: Each RA-series disk drive except the RA60-AF and RA81-HAis shipped with a BC26v-12
(12-foot) cable as a standard part of the package. Cables of different lengths can also be
ordered. See the cable options above. If dual porting is desired, a duplicate set of cables
must be purchased.

Disks and Tapes

5.11

Disks
RA60 205-Mbyte Retn0vable-media Disk

Product Description

The RA60 is a rackmountable, removable-media disk providing 205 Mbytes
of formatted capacity. The recording density is three times that of removable
disks with similar capacity. The RA60 disk drive uses advanced embedded servotechnology to eliminate the need for alignment altogether. It also incorporates new recording methods, microprocessor-controlled diagnostics, a 170-bit
error-correction code, and modular design for easy maintenance.
RA60 stand-alone units come in either the top bay of a 91.4-centimeter (36-in)
deep cabinet or in the 154-centimeter (60.5-in) high H9646 4-HI cabinet or as
part of an integrated MicroPDP-11/83 system using the H9642-JA/JB cabinet.
Two additional drives (RA82s, RA81s and RA60s in any combination) can be
mounted in the middle and bottom cabinet bays of the 3-HI cabinet; three
additional drives in any combination can be mounted in the 4-HI cabinet's
remaining bays. One BC26V 3.7-meter (12-foot) cable is included with
every drive or subsystem to connect the RA60 to any SDI controller.

Features

• Peak transfer rate: 1.98 Mbytes/s
• Average access time: 50 ms
• Average seek time: 41.7 ms
• Average latency time: 8.33 ms
• Dual-port option: standard
• Media surfaces: 10 (6 data, 4 protective)
• Tracks per surface: 1,600
• Sectors per track: 42 (16-bit words)
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Single-track seek: 6.7 ms
• Rotational speed: 3,600 rpm
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Expansion Specifications

• Drives per UDA50 or KDA50 controller: 4
• Drives per H9642-AP(AR) stand-alone cabinet: 3
• Drives per H9646 cabinet: 4

5.12 Disks and Tapes

Disks
RA60 20,;-Mbyte Removable-media Disk

Ordering Information

Disk Drives
RA60 rackmountable disk drive with one BC26V-12 cable.
Prerequisite: Any SDI controller and a cabinet for mounting.

RA60-AA

RA60-AF with KDA50 controller. 50/60 Hz and BC26V-6D

RQA60-AA

cable.
RA60-AF

RA60-AA rackmountable disk for use on MicroPDP-ll/83
systems.
Prerequisite: H9544-CD top RA60 trim kit, BC26V-6D 6-ft
cable, and KDA50 controller.

RA60-CA/CD

RA60-AA disk drive mounted in an H9642-AP/AR cabinet.
Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.

RQA60-CA/CD

RA60-CA/CD with KDA50 controller.

RA60-EA/ED

Three RA60-AA disk drives mounted in 3-HI cabinet.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RA60-JAfln

Four RA60-AA disk drives mounted in a 4-HI cabinet.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RA60-FA/FD

RA60-AA disk drive mounted in a 4-HI disk cabinet.

Prerequisite: Any SDI controller.
RA60-UA

RA60 reconfiguration kit. Required for remounting RA60s
originally configured in 3-HI H9642 cabinet in H946 cabinet.
Not required for mounting newly ordered RA60-AA in either
cabinet.

Additional Controllers
UDA50-A

DSA UNIBUS disk controller for 1-4 SDI drives.

Prerequisite: UNIBUS system and 1-4 SDI drives.
KDA50-QA

DSA Q-bus disk controller for 1-4 SDI drives.

Prerequisite: Q-bus system and 1-4 SDI drives.
Cartridge
RA60-P

Removable 205-Mbyte cartridge.

Note: When ordering a combination of removable and fixed drives in a 3· or 4-HI cabinet,
order the removable drive in the cabinet (Le., RA60-CA and RA60-FA).

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

UDA50-A

2 hex slots

Option

Mounting
Requirements

KDA50·QA

Cables

2 quad slots

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15V

12.0

0.04

1.4

4.3

1.0

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12 V

13.5

0.04

Watts
Drawn

67.9

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

3.0

0.5

I/O Panel
Units

I/O Panel
Insert Size
(2)B

Option

Length

Where Used

BC26V-6D
BC26V-12
BC26V-25
BC26V-50
BC26V-80

2.0 m (6.4 ft)
3.7 m (12 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
24.4 m (80 ft)

Four cables connect one
SA482 storage array, and one
cable connects one RA81 or
RA60 disk drive to an existing
SDI I/O server or controller.

Note: Each RA-series disk drive except the RA60-AF and RA81-HA is shipped with a BC26V-12
(12-foot) cable as a standard part of the package. Cables of different lengths can also be ordered.
See the cable options above. If dual porting is desired, a duplicate set of cables must be purchased.

Disks and Tapes 5.13

Disks
RC25 Fixed/Removable Disk

Product Description

The RC25 has 52 Mbytes of formatted user data (26 Mbytes fixed/26 Mbytes
removable). Its 26-Mbyte sealed removable cartridge provides one-to-one
backup ratio and an attractive alternative to disk/tape configurations where
user productivity is most important.
The RC25 is compatible with other Digital Storage Architecture disk subsystems. Exceptional data reliability and integrity features include a powerful
170-bit error detection and correction code, automatic retry and revectoring,
embedded servos, and bad-block replacement.

Features

• Peak transfer rate: 1.25 Mbytes/s
• Seek time: 10 ms
• Track-to-track: 10 ms
• Average seek time: 35 ms
• Maximum seek time: 55 ms
• Average access time: 45.5 ms
• Subsystems per controller: 2
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

UNIBUS Subsystems
RUC2;.AA/AB

Tabletop RC25 with UNIBUS adapter.

RUC2;-BA/BB

Rackmountable RC25 with UNIBUS adapter. Mounts in
H9642-F and H9642-M UNIBUS expansion cabinets.

Q-bus Systems
RQC2;.AA/AB Tabletop RC25 with Q-bus controller.
RQC2;.BA/BB

Rackmountable add-on RC25.

Disk Drives
RC2;.DA/DB

Tabletop add-on RC25.

RC2;·EA/EB

Rackmountable add-on RC25. Mounts in H9642-F and
H9642-M UNIBUS expansion cabinets.

Cartridge
RC2;K·DC

Removable 26-Mbyte RC25 cartridge.

The dual drive RC25 options have been removed from the price list. Customers should order both a master and add-on as separate items to obtain
a dual drive. For example, RQC25-BA master and RC25-EA add·on drive
represent the same configuration that was the former RQC25-CA.

'.14 Disks and Tapes

Disks
RC25 Fixed/Removable Disk

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

15V

-15V

RUC25-AAjAB

1 quad slot

4.3

0.0

5.0

1.5

RUC25-BA/BB

1 quad slot

4.3

0.0

5.0

1.5

Dual RC25

1 quad slot

4.3

0.0

5.0

1.5

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

RQC25-AA/AB 1 dual slot

3.0

0.0

RQC25-BA/BB 1 dual slot

3.0

1 dual slot

3.0

Dual RC25

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

1/0 Panel
Insert Size

15.0

2.3

1.0

0.0

15.0

2.3

1.0

0.0

15.0

2.3

1.0

Disk Drives
RD Disk Drives

The RD family of fixed, hard disks includes a wide range of products that satisfy system requirements, ranging from the 20-Mbyte RD31 to the 159-Mbyte
RD54. The RD disk drives are used with the small and midrange systems in this
book, as well as with other Digital computer families. These drives are built to
quality standards significantly higher than the industry expectation and appropriate to highly reliable multiuser systems. Digital tests its drives to ensure that
they meet shock, vibration, thermal, and other reliability requirements, not
only at the introduction but also throughout the life of the products. We ensure
that disks are compatible with storage controllers, enclosures, and systems software. When used in Digital's systems, the RD family of disk drives complies
fully with the requirements of FCC, UL, CSA and numerous other national and
international regulatory agencies.
When many 5 .25-inch disk drives fail, they must be completely replaced. All
RD drives shipped by Digital contain two field-replaceable units (FRUs). These
consist of the head disk assembly (RDA) and a printed circuit disk controller
board. In the event of a controller failure, repair is possible without replacing
the RDA, thereby enabling users to retain their recorded data.
The RD53, RD54, and RX50 are available in an external storage enclosure for
use with BA23 systems. Two of these external drives may be used with a BA23 ,
in either rackmounted or desktop units. When configuring these drives, order
the "A" variation for 120-V power (e.g., RD53-DA), or the "B" variation for
240-V power (e.g., RD53-DB). The rackmounted variations require the H9302
kit (one kit for two drives), and all external drives will require theRQDXE
driver (one for two drives).
Except for the RD31 and RD32, which can be used only in the BA23 , any of the
RD disk drives can be used in the current small and midrange system enclosures
(the BA23, BA123, and H9642/BA23 cabinet). Variations of these drives are
available with cables and mounting hardware for use in each enclosure. Two
RD31 or RD32 disks can be mounted in each BA23 system storage slot when
models with the appropriate hardware are ordered. In all MicroVAX and PDP
systems, except the MicroVAX 2000, all of these disks use the RQDX3 controller. The MicroVAX2000 disk controller is embedded in the base system.
The RQDX3 disk controller is used to interface the RD-family of Winchester
disk drives and the RX50 and RX33 diskette drives to the Q-bus. The RQDX3
is an intelligent peripheral controller that relieves the host processor of lowlevel control and realtime response requirements of disks attached to the system. System software communicates with the controller and the drives using
Digital Storage Architecture's Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP).

Disk Controllers
RQDX3

Product Description

The RQDX3 disk controller is required when using the newer model Winchester disk drives, such as the RD54 and RD32, and the RX33 diskette drive. The
RQDX3 will support all drives supported by the older RQDXl and RQDX2.
When replacing the RQDXl or RQDX2 with the RQDX3, existing Winchester
disk drives must be reformatted as a result of the more efficient interleave
scheme employed by the RQDX3. Digital Field Service can perform the
reformatting.
The RQDX3 can interface up to four peripheral storage devices to the Q-bus.
These devices include the RX50 and RX33 diskette drives and any of the RD
family of Winchester disk drives. One RX50 counts as two devices. Thanks to
the combination of the RQDX3 intelligent controller and Digital's Mass Storage Control Protocol; Winchester disks ranging from the original RD50 to the
new RD54 and RD32 can be mixed in a system.
The RQDXE is required when adding external disks, such as the RD54-DA/RA,
to BA23-based systems. The RQDXE will support up to two peripheral storage
devices external to the BA23 system enclosure.

Features

• Overlapped seeking
• Error correction code generation and checking
• Elevator seek algorithm for seek reordering
• Block mode DMA transfers
• Automatic bad block replacement
• Less power used by dual-size module than by previous controllers
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Disk Controllers
RQDX3

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

RQDX3-AA

Q-bus controller and cables for use in BA23 enclosure.

RQDX3-BA

Q-bus controller, cables, and distribution panel for use in
BAl23 enclosure.

RQDX3-M

Q-bus controller module with no cables for use when replacing
existing RQDXl or RQDX2 controllers. (Cables from existing
BA23 and BAl23 system are reused.)

RQDX3-SA

Factory-installed Q-bus controller and cables for use in BA2l3
enclosure.

RQDX3-SF

Field-service-installed Q-bus controller and cables for use in
BA2l3 enclosure.

Bus Loads
Drawn

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at

12V

RQDX3-AA

1 dual slot

2.48

0.06

1.9

0.5

N/A

RQDX3-BA

1 dual slot

2.48

0.06

1.9

0.5

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

RQDX3-M

1 dual slot

2.48

0.06

1.9

0.5

N/A

RQDX3-SA/SF

1 quad slot

2.48

0.06

1.9

0.5

N/A

Disk Controllers

RQDXE

Product Description

The RD53, RD54, and RX50 can be added externally to the BA23 enclosure using the RQDXE-AA. A maximum of two rackmounted or desktop units can be
connected for a total of four storage devices. See the individual storage product
description for additional information. The RQDXE-FA is supplied with cables
to support devices in a second BA23 for applications such as the H9642-JA/JB.
The RQDXE is used for all other supported external disks.

Ordering Information

RQDXE-AA

Dual-height disk drive bus extender module for use with the
RQDX2 or RQDX3 disk controller in a BA23 enclosure and
external disk.

RQDXE-FA

Dual-height disk drive bus extender for use with RQDX2
or RQDX3 controller and disk in the dual BA23 configuration.

Use the BC17Y- 1J (20-inch external cable) to connect a second external RD
and/or RX disk drives.

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

Bus Loads
Drawn

de: Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

ae:

de:

I/O Panel
Insert Size

RQDXE-AA

1 dual slot

0.5

0.00

0.0

1.0

RQDXE-FA

1 dual slot

0.5

0.0

1.0

N/A

Disks and 'faDeS S.19

Disk Controllers
RUX50

Product Description

The RUX50 is a quad-size UNIBUS single-board controller that will interface to
as many as two O.8-Mbyte RX50-D/R dual-diskette drives. Data is transferred
to the host system via DMA. The RUX50 is an intelligent controller with an onboard T-11 microprocessor. Programs in the host system communicate with the
controller and drives using the Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) of the
Digital Storage Architecture. MSCP and the RUX50 include features to enhance system throughput, ensure data integrity, and increase subsystem availability. An RUX50 can be added to a PDP-11 UNIBUS system in conjunction
with other mass-storage devices.

Ordering Information

RUX;O-YA

UNIBUS controller with 2.7-meter (9-foot) I/O cable,
field -instalIable.

RUX;O-YP

Factory-installed variation.

Configuring Information

5.20

Disks and TAn~!l

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

.sV

15V

-15V

RUX.sO·YA

1 quad slot

3.0

0.7

0.0

NjA

RUX.sO·Yp

1 quad slot

3.0

0.7

0.0

NjA

1/0 Panel
Units

Disks
RD31 20.Mbyte Disk Drive

Product Description

The RD31 is a 20-Mbyte half-height Winchester disk drive that is an ideal
entry-level disk drive for small systems and personal computers.

Features

• Formatted capacity: 20 Mbytes
• Average access time: 73.3 ms
• Transfer rate: 5 Mbytes/s (625 Kbytes/s)
• Power - Maximum startup: 38.8 W
• Power - Maximum seeking: 14.5 W
• Heat dissipation: 52.9 kJjh (50.1 Btu/h)
• Temperature: 10-50 degrees C (50-122 degrees F)
• Relative humidity: 25 degrees C (77 degrees F)
• Maximum altitude: 3.0 km (10,000 ft)
• Height: 41.4 mm (1.63 in)
• Width: 14.6 cm (5.75 in)
• Depth: 20.32 cm (8.00 in)
• Weight: 1.59 kg (3.5lb)
• Requires an RQDX3 controller
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

RD31A·AA

20-Mbyte Winchester disk for BA23 enclosure (for the first
drive). Includes cables and mounting hardware.

RD31A·AD

20-Mbyte Winchester disk for BA23 enclosure (for the second
drive). Includes cables and stacking hardware.

RCD31·A

20-Mbyte Winchester disk subsystem for PRO 380.

RCD31·CA

20-Mbyte Winchester disk subsystem for DECmate III.

RCD31.FA

VAXmate expansion box with 20-Mbyte Winchester disk
subsystem.

Option

RD31

Mounting
Requirements

Dedicated space

de Amps
Drawn at

Dus Loads
Drawn

12V

0.9

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

N/A

Disks and Tapes S.21

Disks
RD32 42.Mbyte Disk Drive

Product Description

Features

The RD32 is a 42-Mbyte half-height Winchester technology disk drive that
offers high capacity and reliability in a compact format.
• Formatted capacity: 42 Mbytes
• Average access time: 4S.3 ms
• Transfer rate: 5 Mbytes/s (625 Kbytes/s)
• Power - Maximum startup: 32.0 W
• Power - Maximum seeking: 13.0 W
• Heat dissipation: 47.4 kJ/h (44.9 Btu/h)
• Temperature: 10-50 degrees C (50-122 degrees F)
• Relative humidity: 25 degrees C (77 degrees F)
• Maximum altitude: 3.0 km (10,000 ft)
• Height: 41.4 mm (1.6Jin)
• Width: 14.6 cm (5.75 in)
• Depth: 20.32 cm (S.OO in)
• Weight: 1.59 kg (3.5lb)
• Requires an RQDX3 controller
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

RD32A-AA

42-Mbyte Winchester disk for BA23 enclosure (for the first
drive). Includes cables and mounting hardware.

RD32A·AB

42-Mbyte Winchester disk for BA23 enclosure (for the second
drive). Includes cables and stacking hardware.

RCD32-FA

42-Mbyte Winchester disk for VAXmate.

RCD32·AA

42-Mbyte Winchester disk for PRO 3S0.

Option

RD32

S.22 Disks and Tapes

Mounting
Requirements

Dedicated space

de Amps
Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

12V

0.9

0.6

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

N/A

Disks
RDS3 71.Mbyte Disk Drive

Product Description

'The RD53 is a full-height 71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive that uses state-of-the-art
Winchester technology.

Features

• Formatted capacity: 71 Mbytes

• Relative humidity: 25 degrees C
(77 degrees F)

• Average access time: 38.3 ms

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

• Maximum altitude: 3.0 km (10,000 ft)

• Transfer rate: 5 Mbytes/s
(625 Kbytes/s)

• Height: 8.25 cm (3.25 in)

• Power - Maximum startup: 64.0 W

• Width: 14.6 cm (5.75 in)

• Power - Maximum seeking: 36.0 W

• Depth: 20.32 cm (8 in)

• Heat dissipation: 129 kJ/h (122 Btu/h)

• Weight: 3.18 kg (71b)

• Temperature: 10-50 degrees C
(50-122 degrees F)

• One-year onsite hardware
warranty

RD;3A·AA

71-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for BA23 enclosure.

RD;3A·BA

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for BAl23 enclosure.

RD;3A·SA

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables, ordered with an
Industrial PDP-ll.

RD;3A·SF

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for addition to an
Industrial PDP-H.

RD;3·DAjDB

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive mounted in desktop enclosure with
I/O cable. Prerequisite: RQDXE·AA extender module.

RD;3·RAjRB

7l-Mbyte fixed-disk drive in 19-inch standard equipment rack.
Requires H9302 enclosure. Prerequisite: RQDXE-AA extender
module.

RCD;3-A

7l-Mbyte Winchester for use with PRO 380.

H9302

Rackmount chassis for use with as many as two 5 .25-inch mass
storage devices in any combination.

BC17Y.IJ

Daisychain cable required for second external drive.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at

Dedicated space

,0.9

5V
RDH

Bus Loads
Drawn
12V

2.5

0.0

IjOPanel
Insert Size

N/A

Disks and Tapes ;.23

Disks
RD.54 1.59.Mbyte Disk Drive

Product Description

The RD54 isa 159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive employing state-of-the-art Winchester technology. The drive is ideally suited for applications requiring high performance and capacity.

Features

• Formatted capacity: 159 Mbytes
• Average access time: 38.3 ms
• Transfer rate: 5 Mb/s (625 Kbytes/s)
• Power - Maximum startup: 66.0 W
• Power - Maximum seeking: 24.0 W
• Heat dissipation: 100 kJ/h (95 Btu/h)
• Temperature: 10-50 degrees C (50-122 degrees F)
• Relative humidity: 25 degrees C (77 degrees F)
• MaxiIIl:um altitude: 3.0 km (10,000 ft)
• Height: 8.25 mm (3.25 in)
• Width: 14.6 cm (5.75 in)
• Depth: 20.32 cm (8 in)
• Weight: 3.30 kg (7.3Ib)
• Size: 5.75 by 3.25 by 8.2 inches
• Weight: 7.0 lbs
• Power: 5 Vdc ± 5%
12 Vdc ± 5%
• Requires an RQDX3 controller
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

5.24 Disks and Tapes

Disks
RD.54 1.59-Mbyte Disk Drive

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

RD54A-AA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for BA23 enclosure.

RD54A-BA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for BA123 enclosure.

RD54A-SA

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables, ordered with an
Industrial PDP-II.

RD54A-SF

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive with cables for addition to an
Industrial PDP-ll.

RD54-DA/DB

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive mounted in desktop enclosure with
cable. Prerequisite: RQDXE-AA extender module.

RD54-RA/RB

159-Mbyte fixed-disk drive for mounting in 19-inch standard
equipment rack. Requires H9302 enclosure. Prerequisite:
RQDXE-AA extender module.

H9302

Rackmount chassis for use with up to two 5.25-inch massstorage devices.

BC17Y-1J

Daisychain cable required for second external drive.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

RD54

Dedicated space

de Amps
Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

12V

1.3

1.34

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

N/A

Disks and Tapes

5.25

Disks
RX33

Product Description

The RX33 is a half-height, 5.25-inch 1.2-Mbyte diskette drive. In high-density
mode, the drive provides industry-standard compatibility utilizing doublesided, high-density diskettes. In standard-density mode, the RX33 can read
and write RX50-type standard-density diskettes on a single side. This dualmode capability allows Digital customers to access a vast software base without
sacrificing RX50 software compatibility.
The RX33 provides three times the capacity per diskette of the RX50, while its
half-height form factor means that it takes only half the space. This increased
diskette capacity, along with its low power requirements and low heat generation, make the RX33 inexpensive and easy to operate.

Features (high-density mode)

• Formatted capacity per diskette: 1.2 Mbytes
• Peak transfer rate: 500 Kbits/s
• Average seek time: 92 ms
• Average rotational latency: 83 ms
• Bytes per sector: 512
• Sectors per track: 15
• Tracks per diskette: 160
• Brushless direct drive dc motor
• Dynamic media clamping
• Diskette ejection mechanism
• "Diskette changed" detection device
• One-year onsite hardware warranty

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

5.26

Disks and Tapes

RX33A-AA

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive, with cables, for use in BA23
enclosure (drive 1).

RX33A-AB

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive, with cables and stacking hardware,
for use in BA23 (drive 2).

RX33A-BA

1.2-Mbyte diskette drive, with cables, for use in BA123
enclosure.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

RX33

Dedicated space

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12V

0.35

0.22

Watts
Drawn

4.40

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

N/A

I/O Panel
Insert Size

N/A

Disks
RX50 Dual Disk,tte Drive

Product Description

The RX50 dual diskette drive can accommodate two disks simultaneously; one
diskette can be used for system programs; and the other, allocated as a file device. The RX50 stores data in fixed-length blocks on two 5.25-inch flexible
diskettes using preform at ted industry-standard headers. It has a peak transfer
rate of 250,000 bits per second, an average seek time of 164 milliseconds, and a
rotation latency (average) of 100 milliseconds.

Features

• Peak transfer rate: 250 Kbits/s

• Bytes per sector: 512

• Average seek time: 164 ms

• Sectors per track: 10

• Formatted capacity per diskette:
409 Kbytes (818 Kbytes total)

• Tracks per diskette: 80
• Requires an RQDX3 or RUX50
controller

• Diskettes per drive: 2
• Recording surfaces per diskette: 1

Ordering Information

RX50A·AA

0.8-Mbyte dual-diskette drive (only) for use in BA23 enclosure.

RX50A·BA

0.8-Mbyte dual-diskette drive (only) for use in BA123 enclosure.

RX50·D

0.8-Mbyte dual-diskette drive mounted in desktop enclosure
with I/O cable. 120/240 Vac. Prerequisite: RQDXE-AA extender
module.

RX50-R

0.8-Mbyte dual-diskette drive for mounting in 19-inch standard
equipment rack. 120/240 Vac. Requires H9302 enclosure. Prerequisite: RQDXE-AA extender module.

RUX50·YA

RX50 controller with 2. 7-meter cable.

H9302*

Rackmount chassis for use with up to two 5 .25-inch mass-storage
devices, in any combination. Required on UNIBUS systems.

H9504·SC

5.25-inch blank front panel. Required when ordering H9302 for
installation in UNIBUS CPU cabinets.

*When ordering an H9302 5.25-inch kit for UNIBUS cabinets, you may also
need to order an H9504-SC 5 .25-inch blank panel to be installed beneath
(or above) the H9302. When adding a TK50 desktop or rackmount unit to a
cabinet-based PDP-11 UNIBUS system, you must also order a TUK50-AB controller. On a PDP-ll UNIBUS system, the RX50 unit requires an RUX50-YA
controller with 2. 7-meter cable.

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

12 V

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn
ae

I/O Panel
Insert Size

RX50

Dedicated space

0.85

1.8

25.9

0.0

N/A

RUX50·YA

1 quad slot

0.85

1.8

25.9

0.0

N/A

Disks and Tapes S.27

Tapes
rU81-Plus Magnetic Tape

Product Description

The TU81-Plus replaces the TU81 as Digital's high-density industry-compatible magnetic tape subsystem for PDP-11 systems with high-capacity disks. It
includes a UNIBUS compatible controller. An entry-level group coded recording (GCR) drive, the TU81 offers the lowest cost of ownership and highest reliability of any Digital-supported GCR tape drive. Efficient design allows the
TU81 and the 456-Mbyte RA81, or the 121-Mbyte RA80 to be packaged in a
single, waist-high cabinet for a fully integrated disk and tape subsystem. This
minimal use of floorspace and the drive's exceptionally quiet operation make
the TU81 well suited for today's open office environments.
When ordered as part of a system or field add-on, a rackmountable RA80 or
RA81 disk drive will be configured in the bottom of the TU81 cabinet if no
space is available in a dedicated disk cabinet on that order. Any desired
exception to these guidelines should be noted on the order. Note: TU81-Plus
support was phased in to the PDP-11 operating systems as of July 1, 1986.
Check with your sales representative to determine when your software will
support the TU81-Plus.

Features

• Read/write speed: 75 and 25 in/s (streaming), 25 in/s (start/stop)
• Maximum data transfer speed: 468 Kbytes/s
• Rewind speed: 192 in/s
• Rewind time: 2.5 minutes per 731.5-m (2,400-ft) reel
• Number of tracks: 9 on O.5-inch magnetic tape
• Recording method: Group Code Recording to ANSI X3.54-1976 and Phase
Encoded to ANSI X3.39-1973
• Record density: 6,250 b/in (GCR), and 1600 b/in (PE)
• Capacity: 145 Mbytes (GCR), 40 Mbytes (PE)
• Transports per controller: 1
• One RA80 or RA81 disk can be mounted in cabinet

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

TU81E.AA/AB

TU81-Plus magnetic tape subsystem, UNIBUS interface.

TU81E·DA

TU81-Plus magnetic tape subsystem, Q-bus interface.

Option

Mounting
Requirements

TU81E.AA/AB 1 quad slot

TU81E·DA

5.28

Disks and Tapes

1 quad slot

de Amps
Drawn at
5V

15V

-15V

4.0

0.0

12V

3.0

0.0

Watts
Drawn

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

20.0

1.0

15.0

1.0

Tapes
TU80 Magnetic Tape

Product Description

The TU80 is Digital's entry-level industry-compatible magnetic tape subsystem. As the low-cost complement to Digital's midrange systems and disks, the
TU80 offers the lowest cost of ownership and the highest reliability of any
Digital-supported nine-track tape drive.
With its streaming tape technology, the TU80 is ideal for applications such as
disk backup. Yet it also uses traditional start/stop technology for shorter data
transfers of the type associated with journaling and classical data processing.
The controller automatically selects the speed to optimize the drive's performance for a particular application. TU80 subsystems include a horizontally
mounted TU80 drive in its own 105.7-centimeter (41.6-inch) high H9642-style
cabinet, power controller, UNIBUS adapter module, and a 7.6-meter (24-foot)
shielded intercabinet cable to connect the TU80 to a CPU cabinet.
Efficient design allows the TU80 and the 121-Mbyte RA80 or 456-Mbyte
RA81 to be packaged in a single waist-high cabinet for a fully integrated disk
and tape subsystem. When ordered as part of a system or a field add-on, a rackmountable RA80 or RA81 disk drive will be configured in the bottom of the
TU80 cabinet if no space is available in a dedicated disk cabinet on that order.
Any desired exceptions to these guidelines should be noted on the order.

Features

• Read/write speed: 25 and 100 in/s (streaming), 25 in/s (start/stop)
• Maximum data transfer speed: 160 Kbytes/s
• Rewind speed: 192 in/s
• Rewind time: 2.5 minutes per 2,400-ft reel
• Numberof tracks: 9 on O.5-in magnetic tape
• Recording method: Phase encoded to ANSI standard X3.39-1973
• Record density: 1,600 b/in
• Capacity: 40 Mbytes (8-Kbyte block size)

Expansion Specifications

• Transports per controller: 1
• One RA80 or RA81 disk can be mounted in cabinet

Ordering Information

TU80-AA/AB

Configuring Information

Option

TU80-AA/AB

TU80 magnetic tape subsystem in a cabinet with controller.

Mounting
Requirements

1 quad slot

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15 V de

4.0

0.0

I/O Panel
Units

1.0

Disks and 'fanes

5.29

Tapes
T805 Magnetic Tape

Product Description

TheTS05 magnetic tape subsystems are compact, autoloading 1600 b/in streaming drives, available with either Q-bus or UNIBUS controllers. The TSV05 is
Digital's most compact 9-track industry standard tape drive for Q-bus systems.
The TSU05 is intended for UNIBUS systems that require the smaller size and
do not need the greater performance enhancements of the TU81E.
The tape transport occupies only 22 centimeters (8.7 inches) in a H9642-type
106-centimeter (41.7-inch) high cabinet, thus allowing ample room for expansion. It is also available for rackmounting.
Prerequisite for TS05 Q-bus magnetic tape subsystem is any PDP-ll/23, 53, 73,
or 83 system. Prerequisite for TS05 UNIBUS magnetic tape subsystem is any
PDP-11/24, 44, or 84 system.
For more information, call the Sales Support Team at 1-800-832-6277.

Features

• Recording density: 1,600 b/in
• Read/write speed: 25/100 in/s (depending upon operating system and CPU)
• Capacity per 2,400-ft reel:
- 40 Mbytes with 8-Kbyte blocks at 1,600 b/in
• Maximum data transfer speed: 40 or 160 Kbytes/s
• Rewind speed: 180 in/s (max)
• Rewind time: 2.8 minutes per 2,400-ft reel
• Number of tracks: 9 on 0.5 inch magnetic tape

Expansion Specifications

5.30

Disks and Tanes

• Transports per controller: 1

Tapes
TS05 Magnetic Tape

Ordering Information

Q-bus Systems for BA2l Enclosures
TSVOS·AA/AB

Q-bus TS05 magnetic tape system with hardware for rackmounting and control module. Select cables from chart below.

TSVOS·ZA/ZB

Q-bus TS05 magnetic tape system with hardware for rackmounting, control module, cables, and top access cover for
PDP-11/S3 deep cabinet systems only.

TSVOS·BA/BB

Q-bus TS05 magnetic tape system mounted in a 106-cm
(41. 7-in) H9642-type cabinet with controller module and
53.3-cm (21-in) of expansion space. Includes side panels.
Select cables from chart below.

Q-bus Systems for BA200 Series Enclosures
TSVOS·SA/SB

Q-bus TS05 magnetic tape system with hardware for rackmounting, and control module. Includes cables.

TSVOS·SE/SF

Q-bus TS05 magnetic tape system mounted in a 106-cm (41. 7in) H9642-type cabinet with controller module and 53.3-cm
(21-in) of expansion space. Includes side panels and cables.

TSVOS·BC,-SH

Same as TSV05-BA/BB,-SE/SF except 100 Vac system.

TSVOS·BD,.SJ

Same as TSV05·BA/BB,-SE/SF except 220 Vac system.

TSVOS·AC,·SC

Same as TSV05-AA/AB,-SA/SB except 100 Vac system.

TSVOS·AD,.SD

Same as TSV05-AA/AB,-SA/SB except 220 Vac system.

TSVOS-ZC

Same as TSV05-ZA/ZB except 100 Vac system.

TSVOS·ZD

Same as TSV05·ZA/ZB except 220 Vac system.

CPU Enclosures/Cable Chart (BA2l Enclosures only)
TSVOS System

BA2.3

BAl2.3

H9642
STDCAB

OEM
Configuration

CK-TS05-14

CK-TS05-11

N/A

CK-TS05-12

TSVOS* .BA,BB,BC,BD CK-TS05-14

CK-TS05-11

CK-TS05·14

CK-TS05-12

N/A

TSVOS·AA,AB,AC,AD

TSVOS·ZA,ZB,ZC,ZD

N/A

*When ordering a TSV05-B(X), the following parts may also be required:

Model No.

Description

H9S44·DD

One 5.25-inch shielded front cover (required only when mounting a BA23
enclosure in a TSU05-B(X) cab or TSV05-B(X) cab.)

UNIBUS Subsystems
TSUOS·AA/AB

UNIBUS TS05 magnetic tape system with hardware for rackmounting, control module, and cables. Cabinet not included.

TSUOS·AC

Same as TSU05-AA/AB except 100-Vac system.
Cabinet not included.

TSUOS·AD

Same as TSU05·AA/AB except 220-Vac system.
Cabinet not included.

H9S44·DA

Required on UNIBUS cabinets. 1. 75-inch blank front bezel.
(Also required with H9642-BD storage cabinets).

Disks and 'fanes

S .31

Tapes
TS05 Magnetic Tape

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de: Amps
Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Inserts

12V

ae:

de:

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

(2)A

Q·bus
TSV05·AA/AB

1 quad slot

TSV05·BA/BB

1 quad slot

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

(2)A

TSV05.ZA/ZB

1 quad slot

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

(2)A

TSV05.SA/SB

1 quad slot

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

N/A

TSV05.SE/SF

1 quad slot

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

N/A

1 hex slot

6.5

0.0

3.0

1.0

UNIBUS
TSU05.AA/AB

'.32 Disks and Tapes

Tapes
TK50

Product Description

The TK50 is Digital's industry-leadership cartridge tape subsystem for Q-bus
and UNIBUS PDP-II systems. The TK50 combines high reliability, high data
integrity, and high performance with innovative, simplified streaming design.
The CompacTape cartridge is a distribution medium for Digital's VAX and
PDP-II software products. The cartridge's capacity, small size, and ruggedness
make it ideal for OEMs and end users who wish to transport their own software or data. Its 95-Mbyte capacity makes it an ideal backup device for any of
Digital's mini-Winchester disks. It is small enough to fit into the same size slot
as a minifloppy drive (such as an RX50) in a MicroPDP-11 system box, or to be
mounted in small tabletop or rackmountable enclosures designed for 5.25-inch
form factor storage devices.

Features

• Peak data transfer rate: Total62.5 Kbytes/s, user data - 45 Kbytes/s

• Read/Write speed: 75 in/s streaming

• Recording method: Serial,
serpentine pattern

• Recording density: 6,667 b/in

• Number of tracks: 22

• Record size: Variable to 64 Kbytes - 1 byte
• Recording medium: 182.9-m (600-ft) length,
1.3-cm (O.5-in) width magnetic tape

Ordering Information

In ordering a TK50 subsystem, order the appropriate TK50-xx package and one
of the TQK50-xx or TUK50-xx controller option numbers, depending on system
configuration.
Drives (All include a TK50-K cartridge)
TK50-AA

TK50 5.25-inch tape drive.

TK50E-SA

TK50 5.25-inch tape drive for the BA213.

TK50-DA

TK50 in desktop unit, 120 V

TK50-DB

TK50 in desktop unit, 240 V

TK50-RA

TK50 in rackmount unit, 120 V

TK50-RB

TK50 in rackmount unit, 240 V

Note: TK50-Dx and -Rx units include a 9-foot cable to connect the drive to the CPU bulkhead.

Disks and 'fanes

5.33

Tapes
TK'O
Q-bus Controllers
TQK50·AA

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-AA tape drive. Includes
30-in cable for installation with TK50-AA in BA23-A box.

TQK50·BA

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-AA tape drive. Includes
30-in cable for installation with TK50-AA in BA123-A box.

TQK50·SA

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50E-SA tape drive. Includes
30-in cable for installation with TK50-AA in BA213.

TQK50·AB

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R tape drive. Includes
14-in cable and distribution insert for installation of TQK50 in
BA23-A box.

TQK50·BB

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R tape drive. Includes
21-in cable and distribution insert for installation of TQK50 in
BA123-A box or BA11-M (1123S).
Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R tape drive. Includes
36-in cable and bulkhead plate used in H349 cab (11/23-PLUS
system).

TQK50·PB

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R tape drive. Includes
30-in cable and bulkhead plate used in H349 cab (11/23-PLUS
system).

TQK50·RB

Q22-bus TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R tape drive, includes
120-in cable and bulkhead plate used in non-FCC-compliant
cabinet installation.

UNIBUS Controllers
TUK50-AB

UNIBUS TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R on PDP-ll/84 cabinet variation; includes cable and bulkhead plate used on all 16and 32-bit systems except PDP-ll/84 A series 10.5 inch-high
OEM enclosure. For TK50 rackmount on all systems, two additional items also must be ordered: H9302 (rackmount installation kit) and H9504-SC (filler panel for rackmount package).

TUK50·BB

UNIBUS TMSCP controller for TK50-D/R on PDP-ll/84 box
variation; includes cable and bulkhead plate used on PDP-ll/84
A series 10.5-inch-high OEM enclosure.

Cartridge
TK50·K

CompacTape cartridge, 95-Mbyte capacity. Available from PSG
Supplies.

Additional components needed for UNIBUS TK50 subsystems:
Component/CPU
MRll·FA (Boot ROM chipset for
insertion in M9312)*

11/24

11/.34

11/44

11/70

M9312 (Boot ROM board)t
74·27292·01 (I/O cable bracket
for unshielded compliant cabinets)

*Boot ROM chipset for an existing M9312 module.

tIf the system doesn't have an M9312 module, you must order one.

5.34 Disks and Tapes

11/84

Tapes
TK50

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

TKSO·AA

Dedicated space

TKSO·DA

N/A

TKSO·RA

H9302

de Amps
Drawn at
SV

lSV

12 V

1.4

N/A

2.4

35.55

2.4

35.55

TKSOE.SA

Dedicated space

1.4

N/A

TQKSO

Dual module

3.0

N/A

TQKSO.SA

Quad module

3.0

N/A

TUKSO

Quad module

3.0

0.0

I/O Panel

Watts Bus
Drawn Loads
ae

Units
de

N/A

0.0

2.0

1.0

0.0

2.0

1.0

N/A

4.2

0.5

Disks
DSA Disk Site Preparation

Model

Voltage Freq
Current
Thermal Dissipation
Nominal Nominal
State
Btu/h
V
Hz Startup· Steady Watts [kJ/h]

ac
Plug

Physical Characteristics
PCS/
PDS
Height Width Depth Weight Number of
Cable Typet in [em] in [em] in [em] lb [kg]
Phases

SA482·AA

120/208

7/14** 2,600 8,873

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

SA482-AD

240/416

3.5/7** 2,600 [9,360]

3091EC BN29X

SA482-LA

120/208

7tt

2,000 6,826

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

SA482-LD

240/416

3.5tt

2,000 [7,200]

3091EC BN29X

SA482-HA

120/208

7***

1,300 3,413

NEMAL21-30P BC24W

SA482.HD

240/416

3.5*** 1,300 [4,680]

3091EC BN29X

RA70E·SFttt Note 1 Note 1 5

3.3

194

Note 1

22.0

36.0

970

[156.0] [55.9]

[91.4]

[441]

61.5

22.0

36.0

790

[156.0] [55.9]

61.5

[91.4]

[359]

22.0

36.0

626

[156.0] [55.9]

61.5

[91.4]

[285]

5.77
[14.7]

8.80
[22.4]

10.50
[4.76]

Note 1

3.52
[8.9]

RA82·AA

120

600 2,048

NEMA L5-30P BC24S

10.4

17.5

26.5

172

RA82.AD

240

3.5

600 [2,165]

NEMA L6-20P BN29F

[26.4]

[44.5]

[67.3]

[72.2]

RA82.AE

120

2,048

NEMA L5-30P BC26V

10.4

17.5

26.5

172

RA82.EA

120

1,850 6,314

NEMA L5-30P BC24S

41.8

21.3

36.0

714

RA82·ED

240

10.5

1,850 [6,660]

NEMA L6-20P BN29F

[106.0] [54.2]

[91.4]

[325]

RA82.DA

120

1,250 4,266

NEMA L5-30P BC24S

RA82.DD

240

RA81.AA

120

600

1,250 [4,500]
600

NEMA L6-20P BN29F

41.8

21.3

36.0

542

[106.0] [54.2]

[91.4]

[246]

2,048

NEMA L5-15P Note 2
IEC 320 C14

10.4

17.5

26.5

150

3.5

600 [2,160]

[67.3]

[68]

36.0

350

RA81.AD

240

RA81.CA

120

RA81.CD

240

RA81.EA

120

1,800

RA81·ED

240

10.5

RA81.FA

120

650

RA81.FD

240

3.5

650 [2,340]

RA81.HA

120

600

2,048

NEMA L5-15P BC26V
IEC 320 C14

10.4

17.5

RA81.JA

120

2,600

8,873

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

61.5

RA81.JD

240

14'

2,600 [9,360]

309 IEC BC24K

[156]

NEMA L6·15P BN29K

[26.5] [44.5]

600

2,048

NEMA L5·30P BC24S

41.8

3.5

600 [2,160]

NEMA L6·20P BN29F

[54.2] [91.4]

[150.0]

[159]

NEMA L5-30P BC24S

41.8

36.0

650

1,800 [6,480]

NEMA L6-20P BN29F

[54.2] [91.4]

[286.4] [295]

2,218

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

61.5

36.0

495

[91.4]

[224]

26.5

150

36.0

945

[55.9]

[91.4]

[429]

6,143

309 IEC BN29X

21.3

[156.0] [55.9]

*Drives start up sequentially.
tFor additional KVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Catalog.
**Two phases 7A (3.5A) each; one phase is 14A (7A).
ttThree phases are 7A (3.5A) each.
***Two phases are 7A (3.5A) each; one phase draws no current.
tttField add-on for MicroVAX 3500 and MicroVAX computers.
When installing one or two disk drives in a 3-HI cabient, start with the topmost mounting location. When
installing one, two, or three drives in a 4-HI cabinet, start with the second mounting location from the top.
iDC power does not plug directly into main power. The RA 70 disk drive
requires external power and packaging (reference Power Specifications for
MicroVAX 3500 pedestal and MicroVAX 3600 cabinet.)
2Identify appropriate disk cabinet.

5.36 Disks and Tapes

Disks
DSA Disk Site Preparation

Model

Voltage Freq
Current
Thermal Dissipation
Nominal Nominal
State
Btu/h
V
Hz Startup* Steady Watts [k]/h]

ac
Plug

Physical Characteristics
PCS/
PDS
Height Width Depth Weight Number of
Cable Typet in [em] in [em] in [em] lb [kg]
Phases
lOA

19.0

33.8

152

lOA

19.0

33.8

[69.1]

lOA

19.0

33.8

152

21.3

36.0

352

[106.0] [54.2]

RA6O-AA

120

6.5

510

1,741

NEMA L5-15P Note 2
lEC 320 C14

RA6O-AD

240

3.25

510 [1,836]

NEMA L6-20P Note 2

RA6O-AF

120

6.5

510

1,741

NEMA L5-15P BC26V
lEC 320 C14

RA6O-CA

120

6.5

510

1,741

NEMA L5-30P BC24S

41.8

RA6O-CD

240

3.25

RA6O-EA

120

19.5

510 [1,836]
1,630

5,563

NEMA L6-20P BN29F
NEMA L5-30P BC24S

RA6O-ED

240

9.75

1,630 [5,868]

NEMA L6-20P BN29F

RA6O-FA

120

2,140

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

RA6O-FD

240

2,140 [7,704]

RA6O-JA

120

2,140

7,303

NEMA L21-30P BC24W

RA6O-JD

240

2,140 [7,704]

309 IEC BC24K

7,303

309 lEC BN29X

[91.4]

159.65

2r.3

36.0

656

[106.0] [54.2]

41.8

[91.4]

[297.55]

22.0

36.0

495

[156.0] [55.9]

61.5

[91.4]

[224]

22.0

36.0

945

[156.0] [55.9]

[91.4]

[429]

61.5

*Drives start up sequentially.
tFor additional KVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Catalog.
* *Two phases 7A (3.5 A) each; one phase is 14A (7 A).
ttThree phases are 7A (3.5A) each.
***Two phases are 7A (3.5A) each; one phase draws no current.
tttField add-on for MicroVAX 3500 and MicroVAX computers.
When installing one or two disk drives in a 3-HI cabient, start with the topmost mounting location. When
installing one, two, or three drives in a 4-HI cabinet, start with the second mounting location from the top.
IDC power does not plug directly into main power. The RA70 disk drive
requires external power and packaging (reference Power Specifications for
MicroVAX 3500 pedestal and MicroVAX 3600 cabinet.)
2Identify appropriate disk cabinet.

Disks
Disk Site Preparation

Q.bus Disk Site Preparation
Voltage Freq
Nominal Nominal Number
Hz
V
of Phases

Model

Current
acAmps

Thermal Dissipation
Watts

NEMA
RecType

Physical Characteristics

Btu/h
[k]lh]

Height
in [em]

Width
in [em]

Depth
in [em]

Weight
lb [kg]

RXSO·AA

18
18

61.4
61.4

3.25
[8.33]

5.75
[14.74]

8.5
[21.53]

3.8
[1.72]

RXSO·D

37
37

127
127

5.25
[13.3]

9.0
[22.9]

11.9
[30.2]

14.0
[6.3]

RXSO·R

37
37

127
127

5.25
[13.3]

9.0
[22.9]

11.9
[30.2]

11.0
[5.0]

UNIBUS Disk Site Preparation
Voltage Freq
Nominal Nominal Number
V
Hz
of Phases

Model

Current
acAmps Thermal Dissipation
Watts

RUC25·AA

120

RUC2S·AB

240

NEMA
RecType

*PCS/PDS
Cable Type

Physical Characteristics
Height
in [em]

Btu/h
[kTI

Width
in [em]

Depth
in [em]

Weight
lb [kg]

5.5

200

720

5-15R

BC24K

10.1

10.0

20.0

50.0

3.5

200

[683]

6-15R

BC29K

[25.6]

[25.4]

[52]

[22.7]

IFor product variations which include a UNIBUS Controller, e.g., RL211-AK with RL11 controller, the power and cooling requirements of the
controller are allowed for in the expansion backplane/box data.

Tapes
Voltage Freq
Nominal Nominal Number
V
Hz
of Phases

Model

TUSO·AA

120

TUSO·AB

240

Current
acAmps Thermal Dissipation

PCS+/PDS+
Cable Type* Physical Characteristics
Height
in [em]

Width
in [em]

Depth
in [em]

Weight
lb [kg]

BC24S

41.7

21.3

30.0

102.2

BN29K

[105.9]

[54.0]

[76.2]

[225.0]

Watts

Btu/h
[kJ/h]

500

1800

5-30R

500

[1706]

6-15R

1024

5-30

BC24S

41.6

21.3

30.0

235

Schuko
CEE7-7

BN29H

[106.0]

[54.0]

[76.2]

[106.0]

N/A

3.25

5.75

8.44

N/A

3.25

5.75

8.44

5
[2.3]

TUSIE·AA

120

500

TUS1E·AB

240

500

TKSO·AA

5/12 de

TKSO·DA

120

1.2/2.1

NEMA
Rec Type

36/15

TK50·DB

240

N/A

[8.3]

[14.6]

[21.4]

TKSO·RA

120

.55

N/A

3.25

5.75

8.44

TKSO·RB

240

.35

N/A

[8.3]

[14.6]

[21.4]

[2.3]

TSV05·BA

120

43.75

23.5

33.0

265.0

TSVOS·BB

240

TSVOS·BC

100

TSVOS·BD

220 '

2.25

270

1.13

270

2.70

270

1.23

270

1100

L5-30R
6-15R

BN29K

[111.1]

[60.0]

[84.0]

[121.0]

1100

L5-30R

BC24S

43.75

23.5

33.0

265.0

6-15R

BN29K

[111.1]

[60.0]

[84.0]

[121.0]

*For additional kVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Catalog.

f!I

1ft

.......

I!:_._____ -.t .... __ _
_~

BC24S

Chapter 6
Terminals and Printers

Terminals and Printers
VT300-family Video Terminals

Product Descriptions

The VT300-family of video terminals consists of the VT320 text-only monochrome terminal, the VT330 monochrome graphics terminal, and the VT340
color graphics terminal.
The VT300-family terminals are fully compatible with the VT52, VT100 and
VT200 families of video terminals. The displays on these new terminals have
been greatly enhanced to provide higher resolution with very high-quality,
fully-formed characters. The VT320 and VT330 sport a 14-inch flat video
display screen in a choice of amber, green, or new "paper white" phosphor.
The VT340's 13-inch CRT is capable of displaying up to 16 colors out of a
palette of 4096.
The VT300-family terminals feature a 25th host/terminal status line. All electronics for the terminals are housed in the same enclosures as the monitors. To
improve operator viewing comfort, the VT330 and VT340 monitors include a
pedestal with built-in tilt-and-swivel capabilities. The VT320 features a standard tilt base; a height pedestal base, which provides tilt and swivel capabilities, is optional.
The VT300-family terminals use the same high-quality keyboard as the
VT200-family, with appropriate legend strips and keycaps.
The VT300-family terminals have other new features, such as a bidirectional
printer port for connecting a local printer or an alternate input device. These
new models don't have cooling fans, which makes them even quieter. And,
again with the office in mind, the rear of the VT330 and VT340 terminal has
a cover that hides all cables, to provide a clean appearance in both closed and
open office environments.
An MMJ connector is provided on the VT330/VT340 terminals to connect an
optional mouse or tablet, which is supported in both ReGIS and Tektronix
4010/4014 graphics modes.
One of the major new features of the VT330 and VT340 terminals is the ability
to connect to more than one host over a single wire and concurrently interact
and view information from different host systems.
The VT330 and VT340 offer improved graphics presentation speeds, up to five
times faster than previous Digital graphics terminals. Key to this greatly improved performance is Digital's proprietary graphics chip set. This is the same
graphics processor used in Digital's high-end workstations. Both the VT330
and VT340 offer full text and graphics capabilities, including enhanced support
for the ReGIS and Tektronix 4010/4014 graphics protocols.

Terminals
VT300.family Video Terminals
Ordering Information

Please refer to the Video Terminal Selection Chart on page 6.5 of this chapter
for ordering information.

Accessories and Supplies

VT2XX-AA

VT200/VT300 Family System Stand

VT3XX-CA

VT320 Tilt/Swivel Base (VT320 only)

VSXXX-AA

Mouse (VT330!VT340 only)

VSXXX-AB

Graphics Tablet (VT330!VT340 only)

Industrial Terminals

Digital also offers the 1T330 and the 1T340, industrial versions of the VT330
and VT340 Video Terminals for applications that require terminals on the
factory floor. Each of these terminals is packaged in a rugged enclosure and
sealed to NEMA-12 standards so that it can withstand tough manufacturing
environments.
For complete descriptions and ordering information for the 1T330 and 1T340,
please refer to the Industrial Systems chapter.

Terminal Communication
Processors and Servers

Digital's terminal servers provide a flexible and cost-effective approach for
connecting terminals to systems. Terminal servers are Ethernet-based communication servers designed to logically connect asynchronous devices such
as terminals, printers, modems, and personal computers to one or more hosts
on an Ethernet LAN. Among the features of terminal servers are: multiple
session support, which allows users to establish multiple sessions on one or
several hosts, resulting in greater user productivity; and printer support for
VAX and MicroVAX systems, which provides the capability of sharing printers
among multiple users.
For more information on terminal servers, please refer to the Options chapter.

Terminals
VT300.family Video Terminals

VT300.family At·A·Glance

A Full Family of High Quality Terminals to Precisely Meet Your Every Need.

Feature

VT320
North American

VT320
International

VT330

VT340

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

Common Family Attributes

VT220 Compatibility (Text)
Bidirectional Printer Port
2-Piece, Convection Cooled Design
25th Status Line
Digital LK201 Keyboard
Programmable Function Keys (15)
Modem Support
DEC423 Port
Tilt and Swivel Capability
Extended Performance Attributes

14-inch Flat Screen
Paper White, Amber, Green Display
National Replacement Character Set
RS-232 Port
Full RS-232 Modem Control
10-foot Cable and 25-Pin Adapter (RS-232)
2 DEC423 Ports
Dual Sessions
Vertical and Horizontal Split Screen
Text Memory Screens
Pedestal Base with Tilt and Swivel
Block-Mode Operation
120-Voltage Capability Only
120- or 240-Voltage Capability
FCC Class A Certification
FCC Class B Certification

X
X

Graphics Attributes

VT240 Compatibility (Text and Graphics)
VT241 Compatibility (Color Text and Graphics)
Graphics Memory, 2 Screens
Mouse/Tablet Support
4 Shades of "Gray"
16 Colors, 16 Shades of "Gray," 13-inch Screen

X
X

Terminals
Video Terminal Selection Chart

Video Terminal Selection Chart
Refer to this table for ordering any VT300-family terminal.

VT320

VT330

VT340

USA (North American Model)
VT320-AA
VT320-BA
VT320-CA
VT320-DA
VT320-EA
VT320-FA

VT330-AA
VT330-BA
VT330-CA
VT330-DA
VT330-EA
VT330-FA

VT340-AA

VT340-AB

VT340-AC

VT340-DA

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 120 V

USA (International Model)
VT320-GA
VT320-HA
VT320-JA
VT320-NA
VT320-PA
VT320-RA

Belgium
VT320-AB
VT320-BB
VT320-CB
VT320-DB
VT320-FB

VT330-AB

VT330-AC

VT330-BB
VT330-CB
VT330-FB

VT340-DB

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Canada
VT320-AC
VT320-BC
VT320-CC
VT320-DC
VT320-FC

VT330-BC
VT330-CC
VT330-FC

VT340-DC

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 120 V
color graphics terminal
w/English WPS keyboard,
120V

Terminals
Video Terminal Selection Chart

Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT320

VT340

VT330

Denmark
VT.320-AD
VT.320-BD
VT.320-CD
VT.320-DD
VT.320-FD

VT.3.30-AD
VT.3.30-BD
VT.3.30-CD
VT.3.30-FD

VT.340-AD

VT.340-AE

VT.340-AF

VT.340-AG

VT.340-DD

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

UK/Ireland
VT.320-AE
VT.320-BE
VT.320-CE
VT.320-DE
VT.320-EE
VT.320-FE

VT.3.30-AE

VT.3.30-AF

VT.3.30-BE
VT.3.30-CE
VT.3.30-DE
VT.3.30-EE
VT.3.30-FE

VT.340-DE

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

Finland
VT.320-AF
VT.320-BF
VT320-CF
VT320-DF
VT320-FF

VT.3.30-BF
VT.3.30-CF
VT.3.30-FF

VT.340-DF

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

West Germany/Austria
VT320-AG
VT320-BG
VT320-CG
VT320-DG
VT320-FG

VT.3.30-AG
VT.330-BG
VT.330-CG
VT.330-FG

VT340-DG

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Terminals
Video Terminal Selection Chart

Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT320

VT330

VT340

Holland
VT320·AH
VT320·BH
VT320·CH
VT320·DH
VT320·FH

VT330·AH

VT340·AH

VT330·AI

VT340-AI

VT340-AK

VT340-AL

white graphics terminal
. w/standard keyboard, 240 V
VT330·BM green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
VT330-CM amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
VT330·FM amber graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

VT340-AM

VT330·BH
VT330·CH
VT330·FH

VT340·DH

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Italy
VT320·AI
VT320·BI
VT320-CI
VT320-DI
VT320-FI

VT330-BI
VT330-CI
VT330-FI

VT340-DI

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Switzerland (French)
VT320-AK
VT320·BK
VT320-CK
VT320·DK
VT320-FK

VT330-AK
VT330-BK
VT330-CK
VT330·FK

VT340-DK

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Switzerland (German)
VT320-AL
VT320-BL
VT320·CL
VT320-DL
VT320-FL

VT330-AL

VT330·AM

VT330-BL
VT330-CL
VT330-FL

VT340-DL

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Sweden
VT320-AM
VT320-BM
VT320·CM
VT320·DM
VT320·FM

VT340-DM

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

6.7

Terminals
Video Terminal Selection Chart

Video Terminal Selection Chart (Continued)
VT340

VT330

VT320
Norway
VT320-AN
VT320-BN
VT320-CN
VT320-DN
VT320-FN

VT330-AN

VT330-AP

VT330-BN
VT330-CN
VT330-FN

VT340-AN

VT340-AP

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

VT340-AS

VT340-AV

white graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
green graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
amber graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

VT340-AZ

VT340-DN

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

France
VT320-AP
VT320-BP
VT320-CP
VT320-DP
VT320-FP

VT330-BP
VT330-CP
VT330-FP

VT340-DP

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Spain
VT320-AS
VT320-BS
VT320-CS
VT320-DS
VT320-FS

VT330-AS

VT330-AV

VT330-BS
VT330-CS
VT330-FS

VT340-DS

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Portugal
VT320-AV
VT320-BV
VT320-CV
VT320-DV
VT320-FV

VT330-BV
VT330-CV
VT330-FV

VT340-DV

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/English keyboard, 240 V

Australia/New Zealand
VT320-AZ
VT320-BZ
VT320-CZ
VT320-DZ
VT320-EZ
VT320-FZ

VT330-AZ
VT330-BZ
VT330-CZ
VT330-FZ

VT340-DZ

color graphics terminal
w/standard keyboard, 240 V
color graphics terminal
w/WPS keyboard, 240 V

6.8 Terminals and Printers

Terminals
Video Terminal Site Preparation

Video Terminal Site Preparation
Model

Voltage Freq
V
Hz

Current
Phases ac amps

Thermal Dissipation
Watts

NEMA
PCS+/PDS+
Rec Type Cable Type* Physical Characteristics

Btu/hr

VT320·---2

120

50-60

N/A

VT320·~

240

50-60

N/A

VT330·---2

120

50-60

N/A

VT330·_3

240

50-60

N/A

VT340·---2

120

50-60

N/A

VT340·~

240

50-60

N/A

BC24Ktt

Height
in [em]

Width
in [em]

Depth Weight
in [em] lb [kg]

9.87

12.25

12.59

15.4

[25.1]

[31.1]

[17 .1]

[6.9]

13.75

14.5

[33]

[35]

[36.8]

[10.4]

14.5

15.5

16.9

[36.83]

[39.4]

[42.9]

[15.4]

*For environmental kVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Reference Guide and Price List.
"Typical Line Cord
Where Used
DEC PDS Cable
BN04A-2E
Switzerland
BN29A-xx
BN02A-2E
UK/Ireland
BN29D-xx
BN03A-2E
Continental Europe
BN29HU}-xx
tt60-Hz cable.

Terminals and Printers 6.9

Terminals and Printers
VSV21 Color Graphics Controller

.Product Description

The VSV21 Color Graphics Controller is a single-board color raster graphics
module that is used on Q22-bus processors. It is a medium-resolution device
that can be used by OEMs as a building block to create multiple workstations/
CPUs for the process control industry, low-end CAD/CAM and scientific/
engineering applications.
The VSV21 contains an advanced graphics controller chip and an onboard
microprocessor. This combination gives the device high performance, high
functionality, and fast screen updating.
System software is supplied separately for the VSV21 to run on MicroRSX,
RSX-11M-PLUS, and MicroVMS. Additional applications, such as third-party
display management software/editors and graphics industry standards, can be
layered.

Features

• Single quad-height Q-bus board with two powerful onboard processors
• A Direct Memory Access (DMA) link to the host processor's Q22-bus for the
fast transfer of data and rapid bit-mapped display updates
• Four switch-selectable, 60-Hz noninterlaced screen resolutions for flicker-free
high-picture-quality (640 by 480,640 by 240,512 by 512,512 by 256)
• 16-color simultaneous display from a palette of 4,096 colors
• Four RS-232-C serial ports for connecting keyboard, printer, and pointing
devices
• VT220 emulation firmware for host interface

6.10 Terminals and Printers

Terminals and Printers
VSV21 Color Graphics Controller

Ordering Information

VSV21-AA

VSV21 module.

VSV21-AB

BA23 distribution kit.

VSV21-ACA

BA123 distribution kit.

VSV21-AD

BA11-S distribution kit.

VSV21-AE

25-foot video cable.

VSV21-AF

14-foot keyboard cable.

VSV21-AG

Host cable - PDP.

VSV21-AH

25-foot printer cable.

VSV21-AJ

Loopback kit.

VSV21-AK

Host cable - MicroVAX II.

VSV21-AL

Data tablet adapter.

VSV21-BB

VSV21-AA plus VSV21-AB.

VSV21-BC

VSV21-AA plus VSV21-AC.

VSV21-BD

VSV21-AA plus VSV21-AD.

Note: You must initially purchase a license/warranty, a -GZ documentation kit,
and an H kit for the appropriate operating system. System planning should
include 7 A (max.) on the 5-vdc bus and 0.01 A on the 12-vdc bus.

Terminals and Printers

6.11

Printers
Printer Feature Chart

Model

Print Speed
Maximum
& Quality

Graphics

Parts/
Form

Paper
Feed

Special
Features

Interface

LA75/
LA75P

250-ch/s draft
l25-ch/s memo
42-ch/s NLQ
32-ch/s LQ

Sixe1 processing

Friction
Low Tear-off
Tractor
Cutsheet OPT
Bottom feed
Single-sheet auto pack

DEC and IBM PCcompatible
Plug-in fonts
Graphics

Serial RS-423:
LA75
Parallel: LA75P

LA2l0

240-ch/s draft
40-ch/s letter
BO-ch/s OPT

Sixel processing

Friction
Bidirectional
Tractor OPT
Sheet OPT
Bottom feed

Acoustic tractor STD
IBM PC-compatible
2 plug-in fonts

RS-232-C
IBM
Parallel
OPT

LAlOO

240-ch/s draft
BO-ch/s memo
30-ch/s NLQ

Bit-mapped graphics

Friction

Multiple fonts
Wide carriage
Multimode

RS-232-C

LA120

lBO-chIs draft

Up
to 9

Tractor only
Low-tear
Tractor OPT

For high-duty
cycle environment

RS-232-C

LJ25 0/
LJ252

l67-ch/s NLQ

ReGIS with RETOS
ANSI/Color Sixels

Friction
Tractor

255 colors
text and graphics
transparency printing

Serial RS-232-C:
LJ250
Parallel: LJ252

LCGOl

2-pp/min

ReGIS, GIDIS, and
NAPLPS
Color sixels
Protocol processing

Cutsheet,
paper,and
transparencies

Color ink-jet printer
and protocol
processing graphics
Offloads host

RS-232-C
20mA
RS-422

LN03
PLUS
(LN03S)

B-pp/min letter

Full bit-mapped
graphics
Tektronix 4010/4014

Cutsheet

Collated output
Plug-in RAM and
font cartridges

RS-232-C

LN03

B-pp/min letter

Business graphics
with sixels

Cutsheet

Collated output
Plug-in RAM and
font cartridges

RS-232-C

LQP45

45 chIs LQ

Friction
Tractor OPT
Cutsheet (dualtray plus envelope
feed) OPT

Multinational printwheels
Excellent letter-quality
Flexible paper handling

RS-232-C

LP27

64-char
l200-li/min
96-char
BOO-li/min

Tractor only

High-duty cycle

Short-line parallel
long-line parallel

LP25

64-char
300-li/min
96-char
2l5-li/min

Tractor only

Band printer

Short-line parallel
long-line parallel

LXYl2

300-li/min

Yes

Tractor only

Text and graphics

RS-232-C
Parallel

LGOl

600-li/min
uppercase dp
480-li/min
lowercase dp

Tractor only

Line matrix
extended text features
High reliability

RS-232-C
Parallel

LG02

600-li/min
uppercase dp
480-li/min
lowercase dp

Sixel processing

Tractor only

Line matrix text/graphics RS-232-C
Bar codes
Parallel
Landscape printing
High reliability
Superscripts/subscripts

To connect with IBM Personal Computers, PC-compatibles, and other hosts supporting parallel communications, the BC19M-IO,
shipped with the LJ252 and LA 75P parallel models, will be used.

6.12

Terminals and Printers

Printers
LA75/LA75P Companion Printers

Product Description

The quiet, compact Companion Printers set new standards of quality, performance, and versatility for low-cost, desktop printers. Available in both serial
(LA75) and parallel (LA75P) interface models, they are fully compatible with
software written for Digital printers and for the IBM Proprinter. Fast print
speed, flexible paper handling, and easy operation make the Companion
Printers superb choices for anyone requiring high-quality "personal" text and
graphics printing capabilities. They are the ideal printing solution for most
Digital computing environments including those with VAXmates, IBM personal
computers and PC-compatibles, VT -family video terminals, and workstations.
For a wide range of computing applications, the Companion Printers' unique
combination of performance, convenience, and compatibility can help you get
the most out of your system.

Features

• Available in a serial interface model (LA 75), compatible with Digital systems
• Available in a parallel interface model (LA75P), compatible with IBM Personal
Computers, PC-compatibles, PS/2, or equivalent
• Built-in LA50, LA100, LA210, and IBM Proprinter emulation offers complete
text/graphics compatibility with Digital systems and industry-standard personal
computers
• Print speeds, and other printer attributes selectable with front-panel switches
or under software control
• Text printing at 250 chIs, 125 chIs, 42 chIs, and 32 chIs burst speeds; plus full
bit-mapped graphics printing at 180-by-144-dot-per-inch resolution
• Quiet operation for busy office environments
• Versatile paper handling for printing on formfed paper, labels, multipart forms,
single-sheets, and envelopes
• Pivoting tractor allows choice of top or bottom paper feeding
• Optional single-bin cutsheet feeder holds 100 pages
• 9 built-in character sets: U.S. ASCII, National Replacement (NRC), ISO 8-bit
Supplemental, DEC Supplemental, DEC Technical, VT100 Special Graphic
("Line Drawing"), plus IBM Proprinter Line Drawing, Chart Drawing, and
Symbol Drawing sets
• Economically priced, user-installable
• Compact desktpp size (4.8-in high by 16.8-in wide by 13.6-in deep)
• Built-in self-testing, front-panel status indicators
• Full range of accessories/consumables available from Digital
• Requires no periodic maintenance other than normal cleaning
• 2,047 -character input buffer

Terminals and Printers 6.13

Printers
LA75/LA75P Companion Printers

Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.47 of this chapter for
ordering information.

Accessories and Supplies

LAXXA·AA

Acoustic cover

LA7.5X·SF

Single-bin sheetfeeder

LA75X·AA

Letter Gothic font cartridge

LA75X·AB

Orator font cartridge (limited character set)

H9850·HP

Dust cover

PCXXF-CF

Desk Stand

LA50X-FF

Paper catcher

LA50R·06

Ribbon cartridges (6/box)

H98.50·PH

Paper (2700 9.5 by 11)

6.14

Terminals and Printers

Printers
LA7'/LA7'P Companion Printers

Adapters

To connect to any Digital host except VAXmate and VT300 series, an adapter
must be ordered:
Host

Host Printer
Port

MMJ Adapter

VT100

25-pin male

H8571-A

VTI0l

25-pin male

H8571-A

VTI02

25-pin male

H8571-A

Required

VT125

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT131

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT180

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT220

9-pin male

H8571-B

VT240

9-pin male

H8571-B

VT241

9-pin male

H8571-B

DEC mate II, III

9-pin male

H8571-B

Professional 325/350/380

9-pin male

H8571-B

Rainbow 100 Series

25-pin female

H8571-D

Micro VAX family

9-pin male

H8571-B

VAXstation family

9-pin male

H8571-B

(For any other host with an RS-232 serial 25-pin male printer port, use the
H8571-A adapter. For any other host with an RS-232 serial9-pin male
printer port, use the H8571-B connector. To connect with IBM Personal
Computers, PC-compatibles, and other hosts supporting parallel communications, select the LA 75P parallel model, which features Centronics-type
parallel interface.)

Terminals and Printers 6.1S

Printers
LA210 Letterprinter

Product Description

The LA210 Letterprinter is a desktop, dot-matrix text and graphics printer
offering 40-ch/s near-letter quality and 240-ch/s (burst speed) draft modes, plus
full bit-mapped graphics with 132-by-72-dot-per-inch resolution and an optional80-ch/s memo-quality mode. In addition to the numerous standard resident typefaces, optional plug-in font cartridges and field-installed ROM chips
are also available. The LA210 can print on office stationery, multipart forms,
labels, roll and fanfold paper up to 14.9 inches wide (bidirectional tractors are
optional). With an optional parallel interface and font cartridges, the LA210
can work with IBM-compatible personal computers.

Features

• 240-ch/s maximum mode for high-speed draft style printing
• 40-ch/s maximum mode for high-density, near-letter-quality printing
• Full bit-mapped graphics mode for plotting graphs and charts
• Connects to standard RS-232 serial host printer ports
• Optional plug-in IBM/Centronics type parallel interface supports communication with IBM personal computers and PC-compatibles
• With parallel interface and optional cartridges, emulates Epson MX80, Epson
MX80 with Graftrax Plus, and IBM Graphics Printers
• OptionaI80-ch/s maximum mode for medium-density, memo quality printing
• Throughput: 90 lines/minute in draft mode at 132 columns
• Standard acoustically shrouded unidirectional forms tractors; optional
bidirectional forms tractors and sheetfeeder
• Compatibility with Digital software, hardware
• Large library of available font styles and character sets
• Line-drawing graphic characters and international characters
• Built-in self-diagnostics and printer tests
• Reliable 9-wire "logic seeking" printhead
• Variable character widths and line spacing for versatility
• User-installable and maintainable, with quick-change printhead and ribbon
cartridge features
• 2,000-character input buffer
• Universal (110/220-V) power supply

6.16 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LA210 Letterprinter

Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.47 of this chapter for
ordering information.

Accessories and Supplies

LA21X-BT

Bidirectional tractor

LA10X-EP

External parallel interface

LA21X-SF

Single-tray sheetfeeder (A-size paper)

LA21X-SH

Single-tray sheetfeeder (A-4 size paper)

LAXXS-AB

Printer stand

LA10X-SP

Paper catcher

LA10X-SQ

Paper shelf

LA21X-SW

Paper tray

LA10R-06

Ribbon cartridges (6/hox)

LA21X-AC

Acoustic cover

ROM Cartridges
Courier
10

Courier
12

Gothic
10

Gothic
12

US/UK

-AA

-AB

-AF

Foreign Overlay

-BA

-BB

-BF

Multinational
Overlay

-JA

-JB

Multinational

-MA

-MB

APL

-BN

Orator
10

Courier
Italics 10

Courier 10 Orator 10
Special
80/240ch/s 80/240ch/s 10
(Max.)
(Max.)

-AC

-AD

-AP

-AH

-AJ

-BC

-BD

-BH

-BJ

-JF

-JC

-JB

-JH

-JJ

-MF

-MC

-MD

-MH

-MJ

Special
12

Special 10
80/240 chIs
(Max.)

US/UK &

DEC
Technical

-AR

-AM

Symbols

-AE

-AN

VT100 Line
Drawing

-IN

-JP

-JR

IBM-PC Compatible ROM Cartridges (LA210 only)
Emulation Node

IBM Line
Drawing

EpsonMX80

IBM
Graftrax

IBM
Foreign

EpsonMX80
with Graftrax
IBM Graphics
Printer

IBM
Mosaic

IBMCompatible Kit
LH

LC
LA

LH = EP + LE
EP = Parallel Interface
LE = LA + LD

Terminals and Printers

6.17

Printers
LAIOO Letterwriter

Product Description

The LA100 Letterwriter is a desktop hardcopy keyboard send/receive (KSR)
terminal that communicates with host computers using a standard serial EIA
RS-232 or optional20-mA interface, or remotely over telephone lines through
a modem. LA100s offer 40-ch/s near-letter-quality and 240-ch/s draft modes
(burst speeds), plus full bit-mapped graphics with 132-by-72-dot-per-inch resolution and an optional80-ch/s maximum memo-quality mode. In addition to
the numerous standard resident typefaces, optional plug-in font cartridges and
field-installed ROM chips are also available. The LA100 prints on office stationery, multipart forms, labels, roll and fanfold paper up to 14.9 inches wide.
(Bidirectional tractors are optional.)

Features

• 240-ch/s maximum mode for high-speed draft style printing
• 40-ch/s maximum mode for high-density, near-letter-quality printing
• OptionaI80-ch/s maximum mode for medium-density, memo-quality printing
• Full bit-mapped graphics mode for plotting graphs and charts
• Throughput: 90 lines/minute in draft mode at 132 columns
• Standard unidirectional forms tractors; optional bidirectional forms tractors
• Compatibility with Digital software, hardware
• Built-in self-diagnostics and printer tests
• Connects to standard RS-232 host printer ports
• Character set: 7-bit 94-displayable ASCII character set for 11 countries,
ANSI-compatible escape sequences
• Print columns: 40 to 217
• Reliable 9-wire "logic seeking" printhead
• Variable character widths and line spacing for versatility
• 250 printable characters, including line-drawing graphic characters and international characters
• User-installable and maintainable, with quick-change printhead and ribbon
cartridge features
• Baud rates: 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150,200,300,600, 1200, 1800,2400,4800,
7200,9600
• 400-character input buffer standard; 4,000-character buffer optional
• Universal (110/220-V) power supply

6.18

Terminals and Printers

Printers
LA100 Letterwriter

Ordering Information

LA100·BA

KSR hardcopy terminal with keyboard, numeric keypad, tractors, BC22D-10 cable, ribbon cartridge, one package of paper,
and Courier-10/0rator-10 fonts in the US/UK character sets
only.

LA100·BB

KSR hardcopy terminal with keyboard, numeric keypad, tractors, BC22D-10 cable, ribbon cartridge, one package of paper,
Courier-10 font, international overlay, and VT100 line drawing
set and international key caps.

LA100·CA

KSR hardcopy terminal with keyboard, tractors, BC22D-10
cable, ribbon cartridge, one package of paper, Courier-101
Orator-10 fonts in the US/UK character sets only, and multiple
font option.

LA100·CB

KSR hardcopy terminal with keyboard, tractors, BC22D-10
cable, ribbon cartridge, one package of paper, Courier-10 font,
international overlay, VT100 line drawing set, and multiple
font option and international key caps.

To order LA100 ROM cartridges, use part number LA10X plus the appropriate
variant. For example, to order US/UK in Courier 10 cartridge, use part number
LA10X-AA. Use LA10X-AK to order blank ROM cartridge. ROM cartridges are
customer-installed.

Options

LA10X-EB

4-K buffer option

LA10X-CL

20-mA interface option

LA10X·SF

Sheetfeeder option

LA10X·FL

Multifont adapter option

ROM Cartridges
Courier
10

Courier
12

Gothic
10

Gothic
12

Orator
10

Courier
Italics 10

Special
Courier 10 Orator 10
80/240 chIs 80/240 chis 10
(Max.)
(Max.)

US/UK

-AA

-AB

-AF

-AC

-AD

-AP

-AR

-AJ

Foreign Overlay

-BA

-BB

-BF

-BC

-BD

-BR

-BJ

Multinational
Overlay

,iTA

-JB

-JF

-JC

-JB

-JR

-J]

Multinational

-MA

-MB

-MF

-MC

-MD

-MH

-MJ

APL

-BN

Special
12

Special 10
80/240 chIs
(Max.)

US/UK &

DEC
Technical

-AR

-AM

Symbols

-AE

-AN

VT100 Line
Drawing

-IN

-JP

-JR

Terminals and Printers 6.19

Printers
LA120 DECwriter

Product Description

The LA120 DECwriter III (a keyboard send/receive, KSR, terminal) is a sturdy
device designed for use in high-duty-cycle environments. It is a pedestal-based,
stand-alone, dot-matrix text printer that can print on 1-6 and 4-9 part forms
at up to 180-ch/s (burst speed). The LA120 is optimized for 1200-baud communications, but can operate at a dozen rates ranging from 50 to 9600 baud. It
features bidirectional "smart" printing, a 7-by-7 dot matrix, and 1,000-character print buffer. Forty-five setup features are easily selectable, and a new lowtear tractor option is available to reduce paper usage and lower to operating
costs.

Features

• l80-ch/s maximum (bidirectional) high-speed draft style printing
• Optional low-tear forms tractor option
• Top, bottom, left, and right margins as well as horizontal and vertical tabs are
easily adjustable.
• Eight different horizontal pitches and six different line spacings provide
flexible printed output.
• Line spacing: 2, 3, 4, 6,8, and 12 lines per inch
• Optional national character sets include Finnish, Danish, Swedish, German,
Norwegian, and French. An APL set is also available.
• Nonvolatile memory stores feature settings so they can be recalled at any time
• Compatibility with Digital software, hardware
• Built-in self-diagnostics and printer tests
• Connects to standard RS-232 host printer ports
• Character set: 7-bit 94-displayable ASCII character set, and ANSI-compatible
escape sequences
• Print density: 7-by-7 dots (draft)
• Variable character widths and line spacing for versatility
• Baud rates: 50, 75, 110, 134, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800,2400,4800,
7200,9600
• 400-character input buffer standard; 4,000-character buffer optional
• Universal (l10/220-V) power supply

6.20 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LA120 DECwriter

Ordering Information

LA120-DA

KSR hardcopy terminal, 1-6 part forms.

Accessories and Supplies

LA12X-AL

20-mA interface

LA12X-LT

Low tear tractor

LAXX-FD

Acoustic cover

LAXX-KC

Work surface shelf

LAXX-NC

Paper basket

LAXX-KD

Wire shelf

LAXXR-12

Ribbon (12/hox)

LAXX·KB

Casters

Terminals and Printers 6.21

Printers
Companion Color Printers (LJ250/LJ252)

Product Description

Digital's Companion Color Printers are quiet, compact, desktop printers that
can help users create professional-looking documents, combining high-quality
color graphics with high-quality text, quickly and economically. The Companion Color Printers are available in two models: the LJ250, with DEC423 and
RS-232 serial interfaces, and the LJ252, with a Centronics-type parallel
interface.
The Companion Color Printers employ the latest disposable cartridge technology, (which consists of a printhead and ink supply), for high-quality text and
graphics printing with easy operation and no user maintenance. This technology allows the Companion Color Printers to print up to seven pure colors,
including plain black, and hundreds of mixed colors, all on a single page.
The Companion Color Printers print text and graphics on paper and transparencies in the A (8.5-by-11-inch) and the European equivalent A4 (8.3-by-11-inch) sizes, using single-sheet (friction) feeding or fanfold (sprocket) paper
feeding. Specially treated paper and transparencies from Digital provide
optimum print quality and reliability from the Companion Color Printer's
disposable ink cartridge technology.

Features

• Print high-quality color graphics and high-quality text on paper and
transparencies
• Fast (167 chis burst, 90 chis throughput)
• Quiet (less than 45 dBA)
• Reliable (10,000 hours MTBF)
• Available in serial (LJ250) and parallel (LJ252) interface models to connect to
Digital terminals, workstations, or hosts or to IBM personal computers and
compatibles
• Support Digital systems through ANSI/sixels and color sixels protocols; print
ReGIS graphics files using host-resident VAX ReGIS to Sixels Converter
(RETOS) software or the print screen function on many of Digital's graphics
terminals
• Support many software applications on IBM personal computers and compatibles through the Hewlett-Packard PCL protocol
• State-of-the-art technology, (disposable-cartridge thermal inkjet), provides up
to seven colors at 180-by-180-dot-per-inch resolution and up to 255 colors at
90-by-90-dot-per-inch resolution
• Compact and lightweight (less than 10 pounds), with attractive office styling to
complement Digital desktop systems
• Easy-to-use; no routine maintenance required
• Full DECsupport, with one-year carry-in service warranty and a variety of
service options

6.22

Terminals and Printers

Printers
Companion Color Printers (LJ2S0/LJ252)
Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.4 7 of this chapter for
ordering information.

Accessories and Supplies

LJ25X.AA

Color ink cartridge

LJ25X.AB

Black ink cartridge

LJ25X.AC

8.5-by-ll-inch continuous form paper, 250 sheets

LJ25X.AD

A4-size continuous form paper, 250 sheets

LJ25X.AE

8.5-by-ll-inch cut sheet transparencies, 50 sheets

LJ25X.AF

A4-size cut sheet transparencies, 50 sheets

LJ25X.DC

Dust cover

LJ25X.DS

Desk stand

LJ25X.SW

Paper catcher

Adapters

To connect to any Digital host except VAXmate and VT300 series, an adapter
must be ordered:
Host

Host Printer
Port

VT100

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT101

25·pin male

H8571-A

VTl02

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT125

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT131

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT180

25-pin male

H8571-A

VT220

9-pin male

H8571-B

VT240

9-pin male

H8571-B

VT241

9-pin male

H8571-B

DEC mate II, III

9-pin male

H8571-B

Required
MMJ Adapter

Professional 325/350/380

9-pin male

H8571-B

Rainbow 100 Series

25 ~pin female

H8571-D

Micro VAX family

9-pin male

H8571-B

VAXstation family

9-pin male

H8571-B

(For any other host with an RS-232 serial 25-pin male printer port, use the
H8571-A adapter. For any other host with an RS-232 serial9-pin male printer
port, use the H8571-B connector. To connect with IBM Personal Computers,
PC-compatibles, and other hosts supporting parallel communications,
select the LJ252 parallel model, which features Centronics-type
parallel interface.)

Terminals and Printers 6.23

Printers
LCGO 1 Color Printer

Product Description

The LCGO 1 is an intelligent desktop ink-jet printer that contains its own graphics processor to offload host systems for other tasks. The LCG01 produces output on paper and transparencies, storing five fonts in local memory and offering more than 200 colors/shades. The LCG01 supports the ReGIS, GIDIS,
NAPLPS, and BIT MAP IMAGE (Color Sixel format) graphics protocols. Resolution is 154 dots per inch, with up to 1536 by 1152dots in an A-size image.
The LCGO 1 holds 100 sheets of paper and 50 transparencies. The LCGO 1 can
serve as a shared printing device for a number of users, whether they're working at a VAXstation II/GPX color workstation or at a VT241/VT340 color
graphics terminal.

Features

• Serial-line interface supports shared-resource printing
• 154-dot-per-inch resolution
• Eight true colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, red, blue, green, black, and white)
per page, selectable from 216 combinations and shades
• Large reservoirs of each ink cartridge
• Self-dispensing maintenance fluid
• Self-purging heads
• Compatible with DEC slide, DECgraph, DATATRIEVE office software, VTX,
PRO/GIDIS, and numerous third-party graphics generation packages available
for Digital systems
• Automatically sheetfeeds paper or transparencies
• Processes ReGIS, GIDIS, NAPLPS, and Color Sixel display files
• Downline-Ioadable character fonts and software
• Prints text and graphics in portrait and landscape modes
• Scales graphics images to printer coordinates
• Image sizes: A (7.5 by 9.95 inches) and A4 (7.27 by 9.95 inches)
• Full page memory buffer
• Print speed: approximately 2 minutes per page
• RS-232-C, RS-422, and 20-mA system interfaces
• Built-in self-test diagnostics
• Minimal operator involvement
• No disposable media, making the LCGOl an excellent output device for
classified applications requiring tight security

6.24

Terminals and Printers

Printers
LCGOl Color Printer

Ordering Information

LCGOI·AA

Ink-jet color printer with graphics processor (includes
RS·232 interface)

LCGOI Software is included with the LCG Color Printing System; the software
identification numbers below are used to indicate the appropriate distribution
media when ordering the system.

Country Kits

Supplies

AS·FB IIE·BE

RXOI Floppy Diskette (1/3) (VMS)

AS·FBI2E·BE

RXOI Floppy Diskette (2/3) (VMS)

AS·KY92A.BE

RXOI Floppy Diskette (3/3) (VMS)

BL·FY5IE.BN

RX50 Floppy Diskette (1/2) (MicroVMS)

BL·FY52E.BN

RX50 Floppy Diskette (2/2) (MicroVMS)

BB.FBI5E.BC

9-track 1600 b/in Magtape (RSX)

BB·FC64E·BE

9-track 1600 b/in Magtape (VMS)

BE·FBI3E·BE

TU58 DEC tape II Cartridge (1/2) (VMS)

BE·FBI4E·BE

TU58 DECtape II Cartridge (2/2) (VMS)

AQ.FY50E.BE

TK50 Streaming Tape (1/2) (MicroVMS)

LCGOI·KE

United Kingdom

LCGOI·KG

Continental Europe

LCGOI·KK

Switzerland

LCGOI·KZ

Australia

LCGXI.JY

Yellow ink cartridge

LCGXI·JM

Magenta ink cartridge

LCGXI.JC

Cyan ink cartridge

LCGXI.JB

Black ink cartridge

LCGXI.JW

Maintenance cartridge

LCGXI·PA

Paper (A size), 500 sheets

LCGXI.PE

Paper (A4 size), 500 sheets

LCGXI·AA

Transparencies (A) 100 sheets

LCGXI·AE

Transparencies (A4) 100 sheets

LCGXI·PT

Paper tray

All questions and requests for additional information should be directed to
1-800-832-6277.

Terminals and Printers 6.25

Printers
LN03 PLUS Laser Printer (LN03S)

Product Description

The LN03 PLUS is a desktop graphics laser printer offering full-page, 300-dotper-inch, bit-mapped graphics compatible with Digital (sixels) and Tektronix™
(4010/4014 vector graphics) software. The LN03 PLUS comes with 1-Mbyte
RAM and an additional 14-point monospaced Modern Gothic type font. Other
features are identical to those of the LN03, with text printing at eight pages per
minute; a 250-sheet tray for collated output; and an adjustable 250-sheet input
tray for standard and European-size paper, label sets, or transparencies. Optional font and RAM cartridges can be inserted into the two slots on the front
panel. A standard RS-232 serial interface is provided for connection to
stand-alone or networked systems.

Features

• Full-page, bit-mapped graphics compatible with Digital's sixels and Tektronix
4010/4014 graphics protocols
• Rapid 8-page-per-minute (approximately 333-ch/s) text-printing speed
• Typographic-quality 300-by-300-dot-per-inch character formation with even
density and accurate alignment
• 1-Mbyte on-board RAM for text/graphics applications
• 17 resident fonts in three typefaces, including ASCII, multinational, and
technical character sets
• Prints in both portrait and landscape modes
• Accepts optional plug-in type font cartridges and RAM cartridges
• Type fonts may be downline-Ioaded from host systems
• Built-in LA100 compatibility mode
• Optional IBM Proprinter Compatibility Cartridge
• Supported by most major Digital operating systems and applications software
for text and graphics printing
• 250-sheet input and output paper cassettes accept standard 16-241b paper
(and transparencies) in 8.5-by-11-inch and European (A4) sizes
• Automatic page sequencing for collated output
• Compact size: 15-inches high by 21-inches wide by 23.5-inches deep
• Quiet operation (under 54 decibels)
• Low cost-per-user; simple user-performed maintenance
• Built-in self-diagnostics and status indicators

6.26

Terminals and Printers

Printers
LN03 PLUS Laser Printer (LN03S)

Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.47 of this chapter for
ordering information.
The LN03 PLUS laser printer includes two toner cartridges, one OPC cartridge, an ac power cord, one toner collection bottle, one package (250 sheets)
of paper, documentation, 1 Mbyte of RAM, and 14-point Modern Gothic
typeface.

Font Cartridges

Accessories
and Supplies

LN03X-CS

Letter Gothic: 10-point Normal; 10-point Bold; 14-point Normal; U. S. Legal characters

LN03X-CM

OCR-A/OCR-B: 10 point, 10 pitch

LN03X-CP

English 116 Embassy: (Script Text)

LN03X·IC

LN03 PLUS ISO/PC Cartridge

LN03X·CT

U.S. Legal: 10-point Courier; 10-point Courier Italics; 10-point
Elite; 10-point Elite Italics; 10- and 14-point Gothic; 10- and
14-point Symbols; Large Gothic

LN03X·CZ

CG Triumvirate Large: 24-point

LN03X·CW

CG Times Presentation: 18-point Normal; 18-point Bold;
14-point Normal

LN03X·CX

CG Times Large: 24-point

LN03X·CL

ITC Souvenir: 10-point Normal; 10-point Bold; 10-point Italics;
12-point Normal; 12-point Bold; 8-point Normal

LN03X·CJ

CG Triumvirate Presentation: 18-point Normal; 18-point Bold;
14-point Normal

LN03X·CY

CG Triumvirate: 10-point Normal; 10-point Italics; 8-point
Normal; 12-point Normal; 12-point Bold

LN03X·CB

CG Times: 10-point Normal; lO-point Bold; 10-point Italics;
8-point Normal; 12-point Normal; 12-point Bold

LN03X-DA

VT100/200 Screen Extended Courier font

LN03X·CR

RAM Cartridge

LN03·AD

User maintenance kit

LNOIX·AB

Cut sheet paper (5000 8.5 by 11)

LN03X.AJ

Transparencies (50 8.5 by 11)

LN03X·AC

Toner cartridge kit

LN03X·AE

LN03 mobile cabinet stand

LN03R·UA

LN03 PLUS to Script Printer upgrade kit

Terminals and Printers

6.27

Printers
LN03 Laser Printer

Product Description

The LN03laser printer is a desktop unit that employs electrophotographic
imaging and xerographic printing to produce eight pages of text per minute.
The LN03 comes with three character sets in 16 fonts for both portrait and
landscape orientation. Print resolution is 300 by 300 dots per inch. Precoded
ROM font cartridges or programmable RAM cartridges can be inserted into one
of two option slots on the front panel. The LN03 has a 250-sheet output tray
and an adjustable 250-sheet input tray for standard and European size paper,
label sets, or transparencies. A standard RS-232 serial interface is provided for
connection to stand-alone or networked Digital systems.

Features

• Rapid 8-page-per-minute (approximately 333-ch/s) print speed
• Typographic-quality 300-by-300-dots-per-inch character formation with even
density and accurate alignment
• 250-sheet input and output paper cassettes accept standard 16-241b paper
(and transparencies) in 8.5-by-11-inch and European (A4) sizes
• Automatic paging sequencing
• 16 resident fonts in two typefaces, including ASCII, multinational and technical character sets
• Prints in both portrait and landscape modes
• Accepts precoded ROM font cartridges or programmable RAM cartridges
• Font information may be downline-Ioaded from host systems
• Built-in LA100 compatibility mode
• Supported by most major Digital operating systems and applications software
• Compact size: 15-inches high by 21-inches wide by 23.5-inches deep
• Quiet operation (under 54 decibels)
• Low cost-per-user; simple user-performed maintenance
• Built-in self-diagnostics and status indicators

6.28 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LN03 Laser Printer

Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.47 of this chapter for
ordering information.
The LN03 Laser Printer includes two toner cartridges, one OPC cartridge,
an ac power cord, one toner collection bottle, one package (250 sheets) of
paper, and documentation.

Font Cartridges

Accessories
and Supplies

LN03X·CS

Letter Gothic: 10-point Normal; 10-point Bold; 14-point Normal and V. S. Legal characters

LN03X·CM

OCR-A/OCR-B: 10 point, 10 pitch

LN03X·CP

English 116 Embassy: (Script Text)

LN03X·CT

V.S. Legal: 10-point Courier; 10-point Courier Italics; 10-point
Elite; 10-point Elite Italics; 10- and 14-point Gothic; 10- and
14-point Symbols; Large Gothic

LN03X·CZ

CG Triumvirate Large: 24-point

LN03X·CW

CG Times Presentation: 18-point Normal; 18-point Bold;
14-point Normal

LN03X·CX

CG Times Large: 24-point

LN03X·CL

ITC Souvenir: lO·point Normal; 10-point Bold; 10-point Italics;
12-point Normal; 12-point Bold; 8-point Normal

LN03X.CJ

CG Triumvirate Presentation: 18-point Normal; 18-point Bold;
14-point Normal

LN03X·CY

CG Triumvirate: 10-point Normal; 10-point Italics; 8-point
Normal; 12-point Normal; 12-point Bold

LN03X·CB

CG Times: 10-point Normal; 10-point Bold; 10-point Italics;
8-point Normal; 12-point Normal; 12-point Bold

LN03X·DA

VT100/200 Screen Extended Courier font

LN03X·CR

RAM Cartridge

LN03·AD

V ser maintenance kit

LNOIX·AB

Cutsheet paper (5000 8.5 by 11)

LN03X.AJ

Transparencies (50 8.5 by 11)

LN03X·AC

Toner cartridge kit

LN03X·AE

LN03 mobile cabinet stand

LN03S·UA

LN03 to LN03 PLUS upgrade kit

Terminals and Printers 6.29

Printers
LQP4S Letter-quality Office Printer

Product Description

The LQP45, Digital's fastest daisywheel printer, prints up to 45 characters per
second in true letter-quality text. It is a replacement for the LQP02 daisywheel
printer and supports the RS-232 serial interface.
The LQP45's specially-engineered printwheel and character generator produce
ASCII, DEC Multinational, and National Replacement character sets with a
single printwheel.
The optional dual-bin cutsheet feeder with envelope feed allows selective feeding from two bins for use with cut sheet paper and preprinted forms; a third bin
handles envelopes. This customer-installable option holds up to 220 sheets of
20-pound paper and up to 50 letter-size business envelopes.
The LQP45 can print on multipart forms (an original plus four copies) using an
optional customer-installable bidirectional forms tractor. With this forms tractor, the LQP45 can scroll paper forward or backward for superscript, subscript,
and multicolumn printing.
Both Mylar and Nylon multistrike ribbon cartridges are available for the
LQP45. The ribbon cartridges snap into place easily, without adjustment or
alignment. LQP45 printwheels drop into place without regard to orientation.
Printwheels are available in a range of typestyles, each with a lifetime of approximately 10 million impressions.

Features

• Fully formed letter-quality type in a variety of typefaces
• Print speeds to 45 chIs in 10-pitch Shannon text
• Bold, shadow, underline, overstrike, subscript and superscript printing
• Optional automatic dual-bin cut sheet paper and envelope feeder
• Optional bidirectional continuous forms tractor
• Prints on multipart forms (original plus four copies)
• Easy-to-change ribbons and printwheels
• No user-maintenance; built-in self-tests

6.30 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LQP45 Letter-quality Office Printer

Ordering Information

Please refer to the Printer Selection Chart on page 6.47 of this chapter for
ordering information.
The LQP45 letter-quality printer includes ribbon cartridge and Courier-10
multinational printwheel.

Options

Accessories
and Supplies

LQP4X-S3

Dual-bin cutsheet feeder with envelope feed

LQP2,-TR

Bidirectional forms tractor

Printwheels
LQP4X-CA

International Courier 10, box of 4

LQP4X-CE

International Letter Gothic 12, box of 4

LQP4X-CF

International Prestige Elite 12, box of 4

LQP4X-CH

International Mikron 15, box of 4

LQP4X-CN

OCR-B, box of 4

LQP4X-CM

Orator, box of 4

Ribbons
LQP2,-KA

Mylar ribbon cartridge

LQP2.5-KB

Nylon ribbon cartridge

Terminals and Printers 6.31

Printers
LP29 Impact Printer

Product Description

The LP29 system printer is Digital's fastest line printer. The LP29 can operate
at speeds up to 2000 lines per minute, through the use of a Digital-unique interface and "optimized" character band. The Digital-unique interface allows
the LP29 to accept continuous input from the CPU at the same time that it is
printing. The proprietary "optimized" character band is a special arrangement
of 64 uppercase characters that permits great speed without sacrificing print
quality or character selection. The LP29 is the ideal printer for Digital's high
performance systems.
The LP29's rugged design makes it capable of withstanding continuous impact
at very high speeds. It is designed for Digital's UNIBUS, Q-bus, and VAX BIbus systems iIi central data processing environments. The LP29 comes with a
universal power supply and prints at speeds up to 2000-li/min using the proprietary "optimized" 64-character uppercase ASCII set, or at 1150 li/min using the
96-character uppercase and lowercase ASCII set. Character bands, paper
handIng, and ribbon handling are all easy for the operator. Self-test diagnostic
capabilities are built in. Power stacker is standard.

Features

• Digital-unique interface
• Proprietary "optimized" character band
• Front paper handling
• 300,000 pages per month
• High slew speed
• Accepts pinfeed, continuous fanfold paper
• Accepts up to 6-part forms in a variety of widths and thicknesses, including
carbons
• 132-column printouts
• 132-character buffer capacity

Ordering Information

6.32

Terminals and Printers

LP29-UA/U3

Shortline LP29 UNIBUS system option with LP11 controller,
BC05L-10 10-ft internal cable, bulkhead, and BC27A-30 30-ft
(9.5-m) data cable. Includes powered paper stacker.

LP29-SA/S3

Shortline LP29 system printer with LPV11-SA controller,
BC27L-30 30-ft (9.5-m) data cable and powered paper stacker.
For use on BA213 enclosures only.

Printers
LP29 Impact Printer

Configuring Information
Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at
5V

15V

-15 V

Bus Loads
Drawn

LP29-UA/U3

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LP29-SA/S3

1 quad slot

2.4

N/A

1.0

I/O Panel
Units

N/A

Terminals and Printers 6.33

Printers
LP27 System Printer

Product Description

The LP27 system printer is a fully formed character lineprinter that accepts up
to 6 part fanfold edge-perforated forms. The LP27, designed for use on larger
UNIBUS and Q-bus systems in standard computer room environments, comes
with a universal power supply and prints at speeds as fast as 1,200 lines per minute using a 64-character uppercase ASCII set and speeds as fast as 800 lines
per minute using the 96-character uppercase ASCII set. Character bands are
easy to change and replace. Built-in 3-mode self-test capability. Available in
shortline or longline version. Optional cables, bands, and paper caddies are
available for the LP27.

Features

• Printing speed: 64-character set at 1,200 lines per minute; 96-character set at
800 lines per minute
• Easy-to-change, user-replaceable character bands
• Accepts pin-feed, continuous fanfold, and up to 6 part forms in a variety of
widths and thicknesses, including carbons
• Available in shortline or longline version for maximum flexibility
• 132-column printouts
• 132-character buffer capacity
• Built-in 3-mode self-test capability

Ordering Information

6.34 Terminals and Printers

LP27-UAjUB

Shortline LP27 UNIBUS system option with LP11 controller,
BC05L-10 10-ft. internal cable, bulkhead, and BC27 A-30 30-ft
(9.5-m) data cable.

LP27 -DAjDB

Longline LP27 UNIBUS system option with 15.2-m (50-ft) data
cable and long-line controller. The longline controller permits
operation up to 304.7 m (1,000 ft) from the host processor with
optional cables.

LP27 -QAjQB

LP27 Q-bus system option with LPV11 controller and BC27 A-30
30-ft (9.5-m) data cable. (Cabinet kit components included.)

Printers
LP27 System Printer

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15 V

-15V

LP27.UA/UB

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

LP27.DA/DB

1 hex slot

2.0

0.0

1.0

LP27.QA/QB

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

I/O Panel
Units

1.0
l(A)

Terminals and Printers

6.35

Printers
LP25 System Printer

Product Description

Standard LP25 system printer is a band printer that accepts 1-6 part fanfold
edge-perforated forms. The LP25 comes with a universal power supply and
prints at speeds as fast as 300 lines per minute using a 64-character uppercase
ASCII set. Models using the 96-character uppercase and lowercase ASCII set
print 215 lines per minute. Font bands are user-replaceable. LP25s with single
quad-slot LP11 controllers come with a 9.2-meter (30-foot) cable. Models with
a 15 .3-meter (50-foot) cable rand longline control kit come with an LP20, or
controller. Optional cables, bands, and paper caddies are available for
the LP25.

Features

• Printing speed - 64-character set: 300 lines per minute; 96-character set:
215 Iines per minute
• Easy-to-change, user replaceable font bands
• Supports compressed printing mode in European and Japanese character sets
• Offers a variety of horizontal and vertical spacing choices
• Numerous optional character bands are available
• Universal power supply
• Program status display
• 132-column printouts
• 132-character buffer capacity
• Self-test capability

Ordering Information

6.36

Terminals and Printers

LPll·AA

LP25 UNIBUS system option, 300 Ii/min for 64-character set.

LPll·BA

LP25 UNIBUS system option, 300 Ii/min for 64-character set,
or 215 Ii/min for 96-character set.

LPVII-A

LP25 Q-bus upgrade option, 300 Ii/min for 64-character set.
Select one of the cabinet kits listed below.

LPVll-B

LP25 Q-bus upgrade option, 300 Ii/min for 64-character set.
Select one of the cabinet kits listed below.

LSP25·CA

LP25 UNIBUS Iineprinter (longline version), U.S. prom set,
300 Ii/min for 64-character set, or 215 Ii/min for 96-character
set; US/UK bands, universal power supply; 50-ft cable included.

Printers
LP25 System Printer

Cabinet Kits

Configuring Information

CK·LPVIA·KA

Cabinet kit for MicroPDP·11 (BA23 enclosure).

CK·LPVIA·KF

Cabinet kit for H9642-JA.

CK·LPVIA·KB

Cabinet kit for MicroPDP-11 (BA123 enclosure).

Option

Mounting
Requirements

UNIBUS

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15V

1.5

0.0

1.0

LPll·AA

1 quad slot

LPll·BA

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LSP25·CA

1 hex slot

2.0

0.0

1.0

12V

Q~bus

I/O Panel
Units

LPVll·A

1 dual slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LPVll·B

1 dual slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

Terminals and Printers

6.37

Printers
LXY Graphics Lineprinter

Product Description

The LXY12 graphics lineprinter is a versatile dot-matrix printer that combines the benefits of a lineprinter and a plotter in one product. This printer is
compatible with all of Digital's lineprinters, requiring no special software for
use as a lineprinter. PLXY and Bar Code/Block Character graphics software is
available. This printer can be connected using an LP11 controller, or a serial
RS-232 port. The LP11 controller offers faster parallel throughput and full
data transfer speeds. The RS-232-C interface provides remote connection to
the host via a serial line interface and modems or standard null modem cables.

Features

• Printing speed with parallel interface: 300 lines per minute (64 uppercase characters), 240 lines per minute (underlines, uppercase/lowercase characters with
descenders), 170 lines per minute (double-height characters)
• Plotting speed: 42.4 em/min (16.7 in/min)
• 96-character ASCII set standard
• 192-character expanded set optional
• 132-character buffer capacity

6.38

Te~als and Printers

Printers
LXY Graphics Lineprinter

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

LXY12-CA/CB

UNIBUS 300-li/min dot-matrix graphics lineprinter with
M7258 controller and BC27A-30 9.2-m (30-ft) cable.

LXY12.DA/DB

300-li/min dot-matrix graphics lineprinter with BC22D-25
25-ft cable for interfacing to an RS-232-C serial port.
(RS-232-C serial port not included.)

Option

LXY12.CA/CB

Mounting
Requirements

1 quad slot

de Amps Drawn at

Bus Loads
Drawn

15V

-15V

1.5

N/A

I/O Panel
Units

1.0

Software must be specified when ordering hardware. The following is the
PLXY Graphics Software and the BCP Bar Code/Block Character Graphics

Software ordering information. Refer to the Software Product Descriptions for
further details about these software packages.
BCP Bar Code/Block Character
Graphics Software

PLXY Graphics Software

Operating System

Media

Order Codes

RSX-llM

9-track magtape (800 b/in)
9-track magtape (1,600 b/in)

RLOl
RXOl
RL02

QJS05·AD
QJS05·AM
QJS05·AQ
QJS05·AY
QJS05·AH

Operating System

Media

Order Codes

RSX-IIM

9-track magtape (800 b/in)
9-track magtape (1,600 b/in)

RLOl
RXOl

QJS90.XD
QJS90.XM
QJS90-XQ
QJS90.XY

RSX·IIM·PLUS

9-track magtape (800 b/in)
9-track magtape (1,600 b/in)

QJS95·XD
QJS95·XM

RSTS/E

9-track magtape (800 b/in)
9-track magtape (1,600 b/in)

QJS92-XD
QJS92-XM
QJS92-XQ

RTll

9-track magtape (800 b/in)
9-track magtape (1,600 b/in)

RLOl

RLOl
RXOl

QJS91.XD
QJS91.XM
QJS91.XQ
QJS91.XY

Terminals and Printers 6.39

Printers
LG31 Dot Matrix Printer

Product Description

The LG 31 is a low-end distributed data processing system printer. It prints at
speeds of 300 lines per minute in uppercase data processing mode, and provides
extended text, bar code, and sixel processing capabilities. With its target the
open office environment, the LG31 has an appropriate acoustic level of 55 dBA.
In the open office, this printer is ideal for use in small departments as a shareduser device where the daily output is approximately 1,100 pages per day,
25,000 pages per month, half a box of 15-inch fanfold computer paper per
day, or nine boxes per month. The LG 31 is connected to the host CPU, or
DECserver 200, via an RS-232 serial interface.

Features

• Quiet operation at 55 dBA for use in open office environment
• Print volume typically 25,000 pages per month
• Compressed or expanded print
• Underlining, bolding, superscript, and subscript
• Multipart forms (1 to 6 parts)
• NRC and DEC Multinational character sets
• 7- or 8-bit character sets and addressing, ANSI/ISO-compatible
• OCR-A and OCR-B
• Sixel protocol processing
• RS-232-C serial interface
• Front control panel
• Universal power supply

6.40 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LG31 Dot Matrix Printer

LG31 Printer Speed Chart
Print Speeds in Lines Per Minute
Data Processing Mode
Uppercase
Uppercase and lowercase
N ear Letter Quality Mode
Uppercase
Uppercase and lowercase
OCR.At
OCR·Bt

Characters Per Inch Settings
10
12 13.3
15 16.7*
300
240

300
240

147

147
105

105

65
65

* At the 16.7 character per inch setting a maximum of 220 characters per line can be
achieved.
tOptical Character Recognition fonts
Note: To ensure the above print speeds the data transfer rate should be set to 9600 baud.

300 Ii/min enhanced text line dot matrix impact printer, with
RS-232 serial interface and 25-ft cable, (BN22D-25).

Ordering Information

LG31-A2

Country Kits

For non-U.S. Customers the following Country Kits are available as a separate no-charge line item:
LGK31-AD
Denmark
LGK31-AE
UK/Ireland
LGK31-AG
Germany/Austria
LGK31-AI
Italy
LGK31-AJ
Japan
LGK31-AK
Switzerland
LGK31-AT
Israel
LGK31-AZ
Australia
LGK31-CA
Belgium/Finland/France/Netherlands/Norway/Portugal/
Spain/Sweden
LGK31-BJ
India
(Includes power cord, serial cable (25-ft), installation/operator manual, and
user guide)
For further information call the Sales Support Team at 1-800-832-6277.

Terminals and Printers 6.41

Printers
LGOI/LG02 Line Dot Matrix Printers

Product Description

The LG01 and LG02 are the most functional600-line-per-minute impact
printers ever offered by Digital.
The LGO 1 is a text printer that offers data processing and correspondence
mode printing, multiple characters-per-inch print selections, and 7- or 8-bit
character sets. The LG02 is a text and graphics printer that offers bar codes,
custom forms creation, superscript and subscript, portrait and landscape mode,
and many other graphic functions. In addition, the LG02 provides all of the
text capabilities of the LGOl. The LG01 text printer can be field-upgraded to
an LG02 text and graphics printer via an upgrade kit.

Features

• Compressed or expanded print
• Underlining
• Strikethrough
• Bolding
• Multipart forms (1 - 6 parts)
• Multiple character sets
• 7- or 8-bit character sets and addressing, ANSI/ISO compatible
• Parallel or RS-232 interface
• Front control panel

The following additional features are available on the LG02 text and graphics
printer
• Bar codes
• Subscripts and superscripts
• Rotation of text for spreadsheet applications
• Ability to create custom forms and logos
• Sixel protocol processing
• Parallel and serial interfaces standard

6.42 Terminals and Printers

Printers
LG01/LG02 Line Dot Matrix Printers

LG01/LG02 Printer Speed Chart

Ordering Information

Draft Mode

LPM

Uppercase
Uppercase and Lowercase

600
480

Correspondence Mode

LPM

Uppercase
Uppercase and Lowercase

280
240

OCR-A

LPM

Uppercase
Uppercase and Lowercase

480
240

OCR-B

LPM

Uppercase
Uppercase and Lowercase

250
205

LG01-AA

UNIBUS text printer with M7258 controller, BC05L-10 10-ft
internal cable, bulkhead, and BC27 A- 30 30-ft data cable.

LGOI-BA

Q-bus text printer with M8027 controller and BC27 A-3D 30-ft
data cable. Cabinet kit included.

LGOI-DA

Text printer with RS-232-C serial interface and 25-ft cable.
Standard baud rates: 1200 to 19,200, selectable from printer
control panel.

LGOI-UG

Upgrade kit converts LG01 into LG02.

LG02-AA

UNIBUS text and graphics printer with M7258 controller,
BC05L-10 10-ft internal cable, bulkhead, and BC27 A-3D 30-ft
data cable.

LG02-BA

Q-bus text and graphics printer with M8027 controller and
BC27 A- 30 30-ft data cable. Cabinet kit included.

LG02-DA

Text and graphics printer with RS-232-C serial interface and
25-ft cable. Standard baud rates: 1200 to 19,200, selectable
from printer control panel.

Note: The LG01 includes either a serial or a parallel interface. The LG02 includes both serial and parallel interfaces, which are selectable from the printer
control panel.
All questions and requests for additional information should be directed to
1-800-832-6277.

Configuring Information

Option

Mounting
Requirements

UNIBUS

dc Amps Drawn at
5V

15V

-15 V

Bus Loads
Drawn

I/O Panel
Units

LGOI-AA

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LG02-AA

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

12V

Q-bus
LGOI-BA

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

LG02-BA

1 quad slot

1.5

0.0

1.0

Terminals and Printers 6.43

Terminals and Printers
Printer Interconnect Cabling

Cabling Configuration Chart
The following chart will serve as a guide to connecting most video products to printers and modems. Please note,
however, that cables and/or adaptors are shipped with most Digital printer products.
Video/
Workstation

To
Connect
LJ250*

To
Connect
LA75*

To
Connect
LA210

To
Connect
LA120

To
Connect
LA100

To
Connect
LN03
Family

To
Connect
Modems/
Couplers

VT100
VT101
VT102
VT125
VT131
VT180
VT220
VT240
VT241
VT320
VT330
VT340
DECmatell
DECmateIII
Pro 325
Pro 350
Pro 380
Rainbow
VAXmate
VAXstation 2000
Micro VAX 2000
DECserver
200/DL (DSRVB-BA)
DECserver 200
200/MC (DSRVB.AA)

H8571-A

BC220

H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
BC16E*
BC16E*
BC16E*
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-D
BC16E*
H8571-B
BC16E*
BC16E*

H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-A
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
BC16E*
BC16E*
BC16E*
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-B
H8571-0
BC16E*
H8571-B
BC16E*
BC16E*

BC220
BC220
BC220
BC220
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC14
H8571-A/BC16E
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E

BC220
BC220
BC220
BC220
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC 16E
H8571-A/BC 16E
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC14
H8571-A/BC 16E
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E

BC220
BC220
BC220
BC220
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC05
BCC14
H8571-A/BC16E
BCC05
H8571-A/BC16E
H8571-A/BC16E

BC22E
BC22E
BC22E
BC22E
BC22E
BC22E
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14
BCC14

H8571-A

BC220

BC22E

*BC16E included with LA75 and LJ250 and needed for these connections.

System Printer
Interconnect Cabling

6.44 Terminals and Printers

System
Printer
Interface

LP25

LP26

LP27

LP32

LXY12

LG01

LG02

LPll

BC27A

LPVll

BC27A

OMB32·

BC27A

OMF32

BC27A

Terminals and Printers
Printer Site Preparation

Voltage Freq
Model

Current
Phases ac Amps

NEMA
Thermal Dissipation

Watts
LAtOO-DA

120

50-60

LAtOO-DA

240

50-60

LAtOO-DD

120

LAtOO-CA

Rec Type

Btu/h

1.04

100

341

5-15R

100

[360]

6-15R

[17.8]

50-60

1.04

100

341

7.0

120

50-60

.52

100

[360]

6-15R

LAtOO-CA

120

50-60

1.04

100

341

5-15R

LAtOO.CA

240

50-60

.52

100

[360]

6-15R

.52

PCS + jPDS +
Cable Type·

LA tOO-CD

120

50-60

1.04

100

341

5-15R

LAtOO.CD

240

50-60

.52

100

[360]

6-15R

LA120-DA

120

50-60

1.60

153

522

5-15R

LAt20-DA

240

50-60

.80

153

[551]

6-15R

LA210-AA

120

50-60

.87

120

5-15R

LA210-AD

240

50-60

1.91

120

6-15R

LN03-AA

120

50-60

1.00

132

NjA

5-15R

LN03-A3

240

50-60

1.00

264

NjA

6-15R

LPll-AA

120

50-60

350

5-15P

LPll-AD

240

50-60.

350

5-15P

LP27-UA

120

LP27·UD

240

LP27-DA

BC24Ktt

1100

3754

BC24S

1100

3754

N/A

120

1100

3754

BC24S

LP27-DD

240

1100

3754

LP}2

120

50-60

LP32

240

50-60

LXYI2-CA

120

4.0

LXY12-CD

240

450

LXYI2-DA

120

450

N/A

BC24Ktt

450

1535

BC24Ktt

1535

BC24Ktt

LXYI2-DD

240

450

LXYI2-EA

120

450

1535

LXYI2-ED

240

450

1535

LCGOI-AA

120

50-60

LCGOI-AA

240

50-60

600

LGOI-AA

120

50-60

1,000

3,000

LGOI-AA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000
3,000

BC24Ktt

600

LGOI-DA

120

50-60

1,000

LGOt-DA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000

LGOI-DA

120

50-60

1,000

3,000

LGOI-DA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000

BC24Ktt

Physical Characteristics

Height

Width

Depth Weight

in [em]

in [em] lb [kg]

7.0

22.0

15.5

[55.9]

[39.4]

[11.4]

22.0

15.5

25.0

[17.8]

[55.9]

[39.4]

25.0

[11.4]

7.0

22.0

15_5

25.0

[17.8]

[55.9]

[39.4]

[11.4]

7.0

22.0

15.5

25.0

[17.8]

[55.9]

[39.4]

[11.4]

33.5

27.5

24.0

102.0

[85.1]

[69.9]

[61.0]

[46.4]
25

5.0

21.5

13.5

[12.50]

[53.75]

[33.75] [12.15]

66.0

[33.1]

[53.5]

[40.7]

[29.7]

43.8

30.3

33.6

195

[111]

[76]

[85]

[89]

43.8

567

[111]

[88.9]

[96.5]

[257.2]

43.8

567

[111]

[88.9]

[96.5]

[257.2]

43.8

30.3

33.6

195

[111]

[76]

[85]

[89]

46.5

24.3

200

[118]

[76.2]

[61.6]

[90.7]

46.5

24.3

200

[118]

[76.2]

[61.6]

[90.7]

46.5

24.3

200

[118]

[76.2]

[61.6]

[90.7]

8.5

24.0

24.25

[21.6]

[61.0]

[61.6]

[43.5]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

*For environmental kVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Reference Guide and Price List.
1'fypical Line Cord
Where Used
DEC PDS Cable
BN04A-2E
Switzerland
BN29A-xx
BN02A-2E
UK/Ireland
BN29D-xx
BN03A-2E
Continental Europe
BN29HG)-xx
tt60_ Hz cable.

Terminals and Printers 6.45

Terminals and Printers
Printer Site Preparation

Voltage Freq
Model

Current
Phases acAmps

NEMA
Thermal Dissipation

Watts

RecType

PCS +/PDS +
Cable Type*

Physical Characteristics

Height
in [em]

Btu/h
BC24Ktt

LG02-AA

120

50-60

1,000

3,000

LG02-AA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000

LG02-BA

120

50-60

1,000

3,000

LG02-BA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000

LG02-DA

120

50-60

1,000

3,000

LG02-DA

240

50-60

1,000

3,000

LJ250/252-A6

120

59-61

0.17

188

N/A

LJ250/252-A6

220

49-51

0.091

188

N/A

LJ250/252-A6

240

49-51

0.083

188

N/A

LQP45-AA

120

59-61

0.58

198

5-15R

LQP45-B

240

49-51

0.315

198

6-15R

LG31-A2

100-240

50-60

BC24Ktt

400

LA75/LA75P-A2

120

50-60

0.58

188

5-15P

LA75/LA75P-A3

240

50-60

0.32

58.5

188

5-15P

LA75/LA75p.A4

220

50-60

0.33

188

5-15P

LA75/LA75p.A5

100

50-60

0.7

52.7

188

5-15P

BC24Ktt

Width
in [em]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

38.5

33.5

22.5

350

[97.8]

[85.1]

[57.2]

[157.5]

3.5

16.7

10.2

[9.0]

[42.5]

[26]

[4.5]

[9.0]

[42.5]

[26]

[4.5]

7.9

22.5

29.7

[20]

[55.0]

[33]

[13.5]

46.6

285

5.12

17.8

13.7

22.0

[13.0]

[45.2]

[34.8]

[10.0]

[13.0]

[45.2]

[34.8]

[10.0]

5.12

17.8

13.7

22.0

*For environmental kVA and cable information, see the Environmental Products Reference Guide and Price List.
1Typical Line Cord
DEC PDS Cable
Where Used
BN04A-2E
Switzerland
BN29A-xx
BN02A-2E
BN29D-xx
UK/Ireland
BN03A-2E
Continental Europe
BN29H(J)-xx
tt60-Hz cable.

6.46 Terminals and Printers

Depth Weight
in [em] lb [kg]

Printers
Printer Selection Chart

Printer Selection Chart
Refer to this table for ordering any of the following printers.
LN03 PLUS
LA'5*

LJ250 t

LA210

LN03

Printer

Printer
(LN03S)

English

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA2l0-AA

LN03-AA

LN03S-AA

LQP45-AA

Flemish

LA75-AB

LJ250-AB

LA21O-AB

LN03-AB

LN03S-AB

LQP45-CD

Canada

French

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA21O-AC

LN03-AC

LN03S-AC

LQP45-AA

Denmark

Danish

LA75-AD

LJ250-AD

LA2l0-AD

LN03-AD

LN03S-AD

LQP45-AD

UK/Ireland

English

LA75-AE

LJ250-AE

LA2l0-AE

LN03-AE

LN03S-AE

LQP45-AE

Finland

Finnish

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA2l0-AF

LN03-AF

LN03S-AF

LQP45-CC

W. Germany/Austria

German

LA75-AG

LJ250-AG

LA2l0-AG

LN03-AG

LN03S-AG

LQP45-CD

Holland

Dutch

LA75-AH

LJ250AH

LA21O-AH

LN03-AH

LN03S-AH

LQP45-CD

Italy

Italian

LA75-AI

LJ250-AI

LA2l0-AI

LN03-AI

LN03S-AI

LQP45-AI

Japan

Katakana

LA75-AJ

LA2l0-AJ

LN03-AJ

LN03S-AJ

Switzerland

French

LA75-CB

LJ250-CB

LA2l0-AK

LN03-AK

LN03S-AK

LQP45-CB

Switzerland

German

LA75-CB

LJ250-CB

LA2l0-AL

LN03-AL

LN03S-AL

LQP45-CB

Sweden

Swedish

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA2l0-AM

LN03-AM

LN03S-AM

LQP45-CC

Norway

Norwegian

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA2l0-AN

LN03-AN

LN03S-AN

LQP45-CC

France

French

LA75-AP

LJ250-AP

LA2l0-AP

LN03-AP

LN03S-AP

LQP45-CD

Canada

English

LA75-CA

LJ250-CA

LA2l0-AQ

LN03-AQ

LN03S-AQ

LQP45-AA

South America

Spanish

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AR

LN03-AR

LN03S-AR

Country/
Region

Language

United States
Belgium

LQP45

Printer

LQP45-CC

Spain

Spanish

LA75-AS

LJ250-AS

LA2l0-AS

LN03-AS

LN03S-AS

Israel

Hebrew

LA75-AT

LJ250-AT

LA2l0-AT

LN03-AT

LN03S-AT

South America

Portuguese

LA75-CA

LA2l0-AU

LN03-AU

LN03S-AU

Portugal

Portuguese

LA75-CC

LJ250-CC

LA2l0-AV

LN03-AV

LN03S-AV

LQP45-CC

LA2l0-AW

LN03-AW

LN03S-AW

LQP45-CB

LN03-AY

LN03S-AY

LN03-AZ

LN03S-AZ

Switzerland

Italian

Japan

Hiragana

Australia/
New Zealand

English

Mexico

Spanish

LA75-CB

LA75-AZ

LJ250-CB

LJ250-AZ

LA2l0-AZ

LJ250-CA

*To order the parallel version of the LA75, use LA75P with the respective suffix for country variation. For example, LA75P-CA
for the U.S. parallel version of the LA75 Companion Printer.
tTo order the parallel version of the LJ250, use LJ252 with the respective suffix for country variation. For example, LJ252-CA
for the U.S. parallel version of the LJ250 Companion Color Printer.

Terminals and Printers

6.47

Terminals and Printers
DECtaik

Product Description

The DEC talk family includes four products that cover a broad range of application and system requirements. Singleline DECtaik is a small, self-contained
system, ideal for small-business applications and for use as system annunciators or "interactive" terminals and workstations. Singleline connects to a
host computer, terminal, or telephone line. Multiline DECtaik is the most
suitable model for large, multiuser, telephone-response systems. It is upwardly compatible with single-line DECtalk, and includes some enhancements
for more sophisticated telephone handling and linguistic accuracy. Each
Multiline DEC talk supports eight telephone lines and eight communication
ports; another Multiline Unit can be added when more lines are required.
Its lO.5-inch rackmount enclosure fits into an industry-standard, 19-inch
computer cabinet. Dual-line DECtaik is a two-channel version of Multiline
DECtalk, which is an entry-level product for telephone voice response applications. The DECtaik module is the DEGtaik board, which enables system designers to integrate DECtaik into workstations or telephone response
systems. The DECtalk module is also an add-on for Dual-line DECtalk.

Features

• With any Touch-Tone™ (a trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph
Company) telephone, DECtalk and the telephone keypad function as a terminal keyboard to control a host computer and access information.
• Connects to your computer through a standard RS-232-C serial line.
• Ten different voices and unlimited vocabulary.
• Self-contained, onboard diagnostics.
• Sophisticated telephone-handling features.

Ordering Information

Configuring Information

DTCOI-AA

Single-line DECtaik text-to-speech unit. Cables included.

DTC03·AA

Multiline DECtaik 8 channel text-to-speech unit. Cables not
included.

DTC03·AM

DECtaik module single-channel DECtalk board for system
integrators and add-on for Dual-line DECtalk. User must
supply power and mechanical mounting.

DTC03·SC

Dual-line DECtalk two channel text-to-speech unit. Cables
not included.

Connect DEC talk to a Digital or other vendor computer with a standard
RS-232-C compatible line running from the host computer to DEC talk' s communication port. The system must support full-duplex connections, standard
XON/XOFF flow control, and be able to pass the full ASCII character set.
To connect DECtalk to the telephone system, order standard telephone service.
For Multiline/Dual-line DECtaik installations, request R]21X service (CA21A
in Canada). Single-line, use RJllX service or CAllA in Canada.

6.48

Terminals and Printers

Chapter 7
Personal Computers

Personal Computers
Rainbow Options and Software

Product Description

The l6-bit Rainbow personal computer functions as a stand-alone desktop
system as well as an extension of a larger system, such as an ALL-IN-l office
information system. Options and software are currently available for existing
Digital Rainbow customers.

Rainbow 100A, 100B and 100 +
Hardware Options

Memory

Storage

PCIXX.AC

A l28-Kbyte base memory module.

PClXX·AD

A 256-Kbyte base memory module.

PClXX·AZ

A 256-Kbyte add-on memory chipset.
Requires PClXX-AC or PClXX·AD.

PClXX.AK

Memory adapter module. Allows use of above memory options
in PC 100-A. Not needed if using 8087 coprocessor in PC 100-A.

RCD31-BA

20-Mbyte half-height hard disk and controller for Rainbow
100B.

RCD31-BB

20-Mbyte half-height hard disk and controller for PC 100-A.

RD31·BA

Drive-only replacement for any Rainbow system already
equipped with an RD5l hard disk.

Note: Only one half-height drive is supported per system. CP/M cannot use
more than 10 Mbytes of storage and therefore must be set up with a 10-Mbyte
MS-DOS partition.

Graphics

PCIXX·BA

Graphics option. Graphics board that provides high-resolution, bit-mapped monochrome and color graphics depending
on monitor.

Communications

PCIXX·FA

Technical character set for PClOO-A (USA only).

Environmental
Power Products

H7229·AA

Standby Uninterruptable Power System, providing battery
backup for critical applications for up to twelve minutes at a
full-rated load. Also provides attenuation of impulses, receptacle panel distribution, and casters for ease of installation.
Available in three sizes up to 1.5 kVA in power rating. For more
information, refer to the Environmental Products Reference

Guide and Price List.

7.2

Personal Computers

Personal Computers
Rainbow Options and Software

Character Set ROMs

Coprocessor for Floating Point

PClXX-FB

Technical character set for Rainbow 100B/ + . (USA only).

QV099

Rainbow Athabascan kit. Modifies Rainbow for word processing in Navajo, Apache, and other Athabascan languages when
used with SELECT.TM

PClXX-EA

8087 numeric data processor. Coprocessor for 8088 CPU.

RCD3l-BB

20-Mbyte Winchester disk drive options. Upgrade for floppybased Rainbow 100A.

RD3l-BA

Drive-only replacement for Rainbow 100A already equipped
with an RD51 hard disk.

PClXX-BA

Graphics option. Palette of 1,024 colors on PC100-A. Includes
color signal cable (BCC17-06) and GSX-86 software, the graphics system extension to CP/M-86/80.

PC lXX-FA

Technical character set. (For USA only.)

QV099-A3

Rainbow Athabascan kit.

PClXX-EA

A 8087 numeric data processor.
Includes memory adapter for PC100-A.

PClXX-AC

128-Kbyte base memory module.
Requires PC1XX-AK or PC1XX-EA on PC100-A.

PC lXX-AD

256-Kbyte base memory module.
Requires PC1XX-AK or PC1XX-EA on PC100-A.

Rainbow 100 (PC100-A)
Hardware Options

Ord~ring Information

Personal Computers 7.3

Personal Computers
Rainbow Options and Software

External Devices and
Accessories for Rainbow Systems

External Devices

Cables

Accessories·

LQPX2-SW

Serial switch. Connects two printers to one Rainbow.

PCXXF-CZ

Serial interface switch.
Connects two communication lines to one Rainbow.

DFMSA·AA

Mini exchange. Microprocessor port selection device.

BCC14·10

Modem/printer cable - 10-ft A 16-pin RS-232 peripheral
cable. Connects LAI00, LA210, DF03, or DFI12-AA
to Rainbow.

BCC04·25

Modem/printer cable - 25-ft A 25-pin RS-232 peripheral
cable. Connects LAI00, LA210, DF03, or DFI12-AA
to Rainbow.

BCC04-50

Modem/printer cable - 50-ft A 25-pin RS-232 peripheral
cable. Connects LAI00, LA210, LQP02, LQP03, DF03,
or DFI12-AA to Rainbow.

BCC19-15

Pen plotter cable. Connects LVP16 or Hewlett-Packard pen
plotter to Rainbow communication port.

PCXXF·BA

System unit floorstand. Mounts system unit vertically so
it fits under table or desk.

Operating Systems

MS-DOSTM V2.11 and
CP/M®-86/80 V2.1

MS-DOS V2.11 and CP/M-86/80 V2.1 operating systems combined in
one package.
QV066-A3

Rainbow's MS-DOS V2.11, an enhanced version of the Microsoft operating
system, includes a RDCPM utility that reads CP/M diskettes so that users
can transfer data stored in CP/M format to MS-DOS format.
QV062.A3

CP/M-86/80 V2.1, a combination of Digital Research 16-bit CP/M-86
and 8-bit CP/M-80 with additional utilities.
QV061-A3

Trademarks

7.4 Personal Computers

CP/M is a registered trademark of Digital Research, Inc.
MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Personal Computers
Professional 380 Options

Product Description

The Professional 380 computer, with its advanced communications, high-resolution bit-mapped graphics, and PDP-ll processing, brings the power and versatility of a personal PDP-ll system to your desktop. The options listed below
and the Professional 380 software described in Chapter 9 are currently available for existing Professional 380 customers.

Professional 380
Hardware Options

Monitors

Memory

Hard-disk Drives

Extended Bit-mapped Module

VR201-A
VR201-B
VR201-C

30A-cm (12-in) white monochrome monitor
30A-cm (12-in) green monochrome monitor
30A-cm (12-in) amber monochrome monitor

VR241-AA

33.0-cm (13-in) color monitor

VRTSI-A

33.0-cm (13-in) color DEC touch monitor

MSCll·CK

This option provides 256 Kbytes of additional memory. Each
256-Kbyte memory option occupies one option slot.

MSCll·B

This daughter module resides on the system module, giving the
Professional 380 1 Mbyte of memory without using an option
slot. This option may also be used on the Professional 350.

RCD31·A

20-Mbyte, 5 .25-in half-height form factor hard-disk drive and
controller for the Professional. Features a 5-Mbit/sec transfer
rate and an average access time of 73 milliseconds. The controller module occupies one option slot.

RCD32·AA

40-Mbyte, 5 .25-in half-height form factor hard-disk drive and
controller for the Professional. Features a 5-Mbit/sec transfer
rate and an average access time of 48 milliseconds.

RCD53·A

67-Mbyte, 5.25-in hard-disk drive and controller for the
Professional. Features a 5-Mbit/sec transfer rate and an
average access time of 38 milliseconds.

VC241·B

Extended bit-mapped module for the Professional 380. This
single· daughter bit-mapped module plugs directly into the
Professional 380 system module. It adds two bit-mapped
planes to the standard video generator for a total of three
planes. Each plane supports a display of either 960 by 240
pixels or 960 by 480 pixels interlaced. This option adds a
color output map that can simultaneously display 8 colors
from a palette of 4,096 on a color monitor. This option is not
compatible with the Professional 350.

Systems

7.5

Personal Computers
Professional 380 Options

Networking

DECNA·K

DECNA Ethernet controller. It allows Professional systems to
tie into high·speed DECnet local area networks. It contains
128 Kbytes of memory, provides onboard self-diagnostics,
and includes a 5-meter transceiver cable. Prerequisites:
Professional with a hard disk, PRO/DECnet software, P/OS
Hard Disk Version 2.0 or later, and either a DELNI local
network interconnect or H4000 Ethernet transceiver.

DELNI·AA

DELNI local network interconnect. This low-cost Ethernet
device allows up to eight Professionals to be tied into a small
local area network. The DELNI is a compact, tabletop unit
with a self-contained power supply. PDP-II and VAX systems
also can be integrated into a DELNI network. To tie into a
DELNI-based Ethernet, a Professional must be equipped
with a hard disk, the DECNA controller, PRO/DECnet software, and P/OS Hard Disk Version 2.0 or later.

(U.S.)
DELNI·AB

(Non.U.S.)

7.6

Systems

H4000

H 4000 Digital Ethernet Transceiver. This device provides the
interface between an Ethernet coaxial cable and a DECNAequipped Professional. The unit consists of a small printedcircuit board in a rugged plastic housing, with a nonintrusive cable tapping assembly. To connect a Professional into
Ethernet, the system requires a hard-disk DECNA controller,
PRO/DECnet software, and P/OS Hard Disk Version 2.0
or later.

DESTA·AA

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter. It allows connection
of a single Ethernet station (PRO 350/380) to ThinWire
Ethernet cabling. The DESTA has one 15-pin connector
port that allows it to be mounted in or near the Ethernet
station and a second port for connection to the ThinWire
Ethernet cable.

DFMSA·AA

Mini-exchange is a simple, inexpensive communications link
for up to eight asynchronous devices within a range of 200
feet. It provides facilities for file and document transfer
among Professionals and other Digital personal computers,
queuing and allocating for shared devices. Devices communicate at speeds ranging from 300 to 19,200 baud.

DTCll·A

Telephone Management Modules. Include a controller board
and telephone interface board for a wide variety of voice and
data communications and telephone management.

Personal Computers
Professional 380 Options

Realtime Options

PC3XX·AA

Realtime Interface (R T1). I/O interface combines three widely
used realtime functions on a single module for scientific/engi.
neering applications. Includes an IEEE· 488 general·purpose
interface bus for control of up to 15 compatible devices; a
two-line RS-232-C/423 compatible serial asynchronous
port with user·selectable baud rates (50 to 9600 baud); and a
24-line parallel port with 16 data lines and 8 c~ntrollines.

PC3XX·AB

RTI connector pod. Connector box and cable for interfacing
to RTI back-panel connector.

ADMPC·AA

Analog to Digital converter option to the R T 1. Performs
16-bit conversion on 1 of 8 channels. Programmable Gain
Amplification, and simultaneous use if IEEE and 2 serial
line ports are provided.

BCCIO·03

Y·Cable for serial I/O for RTI. Not needed if using RTI
Connector Pod.

BCCll·03

IEEE standard connector for RTI. Not needed if using RTI
Connector Pod.

BCC12·03

Parallel I/O cable for serial I/O for RTI. Not needed if using
RTI Connector Pod.

Quad Serial Line Unit

PC3XC·BA

A single-slot option providing four additional RS-232
serial lines for the Professional. It can be used to connect any
serial device supported by P/OS including terminals, printers,
or plotters. Two SLU boards can be installed at once, for a potential total of eight additional RS-232 ports.

Floorstand

PCXXF·AA

Professional 380 enclosure allows for vertical mounting of the
Professional system unit.

Systems

7.7

Personal Computers
DECmate III and DECmate III Plus

Product Description

The DECmate III and the DECmate III Plus make it easy to write, edit,
communicate, report, and print information. With a superior combination
of proven word processing software and a sophisticated engineering design, the
DEC mate provides the office solution for professionals whose primary task is
word and document processing. A floppy-disk-based word processor, the DECmate III is Digital's most affordable system, and offers the advantages of DECmate/WPS V 2.3 word processing. The newest addition, the DECmate III Plus,
combines the efficiency and cost-effectiveness of the DECmate III with the
speed and convenience of a 20-Mbyte hard disk. With applications and documents resident on the system, the DEC mate III Plus provides over 40 times
the room of a diskette to store documents and files. The DECmate III system
comes complete with keyboard, monochrome monitor, dual diskette drive,
and DECmate/WPS V 2.3 software. The DECmate III Plus system comes complete with keyboard, monochrome monitor, one double-density disk drive, a
20-Mbyte hard disk, Master Menu, and WPS software. DECmate III and
DECmate III Plus support CP/M-80 operating systems, and the LN03,
LQP45, LA210, and LA75 printers.

Features

• 6120 microprocessor
• 96-Kbyte memory (64 Kwords)
• RS-232-C serial printer port
• Asynchronous/synchronous communications port to 9600 baud with full
modem control
• Integral modem support (DECmate III)
• External modem support (DEC mate III Plus)
• Monochrome character cell video output
• Built-in diagnostic firmware
• 5 .25-inch 800-Kbyte dual-diskette drive and controller
• Graphics support
• Three option slots (two option slots on DECmate III Plus)

7.8

Personal Computers

Personal Computers
DECmate III and DECmate III Plus

Ordering Information

Environmental
Power Products

PC23P-XX

DECmate III system unit, keyboard, 12-inch (13.3-cm)
monochrome monitor, dual diskette drive, and WPS software.

PC24P-XX

DEC mate III Plus system unit, keyboard, monochrome
monitor, one double-density disk drive, 20-Mbyte hard disk,
Master Menu, and DECmate/WPS V 2.3 software.

PC23X-AB

DECmate III and DEC mate III Plus auxiliary processor unit
with 64 Kbytes of memory.

PC23X-CA

DECmate III and DECmate III Plus graphics option module.

PC23X-DA

DEC mate III integral modem.

QWAOl.A3

DECmate/WPS Version 2.3 is a single-user word processing
package for DECmate III and DECmate III Plus. This menudriven software lets users create and update documents on
diskettes, storing as many as 200 documents or 150 pages on
one 5.25-inch double-density document diskette or approximately 8,000 pages on the DECmate III Plus hard-disk system.
DECmate/WPS features include responsive menu-driven operation, a special editing keypad, full editing features, printer
controls in documents, 100 user-defined keys for repetitive
operation, and user-definable widow-orphan control.

QWA03-A3

DECmate/WPS DECspell checks for spelling errors, drawing
on a master dictionary list of about 76,000 words with correct
spelling and capitalization based on the American Heritage
Dictionary published by Houghton Mifflin Company. In addition to its master dictionary, DECspell can accommodate a
personal dictionary of approximately 1,500 words. Requires
PC27X-AB option.

QWA21

DECmate Master Menu Version 2.1 is an office automation
application that allows the user the ability to organize and access various applications and operating systems from one general menu. Master Menu resides on a hard disk and consists of
utilities that allow users to create their own menu and manage
the hard disk. Master Menu is included with DECmate/WPS
V 2.3 software.

QWA25·A3

DECmate CP/M-80 2.2 Operating System is a single-user
operating system specifically tailored for DECmate. Using a
floppy disk and/or hard disk storage system, CP/M provides
for program construction, storage and editing, along with assembly and program debugging facilities. CP/M includes a text
editor, Z80-microprocessor-compatible assembler, debugger,
and file utility programs.

H7229-AA

Guide and Price List.

Personal Computers

7.9

Chapter 8
Industrial Systems

Industrial Systems
Tough, Reliable Equipment for Industrial Environments

Information is highly critical to manufacturing operations. It must be right, it
must be current, and it must be readily available regardless of local conditions.
To meet these demands, Digital Equipment Corporation has developed a family
of industrialized products that combines superior performance with tolerance
for manufacturing environments - from extremely harsh industrial to light
industrial ruggedized hardware including terminals, keyboards, processors,
air-conditioned computer cabinets, application software, and analog and digital
I/O interfaces. Digital has the products to optimize manufacturing
productivity in a number of ways.
Industrial Data Collection

• Terminals that simplify data entry and retrieval for workers and supervisors.
• Industrial terminals and systems that resist the effects of airborne particles,
temperature, and humidity in most types of manufacturing environments.
• Full-screen terminals that support a wide range of forms transactions.
• Form factor that allows terminals to be installed on a bench, table, or shelf,
forming the nucleus of plantwide workstations.
• Environmentally sealed keyboards that operate reliably at harsh worksites
where there is a potential for high downtime with standard keyboards.
• Bar code options that make data entry faster and easier and reduce the
margin for error.
• Industrial processors for numerical and machine control applications or for
general purpose manufacturing computing.
• Industrial computer enclosure designed to house and protect 19-inch rackmounted equipment for operation in hostile environments.
• Printers that can improve manufacturing productivity by creating and printing
shipping and ID labels, forms signs and documents (see LXYU in the Terminals
and Printers chapter).

Packaged Automation Systems

• A family of stand-alone computer systems that combine industrial I/O analog
and digital control capability and PDP-ll CPUs in a single cabinet.
• Ability to collect, manipulate, and transmit data from a local area to a business
office.
• Optionally expandable to handle over 2,000 I/O points.

8.2

Industrial Systems

Industrial Systems
E-Series IPDP

The E-Series is a specially packaged 6-s10t IPDP-ll in a rugged NEMA-12 cabinet to protect it from hazardous conditions on the factory floor. It can be used
for general purpose manufacturing applications or any application that requires
'
systems on the factory floor.
The E-Series IPDP-ll is sealed to NEMA-12 standards to protect it from failures caused by dirt, dust, metal particles, and noncorrosive liquids. It can also
withstand rough handling and vibration and survive greater power fluctuations, higher operating temperatures, and longer power losses than ordinary
computers can. In addition, its unique passive cooling system dissipates heat
quickly.
This industrial system supports all available RSX-I1M industrial applications.
Existing RSX-IIM applications can be migrated to an E-Series system without
programming changes.

Ordering Information

DH-183RI-A2/A3 PDP-ll/83, NEMA-12 enclosure, 6-s10t, 2 Mbytes memory

(MSVII-JE), RD53, RX33, RQDX3 disk controller,
NEMA-12 disk enclosure, 120/240 V
DH-183RI-B2/B3

Specifications

PDP-11/83, NEMA-12 enclosure, 6-s10t, 2 Mbytes memory
(MSVII-JE), RD32, RX33, RQDX3 disk controller;
NEMA-12 disk enclosure, 120/240 V

Environmental:
Operating Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Shock:
Vibration:
Code Standards:
Dimensions (each box):
Weight:
Backplane:

5°C to 50°C without disk
10°C to 40°C with disk
10% to 95% without disk
10% to 90% with disk
10 g, 10 ms
5 Hz to 500 Hz frequency range
.02 dA - 1 g vibration level
NEMA-12, FCC Class A
23.3 in high by 15.9 in wide by 15.5 in deep
581bs (CPU box)
52 Ibs (disk box)
6 slots

Industrial Systems
Ruggedized Terminals

IT330/340
Product Description

These industrial terminals are VT330 and VT340 models packaged in rugged,
sealed NEMA-12 enclosures. They provide the same text and graphics capabilities as the VT330 and VT340, which offer twice the resolution and five times
the graphics speed of the VT200 family.
NEMA-12 sealing protects the terminals from failures caused by dirt, airborne
particles, noncorrosive liquids and leaking oil and coolants. Their tough enclosures protect against vibration and rough handling, and a high-impact shield
protects against breakage. A unique passive cooling design lets the terminals
withstand higher operating temperatures than ordinary office terminals can.
IT330 and IT340 monitors provide 800-by-500 pixel resolution. The IT340
has a 4,096-color palette and can display graphics in 16 colors. The IT330
has a 14-inch monitor and can display graphics in four shades of gray. The
IT3XX-AA membrane keyboard, also sealed to NEMA-12 standards, is
available for both terminals.

Ordering Information

IT330-A2/A3

Graphics terminal, NEMA-12 enclosure, monochrome, white
phosphor, VT330 functionality, 120/240 V

IT330-B2/B3

Graphics terminal, NEMA-12 enclosure, monochrome, green
phosphor, VT330 functionality, 120/240 V

IT330-C2/C3

Graphics terminal, NEMA-12 enclosure, monochrome, amber
phosphor, VT330 functionality, 120/240 V

IT340-A2/A3

Color graphics terminal, NEMA-12 enclosure, Northern
Hemisphere version, VT340 functionality, 120/240 V

IT340-A5

Color graphics terminal, NEMA-12 enclosure, Southern
Hemisphere version, VT340 functionality, 240 V

IT3XX-AA

NEMA-12 flat-membrane keyboard

Note: Terminal order numbers do not include a keyboard.

R.4

IndU!~tl'ial SvdemR

Industrial Systems
Ruggedized Terminals

RT220
Product Description

The VT220 terminal is used for factory applications. It is packaged with a
passive heat exchanger and housed in a NEMA-12 (dust-tightjsplash-proof)
enclosure. The RT2XX keyboard option is used with this terminal.

Ordering Information

RT220·DA

VT220-D, 120 V, NEMA-12 Enclosure, Printer Port, EIA

RT220·DB

VT220-D, 240 V, NEMA-12 Enclosure, Printer Port, EIA

RT220·EA

VT220-D, 120 V, NEMA-12 Enclosure, Printer Port, 20 mA

RT220·EB

VT220-D, 240 V, NEMA-12 Enclosure, Printer Port, 20 rnA

RT2XX·AA

Flat panel NEMA-12 keyboard

Industrial Systems

8.5

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

PAS Family of
Industrial I/O Solutions

Digital's specialized industrial control I/O offering is the Packaged Automation
Systems (PAS) family of stand-alone computer systems combining analog and
digital I/O capability and the PDP-ll computer in a single cabinet. Several
application software packages are available from Digital's third-party and
Cooperative Marketing Program suppliers. Indepth product description and
configuration information, which is beyond the scope of this book, can be
obtained by referring to the Guide to Digital's Industrial and Scientific
Products (EB-28948-49) or by calling the Industrial Sales Support Hotline
at 1-800-832-6277.

Q-bus and UNIBUS Systems

The PAS family members include the IPQS and IPUS packages. The IPQS
packages utilize a standard Digital Q-bus MicroPDP-ll, available in a
MicroPDP-11/23, a MicroPDP-11/73, and a MicroPDP-11/83 PAS. IPUS packages contain a standard Digital UNIBUS PDP-ll system, including a PDP-11/24
or a PDP-11/84 CPU. These PAS provide a fully integrated configuration that
can be used in a wide range of applications, as a stand-alone, dedicated, or distributed intelligent system. Typical applications are process control, machine
control, data acquisition and control, engine testing, pipeline monitoring, and
energy management.
Mass storage and realtime software are standard features with every PAS. Also
included are a standard driver for the I/O control module and a FORTRAN
interface compatible with ISA61.1. Features include online addressing, flexible
interrupt handling, and direct addressing for the I/O modules.
Software support is available under Digital's RSX operating systems that are
realtime multitasking systems programmable in MACRO-ll, FORTRAN IV,
and FORTRAN-77.

IPQS Standard Equipment

Each IPQS industrial I/O system contains
• IPV12 master chassis with I/O control, power supply, and mounting space for
ten I/O modules
• Software load device RX50 dual-diskette drive on IPQSX-AA/AD; TK50 tape
cartridge on IPQSX-BA/BD
• DRV11 eight-line asynchronous mux
• Modified R9647 cabinet
• IP11 driver software license, sources, and documentation
• License to use the Micro/RSX Operating System Base and Advanced
Programmer Kits
• Hardware and software documentation
• FORTRAN license

8.6 Industrial Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

Ordering Information

IPQS2-AAjAD

PAS with MicroPDP-11/73 CPU, 1 Mbyte memory, RD53
71-Mbyte Winchester disk, and RX50 dual diskette drive.

IPQS2-BAjBD

PAS with MicroPDP-11/73 CPU, 1 Mbyte memory, RD53
71-Mbyte Winchester disk, and TK50 tape cartridge.

IPQS3-AAjAD

PAS with MicroPDP-11/83 CPU, 2 Mbytes memory, and RD53
71-Mbyte Winchester disk, and RX50 dual diskette drive.

IPQS3-BAjBD

PAS with MicroPDP-11/83 CPU, 2 Mbytes memory, RD53
71-Mbyte Winchester disk, and TK50 tape cartridge.

Note: IPQSX-AA/AD systems require Micro/RSX operating system software;
IPQSX-BA/BD systems require RSX or Micro/RSX operating system software.

IPQS Optional Expansion

• Up to two additional H33410-slot expansion chassis
• Up to three H332 ten-slot screw terminal mounting racks
• Up to 30 process I/O modules
• Up to 30 BC40x screw terminal strips
• Add-on cabinets to accommodate a total of eight H334 I/O chassis

IPUS Standard Equipment

Each IPUS industrial I/O system contains
• IP112-AA/AD industrial I/O subsystem master chassis, 120/240 V, and mounting space for ten I/O modules
• H9646 cabinet
• RC25 52-Mbyte disk
• IPll driver software license, sources, and documentation
• General PDP-ll operating license

Ordering Information

IPUS2-AAjAD

PAS with PDP-ll/84 CPU with 1 Mbyte memory

Note: IPUS systems require RSX-llM-PLUS software.

IPUS Optional Expansion

• One additional RC25 disk drive
• One TSU05 tape drive
• One H332 ten-slot screw terminal mounting rack
• Up to ten analog or digital I/O modules
• Up to ten BC40x screw terminal strips
• Add-on cabinets to accommodate up to a total of eight (per processor)
H334-E/J I/O module chassis, up to eight H332 ten-slot screw terminal
mounting racks, and associated I/O modules and termination strips

Industrial Systems 8.7

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

The IP I/O Subsystem Family

Digital's family of IP I/O subsystems is designed to handle applications that
range from simple monitoring functions to the control of complex closed-loop
systems. Built on a com~on architecture, I/O subsystems support a family of
digital and analog interface modules. Each I/O subsystem is a cabinet or rackmountable unit consisting of I/O interface modules and a master chassis that
provides mounting space and power. These subsystems interface with Digital's
LSI-11 or PDP-11 computer systems and offer the capacity for handling more
than 2,000 I/O points plus associated field-wired terminals. An I/O subsystem
and associated CPU can be connected to the DECdataway communications
local area network or can function as a remote device accessed through public
or private lines.

IP I/O Subsystems

The IP1l2 I/O subsystem is designed for local monitoring or control applications. It functions as a local peripheral to a UNIBUS PDP-ll. A maximum of
four IP1l2 subsystems can be connected to a single CPU. The IPV12 local I/O
subsystem, similar to the IP112, interfaces to Q-bus PDP-lls - including the
DECdataway intelligent subsystems.

Ordering Information

IP112-AA/AD

Industrial subsystems for local I/O monitoring and control by
a UNIBUS PDP-11 host computer. Interfaces directly to the
UNIBUS via software interface arid operates under PDP-11
control. A total of four subsystems can be connected to a
UNIBUS based PDP-11 system. The IP1l2 mounts in either a
48.3 cm (19 in) rack or H960 cabinet and includes an H334
I/O subsystem chassis, power supply, an I/O control module (IOCM), and module expansion space. A driver and
FORTRAN interface compatible with ISA61.1 are supplied as
part of the RSX-11 operating systems. IP112 tasking may be
programmed in MACRO-11, FORTRAN IV, or FORTRAN-77
operating under RSX-11M-PLUS, RSX-11M, or RSX-11S.

Dimensions: 40 cm (15.5 in) high by 48.3 cm (19 in) wide by 27.2 cm (10.69 in)
deep.
Mounting: Mountable in H960 and H9646 cabinets or NEMA enclosures.
IPV12-AA/AD

PDP-11 Q-bus version of the IP1l2 I/O subsystem. Provides
local I/O monitoring and control by any standard LSI-11
based system (PDP-11/23-PLUS, PDP-11/23 , or DYS50) in
stand-alone mode or as part of a communications network.
The IPV12 consists of an H334 chassis with power supply, an
I/O control module (IOCM) to interface to the LSI-11 and
extended LSI-11 bus, and mounting space for ten I/O modules. IPV12 tasking may be programmed in MACRO-ll,
FORTRAN IV, or FORTRAN-77 operating under
RSX:11M.PLUS, RSX-11M, or RSX-11S.

Dimensions: 40 cm (15.5 in) high by 48.3 cm (19 in) wide by 27.2 cm (10.69 in)
deep.
Mounting: Four mountable in H960 and H9646 cabinet or NEMA
enclosures.

8.8 Industrial Systems

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

IP I/O Subsystem
Hardware Options
Ordering Information

H334·E/J

I/O expansion chassis and power supply that extends the D-bus
beyond a fully configured IPl12, IPV12, or DYS50 master
chassis. Each H334 can accommodate up to ten I/O modules.
No power restrictions limit the mix of I/O modules in the chassis, with the exception of A631 D/A converters in current
mode. The D-bus is etched in the lower half of the H334 chassis
backplane, which also includes cable connectors for extending
the D-bus between multiple chassis. A maximum of seven H334
expansion chassis may be interconnected to a single master
chassis.

Dimensions: 40 cm (15.75 in) high by 48.3 cm (19 in) wide by 27.2 cm (10.69
in) deep.
Mounting: Front- and rear-mountable in H960 and H9646 cabinet or in NEMA
enclosures.
H332

Screw terminal mounting chassis that mounts in a H960
or H9646 cabinet or NEMA enclosure and holds the BC40
screw terminal assemblies leading to each of the I/O modules.
Each chassis accommodates up to ten BC40 screw terminal
assemblies.

Dimensions: 40 cm (15.75 in) high by 48.3 cm (19 in) wide by 27.2 cm (10.69
in) deep.
Mounting: Front- and rear-mountable in H960 and H9646 cabinets or in
NEMA enclosures.
Thermocouple temperature reference panel. Provides accurate
reference (cold junction) compensation for a maximum of sixteen two-wire thermocouple inputs to the A157 multiplexer orA020 A/D converter. The unit consists of an isothermal screw
terminal assembly which accepts sixteen thermocouple inputs
from the field; the signals are connected to the A157 used in
conjunction with the AO 14 or A020 input channels by a
10-foot plug-in cable.
Dimensions: 13.3 cm (5.25 in) high by 48.3 cm (19 in) wide by 11.4 cm (4.5 in)
deep.
ATR16

Prerequisites: An A020 A/D converter or a multiplexer must be ordered separately for each ATR16. An A157 multiplexer requires an A014 A/D converter
as a prerequisite.
Mounting Requirements: The ATR16 mounts in a 48.3-cm (19-in) rack in a
cabinet, in a NEMA enclosure, or directly against a wall. The ATR16 does not
mount in an H332 or H334 chassis, and it does not require a BC40 screw
terminal strip.

Screw Terminal Strip Assemblies

Screw terminal strip assemblies that connect the user's I/O lines to the I/O
modules via screw strips. Each assembly consists of a 34 screw-terminal barrier
strip and an I/O cable connector mounted on a printed circuit board. The assemblies mount in the H332 screw terminal chassis, one for each I/O module,
and connect to them by preassembled cables supplied with the screw terminal
assemblies.

Industrial Systems 8.9

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

Ordering Information

Digital Input Modules
Ordering Information

8.10

Industrial Systems

BC40A

Screw terminal strip and 14-inch cable for 16- and 32-bit modules (excludes M5013, M6012, and M6013 modules). Mounts
in a H332 screw terminal chassis directly above or below a corresponding I/O subsystem master chassis or H334 I/O expansion chassis.

BC40A·3D

BC40A with 40-inch cable.

BC40B

Screw terminal strip and 14-inch cable for 8-bit modules.
Mounts in a H332 screw terminal chassis directly above or beIowa corresponding I/O subsystem master chassis or H334 I/O
expansion chassis.

BC40B·3D

BC40B with 40-inch cable.

BC40L

Screw terminal strip and 14-inch cable with attached printed
circuit board used in place of BC40A cable for mounting customer-supplied signal conditioning components such as filters,
RTD bridges, and high voltage clamps.

BC40L·3D

BC40L with 40-inch cable.

M5010

32-bit nonisolated dc input module. For monitoring a
wide range of voltages or contact closures. No external
power source is required when monitoring contact closures.
Accepts up to 32 single-ended inputs, structured as four
8-bit bytes, and sends them under program control to the
processor. M5010 module features address selection and
input protection. All field signals pass through a conditioning network that enhances signal integrity. Not suitable where
common mode voltages exist between field circuits and mounting chassis.

M5011

16-bit, nonisolated dc interrupt module. Accepts up to
sixteen single-ended, nonisolated inputs and provides changeof-state detection. The module interrupts on transition of any
of the inputs and stores all transitions until cleared. The
M50 11 accepts a wide range of input voltages, features high
input impedance, and operates at high speeds. Not suitable
where common mode voltages exist between field circuits and
mounting chassis.

M5012

16-bit isolated dc input module. For monitoring voltages
where noise immunity or common mode rejection is important. Accepts up to sixteen differential inputs (all optically
isolated), structured as two 8-bit inputs, and sends them under
program control to the D-bus. Interrupt capability is on a
per-byte basis. Additional features include address and interrupt enable switches and individual input LED indicators.

M5012·YA

16-bit isolated de input module (TTL compatible). Isolated
16-input dc voltage sense module with TTL-compatible
logic thresholds. Accepts up to sixteen differential inputs.

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

Digital Output Modules
Ordering Information

M5013

8-bit isolated ac input module. For monitoring ac voltage
levels. Transformer isolated, it accepts up to eight differential inputs and monitors their states. Input is structured
as a single 8-bit byte. The M5013 includes a switch-selectable
change of state capability.

M5031

16-channel isolated dc interrupt module. Used for monitoring
a wide range of voltages or contact closures. Accepts up to sixteen differential inputs. The M5031 module offers a change-ofstate initiated interrupt capability through enable switches for
each of the sixteen inputs. Features high input impedance and
operates at high speeds.

M6010

32-bit nonisolated dc output module. Provides 32 programcontrolled current sink dc outputs for use with an external
power supply. The outputs are single-wire, nonisolated, open
collector Darlington switches used for controlling relays, solenoid values, indicators, heaters, and other devices. The outputs provide CMOS logic levels and feature a common output
fuse. Also features Zener diode output protection from excessive supply voltages.

M6010·YA

32-bit nonisolated dc output module (TTL-compatible).
Provides 32 TTL-compatible, program-controlled dc sink
outputs that are single-wire, nonisolated, open collector
switches for use with customer-supplied field power supplies
and pull-up resistors. Protection against excessive field supply voltages is provided by Zener diodes across each output.

M6011

Nonisolated dc one-shot output module. Provides 16-program
controlled current sink dc outputs for use with an external field
power supply. Outputs are nonisolated, single-wire, one-shot,
open collector Darlington switches used for operating devices
that must be activated for only a short duration (i.e., solenoid,
values, and relays). The outputs provide CMOS logic levels for
noise immunity and reliability. Also features Zener diode output protection from excessive field voltage overloads.

M6012

8-bit isolated dc output module. Provides eight program-controlled current sink outputs for use with an external power supply. Outputs are isolated, three-wire, open collector Darlington
switches used for controlling solenoid values, relays, indicators
and heaters, where isolation from the controlled process must
be maintained. The outputs provide CMOS logic levels and
feature individual output indicators.

M6013

8-bit isolated ac output module. Provides eight programcontrolled ac outputs. Outputs are transformer-isolated,
three-wire switches used for switching a~ line voltages to
operate ac relays, solenoids, lamps, pumps, blowers, alarms,
etc. Features include individual output status indicator and
fuse protection for the circuit board etch.

Industrial Systems 8.11

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

Digital Output Modules
Ordering Information

M6015

Analog Modules

Digital does not recommend locating analog input modules within three
D-bus slots of any digital I/O module that is switching high voltages or current, because of the potential for induced noise on the analog measurements.

Analog/Digital Converters
Ordering Information

A020

Isolated high common mode A/D converter. 14-bits plus
sign, selectable gain, wide-range analog-to-digital converter.
Provides high common mode isolation using a mercurywetted relay multiplexer for its 16 two-wire, or eight threewire field inputs. The A020 has 14 full-scale input ranges.
Via a switch you can select a single range for all channels, or
you may select two ranges and have one set of consecutive
channels operate on one range and the remainder on the
second. Features include a very high common mode rejection and voltage input protection. It also supports the
ATR16 Thermocouple Temperature Reference Panel for
applications requiring thermocouple sensing.

A014

Solid-state A/D converter. A high-speed converter with
16 single-ended or differential input channels, the A014
module provides successive approximation A/D conversion
of high-speed input signals and supports a maximum of
seven external multiplexer boards (A156, A157, or AM158)
in any combination. When used with multiplexers, the A014
can also accommodate up to 240 single-ended or 120 differential inputs. Features include over-voltage protection. A156,
A157, and AM158 multiplexers must be mounted contiguously
to their corresponding AO 14 A/D converter in the same master
or H334 expansion chassis.

8.12 Industrial System~

16-bit retentive dc output module. Provides 16 programcontrolled retentive dc outputs for use with external power
supplies. Outputs are isolated, three-wire, power FET switches
that offer the same functionality in solid-state as latchingrelay outputs, but with higher reliability. The M6015 module
is used for controlling solenoid values, relays, indicators,
heaters, and the like where retention of existing output status
must be maintained during a computer power failure. Output
circuits are optically isolated from the I/O subsystem and
from each other in groups of four - each requires its own
field power supply if there is a common-mode voltage between
the group. The M6015 can also be used as an isolated dc
output module, such as an M6012.

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

Analog Multiplexers
Ordering Information

A156

High-level analog multiplexer. Multiplexer module that provides additional input channels to the A014 AID converter.
Each module features 32 single-ended or 16 differential channels of analog inputs. Seven A156 modules that provide up to
224 additional single-ended or 112 differential input channels
can be added to the A014. Features include input protection
and switches for selecting single-ended/differential mode and
the number of multiplexers. A156, A157, and AM158 multiplexers must be mounted contiguously to their corresponding
A014 AID converter in the same master or H334 expansion
chassis.

A157

Wide-range analog multiplexer. Multiplexer module that provides moderate speed multiplexing of high- and low-level analog input signals. The module accepts 16 differential inputs
that can be independently programmed for anyone of eight
different gains. Seven A157 modules which provide up to 112
additional differential input channels can be supported by one
A014. Features include voltage input protection and compatibility with ATR16 Thermocouple Temperature Reference
Panel. Recommended for use with two-wire inputs, with common mode return path provided at the transducer end of the
cable. A156, A157, and AM158 multiplexers must be mounted
contiguously to their corresponding A014 AID converter in
the same master or H334 expansion chassis.

AM1S8

RMS to dc multiplexer. Provides true RMS conversion of lowlevel ( ± 10 V) ac signals of either the sine wave type or any
other periodical type (such as SCR-controlled signals). The
AM158 is a 16-channel differential multiplexer which multiplexes the inputs as pairs, thereby enabling two RMS readings
to be taken simultaneously. A156, A157, and AM158 multiplexers must be mounted contiguously to their corresponding
A014 AID converter in the same master or H334 expansion
chassis.
Note: Available only by special quote.

Industrial Systems 8.13

Industrial Systems
Industrial I/O Products

DigitalfAnalog Converter
Ordering Information

A631

12-bit isolated, four-channel D/A converter. Contains four
group-isolated, 12-bit digital-to-analog converters. The module
is optically isolated, offers a choice of current or voltage outputs, and is capable of retaining its output states during a
power failure. The user must provide external ± 24 V power to
the A631 module to operate in the retentive mode.
When the retentive feature is not implemented and the module
is used in the current mode, the A631 should be configured in
an IPl12/IPV12 master chassis or H334E/J expander chassis.

If the entire chassis is to be filled with A631s, leave one slot
unused; the remaining nine slots can then be filled with current-mode A631s. The unused slot should be filled with an
M9019 continuity module unless it is the last slot in the subsystem. Or use five or fewer current-mode A631 modules per
chassis; the remaining slots can be used for any other IP I/O
module types, including voltage-mode A631s.

Counter Modules
Ordering Information

8.14

Industrial Systems

M5014

Dual input counter. Contains two independent 16-bit
counters, each of which is a presettable up-counter with internally generated frequency and time bases. The inputs may be
isolated or nonisolated, low-level or high-level, or TTL. Each
counter has switches that allow the selection of alternate time
bases, input configurations, counting modes, and interrupt
modes. Each counter also has an anticoincidence circuit that
prevents the loss of an input signal while it is being read.

M5016

Quad input counter/prescaler. Contains four independent 8-bit
up-counters designed for prescaling and event counting applications. Each counter has a variable radix overflow detection and
overflow-driven interrupt circuitry. The module can also accept
both high-and low-level inputs, and is capable of operation in
isolated or nonisolated input modes.

M6014

Dual output counter. Dual 16-bit output pulse generator that
contains two internal frequency sources (derived from the system clock), two independent program-controlled counters, and
two one-shots for generation of pulse train outputs. The counters are arranged as 15-bit magnitude down-counters with one
sign/direction bit. Each counter has three nonisolated dc current sink outputs that are TTL-compatible as open collector
drivers and are also usable as high-level drivers. Output pulse
rates and pulse widths are independently selectable.

Chapter 9
Software

Software
Introduction

Software is the collection of written procedures and rules that control computer operations. The system software always includes an operating system,
which is the "intelligence" of the computer system. Usually, the system software includes one or several language processors; it frequently includes specific
applications as well.
The high degree of compatibility among PDP-II programming languages,
system programs, and information management services makes it easy to interconnect your organization's operations. Digital's network products can link
together realtime, timesharing, and single-user systems. While a few of the
characteristics of software may vary from application to application, compatibility helps guarantee that programs can move among systems with a minimum
of trouble. For example, the FORTRAN-77 programming language runs on several operating systems. Consequently, a person who has learned it could, with
little difficulty, write programs that would run in several operating-system environments. Likewise, a FORTRAN-77 application program can be readily transported to any Digital PDP-II system that supports the FORTRAN -7 7 language.
A wealth of languages, utilities, and application software packages for PDP-lIs
is available, and the selection continues to grow. The PDP-II Software Source
Book lists thousands of application packages. These programs are available
from Digital and from commercial developers who specialize in writing program packages for PDP-II operating systems.
This chapter describes all of Digital's PDP-II operating systems and software.
Presented also are Digital application packages for data management, word
processing, graphics, and applications development.
Software Ordering Information

This catalog contains extensive software ordering information in Chapter 1.
Following each set of Chapter I menus is a set of tables, including one containing ordering information for Operating Systems and Layered Products. Use
these tables or the Software Product Descriptions to find the order numbers you
need.

Software Product Descriptions

Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) are the official defining documents for
Digital-licensed software. An SPD describes all of the important functional
characteristics of a product in clear, concise, easily understood language. The
terms and conditions under which the corporation sells and licenses its software products identify SPDs as the documents that specify Digital's obligation
under software warranty, They describe a software product's system environment, and identify required and optional hardware and software. SPDs also
provide the ordering information and identify any additional services available.

9.2

Software

Software
Software Binary License Agreements

Principles

Software is treated as proprietaty information. Customers do not own it, but
are licensed to use it under the terms and conditions of software license agreements. Key points of Digital's software binary license agreements are
• Customers must have a binary license to use any Digital binary software
products.
• This license allows one customer to run one software product on the CPU on
which it is first installed.
• Digital retains title and ownership.
• Digital's licensing agreement does not allow the transfer of software from one
end user to another or from one CPU to another without prior permission from
Digital. Software may be transferred to another party only with written permission from Digital.
• A customer may reproduce the software, if necessary, but for use only on the
specific CPU licensed to use it.
• The use of an updated version of the software on the licensed CPU requires
that the customer purchase a software update option, if not covered by a software service contract.
• The software may be used on anpther single CPU on a temporary basis during
a malfunction of an original CPU that causes the software to be inoperable.
• Any modification to Digital-licensed software does not exempt the software
product from Digital licensing or sublicensing terms, conditions, or fees. Only
those modifications that are not part of the original software are the customer's
property.

Software Ordering Options

This standard binary license includes a 90-day limited warranty.

Software Product Update Option

A customer with a binary license may order a product update for each licensed
CPU. An additional fee is charged for each product update and for each onetime right to copy the update for each licensed CPU.

Software

9.3

Software
Operating Systems

Introduction

An operating system is a collection of programs that manages a computer's
hardware and software resources to provide efficient computer operation. The
operating system organizes the central processor and its peripherals into useful
tools for applications. Operating systems coordinate the execution of programs
on the computer. They can also have a set of utilities and routines that manage
such resources as printers and terminals, detect errors in programs, maintain
user accounts, protect information, warn the operator of failures, and much
more.
Each operating system acquires a unique set of characteristics reflecting the
needs of its users. The basic distinction among PDP-ll operating systems is the
processing method each system uses to execute tasks. The selection of an operating system will reflect the following processing options
• Single-user vs. multiuser
• Single-job vs. foreground/background
• Foreground/background vs. multiprogramming
• Timesharing vs. event-driven multiprogramming
• Realtime
Single-user systems do not require account numbers to access the system or
data files. Nor do these systems usually provide protection for user programs.
RT-ll is a single-user operating system.
A multiuser operating system receives demands for its resources from more
than one individual and/or program. The system must manage its resources
based on these demands. For example, several users may want sole control of a
device at the same time. The system handles access to the device. In addition,
because people may be using the system for different purposes, privacy must be
an option. As a result, a multiuser system normally has an account system to
manage different users' files. The RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS, DSM-ll, RSX-llM,
RSX-llM-PLUS, and Micro/RSX systems are multiuser systems.
It is important to consider which operating system(s) are required to use the
desired applications. The operating systems that run on PDP-lls offer processing environments. These systems are described in the following section.

9.4

Software

Software
CTS·300 Operating System

Product Description

CTS-300 is a disk-based, single-user or multiuser software system that supports
commercial applications on PDP-11s. CTS-300 applications are written in
DIBOL, the high-level Digital Business-Oriented Language. The system consists of the RT-11 operating system, a choice of three runtime systems, SingleUser DIBOL (SUD), Timeshared DIBOL (TSD), Extended Memory TSD
(XMTSP), and a number of utilities. Depending on the applications, program
development can be done in a timesharing environment that supports a
number of users or jobs simultaneously.
Some of the capabilities provided on CTS-300 are described below.

Runtime Systems (R TS)

Single-User DIBOL allows one DIBOL user or job to be run on a system. It is
designed for an entry-level system running in 32 Kbytes of memory. SUD runs
on all RT-11 monitors (SJ, FB, XM).
Timeshared DIBOL allows one or two DIBOL users or two to four jobs to run
simultaneously. It is designed for a medium-sized system running in 56 Kbytes
of memory. File sharing facilities at the record level permit users to share and
update the same data files. TSD is an executive that is usually run on the SJ
monitor generated for multiterminal support.
Extended Memory TSD allows up to twelve DIBOL users or up to sixteen
DIBOL jobs to run simultaneously (up to twelve can be attached to terminals
with the rest running in a detached environment). XMTSD is designed for larger
systems running 128 to 700 Kbytes of memory on a Q-bus machine, and 128 to
248 Kbytes of memory on a UNIBUS machine. Using the XM monitor, XMTSD
has the same features and capabilities found in TSD. In addition, XMTSD
offers multiuser program development.
The CTS-300 programming editor, DKED, lets the user create and modify
DIBOL programs online, allowing concurrent program development and
application execution.
The DIBOL Debugging Technique (DDT) allows DIBOL programs to be easily
debugged with symbolic interaction, breakpoint, and traceback features.

Data Management Services

Data Management Services (DMS) for CTS-300 provide capabilities for handling sequential, random, or indexed sequential access method (ISAM) structured files. Multivolume file support permits one file, extending over several
disk drives, to be processed sequentially, randomly, or by indexed keyed access,
without requiring special programming.
SPD 12.09

Software

9.5

Software
DSM·ll Operating System

Product Description

The DSM-11 operating system is a multiuser data management system that
consists of an interactive high-level programming language, (Digital Standard
MUMPS), a data-management facility, and a timesharing executive. Digital
Standard MUMPS (DSM) is an extended implementation of the
ANSIX11.1 MUMPS Standard.
Many users can access DSM-11 simultaneously and be relatively unaffected by
the activities of other users. Because DSM-11 is an online program development and data storage and retrieval system, a programmer can rapidly write,
test, debug, and modify a program and have a working application quickly
established.
Digital Standard MUMPS is a high-level language oriented toward solving database problems. It can be used by programmers with relatively little programming experience. Implementation of the Digital Standard MUMPS language as
an interpreter facilitates program development by eliminating the need to load
editors, assemblers, and linkers.
The language's text-handling capabilities allow the inspection of any data item
for content or for format. These capabilities are useful for online data entry
checking and correction. Other text-handling capabilities include the ability to
link text strings and to segment text.
The DSM-11 hierarchical file structure allows users to design data file strategies to suit the needs of a particular processing environment. Dynamic file
storage with variable-length string subscripts allows for easy modification or
expansion of the database.
DSM-11 provides a symbolic debugger that aids in the development and maintenance of DSM applications. The debugger permits the user to set break
points and watch points, and to examine the state of a running job.

Features

• High-performance database handler using memory-resident cache of disk data
for sharing among users.
• Distributed database processing (DDP) implemented using multipoint
Ethernet data links (DELUA, DEQNA) and/or point-to-point data links
(DMCll/DMRll).
• Supports terminal connections from DECservers using Ethernet-based LAT
Version 5.1 protocol.
• Online, high-speed database backup, disk media preparation and bad-block
management (including bad block replacement for Digital Storage Architecture
disks), and tape-to-tape copying.
• Automatic powerfail-restart capability.
• Hardware-device error reporting, system patching utility, and executive debugger for system maintenance.
• Journaling of database updates at the system level.
• A set of utilities to gather performance statistics to aid in both performance
evaluation and application performance optimization.
• The capability to load or unload drivers dynamically while the system is running.
• Supports IBM compatible binary synchronous communication, provided as a
complete software package of utilities.
SPD 12.18

9.6

Software

Software
RSX·IIM Operating System

Product Description

RSX-11M is a disk-based, realtime operating system that runs on any UNIBUS
PDP-11 processor and on most Q-bus PDP-11 and MicroPDP-11 processors.
It provides an environment for the development and execution of multiple
realtime tasks (program images) using a priority-structured, event-driven
scheduler. System generation on either a host PD P-l1 or VAX processor running
VMS with VAX-11 RSX allows the user to tailor the software for systems ranging
in size from small 32-Kbyte systems to large 3,840-Kbyte systems. Program
development and realtime tasks can execute concurrently in systems with at
least 56 Kbytes of memory. The system's software priority levels enable the
user to compile/assemble, debug, install, and execute tasks without affecting
realtime task response.
The following information briefly summarizes other features offered on
RSX-11M.

Choice of Command Interface

All systems offer the traditional Monitor Console Routine (MCR) interface
and the user-oriented, English-like Digital Command Language (DCL).
Users also have the option to write their own Command Line Interpreters
(CLls) to suit their specific applications.

Indirect Command Processor

An indirect command file created by a terminal user contains system commands that will be executed automatically by the system without further user
intervention. Indirect command files save the user time and keystrokes by
invoking repetitive or frequently used command procedures and system
operations.

Programming Tools for RSX
Operating Systems

RSX-11M provides text editors for the entry and easy update of source programs and also provides the MACRO-11 assembler, a task builder (or linker), a
symbol cross-reference processor, an interactive debugger, task memory
dump facilities, and other utilities for program development and checkout.
RSX-11M provides shared subroutine libraries and support for user-created
libraries. Additional programming tools, including higher-level languages such
as FORTRAN-77, BASIC-PLUS-2, COBOL-81, Pascal, and a symbolic debugger
are available but each must be purchased separately.

Data Management

The RSX-11M file system provides automatic space allocation and file structures for all data on block-structured devices. Features include file protection,
volume protection, and logical device assignments. Multiheader file support
enables file size to be limited only by the capacity of the volume on which the
file resides. Two file access facilities are available: File Control Services (FCS)
and Record Management Services (RMS). FCS is smaller and simpler and supports sequential and direct access to sequentially and randomly organized files.
RMS supports three file organizations - sequential, relative, and multikeyed
indexed sequential (ISAM) - and provides sequential and direct access modes.

Memory Management

The RSX-11M executive can dynamically allocate available memory in systemcontrolled partitions. Effectively, this allows a task to be loaded anywhere in
memory where there is room. When a task terminates, the space then becomes
available for another task. Memory management provides the most efficient
use of system memory, faster task execution, and hardware task protection.

Software

9.7

Software
RSX-11M Operating System

Communications Support

RSX-11M provides full support for DECnet Phase IV, (DECnet-RSX must be
purchased separately), and for remote command terminals attached to any RSX
or VMS DECnet system. File interchange with other RSX or VMS systems
running VAX-11 RSX is also supported without the need for DECnet.

TSASupport

RSX-11M supports the Digital Terminal Services Architecture (TSA). Terminals connected to an RSX-11M system in a DEC net-based network can function
as remote command terminals on other RSX or VAX/VMS systems that also
support TSA. Likewise, terminals on those remote systems can function as
command terminals on the RSX-11M system.

SPD 14.35

9.8

Software

Software
RSX·11M·PLUS Operating System

Product Description

RSX-llM-PLUS is a high-performance superset of the RSX-llM operating
system, designed to take advantage of the expanded addressing capability of
today's larger-memory PDP-l1s. RSX-llM-PLUS maintains the superior reliability and successful architecture of RSX-llM to ensure compatibility and ease
of transition between systems. This realtime, multiprogramming, multiuser
operating system offers the same features as RSX-llM and many others in
addition to those listed below.

User Mode liD Space

RSX-llM-PLUS supports separate instruction and data space. That means
a user task has the ability to address up to 64 Kbytes of instruction and 64
Kbytes of data simultaneously, giving a l28-Kbyte total. lID space simplifies
the development and enhances performance of large application programs by
reducing the need for program overlays.

Supervisor Mode

For even greater addressing capability, RSX-llM-PLUS supports supervisor
mode libraries.

Multistream Batch Processing

RSX-llM-PLUS provides a powerful batch processing facility in addition to an
indirect command file processing capability. Batch-specific commands, MeR
and DCL commands, and data may be placed in a file and submitted for automatic execution at a designated time (perhaps at night when there are fewer
demands on the system). Batch jobs may run without the presence of a user or
access to a terminal.

Accounting

The RSX-IIM-PLUS system can automatically create and maintain records.
These records are kept in an accounting log file. Accounting information is provided on users, the system, and every task running in the system. The system
manager can use these accounting logs to establish programs for reporting on
the use of system resources and for billing. Accounting also provides extensive
performance information on mass-storage devices.

Disk Performance Features

RSX-llM-PLUS supports overlapped seeks, request queue optimization, disk
data caching and dynamic dual pathing. RSX-llM-PLUS also provides "shadowed disk" support, or redundant recording of data on a secondary disk to
nearly eliminate the possibility of lost data or unscheduled downtime as a
result of hard-disk errors.

Support for Terminal Servers

Terminals or terminal servers on an Ethernet can connect to RSX-llM-PLUS on
that Ethernet. For this capability, DECnet is prerequisite on the
RSX-IIM-PLUS system.

TSASupport

RSX-I1M-PLUS supports the Digital Terminal Services Architecture (TSA).
See full description under RSX-llM operating system.
SPD 14.70

Software

9.9

Software
RSX·11S Operating System

Product Description

RSX-llS is a memory-based, realtime operating system designed to run on a
PDP-11 or MicroPDP-ll processor with a minimum of 16 Kbytes of memory.
It is a fully compatible subset of the RSX-11M disk-based operating system.
RSX-llS is designed, however, for the runtime execution of memory resident
application programs and requires the support of a disk-based RSX-11M,
RSX-llM-PLUS, or VAX/VMS with VAX-ll RSX host system for system
generation and program development.
The I/O driver interfaces are identical to those of RSX-llM. Device drivers
written for either system can execute on both systems. Any application program that executes under RSX-llS will execute under RSX-llM without
change following a relink of the object program. With the exception of device
drivers, application programs that run under RSX-11S will execute under
RSX-11M-PLUS following a relink of the object program.

As a memory-based system, RSX-llS does not support a file system, nonresident tasks, checkpointing (rollin/rollout), overlays (excluding memory-resident
overlays), or program development. It provides a runtime environment for
execution of tasks on a memory-based system.
RSX-llS has most of the features and capabilities of the RSX-llM system, and
supports all of its peripheral devices. CPU options include floating-point processors, parity memory, and memory management.
RSX-llS supports the Digital Terminal Services Architecture (TSA).
See full description under RSX-llM operating system.

SPD 9.21

9.10 Software

Software
Micro/RSX Operating System

Product Description

Micro/RSX is an extended subset of the multiuser, multitasking RSX-11M-PLUS
operating system, tailored for the MicroPDP-11 family of computers.
Micro/RSX is available on RX50 diskettes and TK50 cartridge tapes. It is
preSYSGENed and can be installed by the customer, with no prior experience,
in less than an hour. Micro/RSX offers the Digital Command Language (DCL)
and also allows user-written command language interpreters. Micro/RSX will run
most programs written for RSX-11M or RSX-11M-PLUS without modification.
Micro/RSX is divided into two parts.

Base Kit

The base kit provides the RSX-11M-PLUS executive, appropriate utilities, device drivers, and support for program development with high-level languages.
The base kit has complete tutorial and reference documentation. Customers
who wish to program in high-level languages need only buy the base kit and the
appropriate Micro/RSX language kit. RMS and the EDT editor are included in
the base kit.

Advanced Programmers Kit

The Advanced Programmers Kit is an optional addition to the Base Kit. It
includes the MACRO-11 assembler, tools for developing privileged code (or
"systems programming" such as user-written device drivers), support for
ANSI magtape handling, a point-to-point communications and file-transfer
capability, and additional documentation.

Additional Software for Micro/RSX

Most of the major programming languages and tools, utilities, and communications and networking products available as separate products for RSX-IIM-PLUS
are also available for Micro/RSX. A partial list of these software products
includes BASIC-PLUS-2, FORTRAN-77, COBOL-81, DIBOL-83, Pascal,
DATATRIEVE, SORT/MERGE, the PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger, and DECnet.

Support for Terminal Servers

Terminals or terminal servers on an Ethernet can connect to Micro/RSX on the
Ethernet. For this capability, DECnet is prerequisite on the Micro/RSX system.

TSASupport

Micro/RSX supports the Digital Terminal Services Architecture (TSA).
See full description under RSX-llM operating system.
SPD 14.28

Software

9.11

Software
MicroPower/Pascal Development Tool Kit

Product Description

MicroPower/Pascal is an advanced software tool kit for developing Q-busbased microcomputer applications. It includes a high-performance Pascal compiler, a modular executive, and a variety of tools to create concurrent, realtime
applications programs.
MicroPower/Pascal has two system environments to accomplish this development. The host system creates and builds the software. The target system executes the software. Each application is custom-designed for its target system
and includes the appropriate set of operating system services. The host, using
the symbolic debugger, controls the execution of the target application during
development.
There are four MicroPower/Pascal products. MicroPower/Pascal-RT, MicroPower/Pascal-Micro/RSX, MicroPower/Pascal-VMS, and MicroPower/
Pascal-RSX develop applications using a PDP-ll host system.
The host development environment for each of these products includes an extended, realtime Pascal compiler, a symbolic debugger, several build utilities,
and a MACRO-ll interface. The target environment includes a library of software modules for process synchronization, communications, scheduling, exception and interrupt handling, timer services, and device and file I/O.
The application program is created and linked with the appropriate runtime
software in the host system. It is then transported to the target system by one
of three methods - writing it into read-only memory, downline loading it over a
serial line, or recording it onto removable storage media such as a floppy disk or
tape cartridge and then bootstrapping it on the target system.
MicroPower/Pascal is very compact and can reside in as little as 8 Kbytes of
memory for small application programs. For complex applications, MicroPower/Pascal can address as much as 4 Mbytes of memory.
SPD 14.83 for MicroPower/Pascal-RSX
SPD 18.24 for MicroPower/Pascal-Micro-RSX
SPD 19.12 for MicroPower/Pascal-RT
SPD 26.24 for MicroPower/Pascal-VMS

9.12

Software

Software
RSTS/E Operating System

Product Description

RSTS/E is a multiuser, general purpose timesharing system designed for the
commercial, financial, and educational market. RSTS/E provides a low cost per
terminal combined with a friendly interface especially suited to these markets.
In its 15-year history, thousands of applications have been written and are available to meet the needs of these markets. The system offers a rich development
environment providing EDT, RMS-ll, BASIC-PLUS, PDP-ll SORT/MERGE,
and MACRO-ll as standard components. RSTS/E supports up to 63 jobs and up
to 127 concurrent terminals using multiterminal support.

Digital Command Language

DCL is based upon the DCL available on most Digital operating systems. In
particular, it is similar to the DCL implemented on VAX/VMS. DCL features

include fundamental operations such as listing directories and copying files, as
well as DCL symbol substitution, reading and writing files, system and account
management functions, and terminal activity logging.
DeL Command File Processing

Conceptually, the commands in the DeL command file appear to the system as
a series of commands presented to DCL from the keyboard. Parameters can be
passed to the command file processor at the time the file is invoked. DCL command files are considered to be executable and can be "run" or "chained to"
as programs or can be invoked with the DCL "@" command. In addition to
standard DCL commands, the command file processor interprets a set of specialized commands that allow further operations such as conditional branching,
local and global symbols using 32-bit integers and 255 character strings, and
other special purpose DCL functions.

Security

Access to the system is controlled by the use of passwords. Each user, given the
required privilege, can change his or her own password at any time. Passwords
can, optionally by account, be stored in hashed form that then cannot be retrieved in unhashed form. The system manager may optionally define a system
password.

Print/Batch

Batch jobs are a collection of DCL commands in a file placed on a queue for
execution. Multiple queues can be defined and the user can set limits on the
system resources allocated for each.

Account Management

DCL commands allow the user to defined different types of accounts, create

and delete accounts, set account attributes, and display account information.
Account templates can be created and used to set the defaults for a class of
accounts.

Help

A comprehensive set of help frames explaining the operation of most DCL
commands is available using the "Help" command. This information is also
available in the documentation provided as part of the RSTS/E product.

Disk File and Device Backup

RSTS/E provides the ability for total or selective backup of accounts and files
to disks or to magnetic tapes using DCL commands. RSTS/E BACKUP produces
backup sets that are subset-compatible with the VAX/VMS BACKUP and can
read BACKUP sets produced by VAX/VMS BACKUP. It also provides streaming

support for streaming tape drives.

BASIC-PLUS

BASIC-PLUS can serve as a powerful programming language. The extensive file
processing capabilities of BASIC-PLUS allow users to take full advantage of
RSTS/E file-processing features.

SPD 13.01

Software 9.13

Software
Micro/RSTS Operating System

Product Description

Micro/RSTS is a prebuilt subset of RSTS/E. System calls and programming
facilities supported by RSTS/E are also supported by Micro/RSTS, allowing
programs written for RSTS/E to run unaltered on Micro/RSTS. Micro/RSTS
allows a maximum of twenty jobs and fourteen terminals. It is available in two
kits to meet the needs of two functionally distinct markets. A base kit is available as an applications engine and for BASIC-PLUS development (the language is
included). An application development kit is also available that can be added to
the base kit to provide support for developing applications using MACRO-ll
(included) and high-level compilers. The base kit is a prerequisite for the application-development kit.
Micro/RSTS uses the DCL command language specifically designed for people
with limited computer knowledge. It includes a simplified documentation set.

Base Kit

Standard with the base kit are the Micro/RSTS operating system configured for
the MicroPDP-ll distributed on the RX50 floppy disks and TK50 cartridge
tape, with appropriate documentation. RSTS/E Operating System Utilities,
BASIC-PLUS, RMS-ll, EDT, SORT/MERGE, RSX Emulation, and RT
Emulation.
The purpose of this kit is to provide a product for users who require only that
part of the operating system that is needed to run applications such as those
available through the Software Source Book. Also served by this kit are those
who use BASIC-PLUS as their only development language.

Application Development Kit

The Micro/RSTS application development kit that layers on the base kit includes utility programs and documentation that allows programmers to do software development on the MicroPDP-ll in MACRO-ll (included) and provides
a base for adding layered product compilers such as FORTRAN-77, PDP-ll
Symbolic Debugger, BASIC-PLUS-2, COBOL-81, and others. This kit is not
required for BASIC-PLUS development.
Included with the Micro/RSTS application development kit on RX50
floppy disks and TK50 cartridge tape, with appropriate documentation are
MACRO-ll, RSX Utilities, RT-ll Utilities, Task Builder (TKB), Librarian
for RSX, LINK (RT-ll), Librarian for RT-ll, and RMS-ll Utilities.

Installation and Operation

Both kits have been designed and tested to be customer-installable by the
novice user reading the Micro/RSTS Installation Guide.

Disk and Memory Usage

Approximately 4 Mbytes are used by the base kit and 2 Mbytes by the application development kit. Applications that require more than the remaining space
should add a second disk.
The minimum required memory is 256 Kbytes. If simultaneous use of three
or more large programs is expected, then additional memory is recommended
to improve performance. If more than four simultaneous users are required,
additional memory must be added.
SPD 18.12

9.14 Software

Software
RT.ll Operating System
Product Description

The RT-ll operating system is a single-user, realtime operating system designed
for interactive program development of online application execution on Professional300 Series, PDP-ll and LSI based systems. Although it is a single-user
system, RT-ll supports both single job (SJ) and foregroundjbackground (FB/XM)
modes of processing, as well as a number of system jobs. In addition to a
variety of system and program utilities, RT-ll supports a number of high-level
language processors including BASIC-PLUS and FORTRAN-77.
The emphasis in RT-ll is on efficient use of system resources, minimizing
system requirements in the CPU and on the mass-storage devices, while maximizing system throughput. The RT-ll operating system offers the following
configurations:
Single Job (SJ) Monitor - Enables one job at a time to execute in memory. As
distributed, SJ resides in approximately 6 Kbytes of memory and requires
minimal overhead. Should the user's requirements change, a properly written
program that runs under the SJ monitor can be executed under the FB or XM
monitor as a background program without modification, provided there is
sufficient memory.
Foreground/Background (FB) Monitor - Provides for the simultaneous
execution of up to seven jobs in the foreground and a background job. The
realtime function is accomplished in the foreground, which has priority on system resources. Functions such as program development that do not have critical
response time requirements are accomplished in the background, which operates whenever the jobs in the foreground cannot run. Within their priorities,
both foreground and background jobs are fully functional RT -11 programs with
access to system capabilities.
Extended Memory (XM) Monitor - Has the features of the FB monitor and
supports systems with more than 64 Kbytes of memory. XM allows programs to
extend their size to the full PDP-II virtual address space of 64 Kbytes. By program control an RT-ll job may allocate and use all available physical memory
not used by the monitor or other jobs. A linker option allows user programs
to have overlays in extended memory for fast access.

Flexible Realtime I/O

Three modes of I/O operation are provided to satisfy a variety of input and
output requirements. Synchronous I/O suspends user program processing until
the completion of an I/O event. With asynchronous I/O, user program processing continues until a user-defined point is reached. Processing is then suspended until the I/O event is completed. Event-driven I/O allows user program
processing to continue until the I/O event completes. Processing is then interrupted to service the completed I/O event.

Programming Capabilities and Tools

Capabilities include device-independent I/O programming and ease-of-writing
device interfaces. Program development tools offered within RT-ll include a
choice of three text editors, file and device maintenance utilities, a symbolic
debugger, and a number of patch utilities.
Communications tools, Virtual Terminal Communication (VTCOM) and File
Transfer (TRANSF), enable RT-ll systems to act as a terminal or transfer files
using a serial line .
SPD12.01

Software 9.15

Software
Programming Languages and Applications

Introduction

Most operating systems need additional software, such as programming languages and applications packages, to perform more specialized tasks than the
operating system can perform alone. PDP-11 programming languages and applications are well-suited to the needs of industry, science, academia, and business. A wide range of languages and applications is available on PDP-11 operating systems to meet all programming needs, from system software development
to general purpose application program development. When choosing a language or application package, various criteria can be evaluated based on individual needs and constraints. Among these criteria are relative performance,
ease-of-use, price, portability, complexity, as well as specific functionality.
Some PDP-11 application packages are designed to give users with little computer familiarity the tools to perform specific tasks. The DECWORD/DP word
processing package, DECmail-11 electronic mail, and the DATATRIEVE-11
query and report system are examples of such specialized packages. Other
application products are designed for professional programmers to create new
software for a much wider range of tasks. Programming languages and packages
such as FMS-11 and the Professional Host Tool Kit fall into this category.
Programming languages have typically developed in response to specific functional needs. Some languages, such as FORTRAN, were originally intended for
processing enormous amounts of numerical data through complicated formulas
at high speeds. Others, such as COBOL and DIBOL, were developed for commercial applications in which data management played a major role. And still
others, like BASIC, were invented for use by students who were unfamiliar
with computers and needed a simple, easy-to-Iearn language related to everyday speech. While some of these distinctions have become blurred over time,
it is still true that certain kinds of problems are best approached through specific languages. The descriptions in this section attempt to show the special
strengths of each Digital-supplied language in satisfying specific application
needs.
With an appropriate selection of languages and applications packages, the
PDP-11 system can satisfy the computer needs of users of multiple levels of
expertise and function.

9.16

Software

Software
Programming Languages

BASIC·PLUS·2

BASIC-PLUS-2 is a high-level software implementation language derived from
the original Dartmouth BASIC. Like the original, BASIC-PLUS-2 is a highly ap-

proachable language with an interactive user interface, online help text, and
simple English-like language elements. Unlike many other BASICs, though,
BASIC-PLUS-2 is a compiled language with modern block-structured programming constructs, sophisticated file access methods, and a host of program
development tools aimed at increasing programmer productivity. This combination makes BASIC-PLUS-2 practical for a wide range of uses, from developing
data processing applications to training new programmers. Also, since BASICPLUS-2 is a close subset of VAX BASIC, the two languages can be used together
in projects with a mix of PDP-ll and VAX systems. BASIC-PLUS-2 provides
sequential, relative, indexed, and record file address (RFA) file access via the
RMS Record Management System. Other features include a RUN command
that allows immediate compilation and execution of the program currently in
memory, a LOAD command that places previously compiled BASIC-PLUS-2
modules in memory for use by RUN, immediate-mode program debugging
statements, the ability to omit line numbers and use mnemonic statement
labels, and 31-character variable and constant names.
SPD 14.11 for RSX·IIM and RSX·IIM·PLUS
SPD 14.54 for RSTS
SPD 18.06 for Micro/RSX
SPD 18.09 for Micro/RSTS
SPD 40.23 for PRO/Tool Kit
BASIC.PLUS/RT.ll

BASIC-PLUS/RT-ll is an interactive, incremental compiler operating under the
RT-ll operating system that uses simple, English-like statements and familiar
mathematical notations to perform operations. The BASIC-PLUS processor
comprises a compiler and runtime system. The BASIC-PLUS compiler produces

a compact pseudocode that is interpreted by the runtime system. Being an
incremental compiler, it checks each program line for syntax errors and
immediately returns an appropriate message if an error is found.
In addition to all the other features found in BASIC-PLUS/RT-ll, the latest
version contains a new feature called Language Extension. This feature allows
users to define new keywords and statements in their BASIC-PLUS programs.
User-written MACRO subroutines can also be accessed through the
BASIC-PLUS program. (Refer to appropriate SPD for detailed information).
BASIC-PLUS/RT-ll is a follow-on version to BASIC-ll/RT-ll. Its significantly
enhanced features and functionality make it an appropriate choice for users in
the technical development and educational markets.

SPD 12.05 for RT·ll
SPD 40.39 for Professional Series

Software 9.17

Software
Programming Languages

COBOL-81

The COBOL-81 language processor is a high-performance compiler designed
for interactive PDP-ll business systems programming where ANSI-74 standard
COBOL features, compact code, and low memory usage are of prime consideration. The new release of COBOL-81 also includes some of the features from
the 1985 COBOL Standard. VAX COBOL and COBOL-81 share many common
features that are implemented with the same syntax and semantics on both
compilers. This way, source code developed using COBOL-81 may be migrated
to VAX COBOL. Also, VAX/VMS systems may be used to develop source code
that will eventually be compiled using COBOL-81. COBOL-81 runs on the full
range of PDP-ll systems. It lets users begin with the smallest PDP-ll system
and grow to the largest VAX systems running VAX COBOL. The compiler takes
full advantage of the PDP-ll's optional Commercial Instruction Set (CIS) to
generate even more efficient object code. The compiler's extensive library facilities and interaction with the PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger help increase programmer productivity and enable the production of powerful application
programs.
SPD 13.16 for RSTS/E
SPD 14.26 for RSX
SPD 18.03 for Micro/RSX
SPD 18.08 for Micro/RSTS
SPD 40.24 for PRO/Tool Kit

DIBOL

DIBOL, Digital's Business-Oriented Language, is a structured high-level language for commercial applications programming. It is similar to COBOL in that
it has a Data Division and a Procedure Division and uses English-like procedural statements (although more concise than those of COBOL). DIBOL
is designed specifically for creating interactive applications programs.
DIBOL is available as part of CTS-300 and Professional CTS-300, as well as an
option on RSTSjE, MicrojRSTS, RSX-11M-PLUS, MicrojRSX, and VAX/VMS
and on the Professional 300 computers under the P/OS operating system.
DECFORM, a powerful, easy-to-use data entry and file inquiry package, is included with DIBOL on CTS-300 and Professional CTS-300, DIBOL for RSTS/E
and DIBOL for MicrojRSTS for designing screen formats for data entry. Using
interactive video terminals, programmers can produce forms on the terminal
screen that closely resemble traditional printed forms. Thus DIBOL and DECFORM work together to help programmers who are designing applications for
data entry and retrieval.
Both DIBOL and DECFORM have their own interactive debugging utilities
to speed program development. DIBOL performs data manipulation, arithmetic expression evaluation, table subscripting, record redefinition, external
calls to other programs, and sequential, random, and indexed access to files.
DECFORM features facilities for defining data entry field protection, autoduplication, alphabetic or decimal checking, range checking, field totaling,
cross-field validation, and autoincrement of counters.
SPD 12.09 for CTS-300
SPD 14.08 for RSTS/E
SPD 14.09 for Micro/RSTS
SPD 14.24 for RSX-11M-PLUS
SPD 18.05 for Micro/RSX
SPD 40.22 for P/OS
SPD 40.37 for Professional CTS-300

9.18

Software

Software
Programming Languages

FORTRAN IV

FORTRAN IV is an extended superset of the ANSI X3.9-I966 standard for this
scientific and engineering programming language. Its high-speed, one-pass
optimizing compiler works very efficiently in small-memory environments,
making FORTRAN program development possible on smaller PDP-II systems.
Because it can produce absolute binary code suitable for stand-alone PDP-II
systems or for loading into ROM or PROM memory, Digital's FORTRAN IV
is especially useful for such industrial applications as control programs for
automated equipment.
Other features of FORTRAN IV include the ability_ to use general expressions
in all meaningful contexts, mixed-mode arithmetic, the byte data type for
character manipulation, commenting at the end of each source line, and listdirected input/output.
SPD 12.10 for RT·ll
SPD 12.41 for RSTS/E
SPD 14.63 for RSX
SPD 14.77 for lAS

FORTRAN·77

FORTRAN-77 is much more than just a scientific and engineering language. It
combines the efficient numerical computation for which FORTRAN is known
with provisions for keyed and sequential access to RMS multikey ISAM files.
This makes FORTRAN-77 ideal for writing programs that must manipulate and
perform calculations on masses of data, as in accounting or statistical packages.
FORTRAN-77 runs on RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS, RT-II, RSX-IIM, RSX-IIMPLUS, and Micro/RSX-based PDP-II systems. Runtime operations are supported on RSX-IIS.
FORTRAN-77 is built on the ANSI subset FORTRAN X3.9-I978 standard with
the following extensions: Type and Accept input/output statements, the BYTE
data type, hexadecimal and octal constants, virtual arrays (on systems equipped
with memory management), and language elements to perform RMS multikey
ISAM. To use RMS files and utilities, FORTRAN-77 programs utilize the RMS
Object Time System (RMS OTS); a File Control Services OTS (FCS OTS) is also
available. The compiler produces direct PDP-II machine code optimized on
systems equipped with a floating-point processor. 1& D space is supported on
most systems.
FORTRAN-77 interacts with the PDP-II Symbolic Debugger. This tool aids in
the location of programming errors in successfully compiled programs that behave abnormally when executed, thereby increasing programmer productivity.
RMS file capabilities are not available for FORTRAN-77 running under RT-Il.
SPD 14.31 for RSX.llM.PLUS, RSX.llM, and RSX.llS
SPD 14.49 for RSTS/E
SPD 18.04 for Micro/RSX
SPD 18.10 for Micro/RSTS
SPD A3.55 for RT-ll

Software 9.19

Software
Programming Languages

PDP-ll PASCAL

PDP-II PASCAL is a high-level language for developing business, manufacturing, research, and educational programs. Its English-like commands, logical
grammar, and block structure help developers produce programs that have clear
organization and linear flow.
PDP-II PASCAL accepts programs compatible with Level 0 of the ISO Specification for Computer Programming Language Pascal [ISO 7185-1983 (E)] as well
as to the ANSI/IEEE 770X3.97-1983 (December, 1983) Standard. PDP-II
PASCAL runs on all RSX-IIM and RSX-IIM-PLUS-based PDP-II systems that
have the Extended Instruction Set (EIS). It also runs on Micro/RSX systems
that are configured with either the KEFI1-AA floating-point chip option or the
FPFll dot floating-point processor card. PDP-II PASCAL/RSX uses FCS for
file I/O and supports sequential or direct record access, plus fixed-length or
variable-length records. PDP-II PASCAL/RSX supports many RSX features, in~
cluding cluster libraries and I & D space separation, and it provides access to
the RSX executive-directives.
SPD 14.18 for RSX.llM·PLUS and RSX.llM
SPD 18.07 for Micro/RSX
SPD 40.20 for PRO/Tool Kit PASCAL

PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger

PDP-ll Symbolic Debugger is a fully symbolic debugger for FORTRAN-77,
COBOL-81, and MACRO-ll. This tool is a valuable aid in locating programming errors in successfully compiled programs that behave abnormally when
executed. The PDP-II Symbolic Debugger provides I & D space support for
user tasks. A SET LANGUAGE command allows programmers to debug programs written in the language of their choice. The user is allowed to refer to program locations by symbols or line numbers rather than by addresses, thus saving
valuable programmer time. Breakpoints and tracepoints may be set in overlay
segments that are not currently resident. A programmer may step through a
program by source line, which facilitates source debugging, or by PDP-II instructions. A single application program composed of modules written in either
FORTRAN-77 and MACRO-II or COBOL-81 and MACRO-II can be debugged
using the PDP-II Symbolic Debugger.
The PDP-II Symbolic Debugger is available on RSX-I1M, RSX-IIM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX, RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS, and VMS via VAX-II RSX.
SPD 12.78 for RSX·IIM and RSX·I1M·PLUS
SPD 12.79 for RSTS/E
SPD 14.79 for Micro/RSX
SPD 18.11 for Micro/RSTS
SPD 26.75 for VAX to RSX
SPD 40.25 for PRO/Tool Kit

9.20

Software

Software
Information Management Applications

DATATRIEVE·11

DATATRIEVE-11 is an interactive query, report, and data maintenance system
designed for the less-sophisticated computer user. DATATRIEVE-11 uses the
RMS-11 record management services to access data contained in disk files of
sequential, indexed, or relative organization. DATATRIEVE-11 provides facilities for selective data retrieval, sorting, formatting, updating, and report
generation, without the need for programming. Record and domain (file) definitions entered in DATATRIEVE-11 are stored in Data Dictionaries shared by
DATATRIEVE-ll users. Data Dictionaries can also be used to store frequently
used sequences of commands to be recalled and processed later. Commands
are provided to list the contents of the Data Dictionary, to delete entries, and
to control access to individual entries in the Data Dictionary. A Dictionary
Compression utility is provided to compress the Data Dictionary file.
DATATRIEVE-ll enables the user to define domains that cross RMS file definitions and subset record definitions. DATATRIEVE-ll provides the Application
Design Tool (ADT) to assist the novice user in creating domain and record definitions. The ADT uses an interactive dialdgue technique to guide the user
through the data definition process. It creates an indirect command file that is
then processed to actually update the DATATRIEVE-11 Data Dictionary.
A distributed server will allow DECSYSTEM-20 and VAX DATATRIEVE
transport access to DATATRIEVE domains on the user's system. A remote
call interface will allow the user to write programs in COBOL, BASIC, or
FORTRAN to access DATATRIEVE domains on DECSYSTEM-20, PDP-11,
and VAX/VMS host systems connected via DECnet.
Micro/RSX DATATRIEVE-ll also features a distributed server and remote call
interface. Micro/RSTS DATATRIEVE-ll offers DATATRIEVE-11 functionality
without distributed access or remote call interface capabilities.

SPD 12.48 for RSX-11M-PLUS, RSX.11M, and RSTS/E
SPD 18.15 for Micro/RSX
SPD 18.30 for Micro/RSTS

Software 9.21

Software
Information Management Applications

FMS·ll

FMS-ll (Forms Management System) is used by application programmers to
build interactive, screen-oriented data-entry capabilities into their application
programs. Used in conjunction with a standard programming language such as
FORTRAN-77, COBOL-81, DIBOL, or BASIC-PLUS-2, FMS-ll can be used for
any data-entry application in which paper forms were traditionally used, such
as inventory, payroll, bookkeeping, and patient admittance. FMS-l1 can aid
productivity at all levels: program designers are spared the complexities of creating custom terminal interfaces to use special features of the VT100 or VT200;
program developers can debug and correct forms quickly with FMS-ll 's own
forms-debugging and editing utilities; and the application's end user gets an
intelligent data-entry system that minimizes keystrokes and catches most
common typing errors.
Components of the FMS-11 package are the Form Editor for layout and
modification of video forms on a VT100 or VT200 screen; the Video Keypad
Editor for general purpose text editing of standard ASCII files; the Form Utility for manipulation of FMS forms, descriptions during debugging; the Form
Driver for performing screen processing at application runtime; and, on RT-ll,
the Application Runtime Supervisor for running application programs independently of programs running on other system terminals.
SPD 12.22 for FMS.ll/RT
SPD 12.2~7 for FMS.ll/RSX
SPD 13.17 for FMS.ll/RSTS/E
SPD 18.34 for FMS.ll/Micro/RSX

SORT/MERGE

SORT/MERGE provides a fast and flexible means of reordering (sorting) and
combining (merging) data in files. It is composed of several components including the SORT Utility Program, the MERGE Utility Program, a SORT/MERGE
callable subroutine package, and a detailed documentation set. SORT/MERGE
can accept as input up to ten RMS-11 formatted files and will produce as output
one reordered RMS-ll formatted file. Records can be sequenced in ascending
or descending order by as many as 16 key fields with a maximum total key size
of 512 bytes. Commands can be issued interactively via the standard commandline interfaces or through the specification file created by the user. The subroutine package includes an equal-key callback to be invoked whenever two keys
are found to be equal; a user-defined key comparison algorithm; a user-defined
warning routine to be invoked when nonfatal errors occur; and a user-defined
input routine for the merge record interface. There is a DCL interface as well as
online help for the DCL interface.
SORT/MERGE is sold as a separate product on RSX-IIM, RSX-11M-PLUS, and
Micro/RSX. It is included as part of the operating system package on RSTS/E
and Micro/RSTS.
SPD 12.07 for RSX-IIM and RSX-IIM-PLUS
SPD 18.13 for Micro/RSX

A·to·Z Data Inquiry

9.22

Software

See description under A-to-Z Software.

Software
Graphics Applications

BCP Graphics Software

The BCP Bar Code/Block Character software package lets RSX-IIM users print
out industry-standard Code 39 bar codes, block characters, and vertical and
horizontal lines and dashes on Digital's LXY12 graphics lineprinter. The package provides quick and easy production of labels for warehouse, stockroom, and
other inventory-tracking operations.
The package's interactive user program lets users enter data to be coded for
immediate printout of bar codes and block-lettered labels. A library of graphics routines are also provided that can be combined with applications programs written in FORTRAN-77, for fully automated label generation. Both
parts of the package require that the RSX-IIM system on which they run
have FORTRAN-77 plus a minimum 40 Kbytes of memory. BCP is shipped
with the LXY12 graphics lineprinter and must be specified when ordering
hardware.

A-to-Z Business Graphics

See description under A-to-Z Software.

RGL/11

RGL/l1 (ReGIS Graphics Library) is a subset of VAX RGL, which is a collection of subroutines designed to support the graphics capabilities of the VT 125.
RGL/ll subroutines are callable from FORTRAN-IV (RT-11) and FORTRAN77 (RSX-I1M). Picture-drawing features of RGL/l1 include shading; line patterns; writing modes; and picture objects such as boxes, arcs, circles, and regular polygons. RGL/l1 also provides a method for storing and later recalling
screen images. Data plotting capabilities allow the user to define various types
of graph "papers," such as linear or logarithmic. RGL/ll provides numeric and
alphanumeric labeling and scaling ofaxes. The plotting subroutines are divided
into static and dynamic segments. Static routines display all the user's data
in one call, while dynamic routines allow point plotting. RGL/ll is Digitalsupported and customer-installed.
SPD 14.62

PLXY-11

PLXY-ll is a software package designed to provide RT-ll, RSX-llM, RSX11M-PLUS, and RSTS/E applications programmers access to the plotting capabilities of Digital's LXY12 graphics lineprinter. Using the PLXY-ll graphics
subroutines, programmers can create software that prints out representations
of data in graphs and charts with clear alphanumeric labeling. This makes
PLXY-l1 useful for equipping scientific, engineering, statistical, and econometric application programs with graphics.
To use PLXY-ll, the programmer writes FORTRAN programs that call the
appropriate subroutines in the PLXY-ll library. These subroutines convert the
program's graphics requests into a series of vectors stored in an intermediate
file. This file is submitted to the PLXY-II postprocessing task, which converts
its vector data into raster format suitable to the LXY12 graphics lineprinter.
The user then transfers this converted file to the graphics printer via a standard
file transfer utility such as PIP, where it is printed out by the system LPII lineprinter driver. PLXY is shipped with the LXY12 graphics lineprinter and must
be specified when ordering hardware.

Software 9.23

Software
Word Processing Applications

DECtype

DECtype is a Gold key, DECmate-style word processor that permits concurrent
word and data processing in a multiuser environment. With industry-standard
features such as menu-driven operation, cut and paste, forward and reverse
scrolling, search and replace, automatic wordwrap, subscripts/superscripts,
header/footers, a four-function math utility, and user-defined keys for predetermined, repetitive operations, DECtype is appropriate for any nonlegal,
nonscientific small-business office.
When printing from DEC type, users can remove documents from the print
queue, view the list of documents in the queue, and view the status of all
defined printers in the queue.
SPD 12.71 for CTS-300
SPD 14.82 for RSX-11M-PLUS
SPD 18.14 for Micro/RSX

A-to-Z Word Processing

See description under A-to-Z Software.

DECdx

DECdx is a layered software product that resides on a RSX, RSTS, or VMS system. It enables DECmate/WPS systems, both stand-alone and shared-resource,
to be linked to the host for "TEAM" computing, allowing better system utilization, document exchange, and information and data sharing. DECdx users
can transfer documents between the DECmate/WPS system and the host
through a serial-line interface.
SPD 13.32 for RSTS
SPD 13.39 for RSX

WPS.PLUS/POS

WPS-PLUS/POS is a document-processing software system that provides Gold
key word processing. It is designed to run on any Professional 350 or 380 series system configured with the P/OS Hard Disk operating system. WPS-PLUSI
POS allows users to create, edit, and print documents; produce form letters and
maintain mailing lists; file and retrieve documents; include data from a professional application in a document; convert a WPS-PLUS document to and from
a P/OS, DX, and ASCII file format; include diagrams, matrices, and equations;
and use TCS.
SPD40.30

WPS.PLUS/RSX

WPS-PLUS/RSX is a document-processing application that provides Gold keystyle word processing. WPS-PLUS/RSX runs as a layered product under the
RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems.
WPS-PLUS/RSX features menu-driven document processing, including word
and list processing with math and sort capabilities. WPS-PLUS/RSX allows
users to create, edit, and print documents; produce form letters and maintain
mailing lists; file and retrieve documents, include data from an application in a
WPS document; and include diagrams, matrices, composite and multinational
characters in a document. It contains a spell verifier and corrector, and conversion utilities that allow documents to be converted to ACSII or DX format.
SPD 13.47

9.24 Software

Software
A-to-Z Software

A-to-Z Base System

The A-to-Z Base System is a user-installable, multiuser base system that supports up to ten concurrent users on MicroPDP-ll and sixteen or more concurrent users on MicroVAX. The A-to-Z Base System includes menu-driven system
management functions as well as the ability to install Micro/RSX and/or
MicroV~S applications. Inherent in the system are the menu manager and
flow-control processor, which insulate the end user from the system-level interface without isolating the developer or system manager from the functions available at the operating system level. The A-to-Z Base System for MicroPDP-ll
includes the Micro/RSX operating system software, whereas the other A-to-Z
Base Systems require the purchase of MicroVMS as prerequisite software.

SPD 18.16
A-to-Z Data Inquiry

A-to-Z Data Inquiry is a software product designed to create impromptu reports and terminal queries from existing data files. Through the use of Englishlanguage-like commands, a novice user can design the desired output without
the need for programming.
A-to-Z Data Inquiry uses dictionaries to describe data files. Logical field names
assigned to each field are used with A-to-Z Data Inquiry to extract the desired
information.
A-to-Z Data Inquiry also provides the user with a simplified dictionary build and
data entry facility. Using this feature, users are able to describe their own dictionary
and add, delete, or modify data in the user file designated by those dictionaries.
A-to-Z Data Inquiry can create a procedure file consisting of a sequence of
commands to produce the desired output. This procedure file may be stored
and recalled at will for repetitive report requests.

A-to-Z Integration Features

A-to-Z Data Inquiry is integrated with other A-to-Z applications. There are
interfaces to A-to-Z Business Graphics, A-to-Z Word Processing, and A-to-Z
SupercompTwentyTM; data can be extracted by Data Inquiry and passed to each
of these other applications for their use.

SPD18.17

Software 9.2.5

Software
A-to-Z Software

A-to-Z Word Processing
A-to-Z Word Processing is a Gold key word processing application that runs in
a: multiuser environment. With industry-standard features such as menu-driven
operation, cut and paste, forward and reverse scrolling, search and replace, automatic word wrap, subscripts/superscripts, headers/footers, a four-function
math utility, journaling (allowing recovery of document in the event of an unexpected ending to editing session), and user-defined keys for predetermined, repetitive operations, A-to-Z Word Processing is appropriate for any nonlegal,
nonscientific small-business office.
When printing from A-to-Z Word Processing, users can remove documents
from the print queue, view the list of documents in the queue, and view the
status of all defined printers in the queue.
The A-to-Z Word Processing editor allows you to create and then maintain
documents stored on the A-to-Z System. Storage available for documents
will vary depending on other storage requirements.
A-to-Z Word Processing facilitates the creation of compound documents.
Reports and/or graphs from other A-to-Z applications may be embedded into
the documents.
SPD 18.18
A-to-Z Document Transfer

A-to-Z Document Transfer facility allows word processing documents to be
moved between A-to-Z Word Processing and DECmate word processing systems. It utilizes the DECdx protocol and is compatible with DECdx on other
systems.
SPD 18.31

A-to-Z Electronic Mail

The A-to-Z Base System expedites business communications with its optional
software, A-to-Z Electronic Mail. This mail package represents the key element in the A-to-Z product that meets users' needs for information sharing on
the MicroPDP-ll and the VAX. With A-to-Z Electronic Mail, users can instantaneously create and send messages, reports, and files without learning special
procedures. Electronic Mail is accessed from the standard A-to-Z menu that is
easy to use, with screen prompts and online help available at all times. Users
can create and edit messages, letters, and reports using A-to-Z Word Processing. With this integrated mail package, users also can define, use, and change
distribution lists, store and list messages in folders; selectively search for messages; move messages from one folder to another; print, delete, and convert
messages into A-to-Z Reports.

If the optional DECnet software and appropriate communication ha:rdware is
available, A-to-Z Electronic Mail users can communicate with other PDP-ll
or VAX systems (with the VMS MAIL utility). A-to-Z Electronic Mail uses the
same installation process as the other A-to-Z Base System components. The
A-to-Z Base System and A-to-Z Word Processing are prerequisites for this
product.
SPD 18.26

9.26

Software

Software
A-to-Z Software

A-to-Z Business Graphics

A-to-Z Business Graphics is an interactive business graphics application that
enables the nontechnical user to create presentation style graphs. Aided by
picture-assisted menus, a user is able to input the data to be graphed, design
the graph description, and cdmbine this information to create a graph file for
display on video terminal, printer, or plotter. In this manner, the data, design,
and graph files are maintained independently. This permits modified or new
data files to be used with a previously designed graph. Graphs may be created
and stored on a file for future use. A-to-Z Business Graphics uses the capabilities of graphics terminals and graphic-mode printers. On monochrome terminals, graphic images can be represented in black-and-white formats with the
use of selected fill and line patterns. On color terminals, graphs can be
designed with four colors chosen from a list of fourteen.
An application can also be written to access data files and establish an A-to-Z
Business Graphics data file. A-to-Z Business Graphics can create the following
12 graph types:
• Vertical bar
• Horizontal bar
• Vertical clustered bar
• Horizontal clustered bar
• Vertical stacked bar
• Horizontal stacked bar
• Simple line
• Shaded line
• Scatter
• Scatter with trend line(s)
• Pie
• Pie with exploded segment(s)
SPD 18.19

A-to-Z Develop~r's Kit

The A-to-Z Developer's Kit is designed to allow the creation or migration of
software packages targeted for the A-to-Z Base System. The A-to-Z Developer's Kit provides the necessary software routines to create and maintain
A-to-Z Data Inquiry. The A-to-Z Developer's Kit allows the user to create and
modify menus for user-written applications with all of the functionality of the
menus used in other A-to-Z components.

Features

• A-to-Z Base System menu compiler for ease of menu creation and
modification.
• A-to-Z Base System menu subroutines for use by user applications.
• Utility for creation, modification, and printing of data dictionaries, allowing
access to the application data through A-to-Z Data Inquiry.
• Definition and suggested use of the A-to-Z Base System function keys.
• Definition and requirements for the creation of A-to-Z Base System
installation files.
• Definition and use of callable interface for A-to-Z Base System software
routines.
SPD 18.20

Software

9.27

Software
Applications Development

RTEM·11

RTEM-11 provides the RT-11 program-development environment on Micro/
RSX, RSX-11M, and RSX-11M-PLUS. It allows several users to develop RT-11
applications concurrently on a host system. The number of users depends on
CPU power and system activity. Application programs can be created, edited,
assembled, and linked on RTEM-11 and then debugged and executed on an
RT-11 system. RTEM-ll requires a minimum of 32 KW (64 Kbytes) of memory
available per user.
SPD 15.63

MENU·11

MENU-11 allows application programmers and system managers to design
customized interfaces between a RSTS/E or Micro/RSTS system and its users.
Unrelated applications can easily be tied together to make complete functional
environments on a per-user or per-site basis. RSTS/E's DCL command-language
environment can be sealed off from novice or infrequent users and replaced
with a set of interactive menus backed by help texts. Programmers design the
menus and help texts, giving users access to only those procedures and utilities
needed in their work. This makes MENU-11 ideal for turning a RSTS/E system
into a "turnkey" application system, as well as for providing security on a
system with many inexperienced users.
MENU-11 consists of a set of programs that interact with RSTS/E or Micro/
RSTS and that control the display of menus to users according to prepared
command files. The command files specify the format and content of menus,
the help text associated with each menu option, the actions to be taken when
an option is chosen (including conditional execution of actions), the transfers
between different menus; and the interactions with the user to gather more information. Menu options can execute system commands, run application programs, and generally perform any action or series of actions that is possible
under RSTS/E.
SPD 12.60

Peripheral Processor Tool Kit/RSX

The Peripheral Processor Tool Kit supports use of KXT11-CA peripheral
processors as slave processors in Q-bus systems running RSX-11M-PLUS or
RSX-llM in the arbiter cpu. The application on the KXT11-CA may be either
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX-based or stand-alone MACRO-1l. The Tool Kit facilitates loading and debugging KXT11-CA applications from RSX. The software
also provides a driver for communication over the Q-bus between MicroPower
application softw...re in the KXTll-CA and the RSX-llM-PLUS application.
The KXTll-CA is designed to offload traditional single-processor LSI-11
systems. Typical uses of the Peripheral Processor Tool Kit are applications
utilizing serial or parallel I/O in realtime environments. Development of the
Peripheral Processor Tool Kit onboard application can be done with the
MicroPower/Pascal-RSX product, which provides a complete software environment for the development of applications in either Pascal or MACRO-ll
Assembler Language.
SPD 13.25

9.28

Software

Software
Applications Development/Communications

Peripheral Processor Tool Kit/RT -II

The Peripheral Processor Tool Kit supports use of KXTll-CA peripheral
processors as slave processors in LSI-II systems running RT-ll in the arbiter
CPU. The application of the KXTll-CA may be either MicroPower/Pascal-RTbased or stand-alone MACRO-11. The Tool Kit facilitates loading and de15ugging KXT11-CA applications from RT-ll. The software also provides a
driver for communication over the Q-bus between MicroPower/Pascal-RT
application software in the KXTll-CA and the RT-ll application.
SPD 12.70

Communications

DECnet-RSX

DECnet-RSX allows a suitably configured PDP-II computer system to participate as a node in a DECnet network. For further information about this
product, consult the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide.

DECnet/E

DECnet/E software allows a suitably configured RSTS/E system to participate
as a routing or nonrouting node in DECnet computer networks. For further
information about this product, consult the Networks and Communications
Buyer's Guide.

DECnet-RT

DECnet-RT allows a suitably configured RT-ll Foreground/Background (FB)
system to participate as an end node in DECnet Phase III (non-Ethernet)
computer networks. For further information about this product, consult the
Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide.
SPD 10.72

RSX-l1 Packetnet
Switching Interface

RSX-ll PSI/M and RSX-ll PSI/M-PLUS allow suitably configured RSX-IIM
and RSX-llM-PLUS systems to connect Packet Switching Data Networks
(PSDN) conforming to the CCITT recommendation X.25 Uune 1980). For further information about this product, consult the Networks and Communications
Buyer's Guide.

KMSll RSX X.25 LAPB
Link-level Software

The KMS 11 RSX X.25 LAPB link-level software is a software/firmware package consisting of basic X.25 LAPB link-level firmware for the KMSll-BD or
KMS IP-M, a firmware loader to load the firmware into the KMS 11 hardware,
RSX-ll device driver for a KMS11-BD or a KMSIP-M communications controller, and a demonstration program.
The driver, in conjunction with the X.25 LAPB link-level firmware, allows the
RSX-11 user to perform high-speed, synchronous X.25 link-level communication in a point-to-point environment. The driver provides the interface that
allows for transfer of command, control, and data information to and from the
RSX-11 user task, KMS11-BD or KMS IP-M X.25 LAPB link-level firmware and
remote end communications line. The KMS 11 driver is full-duplex and maintains internal queues, enabling the supplied firmware to control eight receive
and eight transmit buffers per line, concurrently.

Software

9.29

Software
Communications

KMV1A·M RSX X.2.5 LAPB
Link·level Software

The KMVIA-M RSX X.25 LAPB link-level software is a software/firmware
package consisting of basic X.25 LAPB link-level firmware, a firmware loader,
a device driver for a KMVIA-M Q-bus communication controller, a demonstration test program, a trace dump module, and a trace interpreter.
This package allows the RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS, or RSX-llS operatingsystem user to perform high-speed, synchronous communications in a pointto-point environment.
SPD 13.43

KMV1A·M HDLC Framing Software

The KMVIA-M HDLC framing software is a package of basic HDLC/SDLC
framing firmware; a firmware loader; and an RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS, or
RSX-llS device driver for the KMVIA-M programmable communications controller. The driver, in conjunction with the HDLC/SDLC framing firmware,
loader, and the KMVIA-M hardware, allows the RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS, or
RSX-llS Operating-System user to perform medium-speed, synchronous communication in a point-to-point or multipoint environment. The driver provides
the interface for transfer of command, control, and data information to and
from RSX-l1M, RSX-llM-PLUS, or RSX-llS, the KMVIA-M basic HDLC/
SDLC framing firmware, and remote-end communications line.
The KMVIA-M driver is full-duplex and maintains internal queues, enabling
the supplied firmware to control two receive and two transmit buffers at the
same time, allowing for the most efficient use of the device during transmission
and reception of data.
SPD 14.22

KMV1A·M Development Tools

The KMVIA-M Development Tools consist of a software/firmware package that
facilitates the development of layered telecommunications protocols in the
KMVIA-M communications controller. The KMVIA-M operates under the
RSX-IIM, RSX-llM-PLUS, or RSX-llS operating systems, and should be used
by programmers who have MACRO-ll skills.
To facilitate the user development effort, the following set of utilities is included: A "linker" that allows the user to create a working image from the
user-written source programs; a "loader" to load into the KMVIA-M RAM the
file created by the linker; a dump analyzer, so files created by the unload function of the debug utility can be formatted and dumped to a disk; and a debug
utility program, which enables a programmer to interactively debug KMVIA-M
firmware.
The KMVIA-M firmware consists of both user-written firmware and ROM-resident firmware. The ROM-resident firmware consists of powerup code, the communication executive routines, and the self-test routines to detect hardware
malfunctions. The RAM-resident firmware consists of the user-written code
specific to the communication protocol being used.
SPD 13.41

9.30 Software

Software
Electronic Mail

DECmail-11

DECmail-ll is an easy-to-use, full-functionality menu mode or commanddriven electronic mail system. It is available on RSTS/E, Micro/RSTS,
RSX-llM-PLUS, and Micro/RSX.
Commands are in English. You would "Read" to read a message, "Send"
to send a message, "List" to display a directory of messages in a file folder,
"Answer" to reply to a message, and "File" to store a message in a file folder.
Commands such as "Next," "Previous," and "Last" allow the user to move
through a large number of messages easily. As users become familiar with the
system's operation, they can define their own names for commands and sequences to suit personal needs on other systems. An extensive online help
facility and friendly documentation provides indepth information on all
user commands.
Powerful, easy-to-use functionality offers users the ability to create, answer,
or forward messages with or without editing capability (user's option), store
messages, search by author, subject, date and text (phrases or words), retrieve
messages held in user folders, define command names, defaults, command sequences, print, transfer data to the native file system, and use online help. Users can choose to use EDT to prepare the text of messages.

Multinode Operation

DECmail-ll can be used in a network environment with several RSTS, RSX,
ULTRIX, and VMS systems on DECnet, where DECmail-ll is able to send and
receive mail from VMSmail and other RSTS, RSX-llM-PLUS, Micro/RSX, or
A-to-Z systems running electronic mail. DECmail-ll uses VMS Message Router
or the VMSmail Gateway to interface PDP-ll electronic mail with other
Message Router-based mail systems, including ALL-IN-l, PC ALL-IN-l,
and VAX DECmail.
User's names can be defined by the system manager or individual users to
entirely hide references to network locations.
SPD 13.19 for RSTS/E and Micro/RSTS
SPD 13.27 for RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX

A-to-Z Electronic Mail

See description under A-to-Z Software.

A-to-Z Document Transfer

See description under A-to-Z Software.

Software 9.31

Software
Diagnostics

Diagnostic Software

PDP-11 and MicroPDP-11 diagnostic kits are available to support the maintenance of standard PDP-11 CPUs and peripheral devices. The diagnostics reduce
downtime by eliminating "shotgun" -style troubleshooting, as they allow the
user to pinpoint the defective unit within the system. PDP-11 diagnostics are
protected under u.s. Copyright Laws (Unlicensed). The diagnostics are provided on an "as is" basis, without expressed or implied warranty. For more details, refer to the Self-Maintenance Services Price Book.

Additional Services for
PDP-II Systems Maintenance

Maintenance Documentation Service (MDS) is essential for all PDP-11 customer implementing a self-maintenance program. The service provides hardware maintenance documentation as well as PDP-11 diagnostics listings on
microfiche (available only through Maintenance Documentation Service) that
provides further diagnostic fault isolation from module to logic path and integrated curcuit. PDP-11 hardware modifications and system revision level
changes are included in the PDP-11 microfiche library. An update service is
available that automatically reports the latest changes to the PDP-11 system
hardware and diagnostics as released from engineering. New or updated Diagnostic Listings are issued coincidentally to the release of new. or update diagnostic media. Note: Although diagnostics are usually shipped with a system,
they remain the property of Digital and are intended to be removed from the
site with the expiration of the Digital Field Service warranty or contracts. Customers performing self-maintenance must place an order for the diagnostic
they wish to use beyond the warranty period.

Order Numbers
MD-PDPI1-00 PDP-11 Maintenance Documentation and Diagnostic Listings
MD-PDPI1-R PDP-11 Documentation/Diagnostic Update Service
MD-PDPII-L PDP-11 Diagnostic Listings Only
MD-PDPI1-LR PDP-11 Diagnostic Listings Update Service
MD-PDPI1-D PDP-11 Documentation Only
MD-PDPI1-DR PDP-11 Documentation Update Service

9.32

Software

Professional 380 Software
Operating Systems
Professional Operating System*
(P/OS)

The Professional Operating System (P/OS) is an enhanced subset of Digital's
popular PDP-ll/RSX-llM-PLUS operating system. PIOS is a multitasking,
resource-sharing, realtime operating system with VAX and PDP-ll file structure compatibility. For technical or experienced personnel, a subset of the traditional Digital Command Language (DCL) is available. For less experienced
people, the PIOS menu system, characterized by user-friendly menus, on-screen
prompts, and abundant in-context help, is available.
The PIOS RMS and Files-ll file structures give the Professional compatibility
with Digital's VAX and PDP-ll systems. PIOS serves as the primary operating
system for the Professional's outstanding communications and graphics capabilities, as well as for the Professional's extensive listing of application development products.
PIOS Hard Disk provides new support for additional terminals as well as the
diskless Professional 300 Series systems.

Order Numbers
QBA13·A3 PIOS for diskette-based system
QBA13-H3 PIOS diskette update
QBA02.A3 plOS for hard-disk-based system
QBA02.H3 plOS hard-disk update
QBA89·UZ PIOS Add Four License

Q*XXX·A3 Includes single-use license, documentation, binaries, warranty,
and media (RX50)
Q*XXX.C3 Includes single-use license, documentation, binaries, and media
(RX50); no warranty
Q*XXX.H3 Update kit only - includes documentation and binaries
(Note: An -A3 or -C3 software license is a prerequisite.)
Ordering and product information for all PDP-11 Software products, including those of other vendors, can be found in the PD P-ll Software Source Book,
(EB-291 02-41).

Software 9.33

Professional 380 Software
Operating Systems

RT·ll on the Professional

RT-ll native on the Professional is nearly identical to the traditional RT-ll
system, featuring the same compact size, speed, and simplicity of use that
have made RT so popular. RT-ll on the Professional allows users to take advantage of the Professional's video bit map, and provides the VTCOM communications option to enable Professionals to emulate a VT 100 terminal for communication with host systems, including VAX. RT-l1 provides a full development
environment on the Professional.

Order Numbers
QBA39·A3 RT-ll on the Professional, license with warranty
QBA39·H3 RT-ll on the Professional, update
The following languages are available under RT -11 on the Professional:

Order Numbers
QA609·C3 FORTRAN-77 for RT-ll
QB813·A3 FORTRAN IV for RT-ll on the Professional
QB913·A3 BASIC-PLUS for RT-ll on the Professional

Professional CTS-300

Professional CTS-300 is a commercial operating system that bundles RT-11
with DIBOL. Professional CTS-300 is a disk-based single-user multitasking
system designed to support commercial applications on the Professional.
DIBOL is a high-level procedural language designed specifically for interactive business data processing, and is highly compatible with DIBOL
implementations running on other operating system, including VAX/VMS,
RSX-IIM-PLUS, RSTS/E and P/OS.

Order Numbers
QB354-A3 Professional CTS-300, license with warranty
QB354·H3 Professional CTS-300, update

9.34

Software

Professional 380 Software
Application Development Tools/Networking and Communications

PRO/BASIC

PRO/BASIC is a highly interactive BASIC interpreter available for both the
diskette- and hard-disk-based P/OS operating systems. PRO/BASIC emphasizes
ease-of-use and is well suited for the everyday programming needs of the end
user. PRO/BASIC supports monochrome or color graphics on all Professional
systems.
Order Numbers
QBA04-A3 PRO/BASIC, license with warranty
QBA04-H3 PRO/BASIC, update

Synergy

Synergy provides a window environment that integrates popular personalproductivity applications. Using Synergy, you can easily produce professionallooking reports that combine text and graphics, and you can develop and share
data between applications. Synergy offers the latest, enhanced versions of the
PROSE PLUS text and graphics editor, Synergy Datamanager, Synergy Spreadsheet, Synergy Graph, PRO/Communications (including PRO LAT Ethernet
terminal support), Synergy File Services, Synergy Chess, Synergy Calculator,
and the new Synergy Calendar. An additional enhancement to Synergy is the
inclusion of Synergy application development tools in the PRO/Tool Kit.
Order Numbers
QBA76-A3 Synergy, license with warranty
QBA76-H3 Synergy, update

Networking and Communications

PRO/DECnet

PRO/DECnet enables a Professional 300 Series system to participate as a Phase
IV end node in DECnet computer networks. Through the networking port,
PRO/DECnet provides support for Ethernet-based local area networking.
Through the communications port, PRO/DECnet supports asynchronous or
synchronous DDCMP wide area network communications.
Order Numbers
QBA44-A3 PRO/DECnet, license with warranty
QBA44-H3 PRO/DECnet, update

PRO/Communications

PRO/Communications is the primary communications package for the Professional, performing a wide range of asynchronous communications functions,
including multiple terminal emulations, file conversion services, file transfers
(usually with full error checking), and support for voice/data communications.
PRO/Communications also provides PRO LAT Ethernet terminal support.
Order Numbers
QBA05-A3 PRO/Communications for hard disk, license with warranty
QBA05-H3 PRO/Communications for hard disk, update
QBA45-A3 PRO/Communications for diskette, license with warranty
QBA45-H3 PRO/Communications for diskette, update

Professional 380 Software
Database Management/Spreadsheets

PRO/DATATRIEVE

PRO/DATATRIEVE is a database system that includes an interactive query
language that lets you find information quickly and retrieve that information
in nearly any format you require. PRO/DATATRIEVE Report Writer lets you
organize and summarize information in your database in clear, easy-to-read,
meaningful reports. The PRO/DATATRIEVE Data Dictionary stores a wealth
of information about your database and helps you with your query, update,
and reporting operations. PRO/DATATRIEVE includes a Local Cable Interface
that allows applications to call PRO/DATATRIEVE. PRO/DATATRIEVE runs on
a hard-disk-based Professional.
Order Numbers
QBA43·A3 PRO/DATATRIEVE, license with warranty
QBA43·H3 PRO/DATATRIEVE, update

PRO/RDT

PRO/RDT lets you extract subsets of data from a remote Professional, VAX,
DEC-20, or PDP-11 host. The PRO/RDT facility uses DECnet as the transfer
medium, and DATATRIEVE and its protocols to control information transfer.
The PRO/DATATRIEVE Distributed Data Management Facility (DDMF),
which is packaged with the PRO/RDT application, lets the Professional be a
remote host for other Professionals and must be an installed task on host systems. PRO/RDT runs on a hard-disk-based Professional equipped with a
DECNA Ethernet controller, P/OS Hard Disk, PRO/DECnet, and
PRO/DATATRIEVE.
Order Number QBA71.A3 PRO/RDT, license with warranty

Spreadsheets

PRO 20/20

PRO 20/20™ integrates a high-end electronic spreadsheet with graphics business modeling capabilities to provide an invaluable resource for business professionals. The 20/20 spreadsheet supports 1,000 rows and 1,000 columns of information, and allows users to consolidate, summarize, or link a number of
worksheets. The package makes it easy to bring in external data for analysis,
and provides an interface to PROSE or to stand-alone PROSE PLUS. 20/20 includes an extensive set of functions for financial (e.g., depreciation, future and
present value, and internal rate of return) and scientific (e.g., average, simple
linear regression, and modulo arithmetic) calculations, as well as for data management and reporting. With its graphics capabilities, 20/20 lets users choose
from a selection of pie, bar, comparison bar, stacked bar, and line charts.
Order Number QAAAO·C3 PRO 20/20, license

Professiona1380 Software
Engineering and Scientific

RS/l

RS/1 TM, the Research System, integrates the four most important software
capabilities for the laboratory: database management, analysis, modeling,
and graphics input. RS/1 includes a full range of data-handling techniques that
give researchers complete control of their data, using simple English-based
commands. RS/1 on a hard-disk-based Professional (10 Mbyte or larger recommended) is a full implementation of RS/l- PLUS, which is also available on
Digital's VAX and PDP-11 computers.

Order Number QA497 -C3 RS/1, license

PRO/SIGHT

PRO/SIGHT is a full-function drawing package that allows graphics arts professionals and inexperienced users alike to take full advantage of the Professional's
outstanding graphics capabilities to create striking, colorful graphics. Its easyto-use, menu-driven operations include flexible color and fill pattern selection,
extensive line drawing support, and text positioning within graphics. Users can
create using the keyboard, a mouse, and/or a graphics tablet. PRO/SIGHT runs
on a hard-disk-based Professional.

Order Numbers
QBA35-A3 PRO/SIGHT, license with warranty
QBA35-H3 PRO/SIGHT, update

Software 9.37

Professional 380 Software
Graphics/Accounting

ATHENA/graph

ATHENA/graphTM is a presentation and decision-support business graphics application designed for both novice and experienced users. ATHENA/graph provides a set of model graphics displays that users modify by stepping through a
set of easy-to-use screens. The User Chart' Set and Company Chart Set let you
save and recall charts you have created. ATHENA/graph runs on a hard-diskbased Professional.
Order Number QA550-C3 ATHENA/graph, license

DESIGN GRAPHIX/Executive

DESIGN GRAPHIXTM/Executive (DGx/Exec) is a high-performance, low-cost,
two-dimensional computer-aided design and drafting (CAD) package. DGx/
Exec capabilities include geometric designs, figure and text insertion, graphic
editing, display controls, and bit pad and plotter support. DGx/Exec is a subset
of the full three-dimensional DESIGN GRAPH IX CAD system, and drawings
created with DESIGN GRAPHIX on Digital's other systems can be pro~essed
by DGx/Exec. DGx/Exec runs on a hard-disk-based Professional.
Order Number QA684·C3 DESIGN GRAPHIX/Executive, license

PRO/Videotex

PRO/Videotex is the first local, single-user videotex system available for a
desktop computer system. Because PRO/Videotex maintains the videotex database and NAPLPS decoder directly on the Professional, you can access information without the complications and expense of maintaining a videotex link or
expensive communications equipment. Additionally, PRO/Videotex supports
the VR241 color monitor, and takes advantage of the Professional's high-resolution bit-mapped graphics for unsurpassed videotex graphics displays. PRO/
Videotex runs on a hard-disk-based Professional equipped with the Extended
Bit-mapped Graphics Module.
Order Number QA569·C3 PRO/Videotex, license

Accounting

Multi.Journal Accounting

Multi-Journal Accounting (MJATM) products are general purpose, fully functional accounting applications targeted for use by small businesses. Each of the
five available models can be run as a stand-alone subsidiary ledger or in systems
that are fully integrated with the General Ledger module. Because MJA runs
under Digital's VAX/VMS, RT-11, and RS TS operating systems, it can be used
in environments where file transfers can be done for consolidation purposes.
The MJA modules include General Ledger, Accounts Receivable, Accounts
Payable, Payroll and Personnel, and Order Entry/Inventory. The MJA products
run on a hard-disk-based Professional.
Order Numbers
QA384·C3 MJA General Ledger, license
QA385·C3 MJA Payroll and Personnel, license
QA386·C3 MJA Accounts Receivable, license
QA387-C3 MJA Accounts Payable, license
QA388·C3 MJA Order Entry/Inventory, license

9.38

Software

Professional 380 Software
Word Processing

PROSE PLUS

PROSE PLUS integrates time-saving word-processing features with a full-screen
graphics editor to provide an ideal writing and presentation tool for managers.
The graphics editor incorporates sophisticated drawing routines to let you create title pages, diagrams, organizational charts, schedules, call outs, and other
graphic elements. Text and graphics can be arranged and combined on the
screen or printed page to create effective, appealing presentations. PROSE
PLUS runs on a Professional equipped with a hard disk.

Order Numbers
QBAll·A3 PROSE PLUS, license with warranty
QBAll.H3 PROSE PLUS, update
CT*OSTM (Compu-Tome Office System) is a full-featured word processing system
designed to emulate Digital's WPS78 word processing system, containing the
same menu interface and most of the features users enjoy in Digital word processing. With its scientific character set, CT*OS is particularly useful in technicalor academic environments. CT*OS runs on a hard-disk-based Professional.

Order Number QA767.C3 CT*OS, license
WPS.PLUS/POS

WPS-PLUS/POS is a menu-driven document processing application. Features
include Gold key word processing and list processing with math and sort capabilities. Users can create, edit, and print documents; produce form letters and
maintain mailing lists; file and retrieve documents by folder, title, or number;
include data from another Professional application in a document; and convert
a WPS-PLUS document to and from a P/OS file format, DX file format, and
ASCII file format.

Order Number QBA63·A3 WPS-PLUS/POS, license with warranty

Software

9.39

Professional 380 Software
Specialty/Trademarks

Phoenix· PRO

Phoenix-PRO™ Project Management System Planning and Evaluation is designed to provide management information to the professional manager and analyst. The system is designed in three modules: milestone tracking, milestone
plotting, and network analysis. These modules allow the user to track at a
glance, using one database in a variety of ways. Output formats provide detailed statistical tables, Gantt charts, time-to-completion status charts, and
high-level network drawings.

Order Number QAAC2·C3 Phoenix-PRO Project Management System
Planning and Evaluation, RX50, license
LOGO

LOGO™ is an interactive, user-flexible programming language. It can be used
to develop learning tools, enhance computer literacy, and develop applications
using graphics, mathematics, text-handling, and file manipulation. LOGO
supports multitasking, 16-digit precision floating point, RMS file services, and
GIDIS graphics library. It is easy to learn and use and provides three levels of
help. Math functions include random number generator, Power, PI EXPonent,
Arctan, and natural logarithms.

Order Number QA179·C3 LOGO, RX50, license
Trademarks
AT&T is a trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph Company.
ATHENA/graph is a trademark of Ship Analytics, Inc.
CT*OS is a trademark of Compu-Tome, Inc.
DESIGN GRAPHIX is a trademark of Engineering Systems Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
LOGO is a trademark of Design Research, Inc.
MJA Accounting is a trademark of Prodata, Inc.
Phoenix-PRO is a trademark of Advanced Technology, Inc.
PRO 20/20 is a trademark of Access Technology, Inc.
RS/l is a trademark of Bolt Beranek and Newman, Inc.
Supercomp Twenty is a trademark of Access Technology, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph Company.

9.40 Software

Chapter 10
Services and Publications

Services
Startup Service Packages

Introduction

Startup Service Packages are total service solutions for new system sales.
Startup Service is part of a program that provides integrated services for the
lifecycle of a customers' system.

Startup Service Packages

Startup Service Packages (SSPs) provide cross-functional, comprehensive
service support for the software and training needs of the end users of Digital
products. SSPs consist of defined sets of services essential to successful
system installation, startup, and usage during the first year of operation.
Digital offers three comprehensive levels of Startup Service Packages. Each.
SSP provides immediate training upon purchase, DECstart where applicable,
one year of service for the operating system and eligible dependent software,
and initial media and documentation.
These packages are priced at the system level; that is, they cover all eligible
Digital licensed software operating on a particular system at no additional
charge. Prices are targeted to be less than the sum of the service pieces for
typical software configurations. SSPs can be included in the Digital Business
Agreement (DBA) discount structure.
SSPs are currently available for three operating systems: RSX-llM-PLUS,
RSTS/E, and RT-ll.

Software Configurator

10.2

Services and Publications

The Software Configurator module (SC) of the Automated Quoting System
(AQS) contains all business rules and service exceptions for SSPs. Quotes are
easy to generate and accurate when the SC module is used. The SC module
will automatically generate the correct, corresponding H kit (media and documentation) at $0.00 for each license on the AQS quote.

Services
Startup Service Packages

Startup Service Package III

Package III is the recommended solution for providing technical assistance and
training to get system users off to quick and productive starts. It contains the
most comprehensive full year of service support for operating systems and their
dependent software.

Startup Service Package II

Package II is appropriate for a customer's technical staff who have the time
and the resources to support the new system after Digital has trained the staff,
installed the product, and oriented the staff concerning basic system operation.

Startup Service Package I

Package I is appropriate for a technical staff requiring minimal training and
having the time, resources and skill to install and support the new system.
Package III

Package II

Package I

SPS DEC support
Service

SPS Basic Service

Initial
Media/Documentation

Training

Training on selected
systems

DEC start Plus

DECstart

Software Installation

Startup Package Components

Installation Component

Installation covers the operating system and qualified dependent products
installed concurrently. Some communications products are exceptions to the
courtesy installation and will carry additional installation fees. Software Product Descriptions indicate installation specifics. Dependent products installed at
a later time will incur the normal add-on and travel charges.

Media and Documentation Component
Media and documentation are provided with the Startup Package of the operating system and qualified dependent products purchased with the system at no
additional charge. Software products purchased for a system at a later time will
require the customer to purchase the appropriate documentation and media
kit, if desired.

Training Component

In most Startup Packages, customers will receive an amount of training doll~rs
and a DECplan account from Digital's Educational Services. This enables
customers to choose the training solution that meets the educational needs of
their organization.
A DECplan account representative will provide customers with assistance in
determining the most beneficial ways to allocate their DECplan dollars and
purchase training appropriate to match their needs.

Services and Publications

10.3

Services
Startup Service Packages/Field Service

The training component in certain packages contains a specific educational
product (e.g., a Computer-Based Instruction course, a Digital Press book, etc.).
A DECplan account can also be initiated any time training is purchased in
advance from Educational Services. Customers always have the option of
purchasing/prepaying for additional training at discount rates.

Service for Software Component

Service for software agreements cover the operating system and dependent
products for one year, commencing with the installation of the operating system. Dependent products installed later are covered for the period remaining
on the operating system service agreement. For customers who need a level or
combination of services that differ from the Startup Packages, all traditional
software services are available in an "a la carte" manner. Packages may be
augmented by purchasing additional service items.

DECstart Component

DEC start Services are provided with most Level II and III Startup Packages.
A startup consulting service delivered onsite to customers' staffs by a Digital
Software Specialist, the service familiarizes customers with their new operating systems and provides hands-on experience with system setup, management
and operations.

Field Service
Integrated Services

Basic Service for
Hardware and Software

Digital's Basic Service for Hardware and Software integrates the benefits of
onsite Basic Service for hardware with Digital's Basic Service for software.
This service is designed for customers who require onsite hardware
maintenance during regular hours, need highly responsive answers to
software-related questions or problems, and want software updates. This
service is available for selected products only.

Full System DECservice

Full System DECservice is an onsite, hardware/software service product available for Digital's DECmate I, DECmate II, Rainbow, and Professional Personal
Computer Systems. It is designed for customers who need highly responsive
answers to questions and problems with their hardware and Digital Classified
Software, and who require committed response times and extended coverage
- up to 24 hours a day, 7 days a week for hardware maintenance.

Full System Basic Service

Full System Basic Service is an onsite, hardware/software product available for
Digital's DECmate I, DECmate II, Rainbow, and Professional Personal Computer Systems. This system service product is designed for customers who need
highly responsive answers to questions and problems with their hardware and
software, and who require onsite hardware maintenance for up to 8 hours per
day, Monday through Friday.

10.4 Services and Publications

Services
Field Service

Full System Carry-in
Service

Full System Carry-in Service is an offsite, hardware/software service product
for DECmate I, DECmate II, Rainbow, and Professional Personal Computer
Systems. This service product is designed for customers who need highly responsive answers to questions and problems with their hardware and software,
who choose to deliver and pick up their systems at a Digital Servicenter for
hardware maintenance, and who require a maximum turnaround time of 2 days
for hardware maintenance.

Hardware Services

Digital's Field Service Organization offers a range of onsite and offsite postwarranty services. Over 22,000 Field Service Personnel in more than 450 locations worldwide with an inventory of over $500 million in parts are ready to
provide the support needed for continuous productivity.

Onsite Services

DECservice

DECservice is Digital's most comprehensive onsite service product. It provides
a committed four-hour response time for hardware under DEC service contract
- when located within 100 miles of a Digital service location. DECservice
provides continuous repairs until the problem is solved, a program of preventive
maintenance, installation of the latest engineering changes, and automatic
escalation for complex problems. DECservice also allows you to choose the
hours of coverage you need to support your application - up to 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.

Basic Service

Basic Service offers economical, yet full-service, coverage. Your calls for service
receive priority status, second only to DECservice calls. You also receive preventive maintenance, installation of the latest engineering changes, and automatic escalation of complex problems.

Per Call Service

If your application doesn't demand comprehensive support, you can take
advantage of one of Digital's per-call programs. Per-call service is available
onsite and offsite on a noncontractual basis. Service is available Monday
through Friday during standard business hours, from 8 A.M. to 5 P.M.
For onsite per-call service, you pay for the time and materials required for each
service call. Offsite per-call service is available through mail-in board
replacement and carry-in system repairs.

Services and Publications

10.5

Services
Field Service

Network Services

As part of Digital's commitment to meet the total computing needs of its customers, Field Service provides the full set of services that are needed throughout the process of planning, implementing, and operating a network. Most
networks, including those with non-Digital products, can be completely
maintained under a standard Digital Service Agreement. Digital, acting as a
single source for service, delivers professional services on a worldwide basis,
thus ensuring a consistent and high-quality response to distributed and/or
multinational networking requirements.
The Field Service Network Services product portfolio includes both customquote consulting and project management services, and the new SERVpak services, which provide fixed-price planning, installation, and maintenance of
Standard Network Packages (SNPs). The specific services include
Planning
- Network Physical Design Consulting
Implementation
- Network Physical Installation Management
- Network Certification
Operations
- Ongoing Maintenance
Network Tools
- NMCC/VAX ETHERnim
SERVpak Services
DEC site Services

Media Maintenance Service

Digital's Media Maintenance Service is a comprehensive program that provides
total media maintenance support for your disk cartridges (RL01, RL02, RK05,
RK06, and RK07). The program provides
• Inspection of all disk cartridges
• Thorough cleaning of all cartridges
• Labeling of all cartridges
• Installation of SHOCKWATCH warning device
• Cartridge warranty for life of your Field Service contract
• Free replacement of defective cartridges that are under this program
• Reduced downtime, increased system performance

Laser Printer Service

Laser Printer Service is a supplement to Digital's onsite DECservice, Basic
Service, and Full Service System Agreements. The base maintenance price for
Laser Printer Service includes a charge for a specific number of copies per
month. An additional charge will be made for each copy printed above the
monthly allowance.

DECal! Service

DECall Service provides onsite hardware service on specified personal computers, terminals, and hardcopy printers. A minimal retainer fee for each unit
ensures fast, priority response time and provides a predetermined fixed charge
for each service call, including all parts and labor.

10.6

Services and Publications

Services
Field Service

Platter Removal Service

Winchester Platter Removal Contract Service is an optional addition to Digital's onsite DECservice and Basic Service agreements. It is a unique remedial
service, providing removal of platters from sealed head and disk assemblies
(HDAs) that have failed. This service offering is designed to meet the needs of
those customers who cannot allow media containing secure or proprietary data
to leave their premises.

Recover-all Service

Recover-all Service is an optional addition to Digital's DECservice, Basic Service, Full System DECservice, and Full System Basic Service onsite service
agreements. Recover-all Service extends the services available through these
agreements to cover equipment damage that would not normally be included. It
is designed to meet the needs of customers requiring prompt recovery from the
loss of computing power.

DECompatible Service

DECompatible Service is an optional addition to Digital's DEC service, Basic
Service, and Carry-in service agreements. It provides service to selected nonDigital products connected to Digital systems.

Offsite Services

Digital Servicenter

The Digital Servicenter (DSC) is a carry-in repair center for Digital's terminals
and small systems offering low-cost repairs at over 175 convenient locations.
At the DSC you receive the same quality service as you would at your office
with a guaranteed two-day turnaround on your equipment. At the DSC you
may choose from contract (fixed annual cost), per-call (fixed labor charge plus
parts), or parts exchange (pay only for the part you determine to be bad).

Carry-in Service

This is Digital's low-cost alternative to onsite support. You can carry your terminal to any of the 160-plus Digital Servicenters throughout the U.S. and pick
up the repaired system within two days. Or, if you perform your own maintenance, you can carry in your faulty module and we'll make an over-the-counter
exchange.
Carry-in service is available through a one-year, fixed-cost agreement or on a
per-call basis that charges a flat rate for labor, plus the cost of all parts used in
the repair. All carry-in service and parts come with a 90-day warranty.

DECmailer

DECmailer is a return-to-factory replacement service for Digital customers
who maintain their equipment to the module or subassembly level. It provides
five-day turnaround, free return shipping, 90-day warranty, 24-hour emergency service, monthly billing, and quarterly activity reports.

Salvi"s and Publications

10.7

Services
Field Service

Software Product Services

Digital's Field Service organization provides advisory, preventive, and remedial services to help customers before, during, and after software installation.
Software Product Services offers several levels of support on a per product and
system-level basis. For customers purchasing additional systems, contracts and
add-on services are offered. SPS also has special services for multiple systems,
products sold through OEMs and distributors, and small-business applications.

Service Agreements

For customers requiring ongoing support there are DECsupport, Basic, and
Self-Maintenance annual service contracts.

DECsupport Service for Software

DECsupport is the ideal solution for maximum user productivity and system
utilization. It provides high-level personalized support and saves customers the
time and associated costs of doing their own routine software maintenance and
installation of updates and also provides critical onsite assistance when
required.

Basic Service for Software

Basic is designed for customers who have the time, technical expertise, and
resources to maintain their own systems, but who need highly responsive
answers to questions or problems crucial to their business. Basic Service
provides access to software specialists and to online information.

Self-Maintenance Service for Software

Self-Maintenance is for customers who have highly technical staffs with the
time and resources to maintain their own system software and who require only
updates and written communication channels with Digital.
Service Agreements
DECsupport

Basic

Self-Maintenance

Installation of Software
Updates
Preventive Maintenance
Remedial Support
Telephone Support

Telephone Support

Digital's Software
Information Network

Software Media and
Software Media and
Software Media and
Documentation Updates Documentation Updates Documentation Updates
Technical Newsletters

10.8

Services and Publications

Technical Newsletters

Services
Field Service
Service Agreement Components

Installation of Updates

Digital installation of new software releases and interim updates for all operating system and dependent products under contract. Products may be installed
by a Customer Support Center Specialist assigned to the customers account or
installed onsite by a local Specialist. Central delivery advantages include fast
installation pretested to the customer's unique system configuration and scheduled at a convenient time. It is available on applicable products. Scheduling is
subject to the approval of the Customer Support Center (CSC).

Preventive Maintenance

Central delivery includes outbound calls from the customer assigned CSC
Specialist.

Remedial Support

Remedial Support includes remote diagnostics, fault isolation, and correction
of problems with installations of solutions or workarounds. Onsite Remedial
Support is available during contracted hours of coverage for problems that
cannot be resolved by telephone and that, by mutual agreement, are critical.

Telephone Support

Toll-free advisory assistance is provided by Digital's Customer Support Centers
24 hours a day, seven days per week for most Digital operating systems.

Digital's Software Information
Network

Customers may access this easy to use service database for software information. Flash messages alert the user to any high-impact software problems and
their timely solutions.

Software Media and Documentation
Updates

The customer automatically receives new software releases and interim updates
with corresponding documentation for all operating systems and dependent
products under contract.

Technical Newsletters

Technical newsletters and dispatches contain information about new software
developments and enhancements, programming notes, and documentation
updates.

Special Services for Multiple
Systems/CPUs

Networking Services

Software Product Service agreements apply to Digital's software networking
products.

Supplementary Service for Multiple
Systems/CPUs

SPS provides service options supplementary to systems already under a service
agreement.

Media Update Service

The Media Update Service is a subscription service that provides SPS customers with a means of obtaining the machine readable media in order to install new software updates on two or more CPUs. Customers may elect their
choice of available distribution medium for additional systems. A prerequisite
for this Service is that customers have a DEC support, Basic, or SelfMaintenance Software Product Services agreement with Digital.

Services and Publications

10.9

Services
Field Service

Documentation Update Service

The Documentation Update Service supplies service customers with additional
copies of the documentation-only portion of a Software Product Services contract. This service is available for most Digital 16-, 32-, and 36-bit products
that offer DECsupport, Basic, and Self-Maintenance Service for Software.

Service Right-to-Copy

This option allows customers with a software agreement to automatically copy
all software product updates under an SPS agreement onto another specified
CPU. Service Right-to-Copy is purchased per product per CPU.

Additional Telephone Support Center
Contact Service

This service allows customers who have a Basic or DECsupport Service agreement to add one additional name to the list of people entitled to call Digital's
Customer Support Center.

Additional Software Dispatch
Subscription Service

Customers who have a Digital Software Product Services agreement can obtain
an additional copy of dispatches and technical newsletters supplied under
the agreement.

Software Revision Right-to-Copy

The Software Revision Right-to-Copy option allows customers to copy a single
software product update onto a single, additional CPU.

Software Product Services for
Resellers

Several programs exist that allow resellers to sell Digital products to their end
users. Your local Digital office can provide more information.

A La Carte Options for Single and

The availability of these supplementary options can vary by country. Customers should contact the nearest Digital sales or service office for information
on availability.

Multiple Systems

Installation Service

The purchase of installation as a separate service is appropriate in those instances in which there is no need to purchase a Startup Package or there is a
need to have add-on dependent products installed. Installation Service ensures
that customers have received all of the proper distribution materials and that
the system generation process for the operating system and/or dependent software products is completed.

Software Product Updates

A software product update (H Kit) provides the most current release of a software product, including documentation, for customers who do not have an SPS
service agreement, and who wish to update the product to its latest revision.
Further detailed information on specific Software Product Services is available
from your local Field Service Sales Support Specialist.

10.10

Services and Publications

Services
Software Services

Introduction

Software Services offers a wide range of comprehensive services to support
Digital's system customers during any aspect of their system analysis, software
development, or implementation efforts. These services start with the personal
attention of a Digital software consultant and continue for as long as the customer owns the system.
A Digital software specialist often works with a Digital sales representative to
evaluate a prospective user's needs prior to purchase, in order to recommend
hardware/software solutions appropriate to the customer's requirements. A
full range of services is available to assist customers throughout the planning,
implementation, and production phases of their systems.

Computer Services

Digital's Computer Services is the Software Services business for providing
automated information and software access to its customers. Three principal
service offerings are available to deliver the total business solution to a customer's computer resource problem. Additionally, a telephone support service
offering a 24-hour-a-day, 365-day-a-year hotline staffed by Digital software
experts is available.
These services are accessed locally and delivered remotely from Digital's
Information Network Center. The network makes access only a local phone
call away.

Service Bureau Services
(Timesharing)

• Enhanced Application Network Services - combines terminals/micros, customer systems, Computer Services Systems and our nationwide network into
an integrated application that is delivered nationwide.
• Hardware/Software Evaluation Service - makes available the VAX, PDP, DECSYSTEM 20s and their associated software for customer evaluation delivered
via our nationwide network.
• Project Resource Services - provides VAX, PDP, and DEC SYSTEM 20 computing resources and associated software delivered via nationwide network for
major Software Services professional consulting projects.
• Incremental Computer Resources - provides VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM 20
computing resources delivered via our nationwide network for special customer
needs such as peak-load processsing.

Disaster Back-up Services

Back-up and disaster recovery services allow customers to anticipate and plan
for disruptions involving their computer facilities, and to continue processing
critical applications at computer facilities other than their own.
• Restart - Disaster Backup Services for VAX and PDP computing resources
available within 24 hours for emergency processing.
• Disaster/Plan-80 - A contingency planning methodology available to assist
customers in developing their own contingency plan.

Facility Management Services

• A long-term customized/dedicated packaging of service offerings consisting
of computing resources and operational staff available on the customer's site
or Digital's. Facility Management Services will free customers from the need
to develop operations resources to support information systems.

Services and Publications 10.11

Services
Software Services

Professional Services

Digital's Professional Services organization offers a full range of consulting
services to help customers analyze, develop, implement, and productively use
their Digital computer systems. These services benefit customers at all stages
of a system life cycle from planning and design, to the development and delivery of solutions through a successful system startup and user implementation.
In addition, Professional Services offers productivity services such as performance monitoring and capacity planning, and migration and conversion services.
Professional Services consultants possess extensive practical experience in
areas such as manufacturing, office automation, information systems, artificial
intelligence, and networks.

Planning and Design Services

Planning and Design Services assist customers in evaluating their needs by determining the best approach to estimate the structure, systems, environment, and
cost factors to provide the optimal solution. Areas of concentration include
long-range growth planning, networks, office systems, and specific applications.
Network Planning and Design Services help customers construct a new network
or reconstruct an existing one to meet information flow requirements based on
business needs, organization structure, and operational procedures.
Office Analysis and Design Services provide critical management analysis and
planning tasks that precede the implementation of an office automation system. A Digital consultant studies how each department in the customer's organization works, and determines the technology and applications that will most
effectively achieve specific business goals.
Artificial Intelligence Planning and Design Services provide critical data to help
customers select AI applications with the highest potential payoff and the
lowest potential risks to meet business objectives.

Custom Applications Consulting
and Projects

By working with customers to understand and analyze their unique computing
needs and applications, Professional Services provides solutions designed for
specific applications. A large-scale project could result in an entire turnkey
solution; a smaller-scale project could mean the building of a new application
or the expansion of an existing one.

DECstart Services

For maximum productivity and cost-effectiveness, DECstart Plus and
DECstart should be sold as part of a Startup Package. However, all DECstart
services may be purchased ala carte as well as in a Startup Package. One available option upgrades the DEC start component in Startup Package Level II
to a DECstart Plus Service. (See Descriptions under Startup Package
Components.)

DECstart Consulting Services

DECstart Consulting Services consist of several levels of fixed-price consulting
services and automated system management tools that prepare customers to effectively use and manage their systems. They are available for all major Digital
operating systems, ALL-IN-l, networks, and some layered products.

Office Application Support Services

Office Application Support Services provide customized support and individualized onsite consulting for office staff. This includes orientation in the
use of office products, support for the transition to an automated office, office
procedures consulting, and training on customized applications installed on
customer's systems.

10.12

Services and Publications

Services
Software Services

Performance and Capacity Planning

Performance and Capacity Planning helps customers monitor their systems,
evaluate performance, resolve problems, and make recommendations on how to
optimize system utilization. Specific areas of focus are system performance
monitoring and capacity planning, and network management control and
DECnet monitoring.

Migration and Conversion Services

RPG Migration Assistance Service assists in the organization, planning, and implementation of the conversion of RPG source programs, data files, and command procedures from IBM System/3, System/34, or System/36 environments

to the Digital VAX environment.
Conversion services enable customers to move from one operating system to
another or from other vendors' software to Digital's.
Network Management Services

Digital's network specialists provide customers with a family of comprehensive
network services. These services include Network Planning and Design
Services, and Network Consulting Services.

The Network Planning and
Design Service

The Network Planning and Design Service provides Digital communications
expertise which assists customers in defining or reevaluating network requirements. It develops network designs aimed at meeting customers' business and
technical goals.

Network Consulting Services

Digital's software specialists assist customers at any stage in their network
planning, operation, implementation, or modification. Digital's consultants
can provide appropriate assistance, from overall project management to
specific advice on a particular problem.

Management Services

These new services bring contemporary planning methodologies and advanced
technological approaches together to come up with solutions in the four key
areas of change identified by leading experts as critical for business success.

Network Planning and Design - Our management consulting team goes to the
customers' site to help them plan and design a data communications network
that supports their b.usiness needs, organizational structure, and operational
procedures. Customers will learn how to keep costs down, keep up with
technology, and keep expanding.
Office Analysis and Planning - Digital is ideally positioned to help customers
make sound choices for their office environment. First, we'll study how each
department in the customer's organization works. Then, we'll determine the
technology and applications that will most effectively help them achieve their
business goals. Our professional analysts and planners will work closely with all
levels of personnel to record goals, objectives, and expectations. We'll conduct
indepth requirements analysis. When we've collected and evaluated this data,
we'll present the customer with a formal statement of our findings. In this
document, we'll recommend how customers can best implement office
information technology within their departments (or across organizations)
to achieve their stated goals.

Services and Publications

10.13

Services
Software Services/Educational Services

Capacity Planning - Using specially developed Performance Monitoring and
Analysis tools, we'll help customers restore good service levels and efficiency
use, increase their ROI, and give them information they need to make timely
and appropriate decisions on their next equipment purchases.
Arti/icial Intelligence - Digital has had more experience with AI technology
than any other company, and we can offer our customers all the traditional
Digital support services plus the real advantages of single-vendor management.
Through our unique multistep methodology, we will study the customer's business needs, organizational goals, and technological requirements in depth.
Then we will help them select the applications with the highest potential payoff
and lowest potential risk.

Office Application Support Services

These services provide customized support, feature individualized onsite
consulting for office staff, office product usage orientation, office automation transition support, office procedures consulting, and user training on
customer applications.
Digital's customers benefit from an acceleration in productivity gains and
improved acceptance of technological changes in the office environment.

Project Services

These services provide the customer with the expertise to solve business problems through customized solutions, applications expertise, project management, ongoing support, postimplementation support, and flexible solutions.

Resident and Advisory Services

When Digital's customers have an adequate software staff and wish to maintain project management responsibility, Resident and Advisory Services guides
customers in effectively using Digital hardware and software. The services feature software consulting, short-term staffing, and assistance to personnel using
new systems.

Application Startup Services

This low-cost service is geared toward application management and
productivity.

Educational Services
Digital's Customer Training
Programs

Educational Services offers avariety of training options, each with distinctive
features and benefits, allowing customers to make the most effective use of
their training dollars. Comprehensive educational curricula are available in a
selection of training options.

Lecture/Lab Instruction Program

Job-relevant classroom lectures including hands-on laboratory experience are
available at Digital's worldwide Training Centers. Instructors interact with students in fully-equipped computer lab environments.

Onsite Courses

Lecture/Lab Instruction can also be given at a site chosen by the customer. Onsite course content is identical to the content of courses offered at the Training
Centers. This alternative educational solution is often used when many employees need training.

Exclusive Courses

Lecture/Lab Instruction can also be designed specifically for a particular customer's employees and taught at one of Digital's Training Centers. This is an
attractive option for a customer when onsite training facilities are not available
and many employees need training.

10.14

Sel'v1Celil And PublicAtinnlil

Services
Educational Services/Leasing Services

Self-paced Instruction (SPI) and
Computer-based Instruction (eBl)

Self-paced Instruction generally consists of educational media, (either textbased, computer-based, or audio/visual-based), with educational materials such
as student guides, workbooks, sumaries, and tests that enable students to progress at their own pace. SPI can include Computer-based Instruction, in which
students interact with the course material online, at their own terminal. SPI,
CBI, and Audio/Visual (A/V) courseware are cost-effective ways to educate
many people at a relatively low cost. Digital's SPI, CBI, and A/V courses are
available as off-the-shelf products.

Seminars

Short, high-quality courses on topics of interest to managers and technical specialists are offered. These seminars are taught by experienced professionals
from both Digital and the computer industry at large. Using a highly interactive format, these seminars provide key employees with state-of-the-art information as well as the opportunity for stimulating exchanges with peers. Seminars are held regularly at Digital Training Centers and at hotels and conference
centers in major cities throughout the United States. Special arrangements can
also be made to customize seminars and to hold them onsite at customer
facilities.

Educational Technologies Group

For customers who need custom training programs that integrate people and
technology, the Educational Technologies Group provides many types of custom training programs for groups such as managers, office professionals, technical staff members, and factory-floor personnel. Offerings include computerbased training (CBT), computer-based interactive video (CBIV), consulting and
analysis services, and other programs. Educational Services can perform a
specific needs analysis for a specific job or group of jobs, or a broader training
analysis to examine an entire organization's training needs. From these
analyses, specific training programs can be developed and implemented.
Examples of these customer training programs might be job-integrated training
applications from the factory floor using graphics and interactive video, advanced seminars for managers, or computer-based training for office personnel.
Some of these programs may include the creation of a training network from
the customer's computer network, which then allows many users to simultaneously access courses or databases.
In general, the highest quality training is delivered in the most appropriate format, whether it's CBT, CBIV, lecture-based training, linear video, or seminars.
For further information, call 1-800-343-8321 (outside the state of Massachusetts) or 1-800-343-8321 (within Massachusetts). The mailing address is
Digital Equipment Corporation
Training and Information Products Group
12A Esquire Road
North Billerica, MA 01862

Leasing Services
As part of Digital's total solution, the U.S. Customer Finance organization
provides financing and leasing alternatives for customers who choose not to
purchase Digital's products on a cash basis. Whether our customer is responding to budgetary limitations or prefers to preserve cash and bank lines for other
purposes, Customer Finance can facilitate the acquisition of Digital's products.

Services and Publications

10.15

Services
Leasing Services/Digital's Electronic Store

Programs

• Master Lease - A convenient arrangement that supports the delivery of
equipment over an extended period of time. Each delivery (Lease Schedule)
can be tailored to the Lessee's specific needs, e.g., fair market value option or
prenegotiated option.
• DEClease - A simple-to-use lease contract that will support single-delivery
leasing needs. Step-by-step instructions are provided for both Digital's personnel as well as customers.

Plans

• Tax-oriented Leases - Leases that use tax benefits and residual values in their
pricing mechanisms. Terms range from 2 to 5 years. The title remains with the
lessor and the equipment can be purchased from the lessor at its fair market
value at the end of the term. This plan is extremely price sensitive.
• Lease with Option to Purchase - Leases that normally include a prenegotiated
purchase-option. Tax benefits often flow to the lessee. Terms range from 2 to
5 years. The title remains with the lessor until the purchase option is exercised.

Customers Supported

• State and Municipal Subdivisions
• Commercial (for profit businesses)
• Nonprofit (Hospitals, Associations, Private Educational Institutions)
• Federal Government
• Prime Contractors

Field Support

• Customer Finance Managers are conveniently located throughout the country.
They work with customers and Digital account managers in developing financial strategies which best meet customer needs. For more information, please
contact your Customer Finance Manager or call 1-800-343-3451 (outside the
state of Massachusetts) or 1-800-322-3239 (within Massachusetts).

Digital's Electronic Store
The Electronic Store is a free online computer service that helps customers
evaluate, select, and purchase products online. The store offers quick, easy
shopping for Digital products such as VAXstations, personal computers,
microcomputers, software, tapes, disks, terminals, printers, environmental
products, accessories, and supplies. The store is a simple menu-driven system
requiring no expertise or training.
Using rapid-search methods, such as keywords, product lists, and part numbers, the Store helps to evaluate Digital products and services through its
descriptions, demonstrations, selection charts, cable diagrams, prices, and
other configuration aids. The information is organized in conversational
menus.
The store saves time and money because orders are placed online. Critical
ordering information is displayed, such as correct part numbers, accurate
pricing, and product availability. Once the order is placed, it is immediately
entered into Digital's order-processing system-fast and error-free.
To register for an account online, dial 800-332-3366 at 1200/2400 baud from
8 A.M. to midnight, EST with any VT100, VT200, Rainbow, DECmate, PRO,
VAXstation, or other PC that emulates a VT100.

10.16

Services and Publications

Publications
Digital Press

Digital Press, the publishing entity of Digital's Educational Services group,
produces practical, timely books for today's computer community. Digital Press
serves the computer professional and academic and business communities with
books on computer technology, computer management and business applications, general applications, the history of computing, subjects for first-time
computer users, and books with specific reference to Digital products.
Written by leading authorities and practitioners in the computer field, Digital
Press books provide accurate, up-to-the-minute information on computer technology. They address the real-world interests of computer professionals including managers, programmers, systems designers, and business users, and they
meet the academic needs of students as well as instructors. No matter what their
computer interests are, readers find Digital Press books useful and stimulating.
The following titles are a small sample of Digital Press's offerings and reflect
the most recently published texts:

A Programmer's Guide to COMMON LISP
Deborah G. Tatar

KERMIT: A File Transfer Protocol
Frank da Cruz

Microprocessor Logic Design
Nick Tredennick

RSX: A Guidefor Users
John F. Pieper

The Artificial Intelligence Experience: An Introduction
SusanJ. Scown

Local Area Networks: An Introduction to the Technology
John E. McNamara

Working with R T-ll
David Beaumont, Anne Summerfield, and Julie Wright

HANDS-On BASIC for the DEC Professional Computer
Herbert Peckham with Wade Ellis and Ed Lodi

The Human Factor: Designing Computer Systems for People
Richard Rubinstein and Harry M. Hersh with Henry F. Ledgard
Digital Press also offers valuable reference handbooks, including many
specifically geared towards PDP-II computer users. Further information about
Digital Press can be obtained by writing
Digital Press
Digital Equipment Corporation
12A Esquire Road
Billerica, MA 01862-9990

Services and Publications

10.17

~ublications
r

Literature

User Manuals
and Literature

MicroPDP-ll systems and software are supported by a comprehensive set of
documents dedicated to their operation, programming, and maintenance.
These are periodically updated to include new developments and equipment
and can be ordered through Digital's Publishing and Circulation Services. The
following list contains some of the titles and associated Digital order numbers
of documents that may be useful to MicroPDP-ll system users.
To order these documents, write
Digital Equipment Corporation
Publishing and Circulation Services
10 Forbes Road
Northboro, Massachusetts 01532-2597

Hardware Manuals

EB-29317-41

PDP-ll Systems Handbook

EB-23657 -DP

PDP-ll Architecture Handbook

EB-26077-DP

UNIBUS CPU Handbook

EK-1184E·TM

PDP-ll/84 System Technical and Reference Manual

EK-1184D·MG PDP-ll/84-D System Maintenance and User Guide

Software Manuals

Networking Manuals

Miscellaneous

10.18

Services and Publications

EK-1184E·MG

PDP-ll/84-E System Maintenance and User Guide

EB-28783-41

PDP-ll Software Handbook

EB-29102-41

PDP-ll Software Source Book (Volumes 1 and 2)

ED-29631-42

Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide

EB-28987-42

DECconnect Communications System Handbook

EB-26013-42

Digital's Networks: An Architecture with a Future

EB-29097-42

Digital's Solution to Multivendor Networking

ED-317 3 7 -7 8

Self-Maintenance Services Price Book and Reference Guide

ED-31296-94

Environmental Products Reference Guide and Price List

EB-28948-49

Guide to Digital's Industrial and Scientific Products

EB-24501-JL

Guide to Personal Computing

EB-26192-56

Guide to Computer Graphics for Business

EB-26375-56

DECtalk: A Guide to Voice

EB-27153-62

Introduction to Computer-based Education

Publications
Literature

DECdirect PLUS

To complement your Digital computer system, supporting products such as accessories, supplies, add-on and upgrade products, documentation and selected
hardware options are available for immediate delivery through the DECdirect
PLUS catalog. Network and personal computing products are also available
through DECdirect PLUS. Featuring a colorful, informative format, DECdirect
PLUS makes buying high-quality Digital products easier. For your free copy call
toll-free 800·2.58·1710. The mailing address is
Digital Equipment Corporation
Peripherals and Supplies Group
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, NH 03061

Expansion Products
Reference Guide

Building or adding to your present system? The Expansion Products Reference
Guide from Digital contains detailed information on
• Expansion packaging and power hardware
• Environmental products
• Backplane hardware
• Connector blocks
• Wire wrap modules
• General purpose interfaces
• Tools and test equipment
No system builder can afford to be without this valuable tool. In addition, a
separate price list is included. To order a copy, write
Digital Equipment Corporation
Peripherals and Supplies Group
Continental Boulevard, MK01/W83
Merrimack, NH 03054

Software Documentation
Products Directory

The Software Documentation Products Directory is a single reference source of
selected Digital software documentation products. This directory makes necessary product information readily accessible and it can be used to determine
what documentation products are required to support a particular software option. It includes software documentation kits, source microfiche kits, software
manuals, handbooks, and reference cards.
To order a copy, write
Digital Equipment Corporation
Peripherals and Supplies Group
Continental Boulevard, MK01/W83
Merrimack, NH 03054

Services and Publications 10.19

Publications
Digital Reference Service

Your Personal Guide to Digital's
Organization, Products, and Services

The Digital Equipment Corporation
Reference Service
Guide to Digital

One-stop Information Source

Always Current

• Organization and Support
• Full Spectrum of Product and
Service Offerings
• Digital's OEM Products, Referral
Services, Leasing Programs
• Configuration, Environmental, and
Compatibility Information

• Tailored to Your Needs
• Organized by Product Family,
Applications and Performance
• Extensive Product Overview and
Cross-reference Tables
• Price List

• Quarterly, 'Full-set Replacement'
Updates
• Compiled Exclusively for Subscribers by Digital Specialists
• INSIGHT, Digital's Monthly
Magazine

Ordering Information

I would like to enter
subscription(s) to the Digital Reference Service and subscribe to the quarterly update
service, including newsletter, at the annual cost of $340* each. My check or purchase order is enclosed.
Quarterly Price Lists included for U.S. subscribers ONLY.

If this order is for more than one set, please include the name and mailing address of each subscriber. Allow at least 6
weeks for delivery.
*Price valid in the U.S. only and subject to change without notice.
My company's major business is

o Manufacturing
o Retail/Distribution
o Services Industry
o EDP Consultant/Accounting Firm
o Insurance
o Banking/Finance
o Digital OEM Distributors
o Government/Education
o Computer Mfg./Sales
o Computer Services/SW House

Mr./Mrs.fMs./Miss _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Title _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Firm __________________________________________________
Address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
State _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Zip _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone _ _ _ _ _ __
Digital Equipment Corportaion
Reference Service, Dept. 12
CF01-2/K21
200 Baker Ave.
West Concord, MA 01742

10.20

Services and Publications

Dept. 12

Index

Systems

.. I.ll

11/73-UA .......... : : : : : : : .. 1.11
11/73-UB. . . . . . . . . .
. .... 1.11
11/73-UC ........... :: ..... 1.11
11/83-UA ................... 1.11
11/83-UB . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 1.11
11/83-UC ................... 11.10
11/84-DC/DD .............. 11.10
11/84-DE/DF ....... : : ...... 11.12
11/84-EC/ED . . . . . . . . ..... 11.12
11/84-EE/EF ............... 11.26
11/84-U2 .................. 11.26
11/84-UD/UE ............... 11.26
11/84-UF/UG ............... 11.26
11/84-UH/UJ ............... 11.26
11/84-UK/UL ................ 1.11
llE23-UA ................. 11.16
11W84-EC/ED .......
. .. 11.16
11W84-EE/EF .............. 11.14
llX84-EC/ED .............. 11.14
llX84-EE/EF .............. 11.18
l1Y84-EC/ED ........ ::: ... 11.18
llY84-EE/EF ...............1.93
. ..1.80
173QB . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
173QY ................ : : ...1.80
.1.46
173QZ . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
183QB ................ : : : : .1.62
183QE ....................1.20
183QY .............. : : : ....1.20
. ... 1.11
183QZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
630XR ................... 1.122
DH-153Ql ................ 1.126
DH-153Q2 ................ 1.106
DH-153Q3 ................ 1.110
DH-153Q4 ...... . .. : : ... 1.130
DH-153Q5 ........... . .. 1.134
DH-153Q6 ................ 1.114
DH-153Q7 ........... :: ... 1.118
DH-153Q8 ........... . .... 1.74
DH-173Ql ................ 111.3
DH-183Hl-AA/A4 ........... 111.6
DH-183HI-A2/A3 ........... 1.14
DH-183Ql ........... :: .... 1.39
DH-183Q2 ................. 1.55
DH-183Q3 ................. 1.31
DH-183Q5 ........... . ..... 8.3
DH-183Rl .................. IV.2
DS-183Ql . . . . . . . . . . .
. ... IV.3
DS-UPGRD ................ 11.20
SX-JX200-EC/ED
.. : : : ... 11.20
SX -JX200-EE/EF . . . . . . . ... 11.22
SX-JX300-EC/ED ....... . .. 11.22
SX-JX300-EE/EF ...... : : : ... 11.24
SX-JX400-EC/ED ........... 11.24
SX -JX400-EE/EF ..... .

Hardware Options
12-19816 ............ .......
. .... 3.7
3.7
12-19817 .............. . ... 3.7
12-24664 ............ ::: ... 5.34
74-27292 ......... ::: ...... 2.20
874 . '. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ... 2.20
877 . . ... . . . .. . . . . . . . ..8.12
.......
A014 .................... 8.12
A020 .............
. ... 8.13
A156 ..................... 8.13
A157 ................. ..8.14
.......
A631 ..........
. ..... 3.32
AAVll ..............
3.32
ADVll ............... : : : : : . 7.7
ADMPC ............. : ..... 8.13
AM158 .................... 6.25
AQ-FY50E ................. 6.25
AS-FBIIE . . . . . . . . . .
. .. 6.25
AS-FB12E .............. : ... 6.25
AS-KY92A .................. 8.9
ATR16 ................... 3.32
AXV11 ................ .
BAl l .................... .3.35
2.12
lA
....
....
.....
BAl
.......
. ........ 22
.
BA123 ............ . ...... 2.2
2.5 3.35
BA213 ..............
BA23 ....................... : 3.35
BA23A .............. . ... 6.25
BB-FB15E ............ : : .... 6.25
BB-FC64E .................. 4.4
BC16D ... ......... . ..... 4.10
BC16E ....... ..... . ... 4.10
BC16M................
4.4

..... 4.5
BC17C ........... .....
. ......
BC17E ..............
. ... 4.5
BC17N ................. 5.23,5.25
BC17Y ... . . .. . . . ..... . .... 4.5
BC22D .............. : : ..... 4.6
BC22E .............. . .... 4.6
BC22F ............ .... . .... 4.8
BC22M......... ..... . ...... 48
.
. .. 8.10
BC26V ..............
BC40A .............. ::: ... 8.10
BC40B .............. . ... 8.10
BC40L ................ 3.17,4.7
BC55S ................. 3.17,4.7
BC55T ...................... 4.9
BCC03 .................... 4.9
BCC04 ..................... 4.9
BCC05 .............. ::: .... 7.7
BCCI0 .............. . .... 7.7
BCCll ................
..7.7
BCC12 ................ ::: .. 4.9
BCC 14 ............ :::: ..... 4.9
BCC17 ........... .

BCVIB ......... . .......... 3 . 35
62
BE-FB13E ........... :::::: 6.25
BE-FB14E ................. 6.25
BL-FY51E ........... . ... 6.25
BL-FY52E ........... :: ..... 4.3
BN25B ..................... 4.2
BNE2A..............
. .. 4.2
BNE2B ................ : : ... 4.2
.4.2
BNE3H ...............
BNE3K ............... : : : : : . 4.2
BNE3L .............. : ...... 4.2
BNE3M ............ .
3.32
CK-AAVIC ............. : : : : 3.32
CK-ADVIC ................. 3.32
CK-AXVIC ........... : : ..... 3.5
CK-DELQA .......... . ..... 3.6
CK-DELUA ................. 3.4
CK-DEQNA ................. 3.8
CK-DHQll ................ 3.16
CK-DHUll ................ 3.12
CK-DLVJl ............. : ... 3.17
CK-DMRll .......... :: .... 3.14
CK-DMVll ................ 3.13
. .. 3.23
CK-DPVll ...........
CK-DRll .............. : ... 3.24
CK-DRIWX ................ 3.22
CK-DRVIB ................. 3.22
CK-DRVIJ ............. . .. 3.22
CK-DRVIW ............ : ... 3.19
CK-DUPll ................. 3.11
CK-DZQll ................. 3.29
CK-KDFIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
CK-KMSIP . . . . . . . . . ......
. ... 3.15
CK-KMVIA ................ 6.37
CK-LPVIA . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... 3.9
CXA16 ................ : .... 3.9
.3.9
CXB16 ................
CXY08 ............... ' .... .
2.11
DDll ........... . . . . . . .... .7.6
DECNA ............... ::::. 7.6
DELNI .............. : : ..... 3.5
DELQA .................... 3.6
DELUA·············· ....... .
DEQNA .............
. .. 37.64
DESTA··············:::: ... .
DEXAR .................... 33.77
DEXJK ................. 7.4,7.6
DFMSA .................... 3.10
DHFll ..................... 3.8
DHQll .............
. .. 3.16
DHU11 ................ : ... 3.12
DLVJl ....... . .... : : .... 3.17
DMR11 .................... 3.14
..3.13
DMV11 .............
DPVll ......... . ........

DR11 ..................... 3.23
DRV11 .................... 3.22
DSKIT ..................... IV.3
DTC01 .................... 6.48
DTC03 .................... 6.48
DTC11 ..................... 7.6
DUP11 .................... 3.19
DZQ11 .................... 3.11
EJ-31491 ......... ~ ......... 1.4
EJ-31492 ................... 1.4
EK-BA200-DG ............... 2.3
FOCFA ..................... 4.3
FOCMA ...... ; ............. 4.3
FPJ11 ..................... 3.31
H3123 .................... 3.10
H332 ...................... 8.9
H334 ...................... 8.9
H3490 ..................... 2.5
H3650 ..................... 2.3
H3651 ..................... 2.3
H3652 ..................... 2.3
H3653 ..................... 2.3
H3654 ..................... 2.3
H3655 ..................... 2.3
H3656 ..................... 2.3
H3657 ..................... 2.3
H4000 .................. 3.7, 7.6
H4054 ..................... 3.7
H4055 ..................... 3.7
H4080 ..................... 3.7
H7007 .................... 3.28
H7225 .................... 3.28
H7226 .................... 3.28
H7227 .................... 3.28
H7229 .................. 7.2,7.9
H8243 .................... 4.10
H8244 .................... 4.10
H8245 .................... 4.10
H8246 .................... 4.10
H9270 .................... 3.36
H9273 .................... 3.36
H9275 .................... 3.36
H9281 .................... 3.36
H9302 ........... 5.23,5.25,5.27
H9504 ................ 2.16,5.27
H9544 ........ 2.7,2.15,2.19,5.31
H9642 ......... 11.26, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8,
2.9,2.16,2.17
H9645 ................ 11.26,2.7
H9646 ................ 2.18,2.19
H9647 ...... 11.26,2.10,2.14,2.15
H9850 .................... 6.14
IBV11 ..................... 3.34
IEC11 ..................... 3.25
IEQ11 .................... 3.25

IEU11 ..................... 3.25
IPl12 ...................... 8.8
IPQS2 ...................... 8.7
IPQS3 ...................... 8.7
IPUS2 ...................... 8·.7
IPV12 ...................... 8.8
IT330 ...................... 8.4
IT340 ...................... 8.4
IT3XX ..................... 8.4
KDA50 ..................... 5.4
KDF11 ................ 3.29,3.31
KDJ11 .................... 3.29
KEF11 ................. 3.2,3.31
KMS11 .................... 3.20
KMS1P .................... 3.21
KMV1A ................... 3.15
KTF11 .................... 3.31
KW11 ..................... 3.26
KWV11 ................... 3.26
KXJ11 .................... 3.29
KXT11 ........... 3.29,3.30,3.31
LA100 .................... 6.18
LAlOR .................... 6.17
LA10X .................... 6.17
LA12X .................... 6.21
LA120 .................... 6.20
LA21X .................... 6.17
LA50R .................... 6.14
LA50X .................... 6.14
LA75 ..................... 6.13
LA75P .................... 6.13
LA75X .................... 6.14
LA210 .................... 6.16
LAXX ..................... 6.21
LAXXA ................... 6.14
LAXXR ................... 6.21
LAXXS .................... 6.17
LCG01 .................... 6.24
LCGX1 .................... 6.25
LG01 ...................... 6.42
LG02 ...................... 6.42
LG31 ..................... 6.40
LGK31 .................... 6.41
lJ250 ..................... 6.22
lJ252 ..................... 6.22
lJ25X ..................... 6.23
LN01X ............... 6.27,6.29
·LN03 ..................... 6.28
LN03R .................... 6.27
. LN03S ................ 6.26, 6.29
LN03X ............... 6.27, 6.29
LP11 ...................... 6.36
LP25 ...................... 6.36
LP27 ...................... 6.34
LP29 ...................... 6.32
LPV11 .................... 6.36
LQP25 .................... 6.31
LQP45 .................... 6.30
LQP4X .................... 6.31

LQPX2 ..................... 7.4
LSP25 ..................... 6.36
LXY12 .................... 6.38
M5010 .................... 8.10
M5011 .................... 8.10
M5012 .................... 8.10
M5013 ..................... 8.11
M5014 .................... 8.14
M5016 .................... 8.14
M5031 .................... 8.11
M6010 .................... 8.11
M6011 .................... 8.11
M6012 .................... 8.11
M6013 .................... 8.11
M6014 .................... 8.14
M6015 .................... 8.12
M9312 .................... 5.34
MCV11 ................ 3.2,3.33
MR11 ..................... 5.34
MRV11 .................... 3.33
MSC11 ..................... 7.5
MSV11 ................ 3.2,3.33
MXV11 .................... 3.34
PC1XX ................. 7.2, 7.3
PC23P ..................... 7.9
PC23X ..................... 7.9
PC24P ..................... 7.9
PC3XC ..................... 7.7
PC3XX ..................... 7.7
PCXXF ............. 6.14, 7.4, 7.7
QJS02 ..................... 3.25
QJS37 ..................... 3.25
QV061 ..................... 7.4
QV062 ..................... 7.4
QV066 ..................... 7.4
QV099 ..................... 7.3
QWA01 .................... 7.9
QWA03 ............. :....... 7.9
QWA21 .................... 7.9
QWA25 .................... 7.9
RA60 ..................... 5.12
RA81 ..................... 5.10
RA82 ...................... 5.8
RC25 ...................... 5.14
RC25K .................... 5.14
RCD31 ......... 7.2, 7.3,5.21, 7.5
RCD32 ................ 5.22, 7.5
RCD53 ................ 5.23, 7.5
RD31 .............. 5.21, 7.2, 7.3
RD31A .................... 5.21
RD32 ..................... 5.22
RD32A .................... 5.22
RD53 ..................... 5.23
RD53A .................... 5.23
RD54 ..................... 5.24
RD54A .................... 5.25
RQA60 .................... 5.13

RQA81 .................... 5.11
RQC25 .................... 5.14
RQDX3 ................... 5.17
RQDXE .................... 5.19
RT220 ..................... 8.5
RT2XX ..................... 8.5
RUC25 .................... 5.14
RUX50 ............... 5.20,5.27
RX33 ..................... 5.26
RX33A .................... 5.26
RX50 ..................... 5.27
RX50A .................... 5.27
SA482 ..................... 5.6
TK50 ..................... 5.33
TK50E .................... 5.33
TQK50 .................... 5.34
TS05 ...................... 5.30
TSU05 .................... 5.31
TSV05 .................... 5.31
TU80 ..................... 5.29
TU81E .................... 5.28
TUK50 .................... 5.34
UDA50 ..................... 5.5

Applications Development

Pro£essional380 Software

Peripheral Processor
Tool Kit/RSX ............. 9.28
Peripheral Processor
Tool Kit/RT-11 ............ 9.29
MENU-11 .................. 9.28
RTEM-11/RSX .............. 9.28

ATHENA/Graph ............. 9.38
CT*OS .................... 9.39
DESIGN GRAPHIX/Executive .. 9.38
LOGO ............•....... 9.40
Multi-JournalAccounting ...... 9.38
P/OS ...................... 9.33
Phoenix-PRO ............... 9.40
PR020/20 ................. 9.36
PRO/BASIC ................ 9.35
PRO/Communications ........ 9.35
PRO/DATATRIEVE ........... 9.36
PRO/DECnet ............... 9.35
PRO/RDT .................. 9.36
PRO/SIGHT ................ 9.37
PRO/Videotex .............. 9.38
Professional CTS-300 ......... 9.34
PROSE PLUS ............... 9.39
RS/1 ...................... 9.37
RT-11 on the Professional ...... 9.34
Synergy ................... 9.35
WPS-PLUS/POS ............. 9.39

Communications
DECnet/E .................. 9.29
DECnet-RSX ............... 9.29
DECnet-RT ................ 9.29
RSX-11 Packetnet ............ 9.29
KMS11 RSX ................ 9.29
KMV1A-M Development Tools .. 9.30
KMV1A-M HDLC ............ 9.30
KMV1A-M RSX ............. 9.30
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Software .......... 9.32
Electronic Mail
A-to-Z Document Transfer ..... 9.26
A-to-Z Electronic Mail ........ 9.26
DECmail-11 ................ 9.31
Graphics Applications

VC241 ..................... 7.5
VR201 ..................... 7.5
VR241 ..................... 7.5
VRTSl ..................... 7.5
VSV21 .................... 6.10
VSXXX .................... 6.3
VT2XX .. : .................. 6.3
VT320 ..................... 6.2
VT330 ..................... 6.2
VT340 ..................... 6.2
VT3XX ..................... 6.3

A-to-Z Business Graphics ...... 9.27
BCP Graphics Software ....... 9.23
PLXY-11 .................. 9.23
RGL/11 ................... 9.23
Information Management Applications
A-to-Z Data Inquiry .......... 9.25
DATATRIEVE-11 ............ 9.21
FMS-11 .................... 9.22
SORT/MERGE .............. 9.22
Operating Systems

ZYA03 ..................... 1.10
ZYAAA .................... 1.10
ZYAAB .................... 1.10
ZYAAE .................... 1.10
ZYAAS ............. ~ ...... 1.10
A-to-Z Software
A-to-Z Base System .......... 9.25
A-to-Z Business Graphics ...... 9.27
A-to-Z Data Inquiry .......... 9.25
A-to-Z Developer's Kit ........ 9.27
A-to-Z Document Transfer ..... 9.26
A-to-Z Electronic Mail ........ 9.26
A-to-Z Word Processing ....... 9.26

CTS-300 .................... 9.5
DSM-11 .................... 9.6
MicroPower/Pascal ........... 9.12
Micro/RSTS ................ 9.14
Micro/RSX ................. 9.11
RSTS/E .................... 9.13
RSX-11M ................... 9.7
RSX-11M-PLUS .............. 9.9
RSX-11S ................... 9.10
RT-11 ..................... 9.15

Programming Languages
BASIC-PLUS-2 .............. 9.17
BASIC-PLUS/RT-11 .......... 9.17
COBOL-81 ................. 9.18
DIBOL .................... 9.18
FORTRAN-77 .............. 9.19
FORTRAN IV ............... 9.19
PDP-11 PASCAL ............. 9.20
PDP-11 Symbolic Debugger .... 9.20
Word Processing Applications
A-to-Z Word Processing ....... 9.26
DECdx .................... 9.24
DEC type .................. 9.24
WPS-PLUS/POS ............. 9.24
WPS-PLUS/RSX ............. 9.24